Basel st
‘ ih sth i
Ghassan hiedtiag
Gas Bi

ne
i

res
ea

Bees
Eeorer tapes Es

Sut

SSPEE

ss3

ariel
be teh dort
oes

A Bist

aU Gattis
ae iar He
: a
sate i f

ea
a

E 5
ity He pias sr
siete

te ays i ints rebels
ister sh :
aise

y
Rastos

Reet
pisea bal Sed: ih

feta ps
rarer st

iey ns
ers He o sishte

=
/ ae louke

ee
che
ry

sathat
eat
Roeser

nk
eanites staat
. eee
ites

Digitized by the Internet Archive
In 2010 with funding from
University of Toronto

http://www.archive.org/details/memoirs26harv

MEMOIRS

OF THE

MUSEUM) OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

HARVARD COLLEGE.

VOL. XXVI.

CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U.S. A.

1902-1911.

i a — 4 q a) . 7 - he
ine ee te
) 7 ;
yt a
ae. a ~<e eS i
7 .
a Ay ihe
&- y a
ay

,
He ; i ‘| , j ‘1 ri ')
Tue Cosmos Press: =
4 Epwarp W. Wueerer, Camprince, Mass., U.S. A.
7
7
rm"
‘
’

CONTENTS:

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE
TROPICAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, BY THE
U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER “ALBATROSS,” FROM AUGUST, 1899,
TO MARCH, 1900, COMMANDER JEFFERSON F. MOSER, U. S. N., COM-—
MANDING.

No. — I. PRELIMINARY REPORT AND LIST OF STATIONS. By ALEXANDER

Acassiz. With remarks on the deep-sea deposits. By Stk Jonn Murray.

21 charts. January, 1902. : ; 5 3 : 2 : : : 1
No.2— II. SOME SPECIES OF PARTULA FROM TAHITI. A study in variation.

By ALFRED GotpsBporouGH Mayer. 1 plate. January, 1902. : . 115
No. 3— III. MEDUSAE. By ALrexanprer AGaAssiz and ALFRED GOLDSBOROUGH MAYER.

13 plates, 1 chart. January, 1902 ‘ : ; : : : : : 137
No. 4.— V. SHARKS’ TEETH AND CETACEAN BONES FROM THE RED CLAY

OF THE TROPICAL PACIFIC. By C. R. Eastman. 3 plates. June,

1903 4 ms c f ; c é x A . 2 ra " c 177

No. 5.— VIII. THE PELAGIC TUNICATA. By Wit11am E. Rivrer and Epiti 8. BYXBEE.

2 plates. August, 1905 193
No.6.— X. THE LANTERN FISHES. By Cuartes Henry Givpert. 6 plates. July,
1908 : : : : : ; : 5 215

No. 7.— XIII. THE SHORE FISHES. By Wittiam C. Kenpaiti and Epmunp L. Goups-

BOROUGH. 7 plates. February, 1911. : : : : 2

Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

WiOIin XokoVEL., NOs

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE
TROPICAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, BY THE
U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER ‘ ALBATROSS,” FROM AUGUST,
1899, TO MARCH, 1900, COMMANDER JEFFERSON F. MOSER, U.S.N.,

COMMANDING.
I.

PRELIMINARY REPORT

AND

LIST OF STATIONS.
By ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

WITH REMARKS ON THE DEEP-SEA DEPOSITS

By SIR JOHN MURRAY.

WITH TWENTY-ONE CHARTS.

[Published by permission of George M. Bowers, U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries. ]

CAMBRIDGE, U.S. A.:
Printed for the fAuseum.

January, 1902.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

IERMHIMINARYEBIUEPORT 5 i os) as ss es 6 8 ew Oe Oe ws
MIRHNMLOSUTTONS Bretcc | seul foc sel SiN sr osen QB te: lage GG wes ne Hey “ie wie 3) wee SPS kote
NISMO ME STATIONS 11 oes tae a aerate sa) cl ners ssi ae, xa oie 3), fa. san we neimess ae es

Notes ON THE DrrEp-sEA HAvLs OF THE TRAWL AND DREDGE MADE BY THE ‘‘ ALBA-

TROSS=) AND! THE ““ CHALLENGER IN-THE PACIRIG .. . .« «. = «© » « «© «
RESULTS OF THE TRAWLING AND DREDGING OF THE ‘‘ CHALLENGER” IN THE PACIFIC

RESULTS OF THE TRAWLING OF THE ‘* ALBATROSS” IN THE TROPICAL PACIFIC 5

Tue Borrom Deposits COLLECTED BY THE ‘‘ ALBATROSS” . . . . .
RECORD OF THE SURFACE HatLs MADE BY THE “*ALBATROSS”. . . . . .. .
HaAvtLs MADE AT INTERMEDIATE Deprus By THE ‘‘ ALBATROSS” . . . .- -« « -

Tue Bottom Deposits COLLECTED BY THE ‘‘ CHALLENGER” IN THE PACIFIC. .

THe SURFACE ORGANISMS OBSERVED BY THE ‘*‘ CHALLENGER” IN THE PACIFIC. . .
THe BATHYMETRICAL RANGE OF THE Pe“acic FAUNA. . .. .. +. +. -s -
REMARKS ON THE DEEp-sEA Deposits, By Str JOHN Murray . . . - + + = >

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES 60 VG Oe Hon OF OO 9G IG Pom roe oi eo

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE TROPICAL
PACIFIC [IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, BY THE U.S. Fis Comission
STEAMER “ ALBATROSS,” FROM AUGUST, 1899, To Marca, 1900, COMMANDER
JEFFERSON F. Mossmr, U. S. N., COMMANDING.

I.

PRELIMINARY REPORT.
TOGETHER WITH A LIST OF THE STATIONS OCCUPIED BY THE “ALBATROSS.”
By ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.
(Published by permission of Geo. M. Bowers, U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries.)

I arrivep at San Francisco on August 20th, and after consulting
with Commander Moser we decided to leave on Wednesday, the 23d.)
Everything shipped from the East had arrived with the exception of the
tow-nets sent me by Dr. Kramer, and the deep-sea nets kindly ordered
for me by Professor Chun of Leipzig. Captain Moser and I decided not
to make any soundings nor do any deep-sea work until we had passed
beyond the lines of soundings already run by the “ Albatross” and
“Thetis” between California and the Hawaiian Islands. .

In latitude 51° 10’ N., and longitude 125° W., we made our first sounding
in 1955 fathoms, about 320 miles from Point Conception, the nearest land.
We occupied twenty-six stations until we reached the northern edge of the
plateau from which rise the Marquesas Islands, having run from Station 1,
a distance of 3800 miles, in a straight line.

At Station 2 the depth had increased to 2368 fathoms, the nearest land,
Guadelupe Island, being about 450 miles, and Point Conception nearly
500 miles, distant. The depth gradually increased to 2628, 2740, 2810,
2881, 3003, and 3088 fathoms, the last in lat. 16° 38’ N., long. 136° 14’ W.,

1 Explorations of the “ Albatross” in the Pacific Ocean. [Extract from a letter to the Hon. George
M. Bowers, U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries, Washington, D. C., dated Papeete Harbor,
Tahiti Island, 30 September, 1899, on the trip of the “ Albatross” from San Francisco to Papeete, by
Alexander Agassiz.] Am. Jour. Sci., Fourth Series, Vol. IX., No. 49, January, 1900.
1

2 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

the deepest sounding we obtained thus far in the unexplored part of the
Pacific through which we were passing. From that point the depths varied
from 2883 to 2699 and 2776, diminishing to 2583, and gradually passing
to 2440, 2463, and 2475 fathoms, until off the Marquesas, in lat. 7° 58’ S.,
long. 139° 08’ W., the depth became 2287 fathoms. It then passed to 1959,
1802, and 1040 fathoms in lat. 8° 41’ S., long. 139° 46° W., Nukuhiva Island
being about twenty miles distant. Between Nukuhiva and Hounanu Point,
Ua-Huka Island, we obtained 830 fathoms, and five miles south of Nukuhiva
687 fathoms. When leaving Nukuhiva for the Paumotus we sounded in
1284 fathoms about nine miles south of that island. These soundings seem
to show that this part of the Marquesas rises from a plateau having a depth
of 2000 fathoms and about fifty miles in width, as at Station 29 we sounded
in 1952 fathoms.

Between the Marquesas and the northwestern extremity of the Paumotus
we occupied nine stations, the greatest depth on that line being 2700
fathoms at Station 31, in lat. 12° 20’ S., and long. 144° 15’ W. The depths
varied between 2451 and 2527 fathoms, and diminished to 1208 fathoms
off the west end of Ahii, and then to 706 fathoms when about sixteen
miles N.E. off Avatoru Pass in Rangiroa atoll.

We developed to a certain extent the width of the Paumotu Group
plateau by a line of soundings in continuation of the direction of Avatoru
Pass, extending a little less than nine miles seaward, where we obtained a
depth of 819 fathoms. Subsequently we ran a similar line normal to the
south shore of the lagoon of Rangiroa, a distance of nearly twelve miles,
into 897 fathoms.

Between Rangiroa and Tikehau, the next atoll to the westward, we
obtained a depth of 1486 fathoms.

3etween Tikehau and Matahiva six soundings were made, with a depth
of 488 fathoms half a mile from shore, and a greatest depth of 850 fathoms
six and one half miles from Tikehau. The slope approaching Matahiva is
steeper than the Tikehau slope.

From Matahiva to Makatea (Aurora) Island, we made six soundings:
from 624 fathoms about two and one half miles off shore to 581 fathoms

about one and one eighth miles off the west side of the latter island, the

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 3

depths passing to 860, 1257, 1762, and the greatest depth being 2267
fathoms, then 2247, and rising more rapidly near Makatea to 581 fathoms.

Between Makatea and Tahiti we made eight soundings, beginning with
1363 fathoms, two miles off the southern end of Makatea, passing to 2238,
2363 (the greatest depth on that line), to 2224, 1930, 1585, 775, and finally
867 fathoms off Point Venus.

These make in all seventy-two soundings from our first station to Point
Venus.

The deep basin developed by our soundings between lat. 24° 30’ N., and
lat. 6° 25’ S., varying in depth from nearly 5100 fathoms to a little less
than 2500 fathoms, is probably the western extension of a deep basin
indicated by two soundings on the charts," to the eastward of our line,
in longitudes 125° and 120° W., and latitudes 9° and 11° N., one of over
3100 fathoms, the other of more than 2550 fathoms, showing this part of
the Pacific to be of considerable depth and to form a uniformly deep basin
of great extent, continuing westward probably, judging from the soundings,
for a long distance.

I would propose, in accordance with the practice adopted for naming
such well-defined basins of the ocean, that this large depression of the
Central Pacific, extending for nearly thirty degrees of latitude, be named
Moser Basin.

In naming the “ Moser” Basin I am following the practice adopted by
the “ Challenger” and Coast Survey, of naming after naval officers or the
ships they commanded prominent hydrographic features. Dr. Neumayer
in 1882, in the Atlas of the Atlantic Ocean issued by the German Marine
Observatory, was the first to object to this system of nomenclature, on the
ground of the confusion likely to arise from the adoption of personal
names when applied to ridges, basins, deeps, and plateaus in the different
oceanic realms. He proposed a strictly geographical nomenclature, which
ignored the personal names given in the earlier bathymetrical charts ;
and the same principle was carried out in the Atlas of the Indian and
Pacific Oceans subsequently published by the German Marine Observatory.
Finally, Professor Supan, in his article on “Die Bodenform des Welt-

1 H. O. Chart, No. 52

t EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

meeres,’? has followed the same principle, and has in no way recognized
the names which appear on the “ Challenger’” bathymetrical chart or the
earlier charts of Petermann, issued in 1877, or in the charts issued by the
U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. In order to prevent a possible future
confusion, the Germans have deliberately created it; for Professor Supan
objects on “ national grounds” to Sir John Murray’s proceeding of “ tagging
the oceans as if they were Anglo-Saxon dominions,” and insists that such
a proceeding “‘can never receive general recognition.” Professor Supan
considers the Anglo-Saxon method * as impracticable because in the future
it may burden the memory of the school children of the next generation.”
If we are to have a remodelling of the oceanic bathymetrical nomenclature,
it seems as if we were attempting it with very insufficient data, at least
as far as the Pacific is concerned. Professor Supan himself has called
attention to the fact that the bottom of the Pacific Ocean is far less uni-
form in depth than would appear from the earlier charts; and certainly
the great blank spaces left between the lines of soundings make it suffi-
ciently clear how tentative all our attempts to chart the depths of the
Pacific must be for some time to come. Of course, I do not in any way
wish to object to a more strict limitation of the hydrographic terms pro-
posed by Dr. Supan, many of which have naturally in the earlier days of
deep-sea explorations been applied somewhat vaguely. In the meantime
basins, deeps, and ridges, such as are sketched and named on the earlier
charts, will gradually disappear as subsequent explorations show them to
be connected; others again will be subdivided as our knowledge of the
depths of the oceans becomes more accurate.

No geographer has as yet attempted for land names to make such a
sweeping reform as that proposed by the Germans. It is true that the
great oceanic realms are common property, and have not as yet, like the
islands scattered in the Pacific, become included in regions of English,
French, German, or American influence. But it will appear to an Anglo-
Saxon as natural, from a national standpoint, to adhere to his nomenclature
as it seems important to the German, for the same reason, to adopt a differ-
ent system. To a naturalist accustomed to have such questions settled for

1 Petermann’s Mitteil., Bd. 45, 1899, p. 177.

“ALBATROSS” TROPICAL PaciFic EXPEDITION

| 140°
Tatum *
| | i 5 10
| | . = = - ___. eee ___180
} | <4) — ——
| S
| TORY “] od
| ake a
>
| f \ Mare “1906
|
wy | Hathijo
¥ .
er '
| Bayonnaise I
| ise
»Lots Wife|
\z0r
Morell I
} Rosanio Is e y
BONIN 18 oe \Curelia
Forfana I \" |
> |
Volcano Is + a
*St Augustino |
. | |
\eFarallon de Pajaros
7 SS = us |
| "Assumption 1 a Sica so = SSS —— -— — ——— ee |
ee) eAgriganT Wakes Is |
MARIAN
? Pagan I |
eAlamagan |
+Guguan hs | |
t Sariguont
> LADRONE |
Saipan L |
220/92nian] ISLANDS » Alligator Sh
ja Rota I | spar Rico
feb. 211900 Guam or Guajan I |
| 248Ngn19
a\ oat Bikar,
. Eniwetoke* Bikinis: Rongerlapts 1. 4) . |
7 : sUtrik
| ; nee fant? . ELikieb |
| 3 Uluthi or Mackanzie Is pay. a6
| § * Peys 24d\273 Ujalang' 4 |
| lense! y
Namonuito | Hall Is acy
Y : 3 4 Kveajal |
Is * aw L
, en oe va |
Wolea Martires 35 = yee Seniavina Is Gi |
Enderbyls ts iBonapi-| poke
Namoluk Is 2Pingelap GC Mulgrave |
MortlockIs = = =
= Mortlockls Lane avenaie Es? |
AR = , Ss Feb.7 7,
ORT Nit 1s LE 7 é w |
1 Too a00a
™\ Jan 7
\.Taritari
zoe} 2260
*
Matador | *, Apaiang < ppearald
+
| Greenwich l \ cysan il Praiana
= = —_ = \ — Kuri 2 | Z
a . = = Bl css (
eee rh Nouru i?
oo” Rearn. »Yaonope aie \
BS ~ | \
AdmiraltyTs $s we 2 | ¢ \
De |
BISMARCK - \ |
ARCHIPELAGO F |
= ‘ | Lord Howe Is) |
0) Ts \
| | PAPUA g Sgongtongays Nanlomea |
| sougainy ille! \
| RRA: Pomerania h Chdiseul I |
Ses “Uy N
NEW GUINEA r4 Ry rs oLomoN I |
Ro jNukufetau
é ra ys
# o yFurjafuti
erate Malaita “Abe
\ bie STA CRUZ IS Nukulaflai
\ S.Cri#tobal 5
See gu a Stacruz! Peng iy > Nurakita
+ % Lam o * _Vanik * pancake, zoz0\"|
Baas »Vanikoro z020\"|
ow }>rennell 1 a w\
\ 4 Pandora 3 te\
| - ‘ Rotumaht } pecs; yy
% 9, Torres Is L-
CORAL SEA | i ae I Horne ts
{ | Ae 8
Espirilu Santo
\ S Aurora
Mallicolo Pentecost
pa ie
a> libou RE
Sandwieh |
2°
fe sy gEromango
7 | 5 *, gq Tanna Kandayo
— nl *Erronan
Z>, = Ane Vatoa
Pte “5 Aneityum Fal
g..4 #0noi Law
Pers. TuyanaiTholo 4
180

140"
160" = T SS
= — Saree
Ri | a Rks
> Reed orRepfiel!
i
idway Is
® Peorl ff
Lisiansky Tg
sGardner I
Two Brothers Rf & Freoch Frigate Sh
GmeckerE pirat |
Kauai |
Niih uu \¢ /
Tabor) |“ Ooh l HAWAIIAN |
) <MolokaiT |
: UL / |
curt ISLANDS _sfae be ee zo
R 2 2 Med |
Hawaii |
Ay,
Rae) al
Aug. 3f f |
aléhnston T |
'9/soes |
| |
"fone |
}
|
|
|
||
|
1fzav0
|
2 \
*Palmyra t | |
«Washington orNewYork 1 whee
nning |
} Ciristmas 1
(Howland 1 |
Nantucket 1 ra eer a ron SS ne
Fuarvis 4
| a
»Canton I |
PHEENI Enderburyl |
fcKeont. Bi Ie Phoenix t |
5 Y | Malden!
ISLANDS 4 svaney 1 a ?
ner T+ Hull 1
! ~
| “Starbuck T od
Vp f ee. TRACK OF THE
Victoria I, ; MARQUE|SAS IS AM BATROSS*?
i Hatutu,,Cora Is
Maf } Jeeps SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS.
@ Penstn Nukuhivget “Vahuka |
IN . eHivaca
UNION . Rakohanga Yostokle @Caroline Atoll | es
GROUP * Mahahikt | Humphrey! Kise Patuthivad ©
»GenteHermosa | Banger Ts |
Swain ® Nassonl oFlintI Ho
[Pp
MOAN OR NAVIGATOR 15 Suvaroy Is 10) = oy
Sayaiil na v
u Eee yee yManuals “Disappointment Is 7 oO >
Prawn” BRonei go gm Pha Po Ol rs, C
*#Tofal 3Oc = il
Aral Bellinphausen, 22 CLE yp S02 eFakaina 4, 4
Niuatobutobu heppel 1 Novis cs f to }
a: PA Oy Rekareka "hy
topeha Soares og ;
FE Tat I 1 ae 3h fet.29 2Amonu. o |
‘anuala @Palmerston Is ae < ° oo HAO 140 24, @ Germant Tomer 7
3s Z Seas a ®Nukulavake Je!
ro & OS ee 2 BPinaki Y.
2 Herertar a Se Det. perm As ou
feria Gun ser Atta * Sauk Duke of Gloucester Is oO
MpAreron te Nukatipipt > ts
~ a .
160° + Mangaia 140
*Oeno

* Henderson
Ducie

© Pitcairn

é

MARINE DEPOSITS

After Sir John Murray, K.C.B., LL.D., F.R.S

REFERENCE TO COLOURING

\
<= Ee] Preropod
. Diatom ”
——— fz] Radiolarian ,,
TO ———

\ —
BA Globigerina Ooze
eS

The Edinburgh Geographical Institute Track of “Albatross” shown thus

or
OCEAN DEPTHS

Compiled from the latest sources 1901.

170)

REFERENCE TO COLOURING
_—— ree.

au Paciric Ex

RACK or THe ALBATROSS

PROM

1 FRANCISCO TO MARQUESAS

UNDINGS IN FATHOMS

Prben Bank
|
M4
rs fi
J
a |
/
/
A
/
=
4
g
|
|
|
|
|
(ey
if
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
| |
|
|
«| 2 ee ee E = fil
|
|
|
|
| |
|
| i}
|
| é
|
: |
+ = a
ra ee Plateau |
|
sor ere Es :
Br re — = uo,

Bss TROPICAL PaciFic Ex

TRACK OF TE

THROUGH THE

SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS

ALBATROSS

MARQUESAS ISLANDE

A,

p
sesl* Hergest RY

2456
glob rad vole part

Eiao (Massel) ? 2

NUKUHIVA oR
MARGHAND IT

Fs
Chickakoft! ~ Z Mina Maria BOY

dre sot
tue 4 austen

)
anata CZ)

a sse*
2h
Yd 2267
| Glob ox.
Ctark B*
a
ee —& 2153
glob. ozrolep
43,
| 1802 Date
gv glokps md,
pt ** volepart.
e140
gtab.ox vlc park
glob. vor muta @
W713 HaunanuPs
Bc Matin Jet Washington I,
a 200 % Ua Huka
g
|
oh
+
an Adams 1
4%, Uap
| >
=
| $
© Kakiy
HIVA 0A or DOMINICA Ath
Bordelais Str
my
| a
| S'Christina a
| 7 - ‘Tan ale

{ San Pedro L

Magdalena 1.

Te

140"

TROPICAL PACIFIC Ex

Piate 4.

TRACK or tHe ALBATROSS
YROM THE

QUESAS TO THE PAUMOTUS

SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS

Seperss
2456
glob. radiol

OTU ARCHIPELAGO
|

ie

¢ Takapolo

cy

mii

gS TROPICAL PACIFIC EX

151*

= De 1a"
iso" 149° 145° ue 143° be -~ T
li —— Ta 7 aly |
| | | |
|
| |
| | | Puka-Puka |
oH | ie
ie |
carsigen 38 | } |
fig or tested +— = = ail a
cog Arulua Purch |
= Yes |
=i, e: aie
m glob.er |
per] sora Pf Apataki
T Tee stp $20 Arotika / (Nitzeber / |
¥ 450 Be OS ser ON f Bs
Palis
i pon Pe hes MF i305 Sp (Wetbanaty |
Ne ple = y |plect Toau Fissbeth | x rs \gloka, ys y) M10 wy Wes oniron | |
C Loner Koukura "Bb, St ee @ a M18) oct? 17 corte Angatan | |
es a os 3 2 a, = 6 blob os attra ween + a> |
(363 2269 is mae Wifoss” ' yee Raroia
and rol old gates on =\ of 539, labor | finish) ee, }
3 4; 2238 glob ar Ts. ovis & Ore 108 7 {2 op Taga | Ho) Oct? | |
Motu -Ni ry vol. mad.gieh ara 3th Ratian acter) jog fen (glob. i = or as | | |
Nov? 1B!Scy 5 eo R (Wigertess D, 107 pom ple os 120 928 | | |
G r ° GI NS no ee. { | |
Manpili GY Hore 8 " Wes \ BA 105) 654 f ~ slobple |
—~ z 2) veLead oa = feed a cor sil. Tuanake 1 a
- Mahou ep E aN 38 : oe a sii Veet a Neerow | | |
| unheine z Hi 5 | = - |
. ae y os a Toxo ae Huratea wis o Rekareka |
S % 2224 loom Hobor. -
Sco vol mad god = { 1 =
rary Tetiaron «¢Klmadss <& Sito
Raiatea ‘ae + 8 Motutunga | ‘
fF |
ridge a's og Ba 32 Tehokotn aes | Tatakoto
; {sas : :
2 ql maid | Haraiki 12? qi7
e ry 1208 i909 cored
Moorea oS pep Pe z | “ino arte] |
ladtGh at “ae 2 i FS 4 Mikueru |
| iD) : | ed
yor sd 474 V7 142 z jes | asi
vol pe Tobi 2 tol rhcwrad l or } Reitoru) He
4 Mopelia aur “ 76) 1} ex} 39 742)
vols. ype 832 iy | | 132 lees rv
Mehelia X75 vel mad. 2 | oO i + —~ = iat 1p & Marokau
a im : , Habe. 136) ds
| PAHITT 2 a pap “a, Oe
vol. ma i | U3 iy
279 Ravandhee sok ae, 1H 377
ire | rary : af
a | 4 Ki
208? | h C |
mang no al) ”
1 7 7 G / |} Nengonengo Vahitani
175 = vi brs Ne ad ———
| Nov .<) } i S rN ores o— + ' > :
| " Paraoa ae
niet Monuhang } e " oa
! | . Vairanten iy) bay
rt < drt | | | | ioe Zoya
PRACK OF ALBATROSS | } | } ie eee
In THE 32: { Pinaki WAteaunday)
Tho
rel | Lr lab.on
PAUMOTW ARGHIPELAGO a | | s y 180 54
is | Gi 1 aay | | 88 ri orsdpteos,
(688 d | |
SOciery ISLanos | | glab.oF Hercheretue /s!u }
| | Lea sot | Lod : . <
if SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS | . } ise 108 a + A, } |
i | ors WS asi Nor?!
sober rel W265 wt
: reel
|
Ana: Anurard |
WNarperet 156
ie iA
|
memo OG | | |
| | | If
| bot | py ee
all a : Py So | 4 2
—. isa"
eS ake = 1 - a == fe = = = 3 Fr ul ito
Tio isi 30° a ie 14" 146" Mas cS was pee

Puka-ruha
(Sertow )

Clermont-Tonnerre)

| 19

Reso

S

4s
|
|
4 | oo
| }
| |
|
ve San ———<——— |
J
“y 136°

PaciFic Ex eee
Puate 6
6 c co 166° 16 16 - 163 Saws : re aoe 4 i60° 358° 158 TH 7S See aT — = = a =
TRACK OF ALBATROSS
SOCIETY ISLANDS TO COOKARCHIPELAGO
NIUE. @ Belingshhuse
OUNDINGS {N FATHOMS
SOCIETY ISLANDS
Vor! 1B
Settty va
Palmerst
Aitutaki
Novr 21 |
1) Yor
sa 208
: zea |
SS) Hervey Is
oO &
ie)
fo}
&
ad h Fenua-li 4) stuion
C
an Danis
Pp b ” Mauki |
soli
G
79
| |
t - | xo t |
= es! ae ae SE = Pe . | eo SS! ? al ai I
60 168 165 o 163° 162" 161 160 3 159° ro 167 6 se =3 . 7
= Nees = s —_ z= eae Bs = |

AL PAciFiC Ex Plate 7
17 17€ 7 174° 173° 172 171 170)
x wn a8 ane Deets eines
= VAVAU GROUP |
he i) ——————— *
De 6 ~ (3: 4
= ’ ce ~~ Ox 2
5 he ase 682" 5 sr 4
= ‘ LOST PY sc tas 150 sory
as oN 7 Lo A x 19
sus jor Niue or Savage I
5 a ae iad Nov2
Nel Akkumanes C ;
Jon m2 =) as
jes por ss
é ns
GRour’”, 7 ™ y gd
n mas
Q
se! om9e
ae Rs
7 mm
KoTU GROUP oy
x) Hote Ai wo) |
a c
fone
Pe er}
YOMUIKA GROUP
Falcon |
TRACK oF THe ALBATROSS an “0
FROM |
5 S | oe r aecre
NIWETHROUGH THE TONGAS To Flw) nga Tongal “ais =
Honga Hapat! ww om? se °
SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS = os mt
sow sy 2% 10
ieee 10) eo
~ — |
8) vai oer wa
Nokw % = "a
TONGATABL TONGATARU GROUP
bes ‘Se Nov 2. 184 183) ANov.27.
4173
a 5 ts 1 Tinud.radiol, vol mud radiot
UAC rel rel
11 1 i 75° 174° 173 172°

VAI 170

ROSS TROPICAL PaciFic EX
R Plate 8.

Vatouua

= TRACK or tHE ALBATROSS is
f= THROUGH THE

me FLJI ISLANDS

eremuugeen cen
are = SaSset.

| 7a san 98 l
o = i |
Jjowe Reef |
FAsawa-ilaw

e
“ |

= {Sbitbles RE

ue
SS Namena Barr Reef

24

z S
‘HMalevuvu ie
tafanga |
oS a
| He
ee ava 2) f oO in = Os,
Y ia cat

, i . am 40) gh? s

@Makongar

Vatu Vara 8 G
(a16) ta

MAMAN UTHA,s f ; . SS : we 4, a
ISLANDS pat Pa:

£Bitvengna””
=A (w9}
- uso

orth
VatuLeile 5 oe
(110) Gs 7
1 2} © sos MOALA
Pe Eps (1833)
. 1020 ey
y }
aof

Vi we Great Astrolabe Reefiy

FIJL ISLANDS 450 rata
| x Continuation of Group ie
Matulcu 53) to Southward, oo

Ww
| ge rere a)
yas 409)

@ noitaw
By nO)

Vatoa or Turtle 1 y
j200)
SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS.

ee

ne

uP

PaciFic EX

PLATES
\
\, nee ;
TRACK oF tHe ALBATROSS
FROM THE
| FlJi To GILBERT ISLANDS
a THROUGH THE
ELLICE ISLANDS.
SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS ;
|
|
| a
=
oO o
27 Niutao
o
va
4 Vailupu Tracy I
L
Nukufetau (De Poyster I Be
a
gize
RY. Dec 23
Funafuti y
yb
% Nukulailai (Mitchell I
12)
a 10
i)
Kosciusko B*
Martha BK
Den 22 195) ye Nurakita
m Rose BK PD. Robbie BE
; Tuscarora B* aaotph Knoll
Bayonnatise Bk F
5 RS - Eagleston Bk
a
©*® Rotumah so | 158
is Combe Bank
<r |
|
Rolumah Sh |
|
|
ms "
oe {18
Horne T? 4% 4°"
cornell ge 3

Thikombia "=

1B0°

us

East Plateau of Fiji\lslands

aopicat PACIFIC Ex

pe TRACK oF THE ALBATROSS
Patt 1) THROUGH THE

Heuehing) GILBERT ISLANDS

SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS

cor sd.

IS Maral

Apniang
Charfotte

Tarawa

Cook I
200
95
brosh. 398
413
gab ox

Maiana /
Hau

Oo
Karia P ard. bolt

Aranuka
_(Henderville I

Nonuti

Sydenham 1

Taputeuea WS, Nukonau
Drummond I.) X=, Byron /.}
<3

Onoatoa
Clerk.
“Dee

Tamana®
Rotcher

rROSS TROPICAL PaciFic Ex

Phare Ii
158° 189° 160° 161" =e .
+ 169) 164" 165" er 167" 168" 169° 170" 171" nz a ne
Taongi |
Smyth or Gaspar Rico Atoll 19
SJ
-
TRACK or tHe ALBATROSS
THROUGH THE
7 MARSHALL ISLANDS
AND TO w
PONAPI,(CAROLINES,
SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS
13
M \ R Ss
: H
er
i F Bikar or Dawson Atoll
Ly .
If
5. Eniwetok or Brown Atoll id A 7)
¢ Nesey rae A
Bikini or Eschholtz Atoll Rangel RAO age oot v4 |
f { © fRongerik Atoll Utirik or Kutusov I? xs |
: ¥ pe |
of at 4
rt 400 Taka or Suvarov "
Ailingifiae Atoll bd 4; i
ra)
} 2586 z te
| globrolmid rl MWe Atuiaoe Mee Ue S
2 ~~] “25 Tindal & Watts Atoll
globvolmus.rct y gate
Jemo I 10°
ay t
| Arecifos or Providence Atoll 2a |
| & ui
| ~ 4
SS my at t
(583 Wolje or Romanzoy Atoll
qlob. :
20
te, : $83 oor sil
Ujae or Katharine Atoll LAN ; iy
= Erikub eared: ’
Lae Atoll 2
Maloelab Kaven or Galvert Atoll |
ine |
Li ee _ Aurh or [bbetson Atoll |
219 ny
2179
glob: mud & x
mu or Musquillo Atoll os
(
on CAR
| Vv
| vh
\
Vp Imore or Odia Atoll oe
oy gitar. JM
Ponapior Puynepet I vina I Majuro or Arrowsmith Atoll Con ;
I fArhno Atoll
ti ae
Ss v2 res
¥ | Mokil or Duperrey I T
<| glohor
& Pingelap or Macaskit 1* \-
> al,
I = A2455 Mille or Mulgrave Atoll
S glob, Ps
d Jaluil or Bonham Atoll > Knox Lone
x atTTl }
c globsnud. 1937
| Namorik or Baring Atoll 44 ~ g!0b ox
Kilt or Hunter 1 ;
| Kusaieor Valan 1G hay sah
Phatin® 6 glob.on
s iol cor ad -
|
| 210) ©
| pce
| | ° glob or
Ebon or Boston Atoll
Pe | | es
. 5B" * . : - ,
tb?) a 168 160 161° 162" 163" War 165" 166° 167° 168" (e0" 170" im ted) Be A |

Piare 12
1s" 47° | 149° 150° . 152° a 55°
sid pt z 153" 15a" 155 150°
ED Rowe 1 FH r : =3 :
is - 5 _— a i
Ss |
Pilatjor |
Guam or Guajan I ma
} e v | TRACK . <a
LD wenen » 43) ** TRACK or tuk ALBATROSS
+ v sy
42337 i rr . FROM STATION 240 WEST OF PONAPI
en wok sd .
a xf ‘ = | + THROUGH THE 1s
4613 | CAROLINES to GUAM
vol. part | SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS
—- + + iz*
| |
4 aoe att = ind
| |
‘6 |
N
|
+ +. — t } 0°
| |
| |
2735 }
Grimes J rel 3
h > Dunkin R
Ye Leaghtin BE RO
Magur | Bend He
Namonuito 1* | |
» MorilewI® |
eealee .Pikela or Lydia Fast Fain yy Morileu |
g Ulut & ye |
Pisaras J Namolipiafane 1? \ 7 HALL
|
Ptketot or Coquille £ FeatherB*
Part Dathouste West Fain, Oraitilipu > zinioren * ..
glob. mud T
UE ed. SAugustin
los Martires g | ©. Oraluk or Bordelaise .
Panadike Fob it | Sa Amteltta 1
motrek iS SEE “Moet | 5 | z
© gO Uranie es, : "RUKo 30LU If |
alk or Wilson I* lowal or Tucker I Enderby! Be tae TRUK on HOGOLD I |
at | |
ported 1886 — Suseane Rf Royalist If ¢¢™ | |
— — + 1
2a
2533
Sukor Palasak {© Par Bank Ie lob. mud vol. mud
Sukor Pulusu Fea
Lady Elgin BY |
| v
Namoluk
+ Nile Shoal = Lukunor

“Mortlock I?

(qNakuor or Monteverde

155"

20"

76s

TROP!

Ac PAGIFIC Ex

«Rock

Plate 13.

Inaboye sald

Bayonnaise RM

Syiph R™

N 7
ao wal ISLEg
* Parry
's Kater Dace

Rosano « Disappointmer
utr a chey Group

Peel 1

Hileboroushices

pert!

Submarine Ve

wandro

Volcano
= Sulphur I

Islands

sagt St Augustin

2 Reet

ecu ® Euphrosyne or Sail Rock

» Valetta RF

1981

| 2as0

Britomart RE MA

| zen, OL
Florence Sh!

|
| 700

s Reef

Reefs |
| any

Shoat

2300 T

Mira por vos *

al zers Sparbsht.

oa Lu
2500 potty

Cho On PE aT

TRACK oF THE

ALBATROSS

FROM

GUAM TO YOKOHAMA.

SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS

= Grampus |

Meares RE

+) Farallon de Pajares

|. Urracas I

Assumption

| pAgrigon tl

@ Pagan:

| pAlamagan I,

-Gugual

Dig ONE
Zealandia B*
| *Sariguan I,

= Anataxan I.
aFaralion de Medinilte

0

2007
Manages yy Saipan lt

Tinkan

Aguijan
Ih ay IF

Rota!

3 | a04

- 2000! 95+
Teta 4%

2003,

aus

ALBATROSS" TROPICAL PACIFIC EX g
5 £2
i Ee
a ; a3.
37 ae Sse es Ss) ssa ann se i 3 5 g 5 = : g 2
os :s = Fe Ss Sea Level es af SP Sy a Ba 2 4 a
: na Sa 232 + = iw aa Ls
}io0
oo }z00
s00 |300
woo Joo
H 00 |s00
i
¥ peti mndl |
3 a hee M O nS BE R
4 ober,
es) yl.ipart
S falpar.
vor part z
|
1500 | 1500
|
35°5 | 4
b.07. rad. H
vol.part 1| H
vol, part glob.on H A
P vol. part sage on H H
| H ;
Ia art | i
| |
42500 2500 SECTION FROM
Distance 215 miles > | | SAN FRANCISCO
ACROSS MOSER BASIN TO
| ~
NUKUHIVA ( MARQUESAS) aie :

SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS 1000 Keng Distance 3168 mites Se

3100 43100

3 = = NS

red clo.

Ted clay

se MMe

2000

Fig.l

B

2883

: © s 3
$ £ z §

2075,

H 352 =
glob.ox. mi
! glob _oz

Fed cla Glob.ox

SOUNDINGS IN PATHOMS

c2taa

1939

Glob. ox,

385)

‘glob

100

i;

glob.oz.rad.

oz

vol. part

lob ox

9S
@

tpart
Dtipart.

G
ral part
qlob.or. PO"

lab o« rad é

»

®

les
<

¥ol part

2

ayo

/qlob,ox
vol part

PlaTe 14.

Wpter. vol. purt

ALBATROSS” TROPICAL PACIFIC EX

= . e853 sea nevel_ e Sn SRS $ Sa Sea lever Aas wen, oy z q
ia) 7 =p T Aras md ce -
4100 tice 100 |
4 zoo foo} «OD 4 « 200
= | a o) a
3 <4 300 Js00 gy z (0) i 300 ;
% % } ed |
40 <q 400 400 fa} 400
ple | | ie | < 4 <
AY Ba | 5 H 4 500 dso Za eS Zao°2 4500
Veor.sd.pler \ 9° r | Baer E
: it : peal ani (Gee & 39°71 oree ox ; peer
plerglab. | \ cor. sd. ee
eS pler car.sd.. 3g¢
‘vl Ba Corsd.pter 38-7 cor sd. |
vol.part 1 vol
Jeorsd H vol: mud.
\ | glob.
/qlob.pter \ | 4 ner 1
/ \ gtab.ox
N 1001 meet 1000 1000, 100 miles : » {1000
feor.sd \ 4 miele} 301Vgloboz
\ | , sH0;witen E UES | * 130 mites
\ Fig 3,
J 35°7
\ Y) glob.oz Fig 4.
\cor. scl.glob \ ye
} 41500 | \s00 / 1500 1500 a 1500
| \ | Veot mud.glob. 3% ylub.or ee
\ ol, ma
SECTION ACROSS |
RANGIROA from off AHE . ae
\ | Ss 8 ssks a) 2
. : 4 a =
ina Southwesterly direction \ | = Fig
DEPTH IN FATHOKS 4 |
00
Hoos f 2000
f 10 miles we x | 5 4 t00
\
\ | 3 ° 300 |
ire ie S 100 :
s Oi |
Fig 6. Fig 5. 5 2 500
| 4
% ive i pler z ] 2500
redicl\ | | 4
|
| Xi i Apter | |
| glob Apter.
} j<- E - anne TO niles ~ > | SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS.
| io 1000
IK - 3000

1000

1500

10330

2000

2298

1963

42000

43000

vol. mud.

Fig.2

[130 miles ~~

qa

vol mud.
glob,

Piare 15.

i s ~ & i
ei 3 E E BE 3 Sac
Sea Levet aaa Soa Level
100
200
300
400 400 =
9
500 500 led
2
a o
2 y
3 “
5 <
= ie
G]
1000 1000 {
« about 600 miles 4
4
Eee
|] =
=)
a i
5 J fine cor. sd
1500 1500 — glob,
z
)
rt
<
q
°
7 ] glob oz vol.park
lhe 2000
j
|
}
42300) 42500 j red clay
ios Ie

1500

2000

2500

3000

vaso

+

corisand.

cor. saruL

Lob ox
vol, part

‘or. sand.

Fig. |

volmud
glob. ox

fpler.on

38°8 \cor sand

glolor
vol-parl

PraTe 16.
is 2 vo 3 a) 2 2 Sone PI 2 « «
= = Sea Level
Ji00 (oo s
|z00 200 2 ?
300 300 z cor sand 300
4400 400 S cor. sand. Jin
}so0 \ |soo
49° i 3 ie
1 2 corsand i Cor. <
4 a 530, miles ~ zr - i 2 Z-->}
| ; i <a
| 37°6leor sand corsand, : a 1
H Stee
2) H 237
4 54k 2 ; B
Se <4 i 5
. A i 5 1000
}}000 1000 3 3 = 2
4 1 3O5qlob.oz & = >
as
4 Se
4 fe i H ]
| S |
| 5 1500
J 1500 1500 ec |
| g
| a H
4 qlob.oz © BBS
: HE, i ‘glob
| glob cor sand;
| ]
i 4
] 1 |
Jeovo
{2000 Jeo00 3544 fol my i
4 = H 4
| Fig.2 a 35 ol mud i |
| | gtobvol. mud. |
|
|
‘1 1 }2500
|

SOUNDINGS IN

FATHOMS

Plare 17

"ALBATROSS TROPICAL PaciFic Ex

eo 8 Ce
= Ss > =
eg 400
‘ 0
200
orsand =
<
<| 3300
<
2 x 4400
: corm Sand
‘ ie {00
|
pler.oz |
1
|
Neteaee: |
glob.oz. |
41000
36") tei- |
| |
‘ | 240 miles ‘ |
1500
for
glob oz

35°.
globoz

SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS,

2000

cnt

5 red clay

__ Sea Leve

2 fy

ol mud.

vol rbual
\

5°\ vol-mud

| \

35°) aloboz 1
Polmud |
2000

coor)

/
/

V red clay

SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS.

i

181
vol.mud

35
\ volsand 4, | ee a
Tol mud

oS

> BY

Fig.2

y

>
NL aes geen
18 ON Fed clay

450 miles

*| cor sand.

°5"\ lobo

14°68

ris

/

42°5

corsand,

Ted clay

60)
Zz
a Zz
4 4
4

95°21) olobor

— 8 =i lee

Plate 18,

"AuSATROSS TROPICAL PACIFIC EX

2080 |

|
|
|

SECTION FROM OFF
ROTA, LADRONE ISLANDS To MIAKI
South of C.KING JAPAN

Distance ubout 1250 miles

SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS.

2175

3

| 1008

1002

i710

i910

2335

Piate 19

1003
139
09
Mit
wes

| 22

4 sorz
0

| 2967

Line of Soundings about 10m Nest of the: Ladronas

1000

1500

}2000

/2500

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 5

him on the principle of -priority, it seems unjustifiable to cancel a name
given to an oceanic ridge, or to a great basin or deep, and to substitute
another because it agrees with the principles of the reformer.

Professor Supan anticipates that all maritime nations will attempt in
the future to perpetuate the names of their exploring ships and their cap-
tains, and thus introduce endless confusion. But certainly the confusion
can be no greater than it is in the interior of Africa, where each explorer,
according to his nationality, has given the names of his eminent country-
men to the physical features of the country he traversed.

The nomenclature of the Arctic and Antarctic regions, depending abso-
lutely upon the national geographical system, if I may so call it, is perhaps
the most obvious example of the approval which civilized nations have
given to the system which perpetuates the names of the hardy explorers
and of the ships they commanded when pushing their way towards the
poles. Bold indeed would be the man to attempt on “ national grounds”
to reform the names associated with so many heroic voyages. I do not
mean by this in any way to compare the hardships of the Arctic voyages
with those explorations which are laid in the pleasant paths of the tropics,
and finally can only suggest that school children may perhaps learn a little
interesting history if geographical names do not everywhere replace per-
sonal ones.

The character of the bottom of the Moser basin is most interesting.
The haul of the trawl made at Station 2, lat. 28° 23’ N., long. 126° 57’ W.,
brought up the bag full of red clay and manganese nodules, with Tertiary
sharks’ teeth and cetacean ear-bones; and at nearly all our stations we
had indications of the existence of manganese nodules. At Station 13, in
2690 fathoms, lat. 9° 57’ N., long. 137° 47’ W., we again obtained a fine
trawl-haul of manganese nodules and red clay; there must have been at
least enough to fill a forty-gallon barrel.

The nodules in our first haul were either slabs from six to eighteen
inches in length and four to six inches in thickness, or small nodules rang-
ing in size from that of a walnut to a lentil or less, while those brought up
at Station 13 consisted mainly of nodules looking like mammillated cannon-

balls, varying from four and a half to over six inches in diameter, the

6 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

largest being six and one half inches. We again brought up manganese
nodules at the equator in about longitude 138° W., and subsequently —
until within sight of Tahiti—we occasionally trawled manganese nodules.

As had been noticed by Sir John Murray in the “ Challenger,” these
manganese nodules occur in a part of the Pacific most distant from con-
tinental areas. Our experience has been similar to that of the ‘ Chal-
lenger,” only I am inclined to think that these nodules range over a far
more extensive area of the Central Pacific than had been supposed, and
that this peculiar manganese-nodule bottom characterizes a great portion of
the deep parts of the Central Pacific, where it cannot be affected by the
deposition of Globigerine, Pteropods, or telluric ooze, in the region charac-
terized also by red-clay deposits. For in the track of the great equatorial
currents there occur deposits of Globigerina ooze in over 2400 fathoms
for a distance of over 300 miles in latitude.

We also found manganese nodules south of the Marquesas; at Station 31,
when in 2700 fathoms, we obtained perhaps the finest specimens of red clay
from any of our soundings. As we approached the western Paumotus,
upon the north side of the plateau from which they rise, Globigerina ooze

passed gradually to Pteropod ooze, then to fine and coarse coral-sand. In

the channel south of the Paumotus to Tahiti the coral sand passed to vol-
canie sand mixed with Globigerine in the deepest parts of the line, and
toward Tahiti passed to voleanic mud mixed with Globigerinee, next to fine—
voleanic sand, and finally, at the last sounding, off Point Venus, to coarse
voleanie sand.
We made a few hauls of the trawl on our way, but owing to the great
distance we had to steam between San Francisco and the Marquesas
(3800 miles) we could not, of course, devote much time either to trawling
or to making tows at intermediate depths. Still, the hauls we made with
the trawl were most interesting, and confirmed what other deep-sea expe- —
ditions have recognized: that at great depths, at considerable distances
from land and away from any great oceanic current, there is comparatively
little animal life to be found. Where manganese nodules were found in
abundance the hauls were specially poor, a few deep-sea Holothurians and —
Ophiurans, and some small Actinix which had attached themselves to thel

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 7

nodules, with a few other invertebrates, seemed to be all that lived at these
great depths, in 2500 to 2900 fathoms, far away — say from 700 to 1000
miles —from the nearest land.

The bottom temperatures of the deep Moser basin varied between 54.6°
at 2628 and 2740 fathoms, to 35.2° at 2440 fathoms, and 35° at 2475
fathoms, about 175 miles from the Marquesas. At Station 23, off the
Marquesas, in 1802 fathoms, the temperature was 35.5.

Owing to the failure of many of our deep-sea thermometers, we were not
able to make any satisfactory serial-temperature observations. At Station
11, lat. 14° 38’ N., long. 136° 44’ W., in 2646 fathoms, we obtained :

79° at surface. 48.9° at 200 fathoms.
78.7° ‘ 50 fathoms? 44.1° “ 300 ce
55.9° “« 100 « 39:9° * 700 <*

These temperatures are somewhat higher than those obtained by the
“Challenger” in similar latitudes on their line to the westward of ours
between the Hawaiian Islands and Tahiti. At Tahiti a temperature of
40° is found to vary between 500 and 600 fathoms, off Hawaii a temper-
ature of 48° obtains in 224 fathoms, at Hilo 40° was found in 400 fathoms,
much colder than on the eastern lines.

The temperatures of the bottom between the Marquesas and Paumotus
were 34.9 at 1932 fathoms, 35° at 2456 fathoms and 2451 fathoms, and
39.1? at 2527 fathoms.

We did not take any bottom temperatures between the Paumotus and
Tahiti.

Our deep-sea nets not having reached San Francisco at the time we
sailed, we limited our pelagic work to surface hauls, of which we generally
made one in the morning and one in the evening, and whenever practi-
cable, some hauls with the open tow-nets at depths varying between 100

and 350 fathoms. The results of these hauls were very satisfactory. The

1 Off shore off San Francisco the ‘‘ Albatross” observed in

Fathoms Fathoms.
CH i oo ele on EE pw FS he sm SES
GlSteawemE a steton 7s, <O9° UE 5 og ee oS BESS
GS: Glad “Oemenmt ih PES A So eee BS

line San Francisco to Hawaiian Islands.

8 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

collection of surface animals is quite extensive, and many interesting forms
were obtained. As regards the deeper hauls, they only confirm what has
been my experience on former expeditions, that beyond 300 to 350 fathoms
very little animal life is found, and in the belt above 300 fathoms the
greater number of many so-called deep-sea Crustaceans and deep-sea fishes
were obtained. I may mention that we obtained Pelagothuria at about
100 fathoms from the surface.

We trawled at Station 10 in 3088 fathoms. Unfortunately, the trawl
was not successful, and we simply hauled the bag through over 3000 —
fathoms without bringing up a single deep-sea animal from intermediate —
depths which we did not obtain quite near the surface — at less than
300 fathoms. I may mention here that the experience of the “ Valdivia”
shows, from the preliminary reports published by Professor Chun,’ that
pelagic alge do not extend to beyond about 150 fathoms. Although he
also states that animal life is found at all depths from the surface to the
bottom, yet he states that beyond 800 meters it diminishes very rapidly ;
Professor Chun does not state whether this diminution is more rapid away
from land than near continental areas, both of which conditions I had called
especial attention to in my Preliminary Report on the “ Albatross” expe-
dition of 1891, while using the Tanner net in the Gulf of California?
Mr. George Murray has criticised the action of the Tanner deep-sea net,
and condemns its results, suggesting that the bottom net had always
closed some time after being sent down.’ I need not now discuss that sub-
ject, but will only refer him to the report of the “ Albatross,” in which
he will find the closed part of the net to have on several occasions brought:
up (when I expected it to do so) specimens from over 600 fathoms from
immediately above the bottom, or samples of the bottom from near 1700
fathoms while attempting to tow immediately above that depth. I ought,
in justice to him, to state that I omitted to mention that we secured the
loops by twine to the detacher to insure their dropping only when the

1 Die Deutsche Tiefsee Expedition 1898-99. Zeits. d. Gesell. fiir Erdkunde zu Berlin, 1899,
XXXIV., Heft 2.

2 Bull. M. C. Z., 1892, Vol. XXIII, No. 1, pp. 40, 45.

® George Murray. Exploration of the intermediate depths of the ocean. Geog. Mag., XIII., No. 2,
February, 1899, p. 152.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. Y)

messenger reached the detacher, and that the hooks of the detacher were
lengthened very considerably above the dimensions figured in my Prelim-
expedition of 1891. 1 might add that
we made a number of trials near the surface to see the action of the

?

inary Report on the ‘“ Albatross’

Tanner net under all conditions of position and speed, and I can only
assume that Mr. Murray, having no experience, did not handle his net
properly, or that it was not properly balanced. I may also add that Cap-
tain Tanner used his modified net subsequently in the “ Albatross,” while
running a line of soundings from San Francisco to the Hawaiian Islands,
in from 100 to 350 fathoms from the surface, at considerable distances
from the islands and the mainland, and also in Alaskan waters, and always
with the results we had obtained before. The closed bag, when towing
at 100 fathoms below the surface, always brought up a mass of pelagic
animals living at about that depth, while when tried at 300-350 fathoms
it brought up little or nothing. There is nothing in Captain Tanner's
experience,’ — who, as commander of the ‘“ Albatross” from 1883 until
1894, has had a longer service in deep-sea explorations than any other
individual, — or mine, to indicate why the net should act well at 100 fath-
oms and not well at 500 fathoms or more, as suggested by Mr. Murray.

Subsequently, during the winter of 1893-94 when off the northern coast
of Cuba, during my cruise in the “ Wild Duck’? I had occasion again to
use the modified deep-sea self-closing Tanner net, and found no reason
to change the views regarding the general bathymetrical distribution of
pelagic life I had expressed in my Preliminary Report on the Results of
the “ Albatross” Expedition of 1891.

In the winter of 1897-98 I also made a number of hauls with the deep-
sea self-closing Tanner net at several points in Fiji, the results of which
will be found in my Report on the Islands and Coral Reefs of Fiji*

As long as we have no better acquaintance with the surface fauna of
the great oceans than we now possess, it is idle from the few hauls which
have made us familiar with some of the denizens of a bathymetric belt

1 Z. L. Tanner. On the appliances for collecting pelagic organisms. Bull. U. S. Fish Commission,
Vol. XIV., 1895, p. 143.

2 Bull. M. C. Z., XXV1., No. 1, 1894, p. 7.

8 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XX XII., 1899, p. 14.

10 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

extending from the surface down to, say 300 fathoms, at the outside, to
undertake to classify them into distinct series extending from the surface
to great depths. What is still needed is a careful exploration of the bathy-
metrical range of the pelagic fauna on a line extending far out to sea from
a continental slope into great depths, and a similar line along a great
oceanic current far from any disturbing element such as an archipelago
or submarine plateaus.

If we knew all the species of the so-called pelagic belt it would be a
different thing; but when the peculiar fish with pedunculated eyes which
Chun calls a deep-sea fish, and specially characteristic of intermediate
depths, is found by us at 100 fathoms, this, as well as the many other
fishes and so-called deep-sea Crustacea, Holothurians, Ascidians, and Medusee
which we caught at or about the 100-fathom line in this and in my
former expeditions, plainly shows that as yet we are very far from know-
ing the species which inhabit the belt between 100 fathoms or more and
the surface." No deep-sea expedition using better and newer appliances
has as yet failed to bring up within these limits some so-called new
deep-sea species if they happen to have brought it up when dropping the
net in greater depths, while the next explorer again brings it up from
inside the 100-fathom line. (See note.) I still reiterate that near the
bottom, and some distance above it, a certain number of so-called
pelagie species undoubtedly live, as well as in proximity to the con-
tinental slopes; but that is no criterion of the mode of distribution of

pelagic life at sea far away from continental areas. When thus caught

Nore.—I may mention among the Fishes: Collettia, Scopelus, Myctophum, Argy-
ropelecus, Polyipnus, Plectromus, Paralepis, Stomias, Malacosteus, Eustomias, Melam-
phaés, Trachichthys, Sternoptyx, Cyclothone, Gonostoma, Notoscopelus, Lampanyctus,
Cyema, Caulolepis, Hoplostethus, Chaunax, and Melanocetus. Among the Crustacea: Gnatho-
phausia, Thysanopoda, Bentheuphausia, Willemcesia, Stylocheiron, Nematoscelis, Eu-
phausia, Syviella, Nyctiphanes, Sergestes, Benthcecetes. The remarkable Ascidian Octac-
nemus. ‘he pelagic Holothurian Pelagothuria, and the greater number of the so-called
deep-sea Meduse: Atolla, Periphylla, and Nauphanta, as well as a number of so-called
deep-sea Siphonophores, Bathyphysa, and the like, which are caught by the wire rope.

1 Die Deutsche Tiefsee Expedition 1898-99, Berlin, 1899, p. 54. Zeits. d. Gesell. f. Erdkunde
zu Berlin, 1899, XXIV., Heft 2.

—w

PRELIMINARY REPORT. ijl:

near the land it teaches us nothing of their bathymetrical range, as they
may occasionally wander off miles by being carried seaward by currents
and drop off into deep water along continental slopes.

Unfortunately, the marked paucity of pelagic animal life in the Pacific
makes it well-nigh impossible to obtain data for their bathymetrical dis-
tribution with the limited information we have.

On our way to Tahiti from the Marquesas we stopped a few days to
examine the westernmost atolls of the Paumotus. After striking Ahii we
made for Rangiroa, the largest atoll of the Paumotu Group. Skirting the
northern shore from a point a little west of Tiputa Pass, we entered the
lagoon through Avatoru Pass, anchoring off the village. This pass is quite
narrow, with a strong current running out the greater part of the time,
especially in easterly winds. It varies in depth between nine and ten
fathoms, shoaling near the inner entrance to about three and one half
fathoms, and deepening again to six or seven fathoms, and gradually
passing into fifteen to seventeen fathoms, which is the average depth of
the lagoon from Avatoru Pass across to the south or weather shore, a
distance of about thirteen miles.

We made an examination of the northern side of the lagoon between
Avatoru and Tiputa Passes. The lagoon beach of the northern shore is
quite steep, and is composed of moderately coarse broken coral sand at
the base, and of larger fragmenis of corals along the upper face, which
is about 5 to 6 feet above high-water mark. These coral fragments are
derived in part from the corals living on the lagoon face of the northern
shore, and in part of fragments broken by the waves from somewhat
below the low-water mark. The ledge which underlies the beach crops
out at many places on the lagoon side of the northern land-rim; we traced
it also along the shores of Avatoru Pass, and specially about half-way
between Avatoru and Tiputa Passes across the narrow northern land-rim.
It crops out also at various points between these passes in the narrow cuts
which divide this part of the northern land-rim of the lagoon into a
number of smaller islands. These secondary passes leave exposed the
underlying ledge, full of fossil corals. In some cases these secondary passes

leave a clear channel extending across from the lagoon to the northern

12 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

side, through which water flows at high or half tide. In other cases the
cuts are silted up with coral sand blown in from the lagoon side. In
others, the cut is shut off by a high sand-bank, or a bank composed of
broken fragments of corals, leaving access to the water from the northern
shore only; and finally the cuts are also shut off on the northern side by
sand and broken coral banks, the extension of the north shore outer beach
leaving a depression which at first is filled with salt-water and gradually
silted up both from the lagoon side and the sea-side, and forms the typical
north-shore land-rim of the lagoon. This building up of the land-rim of
the Paumotu atolls by the accumulation of sand both from the lagoon side
and the sea face, is very characteristic of the atolls of that group. It is
a feature which I have not seen so marked in any other coral-reef district.

On the lagoon side the slope from the beach is very gradual into
sixteen and seventeen fathoms, and corals appear to flourish on the lagoon
slope to six or eight fathoms only, in some cases consisting of Madrepores,
in others of Porites or of Astraeans, and Pocillopores. The corals could
be seen over the floor of the Avatoru passage down to from nine to ten
fathoms; and on the sea face Pocillopores covered the outer edge of the
shore platform. This platform is from 200 to 250 feet wide, and was
formed by the planing off of the seaward extension of the ledge cropping
out in the cuts.

It became very evident, after we had examined the south shore of the
lagoon, that the ledge underlying the north shore is the remnant of a bed
of Tertiary ecoralliferous limestone, which at one time covered the greater
part of the area of the lagoon, portions of which may have been elevated
to a considerable height. This limestone was gradually denuded and
eroded to the level of the sea. Passages were formed on its outside edge,
allowing the sea access to the inner parts of the lagoon limestone flat.
This began to cut away the inner portions of the elevated limestone,
forming large sounds, as in the case of Fiji atolls, and leaving finally on
the south side only a flat strip of perhaps 2500 to 3000 feet in width,
which has gradually been further eroded on the lagoon side and also on
the sea face, to leave only a narrow strip of land about 1000 feet in width
and perhaps ten to fourteen feet in height, the material for this land hav-

—

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 13

ing come from the disintegration of the ledge of Tertiary limestone, both
on the sea face and the lagoon side.

There exist in the lagoon a number of small islets which also consist of
this same Tertiary limestone in process of disintegration and transformation
to coral-sand islets. They are the islets at the lagoon side of both Avatoru
and Tiputa Passes, the two islets which we found along our line of sound-
ings across the lagoon, the one about four and one half miles from the
north side of the lagoon, and the other about the same distance from the
south shore. I am told that the eastern extremity of the lagoon is filled
with islets and heads consisting of the same limestone rock so characteristic
of the north and south shores of the lagoon.

The underlying ledge is not the remnant of a modern reef; its character
is identical with that of the elevated limestones of Fiji, which are of Tertiary
age, and the rock is in every respect the same as that I observed on many
of the elevated islands of Fiji. The atoll of Rangiroa is in a stage of de-
nudation and erosion very similar to that of Ngele Levu, in Fiji, only in
Ngele Levu the elevated limestone attains a height of about sixty feet.
Our visit to the southern land-rim of the lagoon, both on the lagoon side
and on the sea face, left us no doubt regarding the character of the under-
lying ledge of the north shore. As soon as the south-shore land was suff-
ciently near, as seen from the lagoon side, for us to distinguish its character,
we could see that the entire shore line was formed of a high ledge of lime-
stone, honeycombed, pitted, and eroded by atmospheric agencies, and under-
eut by the action of the waves both on the lagoon side and on the sea face.
The great rollers of the weather side broke through between the columnar
masses of the ledge into the lagoon, and as far as the eye could reach there
extended a more or less continuous wall (which is described by Dana? as
he saw it while sailing by in the “ Vincennes”’). But in addition to this
we found, on landing, this wall to be the sea face of the islands and islets
which dot the weather side for the greater part of its length on the south-
western part of the lagoon.

These islands and islets of the weather land-rim are entirely composed
of coral sand and coral fragments, formed from the disintegration of the

1 Corals and Coral Islands, 3d ed., 1890, p. 369.

14 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

extension of the elevated ledge toward the inside of the lagoon to a dis-
tance of about one and one half to two miles; and along this very gradual
inner slope of the islands forming the southern edge of Rangiroa, corals

grow profusely down to six or seven fathoms of water, when the bottom

runs into hard coralline bottom, similar to that found on all the soundings ~

taken across the lagoon.

The width of the larger islands of the weather land-rim is about 1000 to
1200 feet; the smaller islands and islets are less, some of the latter forming
in reality mere sand buttresses at right angles to the great limestone ledge
which flanks them all on the sea face and connects them on the weather side
as if by a great wall, more or less broken, and partly shuts off the commu-
nication of the interior of the lagoon with the sea on that side.

The passages between the islands and islets illustrate well, only on a
larger scale, the formation of the cuts, more or less silted up, which were
observed on the northern face of the lagoon. Some of these passages are
dry at low-water, others are partly filled by tide pools, others are entirely
silted up by lagoon sand, only they are lower than the sand-blown land
of the islands on either side of it.

Crossing over to the weather side of the southern land rim of Rangiroa
in one of the passages between two of the islands, we came upon the
coralliferous limestone ledge, from twelve to fourteen feet high and about
forty to fifty feet wide at the top, which formed the sea face of the islands
and islets, and extended far to the westward as a great stone wall more or
less broken into distinct parts. We found this ledge to consist of elevated
limestone as hard as calcite, full of corals, honeycombed and pitted, and
worn into countless spires and spurs, and needles and blocks of all sizes
and shapes, separated by deep crevasses or pot-holes recalling a similar
scene in Ngele Levu on the windward end of the lagoon. In the passages
the parts of the ledge which had not been eroded extended as wide but-
tresses, gradually diminishing in height till they formed a part of the lagoon
flat and extended out into the lagoon below the recent beach-rock which
covered it in short stretches.

The sea-face slope of the elevated ledge was quite steep, but otherwise

similar to the lagoon slope, and its upper surface weathered by atmospheric

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 15

and aqueous agencies into all possible shapes such as I have mentioned.
The slope passed into the shore platform, which was shaved down, as it
were, to a general level surface. On the outer edge, within the line of
the breakers, were growing Pocillopores and Nullipores in great abundance.
This reef flat or shore platform, as well as the reef platform of the north
shore, was strewn here and there with huge masses of the ledge of elevated
reef-rock torn from its outer edge. Similar rocks and bowlders occur on
the lagoon side of the islands forming the outer land-rim of Rangiroa; they
are either torn off from the lagoon face of the outcropping ledge, or are
outlying parts of the ledge which have remained in place and have not
been planed down to the base level of the reef.

The amount of water which is forced into such a lagoon as Rangiroa
is something colossal, and when we observe that there are but a small
number of passages through which it can find its way out again on the
leeward side, it is not surprising that we should meet with such powerful
currents, seven to eight knots in several cases, sweeping out of the passages
on the lee side.

The islands and islets of Rangiroa are fairly well covered with low trees
and shrubs and large groves of palm trees.

The atolls of Tikehau and Matahiva, which we also examined, present
no features which we did not meet in Rangiroa, The first-named atoll
shows the same method of formation of the land-rim by material piled up
both from the lagoon side and the sea face,— material derived from the
disintegration of the underlying Tertiary limestone, which crops out here
and there along the sea face and the inner shores of the lagoon, or forms
across the southwest face of the lagoon an irregular, disconnected part of
the ring of islands and islets encircling that end of the lagoon. These
islets and islands are more or less connected by fragments of the elevated
limestone ledge, attesting its greater extension in past times. The outer
land-rings of both these atolls are covered with vegetation. We could see
in the lagoons several rocky islets, the remnants of the elevated limestone
ledge.

Matahiva is interesting, as its lagoon is quite shallow; it is full of rocky

islets, remnants of the underlying coralliferous limestone ledge which crops

16 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

out above the general level, and has a very narrow and shallow entrance, —
passable for boats only. Some of its islands are wooded and appear to
have been formed by accretion of sand from the decomposing ledges of
the lagoon. The outer land-rim appears as if formed by sand-banks driven
in from the sea face and also driven out from the lagoon side by the action
of the waves. It is evident that a lagoon such as Matahiva could readily
be closed by such a process and the sea no longer have access to it, as it
now has only one very narrow and very shallow boat-passage connecting the
lagoon with the sea on the lee side.

It was with great interest that we approached Makatea, as it is the
only high elevated island of which Dana speaks as occurring in the west-

ern Paumotus.!

For though he mentions some others as possibly having
been elevated five to six feet, yet he considered them all, as well as_
Makatea (Metia, or Aurora, of Dana) as modern elevated reefs. From the
very description given by him of the character of the cliffs and of the
surface of Makatea, I felt satisfied that it was composed of the same
elevated coralliferous limestone so characteristic of the elevated reefs of
Fiji, and which from the evidence of the fossils and the character of the
rock, both Mr. Dall and myself have been led to regard as of Tertiary
age.

As we approached the island from the northwest it soon became evident
that it presented all the characteristics to which I had become so accus-
tomed in Fiji, and, upon landing, this was found to be the case. The
cliffs had the same appearance as those of Vatu Leile, Ongea, Mango,
Kambara, Yangasé, and many other elevated islands of Fiji. There were
fewer fossils, perhaps, but otherwise the petrographic character of the
rock was identical with that of Fiji. Mr. Mayer collected upon the top
of the second terrace a number of fossils similar in all respects to those
we found in the Fiji elevated coralliferous limestones.

The southwestern extremity of the island slopes gradually to the sea
and shows two well-defined terraces. The lines of these two terraces
could, as a rule, be traced along the faces of the vertical cliffs by the
presence of caverns along the lines of those levels, similar to the lines of

* Corals and Coral Islands, 3d ed., 1890, p. 198.

PRELIMINARY: REPORT. 17

caverns indicating the line of present action of the sea at the base of the
cliffs. As we steamed around the island there were distinct indications of
two additional terraces on the line of the vertical cliffs on the weather
side of the island. The position of these terraces was usually more clearly
seen along the face of the cliffs at prominent points, where they were
undercut much as I have figured them for certain cliffs in Vatu Leile,
Yangasd, Mango, Fulanga, and others in Fiji, in my report on the islands
and coral reefs of that group."

Of course it is premature, from this examination of the western ex-
tremity of the Paumotus, to base any general conclusions regarding the
mode of formation of those atolls; certainly, as far as I have gone, there
is absolutely nothing to show that the atolls of the Paumotus have not
been formed in an area of elevation similar to that of Fiji. The evidence
in Rangiroa and in the atolls of the western Paumotus is very definite.
Makatea is an elevated mass of coralliferous limestone similar in all re-
spects to masses like Vatu Vara, Thithia, and others in Fiji. Like them,
Makatea is surrounded by a comparatively narrow shore platform cut out
from the base of the limestone cliffs, and on the seaward extension of
which corals grow abundantly to depths of seven to eight fathoms, when
they appear to become very much less numerous. So that it is not un-
natural to look upon the area of the Paumotus, as I am inclined to do,
as one of elevation, the raised and elevated land of which has been
affected much in the same way, by denudation and by erosion, as have
the masses of elevated coralliferous limestone of Fiji. Only there seems
to have been, from the evidence thus far presented, a far greater uniform-
ity in the height of the elevation of the Paumotus. This would render
the explanation I have given less evident had I not the experience of
the Fiji group to guide me. Evidence of this elevation is found at
the two extremities of the Paumotu Plateau, at Makatea, an elevated
island consisting of Tertiary coralliferous limestone, and at the Gambier
Islands, which are volcanic islands of considerable height (over 1300 feet).
Furthermore, as we shall see, there are other islands and atolls in the
Paumotu Group showing traces of this elevation, so that I am at any rate

1 Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXXIIL., 1899, Pls. 80, 84, 92, 100.
2

18 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

justified in denying that the Paumotus as such are situated in an area of
subsidence, and that subsidence has been the great factor, as is maintained
by Darwin and Dana, in the formation of the characteristic atolls of the
group.

It may be well to point out also that the Paumotus, like the Marquesas
on one side and the Society Islands on the other, are situated upon a
plateau similar to that upon which the last-mentioned groups are placed,
a plateau rising from an oceanic basin which surrounds them, and which
has a depth of from 2500 to 2500 fathoms, the plateau itself having a
depth of 1200 to 1500 fathoms. For the differences which distinguish the
plateaux of these groups I refer to the accompanying charts.

During our stay in Papeete’ some time was spent in examining that
part of the barrier reef of Tahiti which had been surveyed by the “ Chal-
lenger.’ We found the condition of the outer slope of the reef quite
different from its description as given in the “Challenger” narrative.’
The growing corals were comparatively few in number, and the outer
slope showed nothing but a mass of dead corals and dead coral bowlders
beyond sixteen or seventeen fathoms, few living corals being observed
beyond ten to twelve fathoms.

We also made an expedition to Point Venus, to determine, if possible,
the rate of growth of the corals on Dolphin Bank from the marks which
had been placed on Point Venus by Wilkes, in 1839,’ and by MM. Le Clere

and de Bénazé, of the French navy, in 1869. We found the stones and —

inarks as described, but in view of the nature and condition of Dolphin
Bank, did not think it worth while to make a careful survey, as Captain
Moser had intended to do. On examining Dolphin Bank in the steam
launch I was greatly surprised to find that there were but few corals
growing on it. I could see nothing but sparsely scattered heads, none

1 Explorations of the “Albatross” in the Pacific. II. The Paumotus. [Letter No. 2, dated
Papeete Harbor, Tahiti Island, November 6, 1899, to Hon. George M. Bowers, U. S. Commissioner
of Fish and Fisheries, Washington, D. C., by Alexander Agassiz.] Am. Jour. Sci., Fourth Series,
Vol. [X., No. 50, February, 1900.

2 Voyage of the “ Challenger,” Narrative of the Cruise, 2d Part of Vol. I., p. 778.

8 U. S. Exploring Expedition Narrative, Vol. II.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 19

larger than my fist!—the top of the bank being entirely covered by nul-
lipores. We sounded across the bank in all possible directions, and
examined it thoroughly with the water-glass, and at the stage of water
at which we sounded found about eighteen inches difference from the
soundings indicated by the charts. It is also greatly to be regretted that
Dolphin Bank was not examined, either in 1839 or in 1869, and notes
made of what species of corals, if any, were growing on its surface; for
an excellent opportunity has been lost to determine the growth of corals
during a period of sixty years. The choice of this bank as a standard to
determine the growth of corals was unfortunate, as it is in the midst of
an area comparatively free from corals.

After refitting and coaling here, we left on the 5th October for a cruise
in the Paumotus.

We steamed for Makatea, which we had visited on our way to Tahiti,
and not only examined the island more in detail, but took a number of
photographs of the cliffs of the east side, which, on our first trip, we
passed late in the afternoon. We crossed the island from west to east,
the path leading down from the summit of the cliffs bordering the island
into a sink at least forty to fifty feet lower than the rim of either face
of the island. The sink occupies a little more than one-third the length
of the island. It is deeper at its southern extremity, where it is said to
be seventy-five to one hundred feet below the rim of the adjoining
cliffs.

It is difficult to determine if this sink is the remnant of the former
lagoon of the island, or of a sound formed during its elevation; or if it
has been formed by the action of rain and atmospheric agencies. The
amount of denudation and erosion to which this island has been sub-
jected is very great, as is clearly indicated by the small caiions, pinnacles,
and walls of limestone, as well as by the crevasses which occur in the
surface of the basin in all directions, The extent to which this action
has penetrated into the mass of the island is also plainly shown by the
great number of caverns which crop out at all levels along the sea face
of the cliffs, some of which are of great height and extend as long
galleries into the interior of the island. It is, of course, difficult, in the

20 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

face of this extensive denudation and erosion, to state positively what
may be part of the ancient lagoon, or sound, and what has been carried
away by atmospheric and other agencies since the elevation of the island.
At the south end of the island, which is lower than the northern part,
there are only two distinct terraces, while at the northern end four ter-
races can be traced. The southern extremity, however, is still higher
than the deepest part of the central sink of the island.

From Makatea, we visited Niau, Apataki, Tikei, Fakarava, Anaa,
Tahanea, Raroia, Takume, Taenga, Makemo, Tekokoto, Hikueru, Marokan,

Hao, Aki-Aki, Nukutavake, going as far east as Pinaki, when we turned —

westward again, to Nukutipipi.

On arriving at Pinaki we decided to give up the exploration of the
eastern extremity of the Paumotus, and not to make our contemplated
visit to the Gambier Islands, our time having been greatly curtailed by
delays at Fakarava and Makemo, from bad weather and the non-arrival
of our coal supply. We therefore reluctantly turned westward again and
made for the Gloucester Islands. These, as well as Hereheretue, proved
most interesting; they formed, as it were, an epitome of what we had
seen on a gigantic scale in the larger atolls of the western and central
Paumotus. We could see at a glance in such small atolls as Nukutipipi
and Anu-Anurunga the connection between structural features which, in
an atoll of forty miles in length and from ten to fifteen miles in width,
it was often difficult to determine.

We anchored in Fakarava and Makemo lagoons, spending a number of
days in both these atolls. We usually timed our visits to the islands
where we could not anchor so as to spend the day, or the greater part
of the day, at these atolls, making our passages at night, and sounding
whenever practicable on the way.

After leaving Tahiti we made over 100 soundings. These have shown

in a general way that the western islands are probably all on a great

plateau connected perhaps by the 800-fathom line; that such islands as
Anaa are probably on spurs or independent smaller plateaux, separated
from the main plateau by somewhat deeper water; the same may be the
condition of Raroia and Takume, and of Hao and Amanu, while such

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 21

smaller and isolated islands as Tikei, Aki-Aki, Nukutavake, and Pinaki, as
well as the Gloucester Islands, rise from greater depths and are isolated
peaks. At any rate, these soundings indicate, as do the soundings off the
Fijis, that atolls do not necessarily rise from very great depths, and that
in this characteristic atoll district, atolls are found, it is true, with steep
slopes, but rising from moderate depths. The slopes of these atolls would
probably resemble in every respect the slopes of the elevated coralliferous
limestone islands characteristic of the Lau Group in Fiji, where they have
not been obliterated by erosion, denudation, and atmospheric agencies,

The deepest sounding among the Paumotus was on the line to the
northward of Hereheretue in the direction of Mehetia, where we found a
depth of 2524 fathoms, and a continuation of the red clay characterizing
the soundings since we left Pinaki. In nearly all the soundings among
the Paumotus, even at moderate depths not far from the atolls, we
brought up manganese particles or small manganese nodules. The last
haul, made in deep water on the way from Hereheretue, in 2440 fathoms,
on the way to Mehetia, brought at least half a ton of manganese nodules,
the bottom being red clay.

We steamed about 2500 miles among the Paumotus, and although
we had not the advantage of the accurate surveys of the English Iydro-
graphic charts, which made the exploration of Fiji so easy, yet from
the structure of these atolls it was a comparatively simple task, by steam-
ing around the islands and landing wherever practicable, to get a fairly
good idea of their structure. We have seen nothing in this more ex-
tended examination of the group tending to show that there has any-
where been subsidence. On the contrary, the existing condition of the
atolls of the Paumotus cannot, it seems to me, be explained on any
other theory except that they have been formed in an area of elevation ;
an area of elevation extending from Matahiva on the west to Pinaki in
the east, and from the Gloucester Islands on the south to Tikei on the
north, although the islands in the line of Mangareva to Tahiti are sep-
arated from the other Paumotus by a deep channel, nearly 200 miles
wide and more than 2400 fathoms in depth, with scattered islets and

atolls extending from Mangareva to Pinaki, and northward to Puka-ruha

22 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

and beyond, islands which are not connected with the extensive plateau
upon which the greater number of the Paumotu Islands to the westward
of Hao rise.

All the islands we have examined are, without exception, formed of
Tertiary coralliferous limestone, which has been elevated to a greater or less
extent above the level of the sea, and then planed down by atmospheric
agencies and submarine erosion, the greatest elevation being at Makatea
(about 230 feet), and at Niau, where the Tertiary coralliferous limestone
does not rise to a greater height than twenty feet. At Rangiroa it was fif-
teen to sixteen feet high. At other islands it could be traced only as form-
ing the shore platform, from fifty to 250 feet wide, which forms the outer face
of the Paumotus and is so characteristic a feature of the atolls of the group.
In other parts the old ledge could be traced cropping up in the interior of
the outer land-rim, or in the open cuts connecting the lagoon with the outer
sea-face of the atolls. Everywhere the space between the outcroppings of
the old ledge, as I will call the Tertiary coralliferous limestone, was filled
with beach rock, or a pudding-stone, or with a breccia or conglomerate of
coralliferous material consisting in part of fragments of the old ledge, and
of fragments of recent corals and shells cemented together.

The appearance of the old ledge and of the modern reef-rock is so strik-
ingly different that it is very simple to distinguish the two, even where only
comparatively small fragments are found.

We did not find in the Paumotus, as in Fiji, all possible stages of denu-
dation and of submarine erosion between islands like Vatu Vara, Naiau,
Kambara, Fulanga, Ongea, Oneata, Ngele Levu, and Wailangilala, and
atolls with a mere ring of surf to indicate their existence.

In the Paumotus nearly all the islands have been elevated to a very
moderate height and probably to about the same height, for the old ledge
forming the base of the modern structure is found exposed nearly every-
where at about low-water when it cannot be traced at a slightly greater
elevation. This would readily account for the uniform height of the islands
throughout the group.

But there is another element which comes into play in this group, and
has an important part in shaping the ultimate condition of these atolls. At

PRELIMINARY REPORT. Po

the Fijis we have seen the submarine erosion continue until there is little
left of many of the atolls beyond the merest islet or rock to indicate its
structure. In the Paumotus, in the great atolls, which are perhaps only
the exposed summits of parts of ridges or spurs of an extensive Tertiary
coralliferous limestone bed, the land-rim of the atoll is, after having been
denuded to the level of the sea, again built up from the material of its two
faces, which is thrown up on the wide reef-flats both from the sea face and
from the lagoon side. We do not find in the Fijis, as in the Paumotus, the
wide reef-shelves which supply such masses of material from the breaking
up of the outer and inner edges of the Tertiary limestone platforms, in addi-
tion to the fragments of the recent corals growing upon the flats and their
slopes, which, when dead, are thrown up on the top of the reef flats and
formed into shingle and sand to form a pudding-stone, or a conglomerate,
or breccia, with the fragments of the old ledge.

This pudding-stone, or beach rock, is found on all the reef flats of the
islands of the group. It forms great bars, at right angles usually to the
shore-line, and upon the sea face of these bars is thrown up coral shingle,
both old and recent, which builds up short reaches of beaches separated by
wide flats through which the sea rushes at high-water, or merely covers the
flats at low tide; while on the lagoon side of the wide reef-flats a similar
process is going on, throwing up finer sand among the beach-rock bars and
along their sides, and thus building up little by little, at first small sand-
bars, then larger bars, or islets, at right angles to the shore-line, and as they
become larger by accretions from both sides, they finally form islands
from 1000 to 1200 feet long, according to the width of the reef flat,
extending from the lagoon edge of the flat to the sea face of the atoll. The
sand-bars, little by little, become covered with vegetation, and at some
stages of tide appear like islands and islets situated a considerable distance
within the lagoon. Whenever the material supplied both from the lagoon
side and from the sea face is very abundant, the land ring becomes more or
less solid, the islets become consolidated into islands, separated by narrow or
wider cuts, until finally they form the larger islands which seem at first
glance to form a continuous land-rim along the edge of the lagoon, but

which are often seen to be separated according to local conditions by narrow

24 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

cuts, which gradually silting up finally allow no water to pass through and
merely indicate the former separation of the various parts of the land.

In the lagoons of atolls of such great length as some of those of the
Paumotus, like Rangiroa, Fakarava, Makemo, and Hao, which are between
thirty and forty miles long, and others of less dimensions, considerable sea
rises under the prevailing trades. The sea and wind generally follow the
trend of the shores, both in the lagoon and along the sea face, so that the
bars of beach-rock act like buttresses and collect material at their inner and
outer extremities, forming the sand-bars and islets which eventually become
the land-rim of the lagoon. When the material is not, from local causes,
very abundant, or is washed out over the flats, there are fewer islands, and
often these are but mere islets or bars for long reaches of the submerged
land-rim, forming the characteristic weather-faces of many of the lagoons.

Many of the lagoons are filled with shoals or ledges awash or a few
feet above the sea level. These shoals are parts of the old ledge which
have not as yet been eroded, and the disintegration of which has gone
far to supply the material for the land of the outer rims of the atolls. In
Fakarava there were no less than thirty-six islands and islets and ledges,
parts of a former great flat, now broken up, existing parallel to the
outer reef-flat about four miles in the lagoon. Similar reef flats exist in
Tahanea, where they form a secondary lagoon with two to three fathoms
of water, extending nearly the whole length of the western face of the
atoll. There are several large islands on this flat, and at high water
they would appear, as the islands and islets of Fakarava do, as discon-
nected and planted in the lagoon itself. A secondary lagoon also exists
in Ravahere, and in Anaa; in both these atolls the reef flat extends
across one extremity of the lagoon, and does not run parallel to the
longer line of the land-rim of the atoll.

The lagoons of these atolls have a general depth of thirteen to twenty
fathoms. In some eases they are somewhat deeper, as is stated, but there
are no measurements, the greater depths, thirty fathoms or more, being
due probably to orogenic conditions. Some of the atolls are quite shallow,
as at Matahiva, as well as Pinaki, where the lagoon is not more than
two to three fathoms, and Takume, where it is from five to six fathoms

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 25

deep. Some of the smaller islets we visited, among which are Tikei,
Aki-Aki, and Nukutavake, have no lagoons. ‘The former has a small
shallow sink in which fresh water collects, but the rim is only very
slightly higher than the interior, The last two islets are apparently
depressed in the centre, three to four feet below the outer bank of sand
which forms the rim (about ten to twelve feet high) of the basin of the
island. I was at first inclined to look upon these islands as examples of
islands which had been cut down to the level of the sea and subsequently
been built up by beach rock and sand in the manner described above.
The existence of extensive sand dunes on two sides of the island at
Pinaki, and of large dunes (estimated to be thirty-five feet high) on
the south shore of Nukutavake, seems to indicate the possibility of
there having been a shallow lagoon occupying the centre of Aki-Aki
and of Nukutavake, and that these lagoons were gradually filled by the
sand dunes, much as Pinaki is filling now.

At Pinaki (Whitsunday Island), there is no doubt that the lagoon is
rapidly filling from the sand blown in by the dunes. They are from
twelve to fifteen feet high, and are forcing their way in towards the
lagoon, killing the pandanus and whatever vegetation there is growing on
the land-rim of the lagoon. The dunes have probably filled also a
second entrance to the lagoon, indicated now only by a somewhat lower
level of the land-rim. Dr. Moore and Mr. Townsend, who went ashore
at Pinaki, report that the lagoon is not more than three fathoms deep ;
they could wade over the greater part of it. Mr. Alexander counted no
less than 116 islets in this small lagoon —less than a mile in diameter —
islets formed of masses of dead Tridacna shells thrown up on ledge rock,
on the slopes of which grew madrepores. The bottom of the lagoon is
covered by Tridacna, and masses of a species of Arca live near the edge ;
the intervening spaces being filled with nullipores. The entrance to
the lagoon is perhaps 150 feet wide, and there is a cut through the beach
rock covering the old ledge giving access to the sea into the lagoon at
certain stages of the tide. The water in the lagoon is quite warm.

At Pinaki, as at other atolls and islets to the eastward, there are

fewer cocoanuts than on the westward atolls, and the vegetation consists

26 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

in great part of pandanus and putu trees and the usual coral-reef vege-
tation of the Paumotus* and Fijis.

The only atoll we have seen in the Paumotus the lagoon of which is
entirely shut off from the sea is Niau. In this case the old ledge forming
the land-rim which surrounds the nearly circular lagoon is about a third
of a mile in width and sufficiently high, fifteen to twenty feet, to pre-
vent any sea from having access to it except in case of a cyclone,
as that of 1878, when the sea washed into the lagoon. The lagoon is
shallow, of an average depth of about three fathoms, the deeper parts
perhaps five. The water is brackish, of a density of 1.0216 at 28° C.
There are no corals living in it, but a species of mullet is found, as
well as many marine shells, which, like those in the lagoons of San Sal-
vador, in the Bahamas, are of diminutive size compared to their repre-
sentatives living outside. The floor of the lagoon is covered with alge.
The lagoon has probably a slight connection with the sea, the water
percolating through the limestone ring separating it from the outer reef-
flat. It is very difficult in this case to decide whether this lagoon has
been gradually filled up after elevation, or whether it is merely a sink
formed by solution and atmospheric erosion on a more or less uneven
limestone surface.

Dana, and other writers on coral reefs, mention a great number of
lagoons as being absolutely shut off from the sea. I take it these
statements are due to their descriptions being taken from charts, many
of which, as in the case of the Paumotus, are very defective. For
nothing is easier than to pass at a short distance by the wide and narrow
cuts which give in so many cases the freest access to the sea to the interior
of the lagoon, and are described as closed because they have no boat pas-
sages. I could mention, as instances of such lagoons, those of the atolls of
Takume, Hikueru, Anaa, ete., which may be said to be closed, yet into
which a huge volume of water is poured at every tide over low parts of
the encircling reef-flats.

The character of the coral reefs of the Paumotus is very different
from that of other coral-reef regions I have seen. Nowhere have I seen

1 See Dana, Corals and Coral Islands, 3d ed. p. 326.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 27

such a small number of genera, so many small species, and such stunted
development of the corals. None of the great heads of the genera so
characteristic of the West Indian regions, or of the Great Barrier Reef
of Australia, are to be seen; with the exception of a couple of species,
aleyonaria are absent, so far as our experience shows, and there are but
few sponges and gorgonians to be found among the corals. The bathy-
metrical limit of the reef-building corals seems to be about twenty to
twenty-two fathoms, but nowhere have I seen such extraordinary devel-
opment of incrusting nullipores as on the sea edge of the shore platforms
of some of the Paumotu atolls, where they build up to a height often
of four feet to form the outer edge of the secondary barrier reef so fre-
quently seen along the sea reef-faces of the Paumotus.

Judging from the temperatures taken at various points, 40° F. seems
to be found quite generally at about 500 fathoms depth.

We made a number of surface hauls, as well as intermediate hauls
with the tow-nets, but obtained very little animal life in the Paumotus.
The poverty of the surface pelagic life and down to 300 fathoms is
remarkable. I do not think I have ever sailed over so extensive an
area as that of the Paumotus and observed so little surface life; on calm
days, under the most favorable conditions, nothing could be seen with
the naked eye, and at night there was little or no phosphorescence.
Inside of the lagoons our hauls were equally barren.

The same paucity of animal life seemed to extend to the deep-water
fauna. All the hauls we made off the islands, in from 600 to 1000
fathoms, usually the most productive area of a sea slope, brought nothing,

or so little that we came to grudge the time spent in trawling on the

bottom, as well as towing on the surface or near it, —a great contrast to
the conditions in the Atlantic in similar latitudes, and very different from
our anticipations.

For these reasons we did not attempt to make a trial of the deep-sea
pump while in such unproductive areas; and unfortunately while we were
in the region of the equatorial currents the weather conditions were not

suited for a trial of the apparatus.

28 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

We left Papeete! November 15th, after coaling and refitting on our
return from the Paumotus. During our trip to Suva we made a few
soundings from Tahiti to Tonga, striking the northern extension of the
deep basin lying to the eastward of Niue; the depths ranged from 2472
to 2882, the bottom being red clay. This would indicate a greater exten-
sion westward of the zone over which the manganese-nodule bottom is
known to extend.

After leaving Niue we steamed for the deep hole of the Tonga-Kermadee
Deep, about seventy-five miles to the eastward of Tongatabu, and in
4173 fathoms made a haul with the “ Blake” beam-trawl, by far the deepest
trawl-haul yet made. The gear was carefully inspected, and strength-
ened as far as practicable by Captain Moser, and it was with considerable
anxiety that we laid out 5000 fathoms of wire rope for our haul. Fortu-
nately, everything went off successfully, and we landed the trawl safely
back on deck. To my great surprise we found in the bag a number of
large fragments of a silicious sponge belonging probably to the genus
Crateromorpha, which had been obtained by the “Challenger” in the
Western Pacific, but in depths less than 500 fathoms. We also brought
up quite a large sample of the bottom; it consisted of light-brown vol-
canic mud mixed with Radiolarians.

We decided to trawl at 4175 fathoms rather than wait for a possibly
deeper sounding, as the conditions for work were admirable and we did
not care to run any risk from a change of weather. After our haul we
made a still deeper sounding in the proximity of the 4762-fathom sounding
marked on the chart, and found 4540 fathoms, with the bottom of the
same character as at the place where we trawled. We also took a couple
of soundings in the line from Vavau to the southern extremity of the Lau
Group in Fiji, but found, as we expected from the soundings given farther
south, comparatively shoal water, viz.: 1581 fathoms. In the channel
north of Yangas&é, where we crossed the Lau Plateau, between Yangas&
and Mothe, we found 453 fathoms, with bottom composed of coral sand,

1 Explorations of the “ Albatross” in the Pacific. III. [Letter No. 3, dated Suva Harbor, Fiji
Islands, December 11th, 1899, to Hon. George M. Bowers, U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries,
Washington, D. C., by Alexander Agassiz.] Am. Jour. Sci., Fourth Series, Vol. IX., No. 51, March,
1900.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 29

pteropod ooze, and a few Globigerine. Between Namuka and Yangasd
we obtained 524 fathoms; between Namuka and Marambo, 600 fathoms;
between it and Kambara, 450 fathoms; and finally, about fifteen miles
west of Kambara, we sounded in 990 fathoms. These soundings would
indicate a continuous plateau of moderate depths from Wailangilala south,
upon which the islands of the Lau Group rise.

On our way back to Papeete from the Paumotus we examined the east-
ern cost of Tahiti, and from Papeete examined the western coast as far as
Port Phaeton, at Taravoa Isthmus. We examined, in a general way, the
Leeward Society Islands: Murea, Huaheine, Raiatea, Tahaa, Bora-Bora,
Motu Iti, and Maupiti. There are excellent charts of the Society Islands,
so that it was comparatively simple to examine the typical points of the
group and to gain an idea of their structure as far as it relates to coral reefs.
The Society Islands are all volcanic islands edged with shore platforms,
some of great width, upon which the barrier or the fringing reefs of the
islands have grown. The structure of the reefs of the Society Islands is
very similar to that of the Fiji reefs round volcanic islands. A comparison,
for instance, of the charts of Kandavu, Viti Levu, Mbengha, Nairai, and of
other voleanie islands in the Fijis, with those of the Society Group, will at
once show the identity of their structure. Huge platforms of submarine
denudation and erosion characterize both, with fringing and barrier reefs
determined by local conditions. Perhaps it is easier to follow the changes
which have taken place in the Society Islands; and such islands as Tahaa
and Bora-Bora, where we anchored, as well as Maupiti, are admirable
examples and epitomes of the structure and mode of formation of the coral
reefs of that group.

In Motu Iti and Tetiaroa the volcanic peaks have disappeared, leaving
nothing but a shallow platform, upon the outer edges of which sandy coral
islets have been thrown up. There is, however, one point in which the
barrier reefs of the Society Islands differ from those of Fiji. The barrier
reefs in Fiji are generally indicated merely by reef flats, upon which the sea
breaks, and an occasional rocky islet or negro-head; only rarely do we find
sand keys upon the fringing reefs of the islands of Fiji. In the Society
Islands, on the contrary, we find the line of the barrier reefs usually well

30 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

indicated by long lines of narrow islets thrown up on the reef platforms,
exactly as they are in the Paumotus. These islands and islets are usually
well wooded, and thus give a very peculiar aspect to the barrier reef. In
the case of Bora-Bora, Maupiti, and Aitutaki, for instance, we have a central
volcanic peak of considerable height surrounded by a wide lagoon, the sea
edge of which is formed by a fringe of wooded islets and islands forming a
more than half-closed ring around the central island, which, in Bora-Bora
and Maupiti, rise in slopes and nearly vertical walls, the former to a height
of nearly 2400 feet, the other to about 800 feet.

The only island of the Cook Group which we examined was Aitutaki;
as Atiu is composed of elevated limestone, and Rarotonga is volcanic, I
hoped we might find that atoll to be in part volcanic and in part composed
of elevated coralliferous limestone; we found it to be volcanic, an island
with the structure of Bora-Bora on a smaller scale.

We anchored at Niue, an island composed of elevated coralliferous lime-
stone showing three well-marked terraces, the lowest of not more than five
to ten feet, and in many places disappearing completely, the limestone cliffs
rising vertically from the sea well into the second or even the third ter-
races. The vertical faces of the cliffs are dotted with caverns and deeply
indented by small cajions extending at right angles to the face of the
shore or forming blunt headlands separating short reaches of coral-sand
beaches.

The second terrace varies in height from fifty to sixty feet, the third
from ninety to 100 feet. The second terrace is deeply undercut, and in
the higher vertical cliffs extending into the third terrace from the sea, the
former positions of the terraces are usually indicated by lines of caverns.
There are corals on the sea slopes of the first terrace, extending down to

ten or twelve fathoms, growing much as they are found at Makatea.

or
°

From Niue we went to the Tongas, which we found a most interesting
group. The elevated Tertiary coralliferous limestones take here their great-
est development, and are on a scale far beyond that of their development in
the Lau Group of the Fijis, or the Paumotus. The first island of the Ton-
gas we visited, Eua, is perhaps the most interesting of the islands composed

of Tertiary elevated coralliferous limestone I have visited. From Dana’s

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 31

account of it,’ evidently given at second-hand, I expected to find an island
somewhat like Viti Levu on a very much smaller scale. But as we
steamed up to it from the east there could be no mistaking the magnificent
face of nearly vertical limestone cliffs forming the whole eastern face of the
island, and at points rising to over a thousand feet in height. At all pro-
jecting points lines of terraces were plainly marked: at the northern point
three could be followed, and at the southern extremity five, with traces of
a sixth perhaps.

Upon rounding the southern extremity of the island we could see that
the island was composed of two ridges, running north, separated by a deep
valley, the western ridge being much lower than the eastern, only rising
to a height a little over 500 feet. The western ridge is also composed of
limestone, and at the headlands we could trace three terraces. There is a
narrow shore platform along the western face, at many points of which
there are blow-holes where the sea throws up spray to a considerable
height, but these blow-holes are best seen off Cook Point, the southern
extremity of Tongatabu.

As we steamed along the western face of Eua Island we could see
the higher ridges of the eastern side rising above the lower crest of the
western ridge, the slopes indicating a valley of considerable size running
between them. We anchored at English Roads opposite the outlet of
the drainage of the interior basin, where a small river has cut its way
through a depression in the shore terrace. On landing we followed
the crest of the western ridge for a few nailes and could see the whole
valley forming the basin of the island lying between the two ridges, at
our feet; the slopes leading to the bottom are quite gentle, and the
valley dips very gradually northward back of the outlet on the western
shore. Nothing could show more clearly that such an island was not an
elevated atoll, but a plateau which has been eroded and denuded for a
long period of time by atmospheric and other agencies, and in which
a deep basin-shaped valley with gentle slopes has been gouged out,—a
plateau originally similar to that of Tongatébu Island and of Vavau,
but of greater height and less extent.

1 Corals and Coral Islands, 3d ed., p. 373.
2 The western slope of the eastern ridge is partly volcanic.

32 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

To the westward of the Tonga Islands a line of volcanic islands
extends nearly 200 miles, from Honga Hapai to Fanua lai, some of
which have been active very recently. Falcon Island disappeared in
1898, and Letté is still active. This line of voleanoes runs at a distance
of from fifteen to twenty miles parallel with the trend of the four —
irregularly shaped plateaux upon which rise the Tonga Islands. They
are the summits of a great ridge, over 200 miles in length, sloping very —
gradually to the westward into deep water, and being somewhat steeper
to the eastward, towards the smaller platforms. from which rise the
voleanic peaks of the group. The plateaux of Tongatébu, Nomuka,
Haapai, and Vavau, are separated by deep valleys connecting the eastern
and western flanks of the ridge. These four plateaux rise abruptly from
the 100-fathom line. The extremity of the southern one is occupied by
Tongataébu Island. The land behind the cliffs of its southern coast
rises to a height of over 250 feet, and slopes northward very gradually
to form the low land which occupies the northern coast of the island,
and is, except at Mount Zion and Cook Hill, not more than from five
to twenty feet above the level of the sea. At Cook Point and along
the southern coast three terraces are indicated. The northern coast is
deeply indented by shallow bays, full of islands, reef flats, and reef
patches, on which corals grow in great profusion. For a distance of
nearly ten miles northward of Nukualofa the plateau is nowhere more
than fifteen fathoms deep; and a long tongue runs northward, gradually
deepening into twenty to fifty fathoms to the 100-fathom line.

The Tongatabu plateau is separated from the Nomuka Group plateau
by a funnel-shaped channel with a depth passing rapidly into 300
fathoms from the 100-fathom line. The Nomuka plateau is rectangular.
The principal island is Nomuka, where we anchored. We found the
island to be composed of Tertiary elevated coralliferous limestone, with
a shallow sink, filled with brackish water, occupying the southeastern
part of the island, The sink is separated by a high sand-beach, about
200 yards wide, from the sea.

Nomuka Iki, the island next to Nomuka, we found to consist, at its

southern extremity, of stratified voleanic material, resembling somewhat

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 33

the so-called soapstone of Fiji. I was informed that other islands in
this group, near Tonumeia, in the centre of the Nomuka plateau, were
-voleanic. Mango, as we could see it from our anchorage, appeared to
be volcanic. So that this part of the Tongas is, like the Lau Group
in Fiji, made up of islands in part volcanic and in part composed of
elevated coralliferous limestone. The eastern edge of the Nomuka
plateau (which we did not visit) is edged with small low islands. We
merely steamed by the western islands of the Haapai Group, but close
enough to see that Tongua, Kotu, and Fotuhaa, which vary in height
from 120 to 200 feet, are composed of elevated limestone. The eastern
flank of the Haapai plateau is edged with long, low islands, with exten-
sive coral reefs along the reef flats of these islands.

The Haapai plateau is triangular, with isolated islands rising on the
northwestern side from the deep water separating it from the Vavau
plateau. It is separated from the Nomuka plateau by a narrow channel
with over 300 fathoms of water.

The northernmost plateau of the broad ridge of the Tonga Islands is
the Vavau plateau. This is elliptical, with a long tongue extending on
the eastern face of the ridge toward the northern point of the Haapai
plateau, ending in isolated banks (the Disney reef and Falcon bank),
lying to the northward of the broad channel, with over 400 fathoms
separating it from the Haapai Group. The Vavau Group is by far the
most picturesque of the Tonga Islands. It consists of the principal
island of Vavau, extending across the northern part of the Vavau
plateau. Several parts of the island of Vavau, as at the southwestern
extremity, at the entrance to the harbor of Neiafu, and at Neiafu, are
finely terraced ; four terraces are indicated there, and other flat-topped
smaller islands show traces of two or three terraces. The northern edge
of Vavau Island rises to a height of more than 500 feet, and slopes in
a general way southward and inland. The southern shore is deeply
indented by bays and sounds, and flanked by innumerable islands and
islets, some of considerable height (150 to 250 feet) which gradually
become smaller and smaller as they rise toward the southward and east-

ward, these islands having been formed from the denudation and erosion

2
oO

PF e">

34 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

of the greater Vavau. They form tongues of land and sea and sounds
of all shapes and sizes, showing the traces of the former land connec-
tions of the islands and islets, and their disintegration on the eastward
and southward by the action of the sea. The islands and islets to the
southward of the main island rise from more or less extensive reef flats
which stud the whole plateau, and on which corals grow in great profusion
(mainly Millepora, Porites, Pavonia, Pocillopora, Fungia, and Astrea), to
a depth of five to six fathoms in the sounds. In the Nomuka Group
they extended in the more open waters to fourteen and sixteen fathoms.

It is evident that in the Tonga Group, which is a very extensive area
of elevation, the recent corals have played no part in the formation of
the masses of land and of the plateau of the Tonga Ridge, and that
here again, as in the Society Islands and the Cook Islands, both also in
areas of elevation, they are a mere thin living shell or crust growing
at their characteristic depths upon platforms which in the one case are
voleanic, in the other calcareous, the formation of which has been

independent of their growth.

After coaling and refitting we left Suva’ on the 19th of December, and
arrived at Funafuti on the 23d, stopping on the way at Nurakita, the
southernmost of the Ellice Islands. I was, of course, greatly interested
in my visit at Funafuti, where a boring had been made under the direc-
tion of a committee of the Royal Society, in charge of Professor David, of
Sydney, after the first attempt under Professor Sollas had failed. The
second boring reached a depth of more than 1100 feet. This is not
the place to discuss the bearing of the work done at Funafuti, as beyond
the fact of the depth reached we have as yet no final statement by the
committee of the interpretation put upon the detailed examination of
the core obtained, and now in the hands of Professor Judd and his assis-
tants. In addition to the above-named islands, we also examined Nuku-

fetau, another of the Ellice Group.

1 Explorations of the ‘« Albatross” in the Pacific. IV. [Letter No. 4, on the Cruise of the ‘* Alba-
tross,’? dated Yokohama, Japan, March 5, 1900, to Hon. George M. Bowers, U. S. Commissioner of
Fish and Fisheries, Washington, D. C., by Alexander Agassiz.] Am. Jour. Sci., Fourth Series,
Vol. IX., No. 53, May, 1900.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 35

After leaving Nukufetau we encountered nothing but bad weather,
which put a stop to all our work until we arrived under the lee of Arorai,
the southernmost of the Gilbert Islands. On our way from Taputeuea we
steamed to Apamama and Maiana, which we examined, as well as Tarawa.
We next examined Maraki, an atoll which is nearly closed with high
beaches, having only two small boat passages leading through the narrow
outer land-rims. Both Maraki and Taritari, the last island of the Gilberts
which we visited, are remarkable for the development of an inner row of
islands and sand-bars in certain parts of the lagoon parallel to the outer
land-rim, a feature which also exists in many of the Marshall Islands
atolls.

We reached Jaluit the 9th of January, and after a few days spent
in coaling, we passed about three weeks in exploring the Marshall Islands,
taking in turn the atolls of the Ralick Chain to the north of Jaluit: Ail-
inglab Lab, Namu, Kwajalong, and Rongelab, and then some of the atolls of
the Ratack Chain, Likieb, Wotje, and Arhno. The atolls of the Marshall
Group are noted for their great size and the comparatively small area of
the outer land-rims, the land-rims of some of the atolls being reduced to
a few insignificant islands and islets. In none of the atolls of the Ellice,
Gilbert, or Marshall Islands were we able to observe the character of the
underlying base which forms the foundations of the land areas of these
groups. In this respect these groups are in striking contrast to the Pau-
motus, the Society Islands, the Cook Group, Niue, the Tongas, and the
Fiji Islands, where the character of the underlying foundations of the
land-rims is readily ascertained. But, on the other hand, these groups
give us the means of studying the mode of formation of the land-rims
in a most satisfactory manner, and nowhere have we been able to study
as clearly the results of the various agencies at work in shaping the end-
less variations produced in the islands and islets of the land-rims of the
different atolls by the incessant handling and rehandling of the material
in place, or of the fresh material added from the disintegration of the
sea or lagoon faces of the outer land-rim, or of the corals on the outer
and inner slopes. It has been very interesting to trace the ever-changing

conditions which have resulted in producing so many variations in the

36 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

appearance and structure of the islands and islets of the land-rims of
the different groups.

The boring at Funafuti will show us the character and age of the rocks
underlying the mass of recent material of which the land-rim, not only
of that atoll, but probably also that of the other atolls of the group and
of neighboring groups, is composed, though of course we can only judge
by analogy of the probability of the character of the underlying base from
that of the nearest islands of which it has been ascertained. When we
come to a group like the Marshalls we have as our guide only the char-
acter of the base rock of the islands of the Carolines, which is volcanic,
while Nauru’ and Paanopa Islands, to the west of the Gilberts and to the
southwest of the Marshalls, indicate a base of ancient Tertiary limestone. —

The vegetation of the atolls of the Ellice, Gilbert, and Marshalls is more
luxuriant than that of the Paumotus, probably from the greater rainfall,
though the number of species of plants so characteristic of the western
atolls is not much greater. It is only in the larger western volcanic
islands — the Fiji, Samoan, and Caroline group — that we note the marked
increase in the number of species of forest trees allied to those occurring
still further west, over those on the eastern groups, like the Cook and
Society Islands.

Owing to the continued stormy weather and the probability of not being
able to land at Nauru and Paanopa while the unfavorable conditions lasted,
we did not attempt to visit them.

After leaving Suva we made a number of soundings from south of
Nurakita toward the Marshall Group, which, in addition to those of the
“Penguin,” clearly show that the Ellice Islands are isolated peaks rising
from considerable depths (from 1500 to over 2000 fathoms) and that the
same is the case with the Gilbert Islands. We made about thirty soundings
between the atolls of the Marshalls, which appear to show that they also
rise as independent peaks or ridges, with steep slopes, from 2000 to 2500
fathoms, and that the so-called parallel chains of atolls of the Marshalls, —
the Ralick and Ratack, are really only the summits of isolated peaks
rising but a few feet above the sea-level. The Marshall Islands, as well

1 Nauru von Dr. Augustin Kriimer. Globus, Vol. LXXIV., No, 10, September, 1898,

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 37

as the Ellice and Gilbert, seem to be somewhat higher than the Paumotus,
but this difference is only apparent, and is due to the difference in the
height of the tides, which is very small in the Paumotus, while in the
former groups it may be five, and even six feet.

From Jaluit we visited among the Carolines, the islands and atolls of
Kusaie, Pingelap, Ponapi, Andema, Losap, Nama, the Royalist Group,
Truk, and Namonuito, obtaining thus an excellent idea of the character
of the high volcanic islands of the group from our examinations of Kusaie
and of Ponapi, while the others represent the conditions of the low atolls,
having probably a volcanic basis, but this was not observed at any of
those we examined.

The reefs of the volcanic islands of the Carolines are similar in char-
acter to those of the Society Islands, though there are some features,
such as the great width of the platforms of submarine erosion of Ponapi
and of Kusaie, and the development of a border of mangrove islands at
the base of the volcanic islands, which are not found in the Society Islands.

The Truk Archipelago was perbaps the most interesting of the island
groups of the Carolines, and it is the only group of volcanic islands sur-
rounded by an encircling reef which I have thus far seen in the Pacific
which at first glance lends any support to the theory of the formation of
such island-groups as Truk by subsidence. This group was not visited
by either Darwin or Dana; and I can well imagine that an investigator
seeing this group among the first coral reefs would readily describe the
islands as the summits, nearly denuded, of a great island which had
gradually sunk. But a closer examination will readily show, I think,
that this group is not an exception to the general rule thus far obtaining
in all the island groups of the Pacific I have visited during this trip ;
that we must look to submarine erosion and to a multitude of local
mechanical causes for our explanation of the formation of atolls and of
barrier and encircling reefs, and that, on the contrary, subsidence has
played no part in bringing about existing conditions of the atolls of the
South and Central Pacific.

Nowhere have we seen better exemplified than at Truk how important
a part is played by the existence of a submarine platform in the growth

38 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

of coral reefs. The encircling reef protects the many islands of the
group against a too rapid erosion, so that they are edged by narrow
fringing reefs, and nowhere do we find the wide platform so essential to
the formation of barrier reefs. The effect of the northeast trades blowing
so constantly in one direction for the greater part of the year is of course
very great; the disintegration and erosion of islands within its influence
is incessant, and their action undoubtedly one of the essential factors in
shaping the atolls of the different groups, not only according to the local
position of the individual islands, but also according to the geographical
position of the groups. Thus far I do not think any observer has given
sufficient weight to the importance of the action of the trades in modify-
ing the islands within the limits of the trades; nor has it been noticed
that the coral reefs are all situated practically within the limits of the
trades, both north and south of the equator. It is interesting to note
that there are no coral reefs in two extensive island groups of the
Pacific, the Marquesas and the Galapagos, both within the tropics in the
same latitudes where far to the westward the Gilbert and other Line
islands, as well as the Ellice and Solomon Islands, are noted for the abun-
dance of corals and the great development of coral reefs. At the Galapagos
and Marquesas, corals exist only in patches, forming short stretches of
fringing reefs, and it is difficult to account for the absence of coral reefs
in these groups except on the supposition that the shores are usually too
steep, that no great platforms of submarine erosion flank the islands, and
finally that the shore cliffs and slopes are readily disintegrated by the
action of the sea and afford no permanent foothold to growing corals.
The soundings made going west from Jaluit to Namonuito indicate
that there is no great plateau from which the Carolines rise, but that the
various groups are, as is the case with the neighboring groups of the
Marshalls and Gilberts, isolated peaks with steep slopes rising from a
depth of over 2000 fathoms. The line we ran from the northern end of
Namonuito to Guam developed the eastern extension of a deep trough
running south of the Ladrones. The existence of this trough had been
indicated by a sounding of 4475 fathoms to the southwest of Guam
made by the “Challenger.” We obtained, about 100 miles southeast of

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 39

Guam, a depth of 4813 fathoms, a depth surpassed only, if I am not in
error, by three soundings made by the “Penguin” in the deep trough
extending from Tonga to the Kermadees, and by two still deeper made
by the U.S. S. “Nero”! to the eastward of Guam, probably in con-
tinuation of the same “Deep” called the “Caroline Deep” by Professor
Supan.?

I was very much surprised, in approaching Guam from the eastward,
to find that the island was not wholly voleanic, but that the northern
half consists of elevated coralliferous limestone. The vertical cliffs bor-
dering the eastern face rise to a height of 100 to 250 or 300 feet at the
northern extremity, and resemble in every way those of similar limestone
islands, such as Makatea, Niue, Hua, Vavau, and others in the Fyis, which
had made their cliffs a familiar feature in our explorations. In fact, out-
side of Viti Levu and Vanua Levu, this is the largest island known to
me where we find a combination of volcanic rocks and of elevated coral-
liferous limestone. The massif forming the southern half of the island is
voleanic, and the highest ridge, rising to about 1000 feet, runs parallel
to the west coast, the longest slope being toward the east.

This voleanic mass has burst through the limestone near Agafia, and
the outer western extension of the coralliferous limestone exists only in
the shape of a few spurs running out from the volcanic mass, the largest
of which are those forming the port of San Luis d’Apra. These spurs
are separated by lower ridges of voleanic rocks extending to the sea from
the main central mass. To the north of Agaiia the limestone forms an
immense irregular mesa, cut by deep crevasses, full of pot-holes and
sinks, rising gradually northward to a height of 350 or 400 feet. Near
the northern extremity of the island a voleanic mass, Mt. Santa Rosa,
has burst through the limestone and rises about 150 feet above the
general level of that part of the island. The shore stratification of the
bluffs is much distorted in the vicinity of that volcanic outburst.

The formation of huge masses of limestone in which occur at intervals

1 The deep soundings of the “Nero” have been marked “ Nero Deep ” in H. O. Chart No. 529,
published June, 1900, but it does not give the deep sounding of the “Challenger” to the westward

(4475 fathoms), which was the first indication of the probable existence of a deep trough south of Guam.
2 Petermann’s Mitteil., 1899, Vol. 45, VIII., p. 180.

40) EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

layers of corals or of reef-building corals must have taken place in areas
of subsidence, — the subsidence taking place at a comparatively slow rate
while the coralliferous belts were deposited, and at a more rapid rate at
a greater depth than that at which corals could grow while the non-coral-
liferous limestones were laid down. ‘This process has nothing in common
with the formation of atolls. But when these coralliferous masses of lime-
stone of great thickness were elevated either suddenly or intermittently
to heights of more than 1000 feet, the resulting islands in the former case
must have represented either a bed deposited near the surface —if coral

liferous

enclosing perhaps a lagoon, or a sound, or a basin of solution
and erosion, formed in comparatively modern times, with recent corals
forming a capping of moderate thickness. In the second case, during each
stage of rest the elevated beds were subject to denudation and erosion
by the action of the sea. If each stage was an elevation of more than
the depth at which corals can grow, the denudation and erosion may
have continued long enough to cut the elevated limestone down to, or
nearly down to the terrace which marks the uprising of the mass. Or
the denudation and erosion may merely have gone far enough to open the
circumscribed area to the action of the sea at some points only, and
thus to connect what was the lagoon or basin at the first sea-level with
the lagoon or basin or sound of the second stage of rest.

One can readily see how complicated the resultant action may become
when we take into account the varying height of the different stages of
elevation, the condition of the limestone mass and of the coralliferous lime-
stones after the elevation, and the action of denudation and of erosion upon
the elevated mass, as well as the solvent action taking place on the summit
and sides, and finally the eroding action of the sea upon the interior basin,
should it once break through the outer rim of the elevated basin, when its
lowest point has reached the level of the sea. This break would thus form
an entrance to the lagoon, much as is formed the entrance to any lagoon
or sound. Should this mass be elevated a second, a third, or a fourth time,
we may find one, or two, or more entrances to the old lagoons and sounds
according to the rate of denudation and of erosion of the elevated mass

during the periods of rest.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 4]

The coralliferous limestone rings would be fairly continuous in case of
a slow rate of denudation and erosion; if broken through by the action
of the sea and with a rapid rate of denudation, only disconnected patches,
more or less numerous, according to the rate of erosion, would indicate the
former ring; and finally, with a very rapid denudation and erosion, both of
the exterior face and interior of the lagoon, or sound, nothing would be
left of the elevated mass except the submerged reef-ring. This becomes
still more complicated when the limestone mass, while elevated, has been
broken through by the underlying volcanic rocks, and when they have dis-
placed portions of the coralliferous limestone beds and left them more acces-
sible to the effects of denudation and of erosion, especially when this action
has taken place on the outer face of the elevated mass, and left broken
cuts and openings forming connections between the outer sea and the inte-
rior basins, which would thus soon be transformed into great sounds or
lagoons. The erosive as well as the solvent action of the sea would soon
level the outer rim to the plane of the sea level, the further disintegra-
tion being stopped by the growth of recent corals or of coralline alge
upon the surface of the coralliferous or massive limestone eroded to the
level of the sea or below it. With the more rapid erosion and denudation,
both atmospheric and marine, of the limestones, they would rapidly dis-
appear, and there would be left only the volcanic mass which had uplifted
the limestones, with here and there a remnant of them to indicate the
probable course of events. Of course, when the volcanic masses come up
without elevating any limestone beds the conditions are much simpler,
and it becomes only a question of the mode of formation of the recent
corals around the base of the elevated volcanic mass.

The want of continuity of the atolls of the eastern Paumotus of -the
Ellice, Gilbert, and Marshall Islands, their separation by considerable dis-
tances and great depths, would seem to preclude the idea of the forma-
tion of the Tertiary limestones over great areas. The existence of these
limestones on disconnected and isolated islands would suggest the forma-
tion of the limestones upon mounds or ridges elevated to very different
heights below the surface of the ocean, — these mounds and ridges con-

sisting of volcanic or other rocks elevated by the volcanic agencies which

42 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

we know to have been active over very extensive areas of the Pacific
from Tertiary times to the present day. Yet in some of the Pactfie archi-
pelagos the areas upon which the Tertiary limestones were deposited must
have been of considerable extent, as for instance the plateau of the north-
western Paumotus, the plateau of the Tonga Islands, and the plateau
upon which the eastern islands of the Fiji Archipelago rise: the so-called
Lau or Windward group of Fiji. Conditions similar to those under which
the central Pacific Tertiary limestones were deposited must have been of
wide geographical range; they appear, in addition, in the Philippines,
in the Loyalty, the New Hebrides, and Solomon Islands, in New Caledonia,
in the China Sea, at Christmas Island, in the Indian Ocean, in the Red Sea,
and in the West Indian area. .

We left Guam in time to reach Rota by day, and found that this island
also is a mass of elevated coralliferous limestone, the highest cliffs of which
reach a height of 800 feet. Perhaps in none of the elevated islands have
we been able to observe the terraces of submarine elevation as well as at
Rota, especially in the small knob at the southwest point of the peninsula
separating Sosanlagh and Sosanjaya bays, which itself is also terraced ; no
less than seven distinct terraces could be traced. There was no sign of
any volcanic outburst except at the northwest point of the island, where
both the character of the slope and of the vegetation would seem to
indicate a volcanic structure.

It is quite probable that others of the Ladrones, like Saipan and the
islands to the south, are composed in part at least of elevated limestone,
judging from the hydrographic charts and the sketches which accompany
them.! On many of the northern Ladrones there are active volcanoes, so
that it is very possible that the volcanic outbursts which have pushed
through the limestones, or have elevated parts of the islands of the group,
are of comparatively recent date.

During the last part of our cruise, from Suva to Guam, the unfavorable
weather greatly interfered with our deep-sea and pelagic work; in fact,
with the exception of the soundings made to develop as far as practicable
the depths in the regions of the various coral-reef groups we visited, we

1 H. O. Chart No. 1748.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 43

abandoned all idea of carrying out the deep-sea and pelagic work planned
for the district between the Gilbert and Marshall and Caroline groups. To
our great disappointment hardly any marine work could be accomplished,
and our investigations were limited almost entirely to the study of the coral
reefs of the regions passed through.

After Mr. Townsend’s departure, Dr. Moore continued to collect the
birds of the islands where we anchored, and they have brought together a
fairly typical collection of the avifauna of the South Sea Islands. Dr. Pryor
collected the characteristic plants, and Dr. Mayer the insects and reptiles,
in addition to such pelagic work as could be done in port. My_ private
assistants, Dr. W. McM. Woodworth and Dr. A. G. Mayer, as well as my son
Maximilian, took a large number of photographs, and we must have at least
900 views illustrating the coral reefs of the Pacific. Dr. Woodworth also
collected incidentally such ethnological material as could readily be ob-
tained during our short stay at different places.

We were everywhere received with the greatest cordiality and cour-
tesy: by the Governor of the Paumotus, the King of Tonga, Sir George
O’Brien (the High Commissioner of the Western Pacific at Suva), Mr. E.
Brandeis (the Landes-Hauptmann in charge of the Marshall Islands at
Jaluit), the Governor of the Carolines, and the Japanese authorities. The
State Department at Washington having kindly asked through the French,
English, German, and Japanese Embassies at Washington for the kind
offices of the representatives of these nations in Oceania to the “Albatross”
while in their respective precincts, thanks to these credentials nothing
could exceed the interest shown everywhere in the success of our
expedition.

I must also thank Captain Moser and the officers of the “Albatross” for
the untiring interest shown by them during the whole time of our expedi-
tion in the work of the ship, which was so foreign to the usual duties of a

naval officer.

44

EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

LIST OF THE OFFICERS OF THE UNITED STATES FISH COMMISSION

STEAMER “ ALBATROSS.”

Commander Jerrerson F, Moser, U.S. N., Commanding.
Lieutenant Huan Ropman, U. 5. N., Haxecutive Officer and Navigator.
Ensign B. K. McMornis, U.S. N., Chief Engineer.
“« <A. J. Hersurn, U.S. N.
“ Cyrus R. Miner, U.S. N.
“ C.S. Kemerr, U.S. N.
Assistant Surgeon, J. C. Pryor, U. 8. N.
Assistant Pay Master, Grey Skipwith, U.S. N.
Harry Cuirrorp Fassett, U.S. F. C., Captain’s Clerk.

ScreNTIFIC STAFF.

Cnaries H. Townsenn, Assistant, U.S. F.C.
Dr. H. F. Moornr, Resident Naturalist, U.S. F.C.
A. B. ALEXANDER, Fishery Expert, U.S. F.C.

NOON POSITIONS OF THE UNITED STATES FISH COMMISSION STEAMER
“ ALBATROSS” DURING HER CRUISE IN THE
TROPICAL PACIFIC,

Avaust, 1899-Marcn, 1900.

SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, TO NUKUHIVA, MARQUESAS. ISLANDS.

% Distance in
1899, Time. Miles Position.
Noon to Noon.

Aug. 23 6 06 P.M. Left San Francisco, California.
; 24 Noon. 132 D5 eI SON. 193° " 99! We
25 Noon. 183 322) 577 124° 98’
26 Noon. 154 ose 30r 125° 16’
Q7 Noon. 158 98° 30! Oe LOM
28 Noon. 144 96° 37’ 128° 40°
29 Noon. 156 94° 33! 130° 24!
30 Noon. 166 Oo meliys 1392" 30
31 Noon. 149 S07" 19f lbp ie yy
Sept. 1 Noon. 147 18° 16’ 135° 05!
2 Noon. 120 16° 40/ 136° 14
3 Noon. 129 14° 34’ 1362 4d!
4 Noon. 158 5 9s 137° 19°
5 Noon. 147 go 57! 137° 47’
6 Noon. 105 8° 08’ Gy Ren oye
7 Noon. 115 62 30! ISTE O00!
8 Noon. 123 4° Qa! 136° 55!
9 Noon. 120 oN OT 137° 29!
10 Noon. 112 1° 00’ 138° 00’
11 Noon. 145 NO OY EISy 138° ‘Ol!
12 Noon. 157 4° 03! 138° 30’
13 Noon. 155 62 35! 138° <59!
14 Noon. 145 S239! 139° 42’
15 9.30 a.M. 48 Arrived at Tai-o-haé, Nukuhiva Island, Marquesas Group.

MARQUESAS ISLANDS TO TAHITI, SOCIETY ISLANDS, VIA NORTHWESTERN

PAUMOTUS.
12.30 p.m. Left Tai-o-haé, Nukuhiva Island, Marquesas Group.
18 Noon. 152 10° 33'S. 142° 02’ W.
IBY Noon. 168 12° - 15? 144° 15’
20 Noon. 135 138° 50’ 145° 53"
21 10.05 a.m. 141 Arrived at Avatoru Pass, Rangiroa Island, Paumotu
Group.
24 6.40 aM. Left Avatoru Pass, Rangiroa Island, Paumotu Group.
10.00 a.m —3.41 P.M. Coasting off Rangiroa Island.
Noon. 15° 00'S. 148° 02! W.

46 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.
Date. 5 Distance in aa
1899. Time. eee Position.
Sept. 25 8.00-9.48 a.m. Coasting off Tikehau Island.
Noon. 102 LSS OWIS: 148° 29’ 30” W. \
2.30-6.00 P.M. Coasting off Matahiva Island.
26 11.28 a.m. 104 Arrived at Makatea Island.
6.00 P.M. Left Makatea Island.
27 Noon. 132 17° 23'S. 149° 24’ W.
3.45 P.M. 8 Arrived at Papeete, Tahiti.
THROUGH THE PAUMOTU ARCHIPELAGO.
Oct. 5 6.00 a.m. Left Papeete, Tahiti.
Noon. 17 We” TeV St 149° 31’ W.
1.30-2.30 p.m. Coasting off Tetiaroa Island.
6 7.45 aM. 122 Arrived at Makatea Island.
3.07 P.M. Left Makatea Island.
7 8.37 A.M. 122 Arrived at Niau Island.
Noon. Left Niau Island.
5.20 P.M. Arrived Pakaka Pass, Apataki Island.
8 9.45 a.m. Left Pakaka Pass, Apataki Island.
Noon. 59 NGO BES 146° 25’ W.
9 Noon. 109 TER ik! 144° 40°
12.55 P.M. Arrived at Tikei Island.
11.15 p.m. Left Tikei Island.
10 | 8.30 until 10.45 a.m. Coasting off Kauehi Island.
Noon. 106 16° 00'S. 145° 19’ W.
3.30 P.M. 30 Arrived at Rotoava, Fakarava Island.
14 7.00 a.m. Left Rotoava, Fakarava Island.
Noon. 22 16° 09'S. 145° 49’ W.
15 9.00 a.m. until Coasting off Anaa Island.
Noon. 109
15 7.40 p.m. until Lying to and coasting off Tahanea Island.
16 11.05 p.m.
Noon. 101 16° 47'S. 144° 40’ W.
3.40-4.05 P.M. Coasting off Tuanaka Island.
17 Noon. 151 159° 5678: 142° 30’ W.
1.00-2.00 p.m. Coasting off Raroia Island.
17 2.50 p.m. until Lying to and coasting off Takume Island.
18 5.30 A.M. |
§.00-11.35 a.m. Coasting off Raroia Island. f
Noon. 85 UG TWAS 142° 37’ W. |
18 4.30 p.m. until Lying to and coasting off Taenga Island (Hepuhepuarua |
19 2.30 A.M. Anchorage). |
11.50 a.m. 98 Arrived at Makemo Lagoon.
25 4.35 P.M. Left Makemo Lagoon.
26 8.07-9.40 a.m. Coasting off Tekokoto Island.
Noon. 92 17° 33'S. 142° 41’ W.
1.20 p.m. Arrived at Hikueru Island.
27 Noon. 16 Off Hikueru Island.
6.18 pM. Left Hikueru Atoll.
28 5.55 a.m. until Lying to and coasting off Marokau Island.
5.20 P.M.
Noon. 51 Off West coast Marokau Island.
29 6.19 a.m. until Lying to and coasting off Hao Island.
6.15 P.M.
Noon. 89 Off West coast Hao Island.

Date.
1899.
Oct. 30
31
Nov. 1
Q
3
4
5
5
6

Nov.

Time.

10.30 a.m. until
8.10 P.M.
Noon.
7.28 a.m. until
12.05 P.M.
Noon.
1.40 p.m. until
5.35 P.M.
Noon.
10.23 am. until
11.30 a.m.
Noon.
2.10-3.30 P.M.
6.12-6.50 P.M.
9.30 a.m. until
1.50 p.m.
Noon.
Noon.
8.30 a.m. until
12.20 p.m.
Noon.
11.50 a.m.

SOCIETY ISLANDS TO TONGATABU, TONGA ARCHIPELAGO, VIA LEEWARD,
SOCIETY,

10.40 a.m.
Noon.
9.30-8.51 P.M.

§.00-10.00 a.m.

Noon.
6.10 p.m.
6.15 a.m.

11.40 a.m.
7.10 a.m.
9.30-10.20 a.m.
Noon.
2.30-3.00 p.m.
Noon.
Noon.
11.20 a.m.
5.47 P.M.

Noon.

Noon.

Noon.

10.15 a.m.
6.20 P.M.
Noon.
Noon.

7.10-11.15 a.m.

11.15 a.m.
6.20 A.M.
9.23 a.M.

PRELIMINARY REPORT.

Distance in

Miles

Noon to Noon,

113

64

131

160

131

105

108
126

47

Position.

Lying to and coasting off Akiaki Island.

Off West coast Akiaki Island.
Lying to and coasting off Nukutavake Island.

S. W. point Nukutavake Island.
Lying to and coasting off Pinaki Island.

19° 50'30’S. 140° 33) W.
Coasting off Nukutipipi Island.

20° «49'S. 143° 03’ W
Coasting off Anu-Anurunga Island.
Coasting off Anu- Anuraro. Island.
Lying to and coasting off Hereheretue Toland)

Off West coast Hereheretue Tsland.
gee oD LIS. 146° 32! W.
Lying to aad coasting off Mehetia Island.

Off N. W. coast Mehetia Island.
Arrived at Papeete, Tahiti.

AND COOK GROUPS, AND NIUE ISLAND.

Left Papeete, Tahiti.

Wc 98S; 149° 43° W.
Lying to and coasting off Murea Island.
Coasting off Huz theine Island.

16° 38'S 512 18! We
Arrived at Hurepiti, Bay, Tahaa Island.
Left Hurepiti Bay, Tahaa Island.
Arrived at Bora Bora Island.

Left Bora Bora Island.
Coasting off Motu Iti.

16° 22'S 152° 03’ W.
Coasting off M: aupit Island.

ices) 154° 21’ W.

17° 48’ 157° 00’

Arrived off North coast Aitutaki Island.
Left Aitutaki Island.

18° 54'S. 162° 26’ W.
19° 0’ 165° 00’
19° 04’ 167° 41’

Arrived off Alofi Village, Niue Island.
Left Alofi Village, Niue Island.
20° 10'S 171° +54’ W.
21° 18’ 173° 34’
Coasting off Eua Island.
Arrived English Roads (Ohonua village), Eua Island.
Left English Roads (Ohonua village), Eua Island.

Arrived Nukualofa, Tongatabu Island, Tonga Islands.

48

EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

THROUGH TONGA ARCHIPELAGO, AND TO SUVA, FIJI ARCHIPELAGO.

Date. 3 Distance in
Heh ae Noon TANGA
Dee. 1 7-00 a.m.
Noon. 34
5.15 P.M. 28
3 12.30 p.m.
4 9.10 a.m. 119
5 4.15 P.M.
6 Noon. 152
7 Noon. 140
2.20 p.m.
8 Dropped.
9 7.25 A.M.
Noon. 42
10 7-25 A.M. 147

wor

9.15 a.m.
Noon.
Noon.
Noon.
Noon.
Noon.

2.20 p.m.

6.20 a.M.
Noon.

2.45-4.45 P.M.
Noon.
12.30 P.M.
Noon.
Noon.

7.00 P.M.
Noon.

3.30-7.00 Pm.
11.20 a.m. until

2.50 P.M.

Noon.

Noon.

12.20-10.00 p.m.

11.20 a.m. until
Noon.
Noon.

5.00 p.m. until

9.45 a.M.
Noon.
1.00-5.00 P.M.
6.15 p.m. until
8.00 a.m.
Noon.
1.00-8.00 p.m.

Position,

Left Nukualofa, Tongatabu Island, Tonga Islands.
DIC omNs YB UE Ni
Arrived at Nomuka Island.
Left Nomuka Island.
Arrived at Neiafu, Vavau Group, Tonga Islands.
Left Neiafu, Vavau Group, Tonga Islands.
18° 43/8. 176° + 31' W.
18° 56’ 178° 49’
Arrived at Kambara Island, Fiji.
Left Kambara Island, Fiji.
18° 58/8: 179° 31’ W.
Arrived at Suva, Fiji.

FIJI ISLANDS, THROUGH ELLICE AND GILBERT CHAINS, TO JALUIT,

MARSHALL ARCHIPELAGO.

40

55

Left Suva, Fiji.

18° 10'S. 178° 49! Hi.
ge Wa? 179° 08’ W.
13° 00’ 179° 49/

Off Nurakita Island, Ellice Group.

Off North coast Funafuti Island, Ellice Group.
Arrived at Fongafale, Funafuti Island.

Left Fongafale, Funafuti Island.

8° 09'S. 178° 42! K.
Coasting off Nukufetau Island.

GumlORS: 177° 20’ E.
Ran past Niutao Island.

4°) 59'S. 176° 54’ E.

South shore of Arorai Island, Gilbert Group.
Left Arorai Island.

1° 43'S. 175° 48! E.
Lying to off South coast of Onoatoa Atoll.
Coasting off Taputeuea Atoll.

Off N. E. coast Taputeuea Atoll.

00° 35’ N. 174° 02’ E.
Lying to and coasting off Apamama Atoll.
Coasting off Maiana Atoll.

Off N. E. point Maiana Atoll.
Lying to off South coast Tarawa Atoll.

1 AY /ONE 173° 09’ E.
Coasting along Tarawa Atoll.
Lying to off South coast Apaiang Atoll.
Ice buNe 173° 16° E.
Lying to and coasting off Maraki Atoll.

Time.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 49

Distance in
Miles Position.
Noon to Noon,

Coasting off South coast Taritari Atoll.
111 Off Entrance, West coast Taritari Atoll.
8 Arrived at Butaritari, Taritari Atoll.
Left Butaritari, Taritari Atoll.

31 So0 270 Ne WP “BRIDE

120 4° 34! 171° 55!

124 Off S. E. Coast Jaluit Island, Jaluit Atoll, Marshall
Islands.

8 Arrived at Jaluit, Jaluit Atoll.

Jan. 14
15

16

7
18

19
20

21

22

23
24

28

29

THROUGH MARSHALL ARCHIPELAGO.

10.00 a.m.
Noon.
9.00 a.m. Noon.
Noon.
5.20-6.00 P.M.
8.00 a.m. until
8.00 P.M.
Noon.
Noon.
4.30 P.M.
10.35 a.m.
Noon.
Noon.
8.10 a.m. until
1.00 p.m.
Noon.
1.47 p.m.
9.00 a.m.
Noon.
6.04 P.M.
8.15 a.m.
Noon.
140 p.m.
8.00 a.m.
Noon.
Noon.
Noon-1.45 P.M.
3.15 P.M.
8.30 AM.
10.00 a.m. until
2.40 P.M.
Noon.
Noon.
1.27 P.M.

Left Jaluit, Jaluit Island.
24 Off Pingelap Island, Jaluit Atoll.
Coasting off Elmore Atoll.
113 Off Wotje Island, Elmore Atoll.
Coasting off Namu Atoll.
Coasting off Kwajalong Atoll.

132 Off Legan Island, Kwajalong Atoll.
153 NOS 520 IN: 1662" bo! sK:
Arrived at Rongelappelap Island, Rongelab Atoll.
Left Rongelappelap Island.
32 Off South Pass, Rongelab Atoll.
105 10° 12’ N. 168° ll’ E.
Coasting off Likieb Atoll.

80 Off S. W. Point Likieb Atoll.
Arrived at Likieb Island, Likieb Atoll.
Left Likieb Island, Likieb Atoll.
33 9° 43’ N. 169° 26’ E.
Arrived Rurick Pass, Wotje Atoll.
Left Rurick Pass, and coasted off Wotje Atoll.
54 Off Schischmarev Island, Wotje Atoll.
Arrived at Wotje Island Anchorage, Wotje Atoll.
Left Wotje Island Anchorage, Wotje Atoll.
26 9? QIN: 170° 13’ E.
147 Off N. W. Point Arhno Atoll.
Coasting off Arhno Atoll.
19 Arrived at Arhno Lagoon.
Left Arhno Lagoon.
Coasting off Arno Atoll.

24 Off N. W. Point Arhno Atoll.
158 Off S. E. Pass, Jaluit Atoll.
8 Arrived at Jaluit, Jaluit Atoll.

MARSHALL ISLANDS, THROUGH CAROLINE ISLANDS TO GUAM, LADRONE

ISLANDS, AND TO YOKOHAMA, JAPAN.

10.25 a.m.
Noon.
Noon.

Left Jaluit, Jaluit Atoll.
15 Off S. W. Pass Jaluit Atoll.
195 5° Q7'N. 166° 30’ E.

50 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Distance in
Miles Position.
Noon to Noon.

Noon. 184 Doweroi le 163° 26’
6.30 Pm. 37

1.25 p.m.
Noon.
1.00-2.00 p.m.
Noon.
3.45 P.M.
12.50.
Noon.
Noon.

6.50 p.m.—Midnight.

Noon.
4.55 P.M.
2.00
9.10 a.m. until
2.25 P.M.
Noon.
Noon.
Noon.
Noon.
1.55 P.M.
8.25 aM.
Noon.
2.30-3.09 P.M.
Noon.
Noon.
Noon.
Noon.
Noon.
Noon.
10.00 a.m.

2
March 1

147

155
25

138
159

110
28

Arrived at Port Lottin, Kusaie Island, Caroline Islands.

Lett Port Lottin, Kusaie Island.

62) 109/Ne 160° 50’ E.
Lying to off Pingelap Islands.

6° 47’ N. 158° 14’ ¥.
Arrived at Kiti Harbor, Ponapi Island.
Left Kiti Harbor, Ponapi Island.

6° 53’ N. 156° 00’ E.

6° 55! 153° 26’
Lying to off Namo Island.

VgenOG@N 151° 46’ KE.
Arrived at Uola Island, Truk Group.
Left Uola Island, Truk Group.
Coasting along Namonuito Group.

Off Onoupe Island, Namonuito Group.
10° 34’ N. 148° 25’ H.
12° 3! 146° 26’

Off Agana, Guam.

Arrived at San Luis d’Apra, Guam.

Left San Luis d’Apra, Guam.
13° 48’ N. 144° 54’ B.

Coasting off Rota Island.

WE Of NE 144° 45! B.
46/ 144° 24"
15’ 144° 02!
28! - 148° 40!
53! 142° 47’
28’ 140° 41’
Arrived at Yokohama, Japan.

LIST OF THE STATIONS

OCCUPIED BY THE U. S. F. C. S. “ALBATROSS,” DURING HER
CRUISE IN THE TROPICAL PACIFIC,

Auaust, 1899-Marcn, 1900.

SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, TO NUKUHIVA, MARQUESAS ISLANDS.

E Bh Position. eine ae Nature
a 1899, 28 = os Remarks,
2 Latitude | Longitude |Sur-) Bot- | 22 Se
A North. West. face.) tom. | A=
° {) ° / ° °
1 /Aug. 26/31 10 |125 00 | 63 G55 aveee eh simel ie siivachains Lost thermometer and detacher; 320
miles from Point Conception.
2 |Aug. 27/28 23 |126 57 | 66 | 34.6 /2368|/Red clay. Light/450 miles from Guadalupe Island, 500
brown ooze. miles from Point Conception. Large
haul of manganese nodules, sharks’
teeth, and cetacean bones.
PREIS POMS M28 545 |G8i| +) |e |iecs 2 ie se le fee wie ww es ws se et
4 |Aug. 29) 24 45 |130 16 | 69 | 34.6 |2628 Dnght, browm200ze; |) sn. 1s cuccch ets ol suehemeencmene
same as at St. 2.
Red clay.
5 |Aug. 30) 22 42 |131 54 | 70| 34.6 2740/Light brown ooze,/Too rough to trawl; distant from
same as at St. 2.) Guadalupe Island 800 miles, from
Red clay. Point Conception 960 miles.
6 jAug. 31) 20 26 |133 28 | 75 2810)/Dark brown mud|Distant from Guadalupe Island 960
ooze. Red clay. | miles, from Sebastian Viscaino 1060
miles.
7 |Sept. 1/18 19 |134 57 | 76 2881/Red clay. Dark brown re ee Rear. Gc on
ooze. Very sticky.
§ Sept. 2/17 13 |136 09 |78 Ad cet ae CRON te LAG | toa eR meneame: pio cotorn.”o
See) (16 52 136 12) 1.76 ROWE hoa ceo eto ofolo|é Ufc om od atewe nS ao 0 do
10} “ “116 38 |136 14 |78 SOSSiksmoe wees or sc tns Deepest part of Moser Basin.
11 |Sept. 3/14 38 |186 44 | 79 2646/ Red clay. aseing out of deepest part of Moser
2 3asin.
12 |Sept. 4/12 07 /137 18 |81j . . |2883/Red clay, radiol. |....... nto oO OS Oo og
13 |Sept. 5} 9 57 |137 47 | 82 . |2690|Red clay. Light)/Large balls of manganese nodules, ce-
brown ooze, coarse] tacean bones, sharks’ teeth.
mineral _ particles
Radiolarian ooze.
14 |Sept. 7} 6 41 |137 00 | 82 2776\Gray ooze glob. eee are eens tome oed O° Boo
Foram. no radiola-
rians. Not sticky.
15 |Sept. 8) 4 35 |186 54 | 79 9583lBineray ooze. Ra)... 2. s+ ss @ 2 = se eee
diolarians. : ;
16 |Sept. 9} 2 38 |137 22 | 79 | 35.2 |2440) Light yellow gray|'lo Hawaiian Islands 1500 miles, to
glob. ooze. Marquesas 660 miles.
17 |Sept. 10) 0 50 |137 54 |79 . |2463|Light yellow gray|Sea too heavy to sound after this till
glob. ooze. Sept. 13.

Stations 1-18 referred to H. O. Chart
No. 527, corrected to April, 1897.
Stations 19 to 29 referred to H. O.
Chart No. 1797, edition of May,

Globigerinae still retaining their color.
Developing the Marquesas Plateau.

154 miles N. 43° W., same as below.
13 miles N. 73° W. of Haunanu Point,

17 miles west of Mt. Uranupe, Nuku-

6 miles 8S. 20° E. of Anna Maria Bay.
About 18 miles 8. 138° W. of Chicha-

25 miles from Cape Chichakoff, Nuku-
Stations 30, 31 referred to H. O. Chart

Deepest part of Channel separating the
Stations 32-35 referred to H. O. Chart
22 miles N. 28° E. of entrance to Ahii.

About 24 miles northwest of entrance

Position according to H. O. Chart

oo EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.
E Ne Position. als oe
Zz | 1999, 8
<= Latitude | Longitude Sur-| Bot- | 25
oF South. West. face.) tom. | A=
° , ° / ° °
18 Sept. 13) 6 25 | 1388 59 |80|35 |2475)Light gray yellow/About 175 miles to Marquesas.
ooze. Globig: ooze.
Radiolarian.
TE || SNe Gh als) ) 7) 2287 Coarse glob. ooze.
1899.
20 |Sept. 14) 8 13 | 139 10 | 79 | 35.1 |2267/Glob. ooze with vol-
canic particles.
HS) Py) ES | aU) aU) | 748) . |2183|/Glob. ooze. Many
voleanic particles.
92) 1 830 1139267179 + |1939|Globl ooze: Eineivol-|= = «1 + <1) -irellsi oleae
canic particles.
23 | “ “| 8 33 | 139 36 | 80} 35.5 |1802)Gray ooze. Glob. and
Radiol. and coarse
volcanic particles.
MARQUESAS ISLANDS TO TAHITI, SOCIETY ISLANDS, VIA NORTHWESTERN
PAUMOTUS. .
Stations rn Vicinity oF THE Marquesas ISLANDS.
. ° , ° 7 ° °
24 |Sept. 14) 8 41 | 139 46 | 80 1040|Coarse glob. ooze.
Volcanic particles.
25 | “ “| 8 48 |139 48 | 80} 38 | 830/Globig. and volcanic
mud and fragments.| Ua Huka Island.
264) So 7 9S 8b 239521180 1173|Glob. ooze. Ptero-
pods and volcanic} hiva Island (Tai o haé).
particles.
27 |Sept. 15} 9 O1 | 140 04 | 79 687|Glob. ooze. Volcanic
particles.
283 |Sept. 17) 9 05 | 140 13 | 80 1284]Rocky. Voleanic
fragments. koff Point.
STATIONS FROM THE MARQUESAS TO RANGIROA.
29 |Sept. 17) 9 16 |140 25 | 80} 34.9 |1932/Light yellow gray
glob. ooze. Coarse} hiva, 20 miles from Ua pu Island.
voleanic particles.
30 |Sept. 18/10 29 | 141 52/81/35 |2456/Lightgray glob. Few
Radiol. Volcanic} No. 824*, Oct. 1888.
particles.
31 |Sept. 19/12 20 | 144 15 |80| 35 |2700)Red clay.
1 Marquesas from the Paumotus.
32 Sept. 20/13 37 | 145 42 | 80) 35 |2451/Redclaywith Foram.
No. 77, corrected to 1899.
33 | “ “'14 10 |146 10°} 81 | 35.1 }2527/Red clay.
34] “ “114 26 |146 25 | 81 1208) Very light col. glob.
ooze. to Abii.
35 |Sept. 21/14 42 | 147 08 | 80 1462 Fine coral sand glob.
No. 77.
| °

(ore

a
2
=
|
=
za
z
D

36 |Sept.

37 |Sept.

39

40

41
42

43

46

47

48

Position.

Date.

1899,

73

“ce

“ec

ce

it

it

“

it

Temper-
atures,

Latitude

South. West.

Longitude | Sur-
face.

Bot-
tom.

Depth in
Fathoms.

PRELIMINARY REPORT.

Nature
of
Bottom.

53

RanGrroa TO TIKEHAU AND TO MaTAnIVA.

° / ° if °
gijl4 45 {147 88 | so
SHE as ler. | 80
“ 80
“ee 10)
80
ce 81
ce Sl
“l15 13 [147 53 | 82

mealenteme! Niel ter sine 199
peilemesiet |iel s 0c)! 102
“ce 80
i 82
“ So

“115 25 1148 08 | 80

25/15 25.5)148 24.4) 80
“115 02 |148 24 | 80

°

706) Volcanic rock frag-|Stations 32-35 referred to H. O. Chart

112

604.

645
661

684
819

897

1123

1486
488

ments.

Coral sand.

Broken shells and
sea-urchins. Ptero-
pods. Glob. Rad.
Mineral particles.
Fine coral sand, glob.
ooze. Broken shells
Mineral particles.
Coral sand. Glob
Pteropods. A few
Radiolarians.
Coralsand. Glob. and
voleanic particles.
Coral sand. Glob.

No. 77, corrected to 1899.

Distant 16 miles northeast of Avatoru
Pass, Rangiroa, according to H. O.
Chart No. 77. Stations 36 to 60
referred to H. O. Chart No. 85, cor-
rected to 1891.

£ mile from Beacon at the entrance to
Avatoru Pass.

Stations 37 to 42. Running a line
N., normal in continuation of Avatoru
Pass.

13 miles from Beacon, entrance to
Avatoru Pass.

Same line, 1 mile farther north.
Same line, 1 mile farther north.

2 miles farther north, same line.

21 miles farther north. Same line.

Volcanic particles.

Coarse coral sand.

Coarse coral sand.

Coarse coral sand,
broken shells. Pte-
ropods, glob. ooze.

Pteropod ooze, coral
sand, small manga-
nese nodules, round
grains of coral sand.

Coral sand, voleanic
or manganese parti-
cles. Glob.

Glob. Foram. Ptero-
pods. Manganese
or lava particles.

Coral sand, manga-
nese (?) particles.
Globigerinae.

Glob. ooze. Manga-
nese particles (?).

About 8 miles north, off Avatoru en-
trance. St. 35 was about 25 miles at
right angles to Rangiroa, and showed
a depth of 1462 fathoms, the edge of
plateau being between it and St. 36.

About 2 mile from Reef off south
shore Rangiroa.

1 mile from south shore, Rangiroa.

1 mile from last station. Normal to
coast.

2 miles from last station.

Positions of St. 43 to 60 approxi-
mate, referred to H. O. Chart No.
85, as corrected by ‘ Albatross.”

3 miles from last station.

5 miles from last station, 11 m. 8. 15°
W. of Station 44.

Coarse coral sand.|1 mile from shore of Tikehau, going
Glob. towards Matahiva.

Remarks.

1 mile from last position.

This sounding is deeper than one off
Rangiroa at same distance from shore.

2 miles from last position.

3 miles from last position. Same
normal.
5 miles from last position.

normal.

Same

8 miles from last position. Same
normal.

Changed course to go round the north
side of the Island of Matahiva.

3 miles from last station, going north.

24 miles off west shore of Matahiva.
4 miles off southwest shore of Ma-
tahiva,

Off south shore of Matahiva, about 74
miles farther off shore than St, 59.

St. 61 to 180 referred to H. O Chart
No. 77, corrected to 1899.
On way to Makatea.

About 1,8; miles off the bluff on west
side of central part of Makatea.
5 miles south of Makatea.

This is the first of a line of soundings
from Makatea to Tahiti. St. 65 to7

20 miles from last station.
10 miles from last station.

44 miles N. 32° E, from Point Venus.
6 miles from last station.

4 miles N. 54° W. from Point Venus.
6 miles from last station,

54 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

2 Position. Temper:

= Date. as of

= 1899. . | 26 Bottom,

E Latitude | Longitude |Sur-| Bot- | 2&5

2 South. West. /face.| tom. | &&

° ip ° / i ° ° |

52 |Sept. 25/15 01.4)148 25 | 80 670|Coarse coral sand,
broken shells and
glob.

Eyal 5 8] 782)|Pteropod ooze. Glob.
Manganese parti-
cles (?).

es |} 8] 850/Pteropod ooze, few
globig.

Say] So 81 844/Globig. ooze, small
manganese nodules.

56 | “ {14 56 |148 44 | 81 711|Pteropod ooze, fine
coral sand. Globig.
ooze. Small man-
ganese nodules.

EY Ally Se 80 486|Coarse coral sand.
Voleanic(?) parti-
cles. Manganese (?)

On| neous 80 624|Coarse coral sand.

BO) | recone ss 80 860)/Glob. ooze. Coral
sand. Voleanie (?)
particles.

GON eS s 80 1257|Coarse coral sand.
Globigerinae. Vol-
canic (?) particles.

Mataniva TO MAKATEA AND TO Paprertre, Tanitt ISLAND.
° /} ° / ° co}

61 |Sept. 25/15 16 |148 46 | 79 1762) Light grayglob.ooze.

62 |Sept. 26/15 33 |148 45 | 80 2267|/Glob. ooze and mud
(voleanic?), allied
to red elay.

63 | “ {15 42 |148 44 | 80 2247/Globigerinae and
mud allied to red
clay.

64 | “ “115 51 |148 15 |80] . . | 581/Coarse coral sand.

65 | “ “15 57.3]148 18.8] 80 1363/Coarse coral sand.
Small manganese
nodules.

66 | “ “116 10 {148 26 | 80 2238] Voleanie mud. Man-
ganese nodules.
Globigerinae.

67 |Sept. 27)16 22 |148 40 | 80 2363) Volcanic mud. Glo-
bigerinae.

68 | “ “116 57 |148 58 179 2224|Coarse voleanic mud,
Globigerinae.

69 « "117 14 1149 10 | 80 NCR Sob bu0 dob ec

10) SVU O1 149 Ta i80 1585|Fine voleanie mud,
yellow brown.

71 | “ £117 25.3)149 26 | 81 775 | Coarse voleanic mud,

| Manganese(?) nodule.

72 |Sept. 27/17 26.5/149 32.4) 79 867|Fine voleanie sand.
Coral sand. Globig-
evinae.

PRELIMINARY REPORT.

55

THROUGH THE PAUMOTU ARCHIPELAGO.

TaunitI TO MAKATEA VIA TETIAROA.

oe Ty =
FI a Position, ae a; Nae
a 1899, oe) of Remarks.
2 Latitude | Longitude |Sur-| Bot- es Wate
a South. West. face. tom. | &
73 |Oct. 5/17 27 |149 32 | 79 807|Fine volcanic sand.|3.8 miles N. 55° W. from Point Venus.
Pteropods.
Am CMR OCVANTAQE SAUNT OH ln Nave direc ss 6 eee © = 4.8 miles N. 82° W. from Point Venus.
Drifted,while trawling, from St. 78 to 74.
(fe || 4 “116 57 1147 29 | 80 1592| Volcanic mud mixed|Tetiaroa distant 6 miles.
with globigerinae.
MakaTEA TO APATAKI VIA NIAU.
° U/ ° / ° °
76 |Oct. 6/15 56.2)147 40 |80|35 |2269|Lightbrownvoleanic St. 76 to 81. Line from Makatea to
mud and glob. ooze.) Niau.
TiiOcte Ale 03 |147 11 17986 |1892IGlob. ooze. Volcanic)... 2+ 6. 15-2 ee ee ee
particles.
YAS 2 “116 08 |146 42 |79}39 | 609|Glob. ooze. About 10 miles off Niau.
79} 116 10 |146 23 |79| . . | 252/Coral sand and glo-|About $ mile off shore, Niau.
bigerinae.
80} “ £416 11.5]/146 25 | 80 491)Pteropod ooze. Glo-|1.75 miles off shore, southwest of vil-
bigerinae. lage, Niau.
81} 15 54.5/146 20 | 80 677|Coral sand. Glob.|/14 miles from Niau, bearing 8. 3° E.
ooze. About 10 miles from Kaukura N.
14° W.
82 |“ 15 42 1146 20 | 80 675|Pteropod ooze. In triangle Apataki, distant N. 6 miles;
Kaukura, 8. 60° W., distant 9 miles;
Toao, N. 81°, distant about 12 miles
83) | a8 “115 34 1146 26 | 80 BEG io: 0 BP dio sr ps 4 mile S. 45° W. from Pakaka en-
trance to Apataki,
84 |Oct. 8]15 35.8/146 27.5) 7939.4 | 613]Coral sand. Glob.|Off Apataki Entrance, about 2 miles
Broken shells. Pter-| 5S. 50° W.
opods.
Sbri|) "115 34.3/146 28 | 80 520|Coral sand. About 1 mile 8. 55° W. of Pakaka
Entrance.
APATAKI T0 TIKEI.
86 lOct. 8/15 18.3/146 23 |80|38.S | 654|Coarse coral sand. |First of a line to Tikei. About 1 mile
from northwest corner of Apataki.
87 | 15 15 {146 07 | 80 1364/Glob. ooze. Few|About 7 miles N. 45° E. off northeast
voleanic particles. | point of Apataki.
88 |Oct. 9/14 57 {144 34 | 80 360|Coarse coral sand.|} mile off west shore of Tikei where

| 89 |Oct. 14/16 0

Nearvak Pass, FAKARAVA TO TAKUME VIA ANAA AND TAHANEA.

Pteropod shells.

landed,

,

°

3.5)145 43

°

80

°

599

Coarse coral sand.

About 1 mile N. 28° W. of north en-
trance to Fakarava. First of line of
soundings in continuation of Ngaruae
Pass.

6 EXPEDITION OF THE

2 Position. Romper:

a Date. aa

a 1399. ae

ac Latitude | Longitude|Sur-} Bot- | 23

3 South. West. face.| tom. | ac

90 |Oct. 14/16 02 |145 43.5] 80 666/Coarse coral sand.
Pteropods.

91] “* “116 38 {145 31 | 80 602|Coarse coral sand.
Pteropod ooze.

92|/ “ “116 44 {145 35 | 80 839|Coral coated with
manganese,

93] “© “116 51 {145 42 | 80 /35.7 |1300/Glob. ooze.

g4| << 116 57 [145 49 | 79 1531/Fine voleanic mud
and globigerinae.

95 |Oct. 15/17 09 |146 00 | 78 |36.10)1079|Glob. ooze.

96] “« “117 14.5]145 49 | 77 139.7 | 527/Coral frets. covered
with manganese.

97| “ “117 17 {145 45.5] 79 804/Globig. ooze and
many very small
manganese nodules.

oy GS Cn WEES ey yA9) 642) Pteropod ooze. Man-
ganese nodules on
coral sand.

99] * “117 22 1145 37 | 79139 568|/Manganese nodules.
Coarse coral sand.

100} “ <|17 20 |145 31 | 80 225|Coral sand.

101} “ 17 16 {145 27 | 80/36 |1110)Pteropod ooze. Fine
coral sand. Man-
ganese nodules.

102) * |17 10 |145 19 |82)36 |1679)Light yellowish brown
globig. ooze.

103) * “17 03 |145 08.5} 82 |35.1 |1733)/White glob. ooze.

104) 116 55 |145 03 | 81]. . | 966|/White glob. ooze.
Few manganese
nod. grains.

105} {16 53 |145 00 | 80|38.6 | 654) Verysmall manganese
nodules. Coral sand.

106 |Oct. 16/16 55 |144 56 | 80 269 Coarse coral sand.

107} © “116 24 143 59 | 80 467) White coral sand.

108} “ ‘116 20 {143 55 | 80 856/Pteropod ooze, Fine
coral sand. Light
yellow gray glob
Few volcanic par-
ticles (?).

109} “ “!16 13 {143 48 | 80 987|Pteropod ooze. Glob.
Voleanic particles(?).

110} * 116 03 {143 32.5) 80|36.3 |1084|/Light yellow gray
glob. ooze.

111 \Oct. 17/15 53 |143 26 | 80/35 |1805|Light yellow gray
glob. ooze.

112) “* **|15 54 |143 06 | 80 /35.4 |1568/Glob. ooze. Light
yellow. Manganese.

“ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

About 3 miles farther north than last
station. 384 miles N. 35° W. from
Ngaruae Pass.

About 2 miles due S.W. from south-
west Point of Fakarava.

& mile farther than Station 91.

10 miles farther than 92. Line to
Anaa at first 40 miles to S.W., then
30 miles to north side of Anaa.

10 miles from Station 98.

Changed course toward Anaa at this
station.

6 miles from Station 96.
Off Anaa, 6 miles from Station 97.

About 1,3; miles off northwest face of
Anaa.

About } mile to edge of reef off vil-
lage at entrance to lagoon of Anaa.
About 5 miles N. 50° B. off Anaa En-
trance. This is first of a line of
soundings across to Tahanea. St.

101 to 106.

15 miles from Station 102.
About 10 miles from Station 108, 4

miles W.S. W. from southwest point of
Tahanea.

About 2 miles W. of southwest point
of Tahanea.

About 4 mile off south shore of Taha-
nea and about 3 miles 8. 45° W. of
southwest point of Tahanea.

1 mile N.W. of northwest Pass to
Makemo on angular line to Raroia,
4 miles N. of northwest end of Ma-

kemo.

10 miles north of Station 108.
15 miles north of Station 109.
At next station on line to Raroia

changed direction at Station 111.
20 miles from St. 111.

—— ae

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 57
2 Position. Nat
- ature
z ea a 28 of Remarks.
2 Latitude | Longitude |Sur-| Bot- 33 TER
A South. West. /face.| tom. | SS
°o , ° ’ | ° °
113 JOct. 17/15 55 1142 39 | 80] . . |1503/Glob. ooze. Light|20 miles from St. 112.
yellow. Manganese.
114} “ */15 56 | 142 29 | 80] 35.7 |1885/Glob. ooze. Fewman-|This is about 5 miles from centre of
ganese particles. west coast of Raroia.
115} “ 15 56.3) 142 29 | 81} 40.2} 508/Coarse coral sand.|About 4 mile from the shore at north-
Pteropod ooze. west point of Raroia.
116 |Oct. 18)15 53 | 142 14 | 79} 88.7} 572\Coarse coral sand. |About 1} miles off southwest point of
Takume.
117) “ = *\15 54 | 142 16 | 79} 38 | 563)/Coral sand incrusted| Half way between Takume and Raroia.
with manganese,
TAKUME TO MakeMO VIA Rarota aND TAENGA.
° fi °

/ 2) °
118 |Oct. 18]16 12 | 142 31 | 80) 38.2) 630)Coarse coral sand./About 1 mile off southwest point of
Pteropod ooze and| Raroia.
manganeseparticles
119) “ = }16 14 | 142 50 | 80} 35.5 |1516)Glob. ooze. Manga-| Half way between Raroia and Taenga.
nese particles.
120} * {16 21 | 143 14 | 80) 36.5} 928/Glob. and pteropod)/About 3 miles 8S. 67° W., off south-
ooze. west face of Taenga.
121 |Oct. 19]16 25 | 143 33 | 79)| 36.1 |1108/Glob. ooze, a few|About half way to Taenga.
pteropods, and man-
ganese particles.

Makemo To Hikverv via TEKOKOTO.

122 |Oct. 20/16 29 | 143 41 |79}|39.7| 540/Coral sand. Ptero-|About 1 mile off north shore of Ma-
pod ooze. kemo.

123 |Oct. 25/16 35 | 143 31 |80|39 | 603/Coarse coral sand. |About 1 mile off entrance to Makemo.

124} « “116 42 |143 10 | 79] . . {1221/Glob. ooze. Munga-|11 miles EK. by 8. off east point of
nese. Makemo, on line to Tekokoto.

125 |Oct. 26/16 51 | 142 57 |79)|36 |1185)Glob. ooze. Half way between Nihiru and Marutea.

126| “117 07 | 142 49 | 79 | 35.9 |1235|/Glob. manganese. |... -- +--+ +++ eee ee eee

127| “ “17 20 |142 35 | 79] . - | 617)/Coral sand. About 1 mile west from Tekokoto.

128) * 17 28 | 142 88 | 80 | 36.6 1009) Pteropods and glob.|Half way to Hikueru from Tekokoto.
ooze. 6 miles north of centre of Hikueru

atoll.

129 |Oct. 27|17 35 | 142 42 | 80| 43.8 | 348/Coral sand and bro-|} of a mile W. of northwest point of
ken shells. Hikueru.

130] “ “|17 35 |142 44 | 80) 37.8| 798/Coral sand. Ptero-|14 mile west of last station. Same
pod ooze. normal.

Hrkueru To Hao via Marokau AND RAVAHERE.
° / ° / ° o
131 |Oct. 28/17 47 | 142 29 | 79 | 35.7 1372 Glob. ooze. Half way between Hikueru and Maro-
kau.

132) “ {18 00 | 142 29 | 77 | 35.6 |1620/Glob. ooze. 8 miles west of Marokau.

133| “ “|18 05 | 142 23 | 78| 35.5 | 742|Pteropod ooze. About 2 miles off north end of Marokau.

134) “© |18 06 | 142 24 | 79| 37.6 | 807\Fine coral sand and|3 miles off northwest point of Maro-
manganese nodules.| kau.

58

EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

sand.)|Half way between heads of pass be-
Manganese unod-| tween Marokau and Ravahere.

7\Fine voleanic mud.|About 20 miles from last station.

Globigerinae and few}About 20 miles from last station.
inapnesc parece Depth indicates rise or spur.

Remarks.

About $ mile off northwest point of
Hao.
2 miles W. of northwest face of Hao.

20 miles from Hao. Stations 140-144,
line Hao to Aki Aki.

Ridge 25 miles from last station.
20 miles from last station.

5 miles from Aki Aki. 10 miles from
last station.

1 mile off southwest end of Aki Aki.

= | a

= om Position. pemaper 7 Nate

Z 1899. | 25 Bodvan:

= Latitude | Longitude |Sur-) Bot- | 2S

Ss | South. West. face. tom. | & =

/ ° 7 jo °

135 |Oct. 28 79 | 48.1) 278|Fine coral
ules. Globigerinae.

136} “ {18 08 | 141 49 | 79) 35.2 |2187 \
Globigerinae.

137 |Oct. 29)18 07 | 141 26 | 78 1713

1388} * j18 05 | 141 03 | 79] 42 425|Coarse coral sand.

139| “ “18 OS | 141 04 | 79] 37.6] 812)\Coral sand.

Hao to Akt AKI.
° / ° / ° °

140 Oct. 2918 27 | 140 21 | 77 | 35.1 |2042|Light brown voleanie
mud with globiger-
inae.

141 }Oct. 30/18 29 | 139 53 | 78/385 |1490/Globigerinae. Large
species. Few man-
ganese particles.

142) “ |18 30 | 189 30 | 78 | 35.1 }2103) Fine light brown vol-

3 canie mud, with
globigerinae.

143) “ |18 34 | 139 19 | 78 | 35.6 |1364| Manganese particles.
Globigerinae.

144} “ j18 30 | 139 15 377|Coarse coral sand,
broken shells.

| AKI AKI TO PINAKI VIA NUKUTAVAKE.
° / ° / ° °

145 |Oct. 30/18 36 | 139 14 |78| 35 |1725|Coarse coral sand.

146 |Oct. 31/18 56 | 139 05 | 78 | 35.1 |2343)Red clay. Few glo-
bigerinae.

147) “ “|19 17 |188 54 |}78]35 |1688|Manganese nodules.
Globigerinae.

148} “ £119 16 | 139 49 | 78} 388.9] 636/Coral sand.

149) “ = 119 23.5) 188 46 |78|37 | 860)Nothing in cup.
Hard bottom.

Pinaki TO NuKuriPrPl.
| =) / ° vA ° °
150 Oct. 31/19 27.5)188 44 | 79} 41 486|Coarse coral sand.
Pteropod ooze.

151} “ |19 27 | 138 47 |79|35 |1907/Glob. ooze. Volcanic
mud.

152 | “119 35 | 189 13 | 78 | 35.1 }2335/Red clay. Few glo-

ails bigerinae.

153 Nov. 1/19 45.5) 139 54 |77 | 35.4|1494|Globigerinae, small
nodules and _parti-
cles of manganese.

5 miles south of Aki Aki. Stations
145-148, line Aki Aki to Nukuta-
vake.

20 miles from last station.

6 miles W. of north end of Nukuta-
vake.
1 mile off north point of Nukutavake.

3.5 miles northwest of Pinaki, between
it and Nukutavake.

Lmile west of Pinaki. St. 150 to 158,
line Pinaki to Nukutipipi.
5 miles W.S.W. from Pinaki.

25 miles from last station.
40 miles from last station. This

ridge may be a spur of Ahunui, or
an independent ridge.

PRELIMINARY REPORT.

59

3 ae Temper-
E Date. voue atures: Fic Nature
is 1899, eg = of Remarks.
3 Latitude | Longitude |Sur-| Bot- | 22 socoms
oH South. West. face.) tom. | &=
fo} / ce) 7 ° °
154/Nov. 1/19 52 /140 16 |77|35 |2284)Red clay. 20 miles from last station.
155] “ “)20 07 |141 00 | 78) 35 ge ae nee pert ee 40 miles from last station,
Red clay.
156 |Nov. 2/20 31 )142 00 |77| 85 |2467|Red clay. No or-/60 miles from last station.
ganic remains,
157| “ “120 46.5)142 51 |78|85 |2315 Red clay and num-|About 5 miles southeast from Nuku-
ber of globigerinae.| tipipi.
158} “© “20 43 |143 0.5) 77|39 | 649|/Coral sand. Broken|About 1 mile southeast of Nukutipipi.
shells. Pteropods.
Nukutipipt TO HereEHERETUE VIA ANU ANURUNGA AND ANU ANURARO.
9 / ° if ° °
159 |Nov. 2/20 42 |143 03 | 77 736)/Coral sand, ptero-|1 mile W.N.W.on course of Nuku-
pods, broken shells,) tipipi to Anu Anurunga.
manganese particles
160) “ ‘120 40 | 143 09 | 78 | 35.5 }1609/Coral sand. Few|Half way to Anu Anurunga. Sound-
globigerinae. Man-| ing indicates a low ridge connecting
ganese particles. the islands of the Gloucester group.
161) “ 120 37 |143 15 | 78|39 | 574)Pteropod ooze.|1 mile off east side of Anu Anurunga.
Coarse coral sand
and manganese par-
ticles.
162} “ 120 37 | 143 18 | 78} 38.5] 659/Coral sand, ptero-/One mile northwest of Anu Anurunga,
pods, and broken} on line to Anu Anuraro.
shells.
163] “ )20 34 | 143 23 | 78] 35.2 |1890|Light gray glob./Half way to Anu Anuraro from Anu
ooze. Small and] Anurunga.
large globigerinae.
164) “ 20 29 | 143 29 | 78] 40.7 | 438]Coral sand. $ of mile from shore off southeast side
of Anu Anuraro.
| 165] “ “120 27 | 148 32 | 77} 42.5 | 406\Coral sand. Ptero-/4 mile northwest of Anu Anuraro.
pods. Small man-| St. 165 to 168, line Anu Anuraro to
ganese nodules. Hereheretue.
166) “ “/20 15 | 144 00 | 77 | 34.8 |2265)Red clay. Globig-|26 miles from last station.
erinae. Manganese.
167 |Nov. 3/20 02 | 144 28 | 78 | 34.9 |2524)Very soft red clay.|3 miles from last station. Continue to
Few globigerinae. | find manganese particles and small
nodules at nearly every sounding.
168} “ 19 54 |144 48 |77/35 |1719|Globigerina ooze. {6 miles from last station. East of
Hereheretue.
169) “ “19 54 | 144 53 | 78| 39.5 | 594/Coarse coral sand. |1 mile off the east coast of Hereheretue.
HEREHERETUE TO Tanti vid MEHeETIA.
| o / °o / ° °
170 Nov. 3/19 54 | 144 59 | 7862.1) 189)/Coralsand. Manga-|;8; mile from edge of reef on west side
nese particles, of Hereheretue. St.170 to 176, line
Hereheretue to Mehetia,
171} “ “19 50 | 145 03 | 78 | 35.3 /1688|Light gray glob./5.3 miles northwest of Hereheretue.
ooze. Manganese
particles.
172} “ “19 22 |145 47 |77|35 2322)Red clay with glo-/50 miles from last station.
bigerinae.

for)
Oo

EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

E aa Position. Temper Ge Nature

a 1899. aa = eee Remarks.

< Latitude | Longitude Sur-| Bot- BS] « ere

uF South, West face. | tom. | As

° / °o / fe} °

173 |Nov. 4/18 55 | 146 32 | 78 34.8 |2440/Red clay. _Large|50 miles from last, half way to Mehetia
haul of trawl of| from Hereheretue.
manganese nodules.

174) “ “| 18 28 | 147 11 |79/85 |2087|Twospherical manga-
nese nodules, about
15 mm. in diameter’
jammed cup open.

175 |Nov. 5/18 03 | 147 48 | 78 134.8 |2129]Coarse voleanie mud.|14 miles southeast of Mehetia.

176| “ “(17 54 |148 00 |80/38.1 | 832 Violeanie ad and}14 miles off southeast face of Mehetia.
coral sand.

Wil) & “117 51 | 148 03 | 80/69 142}Voleanic rock and| mile off north shore of Mebhetia.
coral sand. St. 177-179 Mehetia to Tahiti.

178| “ “|17 46 | 148 23 |81|34.9 |2111}Voleanie sand. 23 miles from Mehetia.

179} “ |17 35 | 148 48 | 80/35 1|1755)Voleanic sand. 30 miles from Tahiti.

SOCIETY ISLANDS TO TONGATABU, TONGA ARCHIPELAGO VIA LEEWARD ©
SOCIETY ISLANDS, THE COOK GROUP, AND NIUE ISLAND.

From Taniti To Leewarp Society Isnanps.

°o tf ° 7 fe} °
180 Noy. 15) 17 30 | 149 41 | 79 |36.7 | 981|Volcanic sand. Pter-|About halfway to Murea from Papeete.
opod ooze. 5 miles from the northeast point of
Murea.
From Arrutakt To NIvE.
o / ° / ° °
18] |Nov. 22) 18 54 | 162 31 | 79 |34.7 |2498|No sample. Sts. 181-184 referred to H. O. Chart
No. 825%, corrected to April, 1896.
182 |Noy. 23] 18 59 |\164 47 |82)133:4 |2882|Rediclay. (Glob: |. 2. 2. = 52 ©.) sneenennenene
183 |Nov. 24] 19 04 | 167 41 | 80)/33:9 12472)Red clay. Radiol. 2 - - . . . . << 2) c) cucuemtciieennenne
From Nive to Eva (TonGa).
| ° / ro) / o °
184 Nov. 26/20 15 | 172 00 | 80/34 |3141)Red clay. Radiol. ||. .-... 25: -). 3 0) nmin
185 |Nov. 27/21 18 |173 31]. 4173) Light brown voleanic|Near 4762 fms. hole, siliceous sponges
mud. Radiol. in trawl. Deepest haul of trawl yet
made. Lost thermo,
186) “ “)/21 18 |173 51 | 77 |84.15|4540|Lightbrownvoleanic]. ...-..........5 5+ es
mud. Radiol.
VAVAU TO FIJI.
°o v2 *) ° °
187 |Dec. 4/18 47 | 174 15 | 79 682)Pteropods and very|Between Vavau and Letté.
peculiar coral sand,|Sts. 185 to 188 referred to B. A. Chart
resembles volcanic] No. 2421, corrected to August, 1899.
sand, with white
erystals of calcite,
gray brown.
188 |Dee. 6) 18 43 | 175 28 | 79 |36.2 |1381}Voleanic mud, glob. |Beyond Letté to westward.

— le

—-.- 3

Serial Number.

Position,

PRELIMINARY REPORT.

Temper-
atures.

Date.
1899-1900.
Latitude
South.

Lon

gitude

West.

Sur-
face.

Bot-
tom,

Depth in
Fathoms,

Bottom.

7|18

“118

“ec 18

179 16

42.9 | 453

47 | 324

In Fist ARCHIPELAGO.

61

Remarks.

Fine coral sand. Pter-
opod ooze. Few
glob.
Coral sand. Colored
in part by manga-
nese.
Pteropod ooze. Frag-
ments of pumice,
Fine coral sand,
glob.
Coral sand. Ptero-
pods. Manganese,
glob.

Very fine light yellow
brown coral ooze.

About in centre of passage between
Yangasa—Mothe. Southernextension
of eastern Fiji plateau.

Between Namuka and Yangasa.

|Sts. 189-193 referred to B. A. Chart
No. 2691, corrected to Dee., 1897.

6 miles S. 23° W. from west end of
Namuka. Between Namuka and
Marambo.

2.7 miles N. 19° W. from Marambo.
In centre of triangle Marambo,
Kambara, Wangava, about 5 miles
distant.

About 15 miles west of Kambara, on
way to Totoya.

FIJI THROUGH ELLICE AND GILBERT ISLANDS TO JALUIT MARSHALL
ARCHIPELAGO.

°

Latitude
North.

2) 0 30

,

179 50

Longitude
East.

179 30

173 54

°

35.6 |1445

245

Light yellow brown
glob. ooze.

Coral sand, rocky.

Hard bottom.

Light yellowgrayglob
ooze. Struck glo-
bigerinae of Equat
Current (obtained
before in Paumotus)

Yellow gray glob.
ooze. Very coarse
large species.

3/Same coarse large

clob. ooze as before

5) Brokenshells. Coral

Coarse large globig-
erinae. Same as
before.

H.0O. Chart No. 825%, cor. April, 1895.

Tanner machine. 4 mile south, off
Nurakita. B. A. Chart No. 1830,
corr. March, 1898.

# mile south of village off south side of
Apamama. Sts. 196-207 H.O. Chart
No. 119, corr. May, 1899.

On way Apamama-Maiana. About 16
miles from northwest end of Apa-
mama.

About 9 miles southeast of Maiana.

Halfway to Tarawa from Maiana. Un-
known summit.

About 4 mile from centre of south
shore of Tarawa. ‘Tanner sounding
machine.

About 1 mile E. of last station,off south
shore of Tarawa. Tanner sounding
machine.

About 5 miles 8. 12° E. of southeast
point of Tarawa. Shoal said to ex-
tend there. Evidently no plateau;
may bea ridge, connecting the islands
Maiana, Tarawa, and Apaiang.

SS,” 1899-1900.

Remarks.

About 2 miles from southeast point of
Apaiang, between Apaiang and north
Tanner sounding

15 miles from Apaiang, on way to
southeast point of Maraki, about

About 4 mile off shore off west coast
of Maraki, N.W.-by-W. from monu-

About 26 miles N.W.-by-N. of Maraki.
About 16 miles seutheast from centre
of south shore of Taritari.

62 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATRO
= Position. ras Nature
= Date. ae of
z 1900. | | 2 B Bottom.
Z Latitude | Longitude Sur-| Bot- | 23
2 North East. face.| tom. | & =
203 |Jan. 4 1 40.5/172 59.5 LY Ol sss etek occ
point of Tarawa.
machine.
204\Jan. 4) 152 1173 15 | 84) 34.9/2156/Light gray glob.
ooze. Small spe-
cies. half way.
205} “ “| 2 04 |173 16 | 86 431|Coral sand and glo-
bigerinae.
ment.
206 |Jan. 5) 2 27 |173 09 | 80 | 34.8 |2255/Glob. ooze. -
207) “ “| 2.49 |173 01 | 83) 35.3/1461/Glob. ooze. Large
species.
From Tarivart To Jaxurr.
° / ° “4 ° o
208 Jan. 7) 3 57 |172 00 | S83] 34.7 |2486|Light yellow glob.
ooze, coarse and| tari.
fine. 983, April, 1891.
209 |Jan. 8) 4 25 |171 18 | 83) 34.7 |2505/Lightgrayglob. ooze,
medium size.
210))“ “! 4 54 |170 21 | 83! 34.7 |2444) Light gray glob. ooze,
coarse and medium
size.
211 |Jan. 9) 5 20 |169 43 | 83) 34.8)2411/Light yellow drab
glob. ooze.
212)“ “| 5 44 |169 45 |82/35 |1937|Light gray glob.
ooze. point of Jaluit.
THROUGH THE MARSHALL ARCHIPELAGO,
| oO / oo / ° °
213 Jan. 14) 6 34 |169 13 |83]35 |2613)/Glob. ooze.
214 \Jan. 15) 7 00 |169 OL | 82/35 |2137/Coarse globigerinae.
215| “ “| 7 08 |168 56 | 82] 35.9 |1283|Coarse globigerinae.
216) “ “| 7 29 |168 32 | 82] 36.5 |1068/Coral sand.
linglab Lab.
217; “ | 7 387 |168 27 |82|37 | 906|Coarse globigerinae. |Half way to Namu.
218; “ “| 7 45 1168 21 | 83] 39.7] 631|Coarse coral sand.
Namu.
219 Jan. 15) 8 02 |167 43 |82]35 |2179/Glob. mud.
220 Jan. 16) 8 38 |167 37 | 82/35 |1897/Glob. mud.
221 Jan. 18/11 09 |166 46 | 80} 43.4] 400)Coral sand.
Rongelab.
222) “ 111 07.5}166 46 | 80} 59 | 827|Coral sand.
Rongelab.
223) 110 49 |167 15 | 80} 35 |2469/Glob. andlight brown
| voleanicmud. Red
| clay (?).
224 Jan. 19/10 30 |167 42 | 80] 35 |2586/Globigerinae and
light brownvoleanic) towards Likieb.
mud. Red elay (?)

About 60 miles northwest from Tari-
St. 208-239 B. A. Chart No.

About 130 miles northwest from Tari-
tari, about half way to Jaluit.
About 60 miles southeast from Jaluit.

About 30 miles from Jaluit.
About 5 miles S. 4 W. from the south

About 30 miles northwest from Jaluit.

About 9 miles 8. 30° E. of southeast
point of Ailinglab Lab.
6 miles northwest of west point Ai-

About 2 miles south of south point of
About 12 miles west of centre of Namu.
About 12 miles southwest of west
point of Kwajalong Island.

4 mile south of Southeast pass of

14 miles south of Southeast pass of

About 35 miles southeast from South-
east pass of Rongelab.

About 35 miles from last station,

Serial Number.

Z

Position,

PRELIMINARY REPORT.

Temper-
atures.

Latitude
North.

Longitude
East.

Bot-
tom,

Sur-
face.

Depth in
Fathoms,

Nature
of
Bottom.

Remarks.

°

/
15

° /
168 06

168 56

169
169
169

14
14
32

10
ll

81} 34.9
80

81
8lj<

MARSHALL

238 | Feb.

239 |Feb.
240 |Feb.

““e

242 | Feb.
243 Feb.

244 |Feb.

5

9

ISLANDS

169

2609

223]

468
934
1583

482
1187

2221
1009
1326
1253

2482
2486

Globigerinae and
light brown volcanic
mud. Red clay (?)

Glob. mud.

Coarse coral sand.

Coarse coral sand.

Globigerinae. Very
fine species.

Coral sand.

Coarse coral sand.
Trace of manganese.

Wh. and gray glob.

00ze.

Coarse globigerinae.
Coarse globigerinae.

Cream colored coarse
globigerinae.

Globigerinae.

Fine glob. mud.

About 35 miles from last station, on
way to Likieb.

About 8 miles W. S.W. of Kapenor
Island. West of north point of Li-
kieb.

4 mile south of South pass of Likieb.
14 mile south of South pass of Likieb.

About half way Likieb to Wotje.

1 mile south of Schischmarey Pass.
2 miles south of last station.

About 40 miles south of last station,
half way between south end of Erikub
and Maloelab.

About 7 miles N. 50° W. from north-
west point of Arhno.

About 6 miles southwest of south point
of Arhno.

About 40 miles from last station.

About 40 miles from last station.

The same deep water we found on
coming north from the Gilberts, and
also all through the Marshalls and
between the islands both of the Ralick
and Ratack chain.

THROUGH THE CAROLINES TO GUAM, LADRONES ISLANDS,

AND TO YOKOHAMA, JAPAN.

°

82 | 35

2424/Glob. mud. Coarse)30 miles west of Jaluit.

diat. cysts.

THROUGH THE CAROLINES.

°

82 | 43.5
82 | 54.9

371
2475
2533

526
2162

2205

Voleanie and coral
sand.
Glob. and light brown
voleanie mud.
Glob. mud. Light
brown fine volcanic
mud.

Coarse coral sand.
Light gray glob
mud and few yol-
canic particles.
Glob. mud,

¢ mile south of Port Lottin, Kusaie.

3 way Ponapi and Truk. Sts. 240-
244 H. O. Chart No. 1754, 1898.
2 way Ponapi— Truk.

About 4 mile south of Nama.

About 17 miles southeast of South
Island, Royalist Islands.

About half way between Truk and
Namonuito.

64 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

e

3 ar Temper-

a Position atures. ; Nataze

z 1900. } SE of Remarks,

= pao Se s | 2 i= mie Bottom,

= Latitude | Longitude /Sur-) Bot- | 22

3 North. East. jface.| tom. | SS +

Namonuiro to Guam.

° ° tf ° °

245 |Feb. 18} 9 31 |149 36 |81/35 |2735)Red clay. 50 miles northwest from Magur islet.
246 |Feb. 19/10 34 |148 25 |81/35 |2993)Red clay and small}100 miles further towards Guam. Sts.
particles of manga-| 245-249 H. O. Chart No, 529, corr.
nese nodules. June, 1896.

247 |Feb. 20/11 35 |147 15 | 80/35 |3213|Manganese nodules.|100 miles further, same course, towards
| Pumice. Red clay.| Guam.

248) “ 112 51 |145 46 | 81) 35.8 |4813) Manganese. Pumice.|Our deepest sounding. 100 miles fur-
Voleanic particles.| ther, same course, towards Guam.
disks of diatoms(?).| Thermometer could not have regis-
tered correctly.

249 |Feb. 21/13 08 |145 25 |S0)35 |2337/Fine voleanic sand. |About 25 miles further, same course,
distant 45 m. from north end of Guam.

PRELIMIYARY REPORT. 65

NOTES ON THE DEEP-SEA HAULS OF THE TRAWL AND DREDGE MADE BY
THE “ ALBATROSS” AND THE “CHALLENGER” IN THE PACIFIC.

The “Challenger” made four hauls of the trawl or dredge from the
Admiralty Islands to Japan, eight between Yokohama and the Hawaiian
Islands, four between the Hawaiian Islands and Tahiti, and eleven between
Tahiti and Valparaiso. The “ Albatross” made thirteen hauls in the line
San Francisco to Tahiti across the deep Moser Basin.

In other parts of the Pacific exclusive of the Southern Ocean we have
only the deep-water trawling of the “ Challenger” near Fiji and Tongatabu
and thence to New Zealand and south from Valparaiso; exclusive of hauls
made in the enclosed seas to the westward of Borneo and New Guinea,
the number of hauls in the deep areas of the Pacific are few in number,
and have thus far made us acquainted with a comparatively small number
of deep-water types. The few hauls made by the “ Albatross” in the
insular area of the Pacific would seem to indicate that in the Paumotus,
Society Islands, Tongas, Ellice, Gilbert, and Marshall Islands the fauna of
these areas was extremely poor as compared with the wealth of animal life
brought to light by the “ Blake” in the West Indies and by the “ Alba-
tross” in the Panamic district near the Galapagos and off the coast of
Central America. ‘The only other hauls in the Pacific are the few made by
the “Gazelle” near the Fiji in less than 800 fathoms, and the large col-
lections made for many years by the “ Albatross” along the shore of
Oregon, Washington, and Alaska, the Aleutian Islands, and in the Bering
Sea. It must be remembered, however, that these collections of the ‘‘ Alba-
tross’” were all obtained at a comparatively short distance from the Ameri-
can continent, — the greatest number of deep-sea hauls made at a distance
from a continental area being those of the “ Albatross” Expedition of
1891 in the Panamie district, a number of which were from five to 700
miles from the continental slope of Central America.

It is interesting to compare the lines run across the Pacific by the “ Chal-
lenger” with those explored by the “ Albatross” in the present expedition.

The line run by the “Albatross” from San Francisco to Tahiti starts in lat.
5

66 EXPEDITION OF THE “ABBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

31° 10’ N., long. 125° W., and terminates at Tahiti off Pt. Venus about in lat.
17° 30’ S., and long,, 149° 30° W. That of the “ Challenger” starting north
of the Hawaiian Islands in lat. 38° 9’ N., and long. 156° 25’ W., and
ending also at Tahiti, converges towards the line of the “ Albatross,” so that
we have an excellent opportunity of comparing the collections of the
“Challenger” in the central Pacific with those obtained by the “ Albatross ”
from the great red-clay and manganese-nodule area of the Pacific Ocean
to the eastward. An examination of the results as recorded by Sir
John Murray,’ and those which I here give from the trawling of the
“Albatross” show plainly that at great depths and far from continental
areas or insular plateaux the bottom fauna of the great depths is compara-
tively poor except when the trawling is made in the line of the great
equatorial currents, where the bottom fauna receives a larger amount of
food, derived from the dead remains of the pelagic fauna falling to the
bottom.

A similar increase in the number of animals brought up in the trawl
can also be noted in the hauls made by the “ Challenger” on the line east
of Japan, while practically in the track of the great Japanese current sweep-
ing to the eastward. In marked contrasts to this line and to the results

by

obtained in the track of the equatorial current by the “ Albatross” are the
scanty hauls obtained by the “Challenger” from the Admiralty Islands
north to Japan.

The line of dredgings made from Tahiti to Valparaiso is also relatively
richer than the two principal lines across the deepest parts of the central

.)

Pacific explored by the “Challenger” and “ Albatross.” That is in part
due to the nature of the bottom, which is often made up of Globigerina ooze,
and also undoubtedly to the fact that the eastern extension of the “ Chal-
lenger” line from Tahiti was run in the northern extension of the basin of
the Southern Ocean, which, as is well known, has supplied a far richer deep-
water bottom fauna than that found in the intertropical areas of the Pacific.

To facilitate the comparison between the results obtained in the Pacific

by the “Challenger” and those of the “ Albatross”? during her trip to the

1 In the General Summary of the “Challenger” results, and in the Deep Sea Deposits (‘“Chal-
lenger ” Expedition) by Murray and Renard.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 67

tropical Pacific, I have prepared an abstract of the results of the “Chal-

' as well as a succinct account of the

lenger” from trawling and dredging,
surface tows and of the bottom deposits compiled from the published
records of the “‘Challenger.” The same has been done for the results of the
“ Albatross,’ which have been treated in the same way and discussed with
reference to the Pacific area covered by us to the eastward and northward
of the “ Challenger” lines, and to the westward of the Society Islands as far
as Fiji, and from there to Guam via the Ellice, Gilbert, Marshall, and
Caroline Islands. From Guam, as our line to Yokohama practically du-
plicated that of the “Challenger” we merely made a passage from the

Ladrones to Japan.

The following are the results of the trawling and dredging of the “ Challenger”
m the Pacific, from the Admiralty Islands to Yokohama, thence to the Ha-
waiian Islands, to Tahiti and Valparaiso.

Leaving out of consideration Station 220, not more than eighty miles
from the Admiralty Islands, where a good haul of the trawl was made
in 1100 fathoms, we have Stations 221 and 222, where no haul was made;
we then come to Station 223, lat. 5° 31’ N., long. 145° 13’ E., where a
haul of the trawl was made in 2325 fathoms, but which contained only
a young Hyocrinus, a small siliceous sponge attached to a piece of pumice,
and a Penzid and a couple of Gonostoma, neither of which probably
came from the bottom. This station was 464 miles from Guam, and some
of the Carolines were not more than 90 miles distant. At the next
station, 224, lat. 7° 45’ N., long. 144° 20’ E., in 1850 fathoms, the nearest
Caroline being 52 miles and Guam 330 miles, the trawl contained only a
deep-sea coral, one species of starfish, and two Ophiurans. At the deepest
station, 226, lat. 11° 24’ N., long. 143° 16’ E., occupied by the “Challenger”
in 4475 fathoms, about 140 miles southwest of Guain, only samples of the
bottom were brought up while sounding. At the next station, 226,
lat. 14° 44’ N., long. 142° 13’ E., in 2300 fathoms, about 150 miles north-
west from Guam, the trawl brought up fragments of Freyella, and one

1 General Summary of the scientific observations and results at each of the “ Challenger” observing
stations, by John Murray.

68 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

specimen of Gonostoma. The trawl was again used at Station 230, lat.
26° 29’ N., long. 137° 57’ E., in 2425 fathoms, about 250 miles west of the
Bonin Islands, 510 miles from the Liu Kiu Islands, and about 480 miles
from the nearest point of the coast of Japan. It was only when off
Japan in 345 fathoms, near the noted Hyalonema ground, and other
stations near the coast (Stations 252-2353, 235-237), that rich hauls of the
trawl were again made.

On the line east of Japan, at a distance of about 975 miles from the
coast, Honolulu being distant 2484 miles, a good haul of the trawl was
made in 2300 fathoms, Station 241, lat. 35° 41’ N., long. 157° 42’ KE. An
excellent haul was also made at Station 244, lat. 35° 22’ N., long. 169° 53’ E.,
in 2900 fathoms, Honolulu distant 1891 miles, and the nearest of the
Kurile and Aleutian Islands about 1250 miles. A good haul was obtained
at Station 246, lat. 36° 10’ N., long. 178° E., in 2500 fathoms, about 120
miles east of Station 244, while at Station 248, lat. 37° 41’ N., long.
177 04’ W., in 2900 fathoms, comparatively little was obtained: two sili-
ceous sponges, a specimen of Monocaulus and a Tunicate, with fragments
of a Holothurian and an Echinid. <A still poorer haul was made in 2740
fathoms at Station 252, lat. 37° 52’ N., long. 160° 17’ W., Honolulu distant
1002 iniles.

At Station 253, lat. 38° 09’ N., long. 156° 25’ W., 3125 fathoms, a few
Annelids and Polyzoa were collected. Nothing came up except a man-
ganese nodule from the next station in 3025 fathoms, Honolulu distant
852 miles. When 568 miles from Honolulu, in 2950 fathoms, Station 256,
lat. 30° 22’ N., long. 154° 56’ W., a Leda and a deep-sea sponge came up
with manganese nodules. The rich hauls of two of the stations, 244, 246,
in deep water at a great distance from land, about 1200 miles from the
nearest land, but in the extension of the Japanese current, are in marked
contrast with the poverty-stricken hauls which characterized the trawling
in the line of Admiralty Islands to Japan.

On the line Hawaiian Islands to Tahiti, at Station 264, lat. 14° 19° N.,
long. 152° 37’ W., in a depth of 3000 fathoms, Tahiti distant 1920 miles and
Hawaii about 300 miles, only one specimen of Cladorhiza was obtained

and fragments of a Euplectella. One hundred miles further south, at

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 69

Station 265, lat. 12° 42’ N., long. 152° 01’ W., in 2900 fathoms, obtained
only one specimen of Gonostoma. At Station 270, lat. 2° 34’ N., long.
149° 09’ W., two species of deep-sea Keratosa were obtained in 2925
fathoms, Tahiti distant about 1200 miles. At Station 271, lat. 0° 33’S.,
long. 151° 34’ W., about half-way between Hawaii and Tahiti, in 2425
fathoms, nine species of Keratosa, six of Hexactinellidae, and, in all,
twenty-nine species of Invertebrates and Fishes exclusive of Protozoa. At
the next station, 272, lat. 3° 48’ S, long. 152° 56’ W., in 2600 fathoms,
sixteen species of Invertebrates.and Fishes were collected. At Station 274,
lat. 7 25'S, long. 152° 15’ W., Tahiti and the Marquesas about equidistant,
625 miles, Caroline Island 202, and Vostok Island 160 miles. At Station
276, lat. 13° 28’S., long. 149° 30’ W., in 2350 fathoms, Tahiti distant 240
miles, only six species (10 specimens) of Invertebrates and Fishes are re-
corded from the trawl, while the hauls off Tahiti, though poor, contained
again a comparatively large number of specimens and species.

On the line from Tahiti to Valparaiso the hauls at Station 280, 1940
fathoms, and at Station 281, 2385 fathoms, distant from Tahiti less than
200 miles south, again showed a very great diminution in the number of
specimens and species collected in the trawl. <A similar condition exists
at Stations 285, lat. 32° 30’ S., long. 137° 45” W., and 286, in depths of 2375
and 2335 fathoms, about 1300 miles southeast from Tahiti and nearly
600 miles south of the islands of the southeast extremity of the Paumotus.
The fauna at Station 289, lat. 39° 41’ S., long. 131° 25’ W., about 250 miles
southeast of Station 285, in 2550 fathoms, was equally poor.

From Station 289 the “ Challenger” ran a line nearly east towards Val-
paraiso, distant 2907 miles. At Station 291, lat. 39° 13’S., long. 118° 49’ W.,
in 2250 fathoms, only two species of Monaxonida were obtained. At
Station 293, lat. 39° 04’ S., long. 105° 05’ W., in 2025 fathoms, an Actina-
rian and fragments of siliceous sponges and Gorgonians and Polyzoa were
obtained attached to manganese nodules; Valparaiso distant 1661 miles.
One specimen of Holopsamma was obtained at Station 294, lat. 39° 22’ S.,
long. 98° 46’ W., in 2270 fathoms, Valparaiso distant 1368 miles. At
Station 295, lat. 38° 07’ S., long. 94° 04’ W., one fish (Cyema) was collected

in the trawl, which is also, like Gonostoma, probably a fish belonging to

70 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

the pelagic types, and a Leptocephalid form of Nemichthys. At Station 296,
lat. 38° 06’ S., long. 88° 02’ W., about 500 miles from Juan Fernandez, seven-
teen species (twenty specimens) of Invertebrates were obtained in 1825
fathoms, Globigerina ooze, and at the next station, 297, lat. 37° 29'S.,
302 miles from Juan Fernandez, only a single specimen of Thenea is
recorded; while at Station 298, lat. 34° 7°S., 122 miles from Valparaiso,
nearly 100 specimens of Invertebrates were obtained, belonging to thirty-
three species, and the hauls from Valparaiso south to the Gulf of Pefas, in
1325 to 2160 fathoms, at no time more than 450 miles from shore, in
blue mud or Globigerina ooze, were also rich in specimens and in species,
compared with hauls taken in deep water and far from continental slopes

or large archipelagos.

The following are the results of the trawling of the “ Albatross” during
her present cruise in the tropical Pacific.

At Station
2, 2568 fath-
oms, lat. 28°
23’ N., long.
126° Ov ae
the trawl
came up with
the bag full of
red clay and
of manganese
nodules, _ sili-
ceous sponge
spicules, a
large pink
Benthecetes,

spines of Phor-

MANGANESE NODULES FROM STATION 2.

mosoma, Eu-
phronides, and Benthodytes in fragments. ‘Together with the manganese

nodules came up many sharks’ teeth, whale ear-bones and other fragments

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 71

of cetaceans more or less coated with manganese. There were a number
of species of sharks represented : Charchaordon, Lamna, Oxyrhina, Car-
charias. There were also a number of flat slabs coated with manganese, the
majority from three to four inches thick, but many were nearly six inches
through. We must have brought up at least 800 pounds’ weight of nodules.
The slabs seemed to be composed of volcanic ash. There were many
rounded masses of pumice covered by manganese and fragments of the stem
of a Gorgonian (Isis) coated with manganese.

At this Station we obtained 116 sharks’ teeth, a few ear-bones and

other bones of whales and dolphins.

Nore. — Sir John Murray informs me that at Station 2 some of the material which
seemed to be manganese nodules proved to be rocks, evidently of continental origin, cov-
ered with a thin,coating of manganese.

Mr. J. J. H. Teall, of the Geological Survey of England, who examined these rocks,
reports that they are a fragment of a rounded pebble, consisting of a typical hornblende
andesite; a subangular fragment of a pale-green serpentine ; an angular fragment of a fine-
grained sandstone composed of grains of quartz, felspar, and epidote, minute grains of
mica being also present; fragments of a well-rounded pebble of black chert, traversed by
microscopic quartz veins.

How these pebbles, having all the characteristics of glacial-worn pebbles, came to be
carried to this point is an interesting question. As the shark’s-teeth and cetacean bones
found in the red clay seem to indicate that since tertiary times there have been but very
insignificant deposits at great distance from continental areas, similarly we may be
tempted to assume that these pebbles, which could not have been transported to their
present locality by any agency of the present epoch, were carried to it during the glacial
epoch, the thin coating of manganese indicating how small have been the bottom deposits
since the glacial period.

The “ Challenger” obtained two bushels of manganese nodules at Sta-
tion 281, south of Tahiti, lat. 22° 2’ S., long. 150° 17’ W., in 2385 fathoms,
with centres of volcanic tufa and larger slabs covered at the surface and
in the cracks. The rounded masses of pumice probably have been carried
out to sea for a long distance and finally sinking became coated with
manganese on falling in the red clay deposit. This locality of the “Chal-
lenger” is only about 300 miles from our Station 173, where we also
obtained a magnificent haul of red clay and manganese nodules and
sharks’ teeth.

~I
i)

EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

From south of Tahiti on the way to Valparaiso the “Challenger”
also obtained manganese nodules at Stations 285, 286, 289, in 2375, 2335,
and 2550 fathoms; and further to the east, at Stations 293 and 297, in
2025 and 1775 fathoms. The “Challenger” also found manganese nodules
in 2160 fathoms, about 100 miles from the coast of South America, as well
as in the Atlantic far from continental land, and at one station in the
Indian Ocean in 2600 fathoms; but the ‘‘ Challenger” obtained none north
of the Equator, either in the Atlantic or in the Pacific, so that this first
haul of ours in lat. 28° 23’ N. and long. 126° 57’ W., as well as hauls further
south on our way to the Marquesas, greatly extend the area over which
such deposits of manganese nodules and red clay probably exist, — areas
which, according to Murray, are situated in deep water and far from
continental land, too far from land to be masked by telluric deposits, and
at too great a depth to be covered by the shells of Foraminifera and
other pelagic animals, as suggested by Murray. The “Valdivia” obtained
manganese nodules in the Southern Atlantic in lat. 30° 34.9’ S., long.
6° 10.2’ W., about 2600 fathoms.

We could find no spherules of cosmic iron in the few samples of
manganese nodules which we ground to powder.

In the track of great oceanic currents Globigerine shells extend to
greater depths, and their tests are found mixed with red clay quite
frequently at depths quite beyond those at which they ordinarily disap-
pear; see Stations 14 to 22, on our way to the Marquesas, where the
deposit is a Globigerina ooze at depths far beyond those at which, accord-
ing to Murray, Globigerina ooze should occur,—in depths of 2776, 2440,
2465, 2495, and 2287 fathoms.

At Station 10, in 3088 fathoms, lat. 16° 38’ N., long. 136° 14° W.,
we lowered the “Blake” trawl. Unfortunately there was no evidence
of the trawl having been on the boitom, although we had as much
wire-rope out in proportion to the depth as in other hauls. The net
came up clean, and although it towed open through such an immense
length of column of water, the net contained nothing which we had
not caught with the tow-net inside of 200 fathoms from the surface.

It had so-called deep-sea fishes, — Cyclothone and Myctophum,— and deep-

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 73

sea Crustacea, which are obtained in the open tow-nets at less than 150
fathoms from the surface.

At Station 13, in 2690 fathoms, lat. 9° 57’ N., long. 137° 47° W., red
clay, Radiolarian ooze, light-brown ooze. The “ Blake” trawl came up full
of large manganese nodules, balls varying in diameter from 4} to over 6
inches; a few of the largest measured 61” in diameter. The bottom
contained some animal life, but of course in their long passage to the
surface, among such a mass of rubble, the delicate deep-sea animals come
up very much disfigured and ground to pieces. Attached to some of
the nodules we found pink Webbinas, a small Voluta (?), three species
of Holothurians, among which one brilliant red I could recognize as a
Peniagone. We found also a fragment of a stem of Bathycrinus, half a
dozen joints or so, and part of the upper portion of a Metacrinus(?), a small
Brachiopod (Magasella?) and a few worm-tubes, large siliceous spicules,
and a species of incrusting siliceous sponge, together with delicate cal-
careous worm-tubes attached to some of the flat nodules, and some Serpulze
tubes. A few Schizopods found their way into the trawlnet on its way to
the surface. ‘There were also large reddish-brown Globigerine, evidently
living at that depth in the interstices of the manganese nodules,’ a large
red Nemertean allied to Pelagonemertes, and a small tough-skinned gray-
white Actinian measuring about an inch in diameter when contracted.
We also brought up the same egg-shaped organism with a thin greenish
skin about half an inch in diameter, found by the “ Blake” and former
“ Albatross” expeditions, the nature of which I have not been able to
determine. The manganese nodules were all more or less mammary ;
this is specially well-developed in the flat pieces.

Station 17, 2463 fathoms, lat. 0° 50’ N., long. 137° 54’ W.., fine, light-
gray, yellowish Globigerina ooze. An excellent haul was made with the

“Blake” trawl, considering its depth and its distance from the nearest land;

1 Dr. Mayer kept surface Globigerine in the dark for three weeks. They were brilliant carmine
when collected, and at the end of that time had lost all their color and had become quite pale, like
those found at the bottom. The only colored Globigerine we found on the bottom were those
living attached on the surface or between the cracks of manganese nodules. ‘These were dull
reddish-brown, with much heavier and coarser tests than the carmine or colored species living at the
surface or near it.

74 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

but it being on the line of the equatorial current, it also shows the effect
of the increased supply of food carried by a great oceanic current. This
haul is a striking contrast to those taken farther south to the southeast
of Tahiti at about the same depth, but outside the range of any great
current. In that district we found practically nothing living on the red-
clay bottom. It seems natural to infer that the lines of migration of the
deep-sea fauna of the tropical Pacific must have been along the track of
the equatorial current.

The trawl contained three species of Holothurians, one of which was
bright carmine; a number of siliceous sponges, among which a small
Hyalonema with its Zoanthus attached to the bundle of spicules; a few
colossal spicules nearly as thick as a lead pencil; a lot of the Neusina we
collected in 1891 in the Panamic region; two species of Actiniw, one of
which a brilliant carmine, the other heavy, thick-skinned, whitish, both
found attached to siliceous spicules; a species of Archaster, and a good
specimen of Linopneustes; a peculiar fish with a long head and_pec-
toral fins, spread vertically upright across the flanks, and having two
long caudal filaments; a few manganese nodules, and a number of small
sharks’ teeth; a couple of specimens of Scalpellum, and what I took to
be fragments of the interesting Ascidian Octacnemus of Moseley. Some of
the large siliceous spicules must have been 24” long. Also a small white,
thick, stiff-armed Ophiuran; some worm-tubes built up in part of mud and
of siliceous spicules; two excellent specimens of Terebella, a Pectinaria-like
worm, and great numbers of Radiolarians collected from the intestines of
the Linopneustes; two specimens of Amusium; a Gasteropod; a Webbina
attached to Neusina; a small Plumularian; a fragment of a Polyzoan;
and a Eucopia which found its way into the net near the surface. The
list of the contents of this trawl-haul is quite sufficient. when contrasted to
that of the haul at Station 173, to emphasize the contrast between locali-
ties in the wake of the great equatorial current and those outside of
its influence.

At Station 25 we lowered the beam-trawl in 830 fathoms, lat. 8° 48’ S.,
long. 139° 48° W., in the channel between Nukuhiva and Washington

Islands, the bottom being Globigerina ooze and volcanic mud. The trawl

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 7d

tripped, but brought up three specimens of Mopsea and an Astroschema
attached to it, of a pinkish-orange color, three Actiniz (Stephanactis),
pink in color, with warty columns, a Pheronema, and pieces of siliceous
sponges. A second haul in the same place brought up a couple of small
manganese nodules, surface fishes, Sternoptyx, and Cyclothone; a large
black Malacosteus, like the Malacosteus indicus of Giinther, with long bar-
bels, a large eye, and a comma-shaped, phosphorescent organ, green-yellow
at the point; the phosphorescence was quite brilliant when the fish was
placed in the dark. The spot was 8” long, the eye itself was a beautiful
dark carmine. The net also contained Atolla Alexandri of Maas, and a
specimen of the thick-nosed phosphorescent surface fish, Ganadis, three
red deep-water prawns, two specimens of Benthesicymus. The latter we
have had from 300 fathoms in the open tow-net.

At Station 51, in 2700 fathoms, lat. 12° 20’ S., long. 144° 15’ W. Red
clay. The sea being a little too heavy for a successful haul, the “ Blake”
trawl came up with the net badly torn; it must have had too heavy a load
of manganese nodules, as the part of the bag left contained about a plate
full of small, irregularly shaped nodules, incrusting also voleanic rock. The
net probably gave away as we broke ground, judging from the indications
of the accumulator.

There is a marked contrast between the hauls on this oceanic line
(Stations 1-72) and our results in the “ Albatross” expedition of 1891,
when never more than 700 miles from shore. We always made excellent
hauls, and there seemed to be an ample food supply on the bottom of
that area, brought by currents and winds from the mainland.

At Station 73 we lowered the trawl in 807 fathoms, lat. 17° 27’ S., long.
149° 32’ W. Fine volcanic sand, Pteropods. It brought up a mass of fine
voleanie mud filled with sticks and leaves and decayed vegetation, frag-
ments of rocks and other telluric material, pieces of sugar cane, and frag-
ments of cocoanut shells. In addition, in the midst of this mixture, one
Holothurian, a Willemoesia, broken shells, fragments and specimens of
Hyalea and many other Pteropod shells, also fragments of Lamellibranchs.

At Station 133 we lowered the trawl in 742 fathoms, lat. 18° 05’ S.,

long. 142° 23’ W. Pteropod ooze. The trawl came up in pieces; the

76 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

pocket of the bag contained a piece of obsidian as large as a hen’s egg, a
piece of pumice and of coral, both coated with manganese, a few fragments
of wood similarly coated, a fragment of Tubipora, also coated, and a mass
of Globigerinze connected by manganese, as well as volcanic fragments and
particles of manganese.

At Station 134, in 807 fathoms, lat. 18° 06’ S., long. 142° 24’ W. Fine
coral sand and minute manganese nodules and Pteropod ooze. We sent
the swabs down; brought up two specimens of Brisinga, a couple of small
Diadematide, fragments of a Gorgonian stem coated with manganese, a few
young siliceous sponges and fragments of others, two species of Ophiurans,
and fragments of a Bryozoan. Also some small manganese nodules and
sharks’ teeth. A poor haul for such a depth and such a bottom.

At Station 139, in 812 fathoms, lat. 18° 08’ S., long. 141° 04’ W. Coral
sand. The “Blake” trawl brought up a fine Brisinga, a couple of genera
of Gorgonians, a Galathodes, a piece of stem of an Isis, young siliceous
sponges, a fine Penzus from intermediate waters (?), and some Ophiu-
rans, —in fact, the same things we brought up at Station 134 im the
tangles. The ground must have been very rough, as the trawl caught
repeatedly, and when it reached the surface was found badly torn along
the sides.

At Station 173, in 2440 fathoms, lat. 18° 55’S., long. 146° 32’ W. Red
clay. The “Blake” trawl brought up about half a ton of flattened man-
ganese nodules, generally mammilated on the surface, and slabs of all sizes,
from that of a large potato to that of a pea. Many of the nodules were
spherical or ellipsoidal. Many of the flattened pieces contained large
sharks’ teeth; there were but few ear-bones or other bones of cetaceans.
Some of the sharks’ teeth were fully 4” long.

At Station 183, in 2472 fathoms, lat. 19° 04’ S., long. 167° 41’ W. Red
clay washed out. Radiolarian ooze, voleanic particles. The “ Blake” trawl
came up with a large hole on the side and the bottom partly carried away,
yet there were still left in the bag a number of small flat manganese nod-
ules, from the size of a small walnut down. ‘The bag also contained a few
pieces of pumice and one shark’s tooth, a few siliceous sponge-spicules,

and fragments of a small siliceous sponge.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 77

At Station 185, in 4173 fathoms, lat. 21° 18’ S., long. 173° 31’ W. Light-
brown volcanic mud and Radiolarian ooze. A small “ Blake” trawl was
lowered, protected by canvas flaps; it came up in excellent condition. A
half-gallon jar was filled with fragments of a large siliceous sponge allied
to Aulochene or Crateromorpha which the “ Challenger” obtained in shal-
lower water, in about 500 fathoms, in the western Pacific. —

The bottom deposits collected by the “ Albatross.”

A comparison of the deposits collected by the “ Albatross” on the line
from San Francisco to Tahiti with the “Challenger” line of soundings
from Station 253 north of the Hawaiian Islands to Tahiti shows a great
similarity in their characteristic structure. At Station 2 (lat. 28° 23’ N.,
long. 126° 51’ W.), in only 2568 fathoms, the “ Albatross” struck the char-
acteristic Pacific red clay which was met with as far as Station 14 (lat. 6°
41' N., long. 157° W.), where in 2776 fathoms Globigerine and Forami-
nifera predominated and no Radiolarians occurred, while at next station,
in 2583 fathoms, Radiolarians were again obtained, as well as at Station
18 (lat. 6° 25’ S., long. 138° 59’ W.), in 2468 fathoms, and at Station 23
(lat. 8° 33’ S, long. 159° 36’ W.), in 1802 fathoms, near the Marquesas,
together with volcanic particles. At the intermediate stations, varying in
depth from 1959 to 2463 fathoms, Globigerina ooze was obtained. It may
be stated that Stations 14 to 25 are in a general way in the tract of the
equatorial current and counter current, characterized by the larger num-
ber of species constituting its surface fauna than in the stations to the

north.

Norr.— Sir John Murray in his Report on the bottom deposits has frequently called
attention to the great bulk of pelagic Foraminifera which are found in the bottom deposits.
While it is true that many of the Globigerine of which the tests are collected must live
at or very near the bottom? yet the pelagic species, which are far less numerous, often
compose fully 80 per cent of the carbonate of lime occurring in the deposit. According
to Brady he records as collected by the “Challenger” only 19 species of pelagic Foramini-
fera: seven of Globigerinz, six species of Pulvinulina, and the following genera, Orbulina,
Hastigerina, Spheroidina, Candeina, Cymbalopora and Chilostomelia, represented each
by one species. But they occur on the surface in such swarms that their dead tests, when
they reach the bottom, completely overwhelm those of the bottom living species.

1 W. B. Carpenter, in Proc. R. S., Vol. XXIII, p. 235.

EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

=I
io /9)

The same may probably be said of the Radiolarians. The surface Radiolarians are
less numerous than the species living near the bottom, but the pelagic species occur
in such hosts as to outweigh at certain localities those living on the bottom. The
number of pelagic species of Radiolarians’ is far greater than that of the Globigerine,
and there are no groups of the former living attached to the bottom, as in the case with
the arenaceous and porcellanous types of Foraminifera. On the other hand there must
be living and floating in close proximity to the bottom, far from continents and at depths
greater than 2000 fathoms, hosts of abyssal Radiolarians, among which the Nasselaria
and the Pheodaria predominate. Asa general rule the abyssal forms are characterized
by their smaller size and massive skeletons, while the surface types are distinguished
by their more delicate skeletons.? The surface and pelagic Radiolarians probably do not
extend far beyond 200 fathoms in depth, and belong especially to the Spumellaria and
Acantharia, and, according to Haeckel, with but few Osculosa, and fewer Pheodaria than
Nassellaria. Unfortunately, no detailed account of the bathymetrical range of the
minor groups of Radiolarians accompanies the report of Haeckel,’ but he naturally
attaches the greatest significance to the dependence of their geographical distribution
on oceanic currents.

The bottom deposit at the stations in the vicinity of the Marquesas are
characterized by an admixture of Globigerina ooze and volcanic particles,
In the channel separating the Marquesas from the northwestern Pau-
motus, a distance of not more than 450 miles, the deeper parts, in from 2456
fathoms to 2700 fathoms, are marked by all the characteristics of the
deposits in the deeper parts of the eastern Pacific north of the Marquesas ;
the deposits passing from red clay associated with Radiolarians to red clay
mixed with Foraminifera, and in the lesser depths, 1208 fathoms to 1952
fathoms, we meet with deposits consisting of Globigerina ooze, and finally
coral sand in the vicinity of the Paumotu Plateau.

Again in the channel separating the Paumotus from the Society Islands
a deposit allied to red clay, composed in part of Globigerinw, was found
in the deeper parts at a depth of somewhat over 2200 fathoms; the Glo-
bigerine becoming mixed with large proportions of voleanic mud as we
approached the Society Islands.

1 Tlaeckel enumerates more than 4300 species, and remarks that probably twice that number
could be distinguished from a more detailed examination of the “Challenger” material. Report
on the Radiolaria collected by H. M. S. “Challenger,”? 1887, Zodlogy; Vol. XVIII., First
Part, p. ii.

2 Haeckel, 1. c., p. elfi.
® Haeckel, 1. ¢., p. exlvi.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 75

Through the Paumotu Archipelago the soundings in less than 1400
fathoms are marked by the frequent occurrence of Pteropod ooze and of
Globigerine, but by far the greater number of soundings show a bottom
made up of Globigerins and of coral sand in proportion to the distance
from the atolls; the coral sand being coarser nearer the shores, gradually
becoming finer as we proceed seaward, and at the same time containing a
larger percentage of Globigerine or of Pteropod shells. Compare the
records of the shallower stations in the northwestern Paumotus, such as
Stations 79, 89, 91, 96, 106, 107, 115 to 117, made up of comparatively
coarse coral-sand, with deeper stations like 82, 97, 104, 109, at which the
coral sand is finer, containing a larger percentage of Pteropods or Globi-
gerine, and with the still deeper stations like numbers 77, 87, 93, 94,
102, 103, 110-114, where the Globigerine make up the greater part of
the deposit.

A similar state of things is found to hold good with the deposits at the
stations occupied in the central Paumotus, as well as in the easternmost
islands of the Paumotus we visited. When the depths separating the
islands are greater, as at Station 146 (lat. 18° 56’ S., long. 139° 05’ W.)
and 152 and 154 to 157 (lat. 20° 46.5’ S., long. 142° 51’ W.), on the way
from Pinaki to Nukutipipi, we find again red clay in depths varying from
2284 to 2467 fathoms containing a greater or less percentage of Foramini-
fera. Similarly at Stations 166 and 167 (lat. 20° 02'S., long. 144° 28’ W.),
in the deep water which separates Anu Anuraro from Hereheretue, in 2265
and 2524 fathoms, the bottom deposit is red clay with an admixture of
Foraminifera; while at stations varying in depth from about 700 fathoms
to nearly 2000 fathoms the deposit is made up of coral sand, Pteropod ooze,
and Globigerine in different percentages, as in the deposits of the north-
western Paumotus.

The deep soundings between Hereheretue and Tahiti at Stations 172
and 173 (lat. 18° 55’ S., long. 146° 32' W.) were made up of red clay
and Globigerinee ; and on approaching Tahiti the coral sand which charac-
terized the vicinity of the atolls in the Paumotus is replaced in the Society
Islands by voleanic mud and volcanic sand and a small percentage of
Globigerine.

80 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

One cannot fail to notice the frequent occurrence of particles of man-
ganese and of small manganese nodules in the deposits through the Pau-
motus and Society Islands.

In the deep water between Niue and Tonga which culminates at Station
186 (lat. 21° 18’ S., long. 175° 51’ W.) in 4540 fathoms, we meet with red-
clay deposits containing Radiolaria, as at Stations 183 (lat. 19° 04'S. long.
167° 41’ W.), 184, and 185 in 2472, 3141, and 4173 fathoms, though at
Station 182 the red clay in 2882 fathoms contained a considerable percent-
age of Globigerine.

On the way from Vayau to Fiji we found voleanic mud to the westward
of Letté while crossing the voleanic ridge which runs parallel to the Tonga
Islands Plateau. Crossing the eastern Fiji Plateau we meet with deposits
of coarse coral-sand, Pteropod ooze, and fine coral-ooze, associated with man-
ganese particles and Globigerinee, much as in the deposits of the Paumotus.

On our way through the Ellice and Gilbert Islands to Jaluit we obtained
in the proximity of the islands coarse coral-sand, Pteropod ooze, and fine
coral-sand ooze more or less mixed with Globigerine. In the deeper
waters separating the islands of each group, and the groups themselves, we
encountered only Globigerina ooze, varying greatly in the size of the
species obtained; very coarse species being met with at Stations 198,
lat. 0° 46' N., long. 175° 09’ E., and 202 in the Gilbert group in 1565 and
1569 fathoms.

At Station 197, in 2221 fathoms, between Apamama and Maiana, we
met with the same Globigerinz, characterizing the equatorial current, which
we had obtained before in the Paumotus and to the northward. Although
on our way to Jaluit from Taritari we sounded in over 2500 fathoms,
yet we nowhere obtained red clay in the bottom deposit, either on that line
or in the deep water separating the islands of the Ellice or of the Gilbert
group. See Stations 197, 2221 fathoms; 204 (lat. 1° 52’ N., long. 173°
15! E.), 2156 fathoms; 206, 2255 fathoms; 208 (lat. 3° 57’ N., long. 172° E.),
2486 fathoms; 209, 2505 fathoms; 210, 2444 fathoms; 21] (lat. 5° 20’ N.,
long. 169° 43’ E.), 2411 fathoms; at all of which Globigerina ooze was
obtained. We found the same conditions in the Marshall group, coarse

coral-sand, passing, according to depth and distance from land, into fine

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 81

coral-sand, or coral-sand ooze, with a gradually increasing percentage of
Globigerine. These are met with in as great a depth as 2613 fathoms, at
Station 213 between Jaluit and Ailanglab Lab and all through the Mar-
shall group in deep water in the channels between the different groups.
See Stations 219, 2179 fathoms; 226, 2231 fathoms; 229, 1583 fathoms ;
232, 2221 fathoms; 233-234, varying from 1009 fathoms to 2486 fathoms ;
while in the shallower stations referred to above, such as Stations 216, 1968
fathoms; 218, 631 fathoms; 221, 400 fathoms; 222, 827 fathoms; 227, 228,
230, in 468, 934, and 482 fathoms, — we find that the bottom deposits con-
tain coral sand, changing from coarse to fine and then to ooze with the
increase in depth. .

Red clay is, however, met with in the bottom deposits of the northern
part of the Marshall group between Rongelab and Likieb at Stations
223-225, in depths varying from 2469 to 2609 fathoms, though even at
that depth it is associated with a considerable percentage of Globigerine.

Similarly on our way through the Carolines we found Globigerine to
constitute a considerable percentage of the bottom deposits to depths of
nearly 2500-fathoms. See Stations 240, 241, lat. 6° 49’ N., long. 156° 36’ E.;
243, 244, lat. 8° 06’ N., long. 151° 08’ E. The bottom deposits in the
Carolines consist, as we would naturally expect from the geological struc-
ture of the Carolines, near the island groups, in great part of volcanic
mud mixed with coral sand and Globigerine; the size of the sand, vol-
eanie or coral, gradually decreasing as the depth increases. “See Stations
239 and 242.

It is only as we pass into the “Caroline Deep” separating the Carolines
from Guam and the Ladrones that we come upon bottom deposits consisting
of red clay, manganese nodules, and pumice, as well as volcanic particles.
See Stations 245, 2735 fathoms; 246, lat. 10° 34’ N., long. 148° 20’ E.,
2993 fathoms; 247, lat. 11° 35’ N., long. 147° 15’ E., 3213 fathoms; 248,
lat. 12° 51’ N., long. 145° 46’ E., 4813 fathoms; and as we approach Guam
at Station 249, in 2337 fathoms, we come upon deposits of fine volcanic sand.

No soundings were made by the “ Albatross” on the line from Guam
to Yokohama, as the line is parallel for a considerable length with that

run by the “Challenger” from the Admiralty Islands to Japan. In addition
6

82 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

there are numerous soundings by the “U.S.8. Nero” for a proposed
cable line between Guam and a point nearly west in the Philippines, as
well as a very complete line from Guam to Japan. These soundings, with
a line to the east of Guam also run by the “ Nero,” give an excellent idea
of the topography of that part of the Pacific. The character of the bottom
unfortunately is not indicated on the charts issued by the U. S. Hydro-
graphic Office* to show the interesting soundings of the “Nero,” under

commander Belknap, two of which are the deepest soundings as yet taken.

The following is the record of the surface hauls made by the “ Albatross.”

Station 1. Lat. 51° 10’ N., 125° W. 500 miles from Point Conception.
Neither Copepods nor Sagittz, Collozoum, Pleurobrachia, Euphausia,
Macrurans, Hyperia, Schizopods, Thysanopoda, Hyalea, Turris, Dyphies,
Agalma, Aglaura, Oceania, Pyrosoma, Salpze, Carinaria, young fishes.

Station 2. Lat. 28° 23’ N., long. 126° 57’ W. Very poor surface haul.
500 miles from Point Conception. Few Macrurans, Euphausiz, Collozoum,
young flying-fish, transparent Prionotus(?) fish eggs, Aglaura, Velella,
Abyla, tentacles of a Siphonophore on the stray line, which could not be
identified.

Surface haul. Lat. 28° 11’ N., long. 127° 16° W. Large Ctenophores
like Mertensia; an elongated, flask-shaped Cydippe; Salpx, Isopods,
Pteropods, young fishes, Macrurans.

Station 3¢ Lat. 26° 18° N., long. 128° 54° W. Large blue Copepods.
Collozoum, Euphausia, two specimens ; Sagittae, Geryonia, young flying-fish.
Very poor haul.

Station 4. Lat. 24° 30’ N., long. 130° 16° W. Halobates, brilliant red
Globigerine ; Collozoum, three or four species; two large blue Copepods,
a few small fishes, young flying-fishes; young Ianthine ; young Velella.

Station 5. Blue Copepods, brilliant carmine Globigerine, Pteropods,
Spirialis, Diphyes, Collozoum.

Station 6. Lat. 20° 26’ N., long. 133° 28’ W.; Saphirine and a few
Copepods; Collozoum, the same as thus far obtained, young flying-fish and
other small fishes; Globigerinz ; many small lilac Ostracods (poor haul).

1H. O. Charts, 528, 529.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 83

Station 7. Lat. 18° 19’ N., long. 134° 57’ W. Very poor haul. Small
Physalia; small blue and black Copepods; Globigerine ; young flying-fish,
and young of other pelagic fishes ; fragments of Pyrosoma.

At 8 p.M., madea very successful haul in lat. 17° 32’ N., long. 135° 40’ W.,
on the same date as at Station 7. Small transparent Taonius, Copepods,
Euphausix, Sergestes, embryos of Hyperia, Atlanta, and Styliola, Aleyope,
Porpita, Halobates, bells of Diphyes and of Agalma, Crystalloides, Sagitta,
very large species, Firoloides, 2 species of Salpw, Collozoum. We collected
in great abundance all the species we obtained in the morning at Station 7,
from 150 fathoms, and then to the surface.

Station 12. Lat. 12° 07’ N., long. 137° 18’ W. This haul contained Col-
lozoum, and a few Globigerine; small blue, yellow, and brown Copepods
were quite abundant. At 8 p.m. of same day, in lat. 10° 57.6’ N., long.
137° 35.4" W., made a surface haul. Euphausiz were very abundant,
small phosphorescent fishes, and many other young surface fish, Copepods,
three species of Pteropods, Spirialis, Salpx, three species of Sergestes larvx,
small Macrurans, Halobates. This haul being so successful, we made a
second one immediately after it, and obtained very little; the same things
were collected, but fewer in number, and the absence of Kuphausiz in this
second trial was especially marked.

Station 13. Lat. 9° 57’ N., long. 137° 47’ W. In this surface haul we
collected practically all the so-called deep-sea types which came up in the
“Blake” trawl when dragging from 3088 fathoms to the surface. On the
surface Porpitidee were common, as well as flying-fishes; we were evi-
dently in the equatorial current. The net contained very many small
Sagittee, and small Copepods, only a few large ones, Atlanta, Hyalea, Spiri-
alis, Thysanopoda, Nyctophanes, Nematocelis, Stylocheirus. A very young
Physalia, the youngest yet observed, was drawn by Dr. Mayer. Young
Diphyes. There were no Euphausie in this haul. We made a second
surface-haul at the same place and obtained the same things and in ad-
dition Halobates. -Same date, surface-haul at 8.30 p.m., lat. 9° 26’ N.,
lone. 137° 49’ W., very much like that of the previous night, without the
surface fishes, only one young fish, Spirialis, Tiedemannia, Cuvieria, Euphau-

six, Amphipods, Sergestes, Hyperia, large blue Copepods, and a few others,

4 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

CA

large Sagitta, Collozoum, Globigerine, Geryonia, Aglaura; not so many
Euphausix as on the previous day, when they formed a perfect paste.

Station 14, Lat. 6° 41’ N., long. 137° W. Very good haul. Apparently
still in the equatorial current, judging from the amount of animal life in
the surface-hauls. Blue Copepods, a large Saphirina, Salpz in great abun-
dance, the principal part of haul consisted of them; Glaucus, young Cuttle-
fish, several species of young pelagic fishes, a fine lot of Collozoum. No
Euphausizw, Sergestes very common, young Physalix, Nausithoé, Aegina,
Diphyes.

Same day, 8 p. m., lat. 5° 40’ N., long. 136° 47' W. Huge Pyrosome,
beautifully phosphorescent, were very abundant, Salpx, Sergestes, a few
Copepods, Euphausiz, large Hyperids, a few transparent Penzids, young
fishes, large Appendicularix, Cydippe, same species obtained before, Gery-
onia, Cestum, large Sagittae, and few smaller ones.

Station 15. Lat. 4° 35’ N., long. 136° 54’ W. Very poor haul. Few
Copepods, Diphyes, bells of Agalma, large transparent fish-eggs, a few
Sagitta, Collozoum, and Halobates.

Same day, 8 p.m. Lat. 3° 28’ N., long. 136° 54’ W. A small black,
blunt nosed fish, with luminous organs, a small fish with phosphorescent
organs, hosts of Salpz, at least three species, Cydippe, Aglaura, Rhopalo-
nema moving by convulsive jerks of the velum, Turris-like Medusa, small fly-
ing-fish, huge Appendicularia houses, small Appendicularix, two Copepods
and Euphausiz, Hyperia, Penaeus with very long tentacles. Sagitta, bells
of Diphyes and of Agalma, many Radiolarians in the stomachs of Salpae. It
is astonishing how many Radiolarians and Globigerinw the “ Challenger ”
obtained in the open tow-nets; our experience near the line in the Pacific
has thus far been quite the contrary.

Station 16. Lat. 2° 38’ N., long. 137° 16’ W. Poor surface haul. A
few Salpe, Copepods, Argulus, Collozoum, Sagittee, the same as before ;
young Physalidee, the same Meduse as at Station 15, Turris (?), Euphausia,
Penzeus, young Balanus larve, Diatoms, a fine large Tiedemannia; colder
current running to Westward at rate of two knots.

Same day, 8 p.m. Lat. 1° 45’ N., long. 137° 36’ W. Net full of surface

animals, mainly small Sagittee, Appendiculariz, very many Sergestes, small

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 85

Copepods, a few Euphausiw, Balanus larvee, small Salpe, Cydippe, Gery-
onia, Rhopalonema, a few Collozoum, Liriope hyalinea of Fiji, Halobates,
small black phosphorescent fishes, large Pteropod, Cuvieria.

Station 17. Lat. 0° 50° N., long. 137° 54° W. ‘The surface haul at this
station contained nothing of importance.

Station 18. Lat. 6° 25° S., long. 188° 59° W. Surface haul very poor.
Collozoum, a few Sagittae and Copepods, two small fishes.

Station 25. In the channel between Nukuhiva and Washington Islands.
Very poor. A few Sagitts, a blue Copepod, and Collozoum.

Station 26. Lat. 8° 52’S., long. 139° 52’ W. Very poor haul. Collo-
zoum, Sagitte, small black Copepods and others, Mysis, Halobates, young
Physalia, and Geryonia, — same species as before,— small fish-eggs, many
small solitary Salpe, or isolated zooids, Appendicularia with iridescent tail,
Janthina, Halobates.

Sept. 15. At anchor in Anna Maria Bay, Marquesas. Collected with
the electric light a number of large Appendicularia houses, new Diphyes.

Station 30. Lat. 10° 29’ S., long. 141° 52’ W.) Many Ianthine and Firo-
loides, Sagittee, Collozoum, Diphyes, a few Copepods, fish-eggs, small Diodon,
Sergestes larvae, Orbulina in very fine condition, large Appendicularie, no
Euphausiz, Agalma bells, Salpze.

Station 31. Lat. 12° 20’ S., long. 144° 15° W. Ordinary haul. Sagittae,
two small Copepods, many Lucifer, medium-sized Appendicularix, Firo-
loides, many Ianthinze with Lepas parasites, Porpita and Physalia quite
common; Diphyes bells, Carmaris, perhaps the same species as that de-
scribed by Haeckel, as found off Peru.

Station 31. 7 p.M., same day. <A good surface-haul containing Salpe,
Doliolum, three species of Copepods, black, pink, and red, Lucifer,
Phronima, a large red species, a small red crab, adult of a red Zoea col-
lected yesterday ; large Sergestes, fine transparent specimens; Atlanta,
Rhopalonema, Lyriope hyalina, Diphyopsis.

Station 32. Lat. 13° 37.5’ S., long. 145° 42’ W. Sagitte, four species of
Copepods, Lucifer, Hyperine, Firoloides, Salpz, a large species of Appen-
dicularia, two species of young fishes, Agalma, a new genus of Diphyes

allied to a genus collected at the Marquesas.

86 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Station 35. Lat. 14° 42’S., long. 147° 08’ W. 8 p.m., at anchor off
Avatoru Pass. Cydippe, Phronima, Appendicularia, and Copepods.

September 23. Surface-haul in Rangiora Lagoon near anchorage.
Many Appendiculariz, Sagitte, Cydippe, Rhopalonema, Epenthesis, first
time we have found Hydroids. No Crustacea.

It is to be noted that in the Pacific, far away from land, we only meet
Narcomedusxe, Cunanthidx, and the like, while Hydroid Medusx are found
near shores. The same result was obtained by the “Plankton” Expedition.

Station 48. Off Avatoru Pass, Rangiroa. An excellent haul, containing
small phosphorescent fishes, Squilla larvae, Zoex ; Penzeids, with red at base
of antennze, many Copepods, Kuphausiz, transparent larvee of many shore
genera of Brachiurans and Macrurans, Syllis, Goniodactylus, larve of Scil-
laridee, Nausithoe, two species of Rhopalonema, Cydippe, Diphyopsis, Pelagia,
Octopus, Pteropods, Appendicularix, Halobates, Collozoum, Salpzx, Sagitte.

Station 73. Lat. 17° 27'S. long. 149° 32’ W. Very poor haul; only
obtained one small flounder and one Cyema.

At 7 p.m. on the same day an excellent haul was made, containing large
and small Sagitte, Salpz, large Appendicularie, Agalma bells, Diphyopsis,
Rhegmatodes, Stomobrachium, Aglaura, Amphipods, two species of Penzids,
one fine Nyctophanes, a red Copepod, blunt-headed black fish with phospho-
rescent organs, also young of large-headed fish with phosphorescent organs,
Sergestes, larvae of Willemoesia, no Euphausiz, three species of Pteropods,
Cuvieria, Styliola, Alciopa, Collozoum.

Station 133. Lat. 18° 05’ S., long. 142° 23° W. A very poor haul, con-
taining a small flying fish, Abyla, Diphyopsis, Collozoum.

Station 139. Lat. 18° 08’ S., long. 141° 04" W. A very poor haul, con-
taining only Pneumodermon larvee and small Salp, a couple of Copepods,
Diphyes bells, and Collozoum.

Station 173. Lat. 18° 55’ S., long. 146° 32’ W. A poor haul, with two
species of Collozoum, three of Copepods, Diphyopsis, and Agalma bells.

As is shown from the surface hauls made in the Paumotus, the number
of pelagic animals is quite small, and even the few successful hauls did not
compare in richness with those made while crossing the equatorial current.

We had a similar experience with our surface hauls while cruising through

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 87

the leeward Society Islands, the Cook, and Tonga Archipelagos, as will be
seen from the record which follows : —

Noy. 16. Near the west side of Huaheine. Calm. Very poor haul: afew
Copepods, Collozoum, mass of Trichodesmium, At anchor in Hurepiti Bay,
Tahaa. By electric light a fair haul was made of Copepods, Polygordius,
young Tamoya, Lucifer, many crustacean larva, mainly Brachiurans, many
Ostracods, Styliola.

Nov. 17. At Bora Bora, 8 p.m., we obtained from the surface haul
Ostracods, Lucifer, Appendiculariz, Sagitte, Squille larvae, Megalops, small
fishes, Macrurans, Ctenophores; very poor in Copepods. <A second haul
made with electric light contained mainly Crustaceans, specially Ostracods,
also Sagittee and Appendiculariz.

Nov. 24. Station 183. Lat. 19° 04’ S., long. 167° 41° W. A very poor
haul: a few Collozoum, four small Copepods, one Ostracod.

Nov. 29. A surface haul made at Tongatébu by electric light con-
tained only four Copepods.

Dec. 4. A surface haul at Vavau by electric light brought together
quite a number of young fishes, a few Copepods and Schizopods, Halobates,
and young Linerges.

Dec. 23. About one mile off shore, off the north entrance to Funa-
futi. A few Copepods, Collozoum, Tomopteris, pelagic fishes, and two
species of Halobates.

Jan. 1, 1900. Off the south shore of Tarawa. Collected by electric
light large numbers of embryos of Crustacea and young fishes.

Jan. 5. At Taritari anchorage. Collected by electric light an immense
number of Copepods, together with pelagic Annelids, Autolytus, young
fishes, and many embryos of shore Macrurans and Brachiurans.

Jan. 18. At anchor, Rongelab. A surface haul by electric light brought
a large number of embryos of Crustacea and of young fishes.

Station 222. About one and a half miles south, off the southeast pass, of
Rongelab. A surface haul obtained only Collozoum and one blue Copepod.

Jan. 20. At anchor in Likieb lagoon. Surface haul by electric light
obtained Autolytus, many Annelids, young fishes, and larvae of Macrurans

and Brachiurans.

io 2)
(9/0)

EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Jan. 22. At anchor in Wotje. Surface haul by electric light; obtained
mainly young fishes and larve of shore Crustacea, a good many Copepods,
and a few Annelids.

Jan. 24. At anchor in Arhno lagoon. Made a surface haul by electric
light; obtained young Squid, fishes, Sagitta, Bolina, Macruran larvee, and
Copepods.

Jan. 27. A second haul made at the Arhno anchorage by electric light
obtained many Squid, young fishes, many Copepods, Nereis and Hetero-
nereis-like Annelids, and larvee of Macrurans.

Feb. 26. At our anchorage in Truk we obtained a number of phos-
phorescent Annelids skimming over the surface, appearing as_ brilliant
luminous spots, and extending, as the animal moved rapidly, into long,
thin, tortuous lines from one to two feet in length.

We did but little towing at Fiji, where 1 had done considerable work
off Suva during a former visit in the winter of 1897-1898 while cruising
through the group in the “ Yaralla.’ The pelagic material collected at
that time, as well as the collections made by Dr. Woodworth at Samoa in
1898, will be incorporated with the reports on similar material obtained by
the present expedition. We were greatly surprised at the extreme poverty
of the surface hauls made within the atolls wherever we anchored in the
Ellice, Gilbert, or Marshall Islands, with the exception of a haul made by
electric light in Taritari, when the nets came up filled with a swarm of
Copepods, with many young Annelids, larva of Brachiurans and Macru-
rans, as well as young fishes.

We had a similar experience when towing in the Carolines in the belt
of the trades. In fact, the poverty of the surface fauna of the regions of
the Pacific which we traversed (far from land) was very marked, with the
exception of the limited tract while crossing the equatorial current, as con-
trasted to the abundance of animal life found in the Panamie district, or in
the track of the Gulf Stream and in the West Indian area.

This renders it far more difficult to obtain data for the bathymetrical and
geographical distribution of the pelagic fauna of the Pacific, and until far
more extensive material has been brought together, the localization of the

surface faunse of the Pacific realm must be left in a very indefinite state.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 89

All we may assert at present is that there is a great intertropical belt ex-
tending north and south of the equator twenty or twenty-five degrees of
latitude and reaching from the Central American district west, as far as the
East Indian Archipelago. The surface fauna of this extensive area is quite
uniform and has a wide geographical range in longitude ; while both north
and south of it we have the temperate surface fauna, which in latitude passes
gradually into a subarctic and subantarctic fauna. The tropical fauna ts
characterized by the greater number of genera and ‘species and the small
number of individuals of each. As we proceed north or south into the
temperate or subarctic and subantarctic regions the diversity of the fauna
shows a marked diminution in the number of genera and species, with a
corresponding increase in the number of individuals of the species charac-
teristic of the temperate and of the more northern or southern belts. As
regards the correlation of the fauna of these different regions in depth and
in latitude, the material available for such a comparison has not yet been

sufficiently worked up.
Hauls made at intermediate depths by the “ Albatross.”

To supplement the surface hauls the open tow-nets were sent to tow
at depths varying from 100 to 400 fathoms, and after having dragged
at certain depths they were run up to the surface open, thus mixing
the materials which might have been obtained at different depths by
closing-nets. One cannot fail to be struck with the fact that the nets sent
down to these greater depths did only in very few instances collect any
forms which might be said to live in intermediate depths, as compared with
those collected in the surface hauls.

At the following stations hauls with the open tow-net (unless otherwise
stated) were made by the “ Albatross” at definite depths for a limited time,
then the open tow-net was dragged to the surface. The legend is as
follows, viz.: Station 1. At 300 fathoms and to surface; meaning that the
open tow-net was dragged at a depth of 300 fathoms generally twenty to
twenty-five minutes, and then dragged to the surface and contents of net
examined. Other stations have a corresponding legend. The net was
kept practically at the depth indicated by means of the clinometer in use
on the “ Albatross.”

90 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Station 1. Lat. 31° 10’ N., long. 125° W. At 300 fathoms and to sur-
face. Large Copepods, Larve of Balanus, Ostracods, Macrurans; the same
Oceania and Diphyes as on the surface; Hyalea, Carinaria, a transparent
Alciopa; dead Globigerine and Orbuline.

Station 2. Lat. 28° 23’ N., long. 126° 57° W. At 350 fathoms and to
surface. Tentacles of Siphonophores. Bathyphysa came up entangled on
the dredging wire. Gnathophausiz, Hyperid, many Copepods, Euphausiz,
a Scopeloid, large Tomopteris with violet band in middle, and white flappers.
Second haul: 100 fathoms and to surface. Remarkable fish with pedun-
culated eyes, Macrurans, Copepods.

Station 3. Lat. 26° 18’ N., long. 128° 54’ W. At 200 fathoms and to sur-
face. Large blue Copepods, numerous small white Copepods, yellowish-
brown Copepods. 660 miles to Point Conception. Collozoum, young
flying-fish, Sagittee, EKuphausie, Phronima, Firoloides, Hyalea, Cuvieria,
Styliola, Geryonia with six canals; very transparent Aleyopide.

Station 4. Lat. 24° 30’ N., long. 180° 16’ W. At 500 fathoms and to sur-
face. Numerous large Copepods, blue, brown, and red; one with red an-
terior part of carapace; small Copepods, red and white; Euphausie,
Ostracods, Saphirina, small transparent Alciopa, Styliola, a Rhizophysa
12" long attached to the wire rope; Diphyes bells, Collozoum. Collected
nothing which had not been obtained when towing at 200 fathoms.

Station 5. Lat. 22° 42’ N., long. 131° 54’ W. At 150 fathoms and to
surface. Many large gray and brown Copepods, large red Copepod, Ptero-
pods, large Sagitta, Diphyes, mutilated Taonius.

Station 6. Lat. 20° 26’ N., long. 133° 28’ W. At 150 fathoms and to sur-
face. Small Copepod with black appendages (subsequently often found), large
red and brown Copepods, Cydippe, Collozoum, Globigeringe, Styliola, Sagitta,
Sergestes larve, small Taonius, Amphipods, and a large Stenorhynchus.

Station 7. Lat. 18° 19’ N.,long. 134° 57’ W. At 150 fathoms and to sur-
face. Fair haul of Copepods, Euphausiz, Phronime, Cystosoma, Sergestes,
small black Copepods, large pink Copepods, Firoloides, Sagitta ; fragments
of a large transparent Solmaris.

Station 12. Lat. 12° 07’ N., long. 137° 18’ W. At 150 fathoms and to
surface. Excellent haul, Agalma, Diphyes, large /igina, all Copepods of

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 91

large species; large transparent Amphipod; Salpze with large red
nucleus; large Sagittee, Collozoum; marked absence of Euphausiz and
other pelagic Macrurans, no Rhizopods on the surface ; Pteropods, many
Atlanta, Hyalea, Styliola, Cuvieria, Tiedemannia; very active large
Ostracod of reddish color and with a transparent shell; Appendicularix,
Globigerine, Amphyon Reynaudi. The Salpe were full of Radiolarians
of the same species as those brought up from the bottom in the sound-
ing-cup.

Station 14. Lat. 6 41’ N., long. 187° W. At 150 fathoms and to surface.
In general the same things as at the surface. Leptocephalus, Salpe and
many Pteropods, Pyrosoma, young fishes, Siphonophore bells, many
Squilla embryos, Oxyrhynchus, also Sergestes, not many Copepods, the
few collected were very large.

Station 15. Lat. 4° 35’ N., long. 136° 54’ W. At 150 fathoms and to sur-
face. Large Cestum, a few Copepods and Euphausix, Eretmocaris, large
white Macruran, small Saphirina-like Copepod, the same Salpx as yester-
day, very large Atlanta, Spirialis, Styliola, a few Tomopteris, Sagitta, the
remarkable Tunicate, Octacnemus, figured by Moseley, a few colonies of a
small Pyrosoma, Globigerinze, Halobates.

Station 16. Lat. 2° 38’ N., long. 137° 16’ W. At 250 fathoms and to surface.
Fine haul. Many Pelagothurixw, Diphyes, Diphyopsis, Turris, Leptocepha-
lus, young fishes and mollusks, Copepods, Penaids, Euphausix, Tomopteris,
and other pelagic worms; Pteropods, Hyalea, Atlanta, Styliola, Spirialis,
Sagittee, Salpxe ; the Salpe full of Radiolarians ; Collozoum, no Globigerine
or Radiolarians at surface.

Tanner net, at 330-350 fathoms. In the closed lower bag only a couple
of Copepods were obtained. In the open upper bag four species of fishes,
Pelagothuriw, a number of large red Schizopods, Penaids, and large red
Copepods, Sergestes, large transparent Phyllodoce with spots on the side,
a large Ostracod with chocolate-brown colored shell, all of which have been
obtained before at a less depth.

Station 18. Lat. 6° 25’ S., long. 138° 59’ W. At 400 fathoms and to surface.
Net carried away; too rough. Fragments of Sigalion, a couple of young

fishes, small Octopus, large Copepods, a few Euphausie, a large Bentho-

Qt EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

oad

earis, the same that was obtained in the trawl by the “ Challenger ”
(Pl. 123) in a depth said to be two miles deep. We may safely
assume that the majority of the Gnathophausiz and Schizopods are
not from the bottom, but live near the surface; also that all Macrurans
with swimming appendages are not necessarily from the bottom. Penzeids
with and without powerful swimming appendages, but long-legged types
like Nematocarcinus, come from the bottom. Dr. Moore, who carefully
examined the three species of Macrurans we brought up from the un-
successful trawl, in 3088 fathoms, says they have all been found at less
than 100 fathoms. The same may be said of the fishes collected in that
haul. ;

Station 26. Lat. 8° 52’ S., long. 139° 52’ W. At 300 fathoms and to
surface. Several red Penzids and so-called deep-sea fishes, Euphausie,
Sergestes larvee, Annelids, and fragments of transparent pelagic Annelids,
Sagitte, young Sternoptyx and other species of young fishes, Salpx, Aglaura,
large bells of Diphyes, Peneid with long antennx, the same as that ob-
tained in haul from 830 fathoms!

Station 27. Lat. 9° 01’ S, long. 140° 04’ W. At 300 fathoms and to
surface. Fine lot of Penzids with long antenne, Scopelids, Euphausie,
Zoex of shore Brachiurans, a fine Nemichthys! so-called deep-sea fish ;
Leptocephalus, and three other species of small fishes ; Actinia embryos,
Tanais, Agalma bells, Diphyes, and a new genus of Diphyes with opaque
bells, a large Pilidium measuring half an inch, Sergestes, Pandalus, a short
Tomopteris with marked yellow patches at the base of the flappers.

Station 50. Lat. 10° 29’ S., long. 141° 52’ W. At 300 fathoms and to
surface. Two species of phosphorescent fishes, a young Diodon, Euphausie,
a few Copepods, a large red Zoea, Carinaria, Firoloides, Styliola, Hyalea, a
small Siphonophore, Agalma bells, transparent Annelids and the large
Pilidium again, Sagittee, Tomopteris, Alciopa, and other species of worms,
Salpze, Gasteropods in the veliger stage.

Station 32. Lat. 13° 37’ S., long. 145° 42’ W. At 300 fathoms and to
surface. Five species of fishes, Euphausia, three species of large Copepods,
Lucifer, Sergestes, Oxycephalus, the same large Pilidium as before, Rhopalo-

nema, Diphyopsis, Abyla.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 93

Oct. 5. Off Point Venus, Tahiti. At 350 fathoms and to surface. At-
lanta, and small fishes. Wire parted, net inside out.

Station 91. Off Fakarava. At 350 fathoms and to surface. Very poor
haul. A Tamoya, the young of the large Charybdea caught off Anaa(?)
Euphausia, Sagitta, young fishes, two species.

Oct. 28. Two miles off Marokau (west shore). At 300 fathoms and
to surface. Very poor haul. Sagitta, Salpxe, Diphyes, Abyla, large Cuvieria.
Among the Paumotus the surface fauna is very poor; we have seen little
or no phosphorescence while steaming through the group until on the
night when making Aki Aki, when there seemed to be a little more pelagic
life, judging by the phosphorescence.

Station 173. Lat. 18° 55’ S., long. 146° 32’ W. Half way from Here-
heretue to Mehetia. At 100 fathoms and to surface. Poor haul. Diphyes,
Liriope, Euphausia, Abyla, Sagitta, Copepods, Saphirina, Collozoum very
abundant, two forms of colonies, Penzeids, Tomopteris, Syllis, a small species
of Salpze, large Appendicularix. At the same locality, at 300 fathoms and
to surface, we obtained exactly the same things, with the addition of a few
Pteropods, Cuvieria.

Dee. 23. One mile off the north entrance to Funafuti, At 150 fathoms
and to surface. Smooth water, very bright day. Brought up Beroé, Li-
riope, Bougainvillia, Sagitta, several species of Copepods, pelagic Annelids,
Tomopteris, Pteropods, a large pink Appendicularia, Schizopods, Saphirina,
Collozoum, a few red Globigerins, larvee of Macrurans and Brachiurans.

At Station 222, about one and one half mile south, off southeast pass
into Rongelab. At 150 fathoms, and to surface. Excellent haul. Obtained
Firoloides, Sagitta, Pteropods, Criseis, Cuvieria, several species of brilliantly
colored Copepods, red, blue; a transparent Argulus-like Crustacean, Collo-
zoum, Solmaris, transparent pelagic Annelids, Taonius, several species of
Macrurans, Salpx, the stomachs of which contained many Radiolarians.

Dr. Woodworth made a few hauls with the Kriimer quantitative nets.

Eight of the hauls are pairs, taken inside and outside of lagoons.

One pair, three quarters mile off the east point of Funafuti, at fifteen
fathoms in 250 fathoms, and from fifteen fathoms close to bottom, inside of

lagoon, half a mile from the village.

94 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

One pair, one and a half miles off the south point of Rongelab, at fifteen
fathoms in 450 fathoms, and inside at our anchorage, at twelve fathoms
one mile from the shore.

One pair, half a mile off South Pass into Likieb, at fifteen fathoms in
468 fathoms, and inside of Likieb Atoll at our anchorage, at ten fathoms.

One pair, one mile off South Pass into Wotje, at 30 fathoms in 482
fathoms, and one mile inside Rurick Pass, at our anchorage, at fifteen
fathoms in twenty-two fathoms.

A single haul off the southeast point of Tarawa, in fifteen fathoms in
200 fathoms; a single haul, at our anchorage in Arhno Lagoon, at fifteen
fathoms in twenty fathoms.

All these showed an excess of organic life in the lagoon as compared
with that obtained outside of the lagoons. It does not strike me as if
the results obtained heretofore, or the few data we collected, were of
great value in determining the question of the proportion of food sup-
plies to corals growing inside of a lagoon or on its sea faces, either on
the weather or lee side.

The conditions inside of a lagoon are very different from those
outside, and depend greatly upon the depth of water on the weather
rim of the lagoon, the extent of the land-rim, the number and dimen-
sions of the passages leading in and out of the lagoon on the weather
or lee side, and the trend of the lagoon as related to the prevailing
winds.

In a lagoon which is comparatively shut out from the general circulation
of the waters surrounding it, we naturally have conditions radically different
from those lagoons in which the prevailing winds drive over the submerged
rim of the weather-side a mass of water, pouring into the lagoon all the
surface organisms of the adjoining sea. Such a closed lagoon is Pinaki,
for instance. The amount of pelagic life which finds its way into its
shallow lagoon through the narrow gap communteating with the sea must
of necessity be very small compared to the mass of water driven mto
such a huge lagoon as Wotje, of which so great a part of the outer rim
is submerged, with one to six fathoms; and again, quite a different state

of things must exist in the interior of a lagoon of which the rim on the

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 95

lee side is made up of large islands, and on the weather-side of shallow
flats separated by narrow gaps, allowing but a comparatively small amount
of water to be driven into the lagoon from that side. In a semi-closed
lagoon like Pinaki there are but few corals, when compared to those
found in such an open lagoon as Wotje, and there are none growing in
the closed lagoon of Niau.

The fact remains that the corals growing on the sea face of an atoll or
of a barrier or fringing reef are far more massive and abundant than those
which grow inside of the lagoon. While it cannot be denied that the
corals of the lagoon are in many localities more numerous in species,
yet they never extend to as great a depth, and never have the luxu-
riant growth or form the colossal heads which characterize those of the
sea face.

Furthermore, the amount of animal life, irrespective of corals, which
finds its sustenance on the sea face of a reef is very great, and its super-
abundance does not seem to indicate a lack of food-supply as compared
with that existing in the lagoon.

To be of value it seems to me that these quantitative experiments
should be accompanied with a comparative statement of the amount of
water sifted through each lagoon, as it were, in which the experiments
are conducted. And furthermore, the amount of animal life coming to
the surface, or living to a depth of ten or fifteen fathoms outside of any
atoll, must be fully as fluctuating a quantity in these regions as it is
known to be elsewhere, depending upon the season, the time of the day,
and atmospheric conditions, all of which are still unknown factors to us,
not only in the Pacific, but even at localities where observations on the
relative abundance of surface organisms, and the causes which influence
it, have been carried on for many years.

The record of the observations of the surface temperatures and of the
specific gravities of the sea were in charge of Dr. H. F. Moore. Of
course, until the record has been carefully computed, we can compare it
only in a very general way with the results obtained in the Pacifie by

the “ Challenger” as tabulated by Dr. Buchanan,’ and specially with Plate 5

1 Physies of the Challenger” Expedition, Vol. I., London, 1884.

>

96 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

of the “ Atlas of the Pacific,” issued by the German Observatory in 1896,!
giving the lines of the specific gravity based upon a large amount of
material accumulated by a number of exploring expeditions down to 1893.

The observations of the ‘* Albatross” practically agree with Plate 5 of
the German Observatory Atlas, showing a gradual increase as we proceed
south from San Francisco to the vicinity of the Society Islands and in
the Paumotus, with a maximum specific gravity on the line San Francisco
to Tahiti. In a general way we found also a somewhat greater salinity in
the lagoons, as at Rangiroa, Fakarava, Makemo, in the Paumotus, as well
as in the Tongas, Fiji, the lagoons of the Ellice, Gilbert, Marshall, and
Carolines, at Funafuti, Taritari, Jaluit, Rongelab, Wotje, Arhno, Ualan,
Ponapi, Truk, and Guam in the Ladrones.

As we proceed westward from the Society Islands there is a gradual and
very marked diminution in the specific gravity, reaching its minimum in
the Fijis. Thence it again diminishes rapidly northward at the Ellice,
Gilbert, and reaches on that line its minimum in the southeastern Marshall
Islands. It rises again in the northern Marshall Islands and going west
from Jaluit is somewhat less along the Carolines, falling again as we go
north to the Ladrones, and thence to Japan, with the exception of a slight
rise to the west off the Bonin Islands.

The Bottom Deposits collected by the “ Challenger” in the Pacific.

The chart given by Murray and Renard,’ showing in general the nature
of the bottom deposits of the Pacific, naturally does not give the interesting
details for each sounding, showing the relation of the constitution of the
bottom deposits to the depth. As the line run by the “ Albatross” shows
in a remarkable manner the same correspondence which had been first
observed by Sir John Murray between the amount of carbonate of lime
present and the depth, I have, for purposes of comparison, collected the
data of the principal stations occupied by the “ Challenger” in the Pacific,
to show how closely the later observations of the “ Albatross” agree with
the records of the “ Challenger.”

1 Deutsche Seewarte, Stiller Ozean, Ein Atlas v. 31 Karten, Hamburg, 1896.
2 Chart 1: Deep-sea Deposits, “ Challenger ” Expedition, Murray and Renard.

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 97

In the western Pacific the line run by the “Challenger” from the

Admiralty Islands to Japan, shows the following :*
~ At Station 220, lat. 0° 42’ S., long. 147° E., 1100 fathoms, Globigerina
ooze,” seven species of Radiolarians were obtained from the bottom deposit.

The Radiolarians from the deposit at Station 224, lat. 7 45’ N., long.
144° 20’ E., in 1850 fathoms, were represented by nearly thirty species, and
by about sixty species of Foraminifera, 88 per cent of the carbonate of
lime of the deposit being represented by pelagic species.

At Station 225, lat. 11° 24’ N., long. 143° 76’ E., in 4475 fathoms, Radio-
larian ooze; over 350 species of Radiolarians are noted from the deposit,
and ten from the surface. The deposit indicates only a trace of carbonate
of lime, while at Station 226, lat. 14° 44° N., long. 142° 13’ E., in 2300
fathoms, the red clay contains 6.11 per cent of carbonate of lime, and in
2475 fathoms, Station 227, lat. 17° 29’ N., long. 141° 21’ E., only a trace
of carbonate of lime occurs, as well as at Stations 228, 229, 230, 231.
At Station 229, lat. 22° 01’ N., long. 140° 27’ E., in 2500 fathoms, red
clay, the deposit was characterized by numerous Diatoms. At Station 231,
lat. 31° 08’ N., long. 157° 08’ E., in 2250 fathoms, blue mud, the number
of species of NRadiolarians in the deposit was greatly reduced, not more
than ten being noted at that station.

It is interesting to note in the line Admiralty Islands to Yokohama that
the Globigerina ooze is found in what we may call, in a general way, the
equatorial current, between Stations 220 to 224, while the Radiolarians
extend as far north as Station 23], taking their greatest development,
apparently, in the belt of the trades, from Station 225 to Station 230. On
the line from Yokohama to the Hawaiian Islands blue mud was brought
up at the first station east of Japan, No. 237, in 1875 fathoms, with 4.45
per cent of carbonate of lime, made up of about 100 species of Foramini-
fera, 33 per cent of the carbonate of lime in the deposits being made up
of pelagic species. The deposit at this station is also characterized by the
large number of species of Diatoms it contains. Globigerina ooze was
brought up only at Station 246, in 2050 fathoms. At all the other stations

1 John Murray, Observations at each of the “ Challenger ” Stations.
? See Murray and Renard, Voyage of the “ Challenger,” Deep-Sea Deposits.

7

98 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

red clay was obtained, with either no carbonate of lime or only a trace of
it, except at Stations 241 and 247, the deposit of which contained, in the
one case 10 per cent, in the other 17.29 per cent of carbonate of lime. At
Station 241, lat. 35° 41’ N., long. 157° 42’ E., in 2300 fathoms, seventy
species of Foraminifera were obtained, nearly sixty per cent of which is
made up of half a dozen of pelagic species. Nearly fifty species of Radio-
larians and twenty-five of Diatoms are also recorded from the deposit at
that station.

At the second station from the Japanese coast (Station 238, lat. 35° 18’ N.,
long. 144° 08’ E.), in 3950 fathoms, red clay, the number of species of
Radiolarians in the deposit is limited to two, and it only contains fifteen
species of Foraminifera.

At Station 244, lat. 35° 22’ N., long. 169° 53’ E., in 2900 fathoms, red
clay, there are mentioned as found in the deposit over thirty species of
Foraminifera and nearly 100 species of Radiolarians.

At Station 245, lat. 36° 23’ N., long. 174° 31’ E., in 2775 fathoms, red
clay, not more than ten species of Radiolarians are recorded as found in
the deposit.

At Station 246, lat. 36° 10’ N., long. 178° E., in 2050 fathoms, Globi-
gerina ooze, where the deposit contains 56.07 per cent of carbonate of lime,
over 100 species of Foraminifera are recorded, and 62 per cent of the car-
bonate of lime is composed of pelagic species.

At Station 247, lat. 35° 48’ N., long. 179° 57’ W., in 2530 fathoms, red
clay, ten species of Radiolarians are recorded. A few more species of
Radiolarians are recorded at Station 250, lat. 37° 49’ N., long. 166° 47’ W.,
in 3050 fathoms, red clay, together with about thirty species of Diatoms.
At the next station, in 2950 fathoms, Diatoms were also common. Radio-
larians are limited to nine species in the deposit of Station 252, lat. 37° 62’
N., long. 160° 17’ W., in 2740 fathoms, red clay.

At the northeasternmost point reached by the “Challenger” in the
Pacific (Station 253, lat. 38° 09’ N., long. 156° 25° W.), in 3125 fathoms,
red clay, forty species of Foraminifera are recorded, four of which are
pelagic, while the number of species of Radiolarians has increased to about

sixty. On the line due south from Station 253 in the direction of the

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 99

Hawaiian Islands, fifteen species of Foraminifera, three of which are pelagic,
and eight species of Radiolarians are recorded from Station 256, lat. 30° 22’ N.,
long. 154° 56° W., im 2950 fathoms, red clay, and in forty fathoms, off the
Honolulu reef, eighty-two species of Foraminifera are recorded in the de-
posit, only 3 per cent of which is made up of seven pelagic species.

The line from Yokohama east to Station 253, lat. 38° 09’ N., long.
156° 25’ W., and thence south to the Hawaiian Islands, is marked for the
great number of Radiolarians recorded in the deposits of the different
stations, as well as for the number of surface Radiolarians. It will be
noticed that the above line follows the general trend eastward of the
Japanese current and that the fauna of the bottom appears to be far
more abundant in the track of this great oceanic current than in the line
running south of Japan, where no great oceanic currents occur.

On the “Challenger” line, Hawaii to Tahiti, which corresponds more to
the “ Albatross” line, only two of the soundings (Station 270, lat. 2° 34’ N.,
long. 149° 09’ W., and 271, lat. 0° 53’ S., long. 151° 34’ W.) indicate Globi-
gerina ooze, and both of them are far beyond the depth at which such
deposits are usually met with. The “ Albatross” had a similar experience
at Stations 14, lat. 6° 41’ N., long. 137° W., in 2776 fathoms; 16, lat. 2° 38’ N.,
long. 137° 16’ W.; 17, lat. 0° 50’ N., long. 137° 54’ W., in 2440 and 2463
fathoms. The above-mentioned soundings of the “Challenger” were in
2925 and 2425 fathoms, and both in the belt of the equatorial current.
With the exception of the stations nearest the Hawaiian Islands and
Tahiti, which showed a deposit of volcanic mud (Stations 262, 263, and
278), the other stations on that line were all red clay, with little or no
trace of carbonate of lime. Though Station 269, lat. 5° 64’ N., long.
147° 02’ W., in 2550 fathoms, approaching Stations 270, lat. 2° 34’ N., long.
149° 09 W., and 271, lat 0° 33’ S., long. 151° 54’ W., contained 20 per cent
of carbonate of lime, made up of more than thirty species of Forami-
nifera, seven of which were pelagic species, composing about 85 per cent
of the carbonate of lime; the rest of the deposit consisting of over sixty
species of Radiolarians and over eighty species of Diatoms.

Of the Globigerina ooze Stations No. 270, 2925 fathoms, contained 71.47

per cent of carbonate of lime, and 271, in 2425 fathoms, over 80 per cent;

100 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

the latter deposit containing over ninety species of Foraminifera, no less
than eighteen of which are pelagic and make up 86 per cent of the deposit.
Yet at this station nearly 600 species of Radiolarians are recorded by
Haeckel as occurring in the deposit, and about thirty species of Diatoms.
The station south of the equatorial belt (272, lat. 3° 48’ S., long. 152° 56’ W.,
in 2600 fathoms) also contained 10.19 per cent of carbonate of lime, and
Station 273, lat. 5° 11’ S., long. 152° 56’ W., in 2350 fathoms, still further
south, only 2 per cent; the number of species of Radiolarians occurring in
the deposit at Station 272 being reduced to about 270 in number and to
about 110 at Station 273.. At Station 274, lat. 7° 25’ S., long. 152° 15’ W.,
the carbonate of line is nearly 4 per cent and the Radiolarians in the
deposit number over 175 species.

In 2350 fathoms, Station 276, lat. 13° 28’ S., long. 149° 30’ W., there is
28.28 per cent of carbonate of lime in the red clay, and over 110 species
of Foraminifera, sixteen of which are pelagic and make up 88 per cent
of the carbonate of lime. Station 277, in 2325 fathoms, has over 9 per cent
of carbonate of lime. Station 278, lat. 17° 12’ S., long. 149° 43’ W., 1525
fathoms, over 20; and other stations in the vicinity of the volcanic mud
contain a varying amount of carbonate of lime. At Station 279 it con-
tains nearly sixty species of Foraminifera, four of which are pelagic and
make up 53 per cent of the carbonate of lime.

On the line from Tahiti to Valparaiso the soundings (Stations 281-282)
in red clay south of Tahiti, though not more than 2450 fathoms in depth,
show but a trace of carbonate of lime, while the soundings to the east-
ward, somewhat less in depth but in Globigerina ooze, carry from 65 to
26 per cent, and are in the line of the southeast trades (Station 285, lat.
26° 09’ S., long. 145° 17’ W. to 286, lat. 33° 29’ S., long. 133° 22° W.).
There are nearly forty species of Foraminifera recorded from the deposit
of Station 280, south of Tahiti in 1940 fathoms, thirteen of which are pelagic
species, making up 84 per cent of the carbonate of lime, and at Station 284,
lat. 28° 22" S., long. 141° 22’ W., there are eighty species noted as found
in the deposit in 1985 fathoms, sixteen species of which are pelagic, mak-
ing up 74 per cent of the carbonate of lime, which constitutes 65 per cent

of the deposit. In a somewhat deeper station, 285, lat. 32° 36’ S., in 2375

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 101

fathoms, red clay, and with 26.25 per cent of carbonate of lime, the
Foraminifera recorded are reduced to fourteen species, only one of which
is pelagic and yet makes up 76 per cent of the carbonate of lime. The
Foraminifera are accompanied by about fourteen species of Radiolarians.
At Station 286, lat. 33° 29’ S., long. 133° 22’ W., 2335 fathoms, with 25.13
per cent of carbonate of lime in the red clay, there are sixty species of
Foraminifera, seven of which are pelagic, constituting 60 per cent of the
carbonate of lime.

At Station 288, lat. 40° 03’ S., long. 132° 58’ W., in 2600 fathoms, over
forty species of Radiolarians are recorded from the surface, only six at
Station 289 (2550 fathoms), and four at Station 290 (2300 fathoms), nearly
twenty at Station 291, Jat. 39° 13'S, long. 118° 49’ W., in 2250 fathoms.
When we come again to the Globigerina ooze stations, containing from
5 to 71 per cent of carbonate of lime in the deposit, we find nearly sixty
species of Foraminifera. At Station 293, lat. 39° 04’ S., long. 105° 05’ W.,
in 2025 fathoms, with nearly 45 per cent of carbonate of lime, ten species
of Foraminifera are pelagic and constitute 78 per cent of the carbonate of
lime, accompanied by sixteen species of Radiolarians. At Station 295, in
1500 fathoms, though in 38° south latitude, Juan Fernandez distant nearly
800 miles, eighteen species of Radiolarians were collected at the surface.
Five species of surface Radiolarians extended even to Station 298, lat.
34 07’ S., long. 75° 56’ W., in 2225 fathoms not more than 120 miles
from Valparaiso; and over twenty-five species of Radiolarians are recorded
from the deposit of that station in blue mud mixed with over twenty
species of Diatoms.

At Station 296, lat. 38° 06’ S., long. 88° 02’ W., in 1825 fathoms, Juan
Fernandez distant about 500 miles, over eighty species of Foraminifera are
recorded from the Globigerina ooze, fifteen of which are pelagic and make
up 85 per cent of the carbonate of lime, of which 64.34 per cent is con-
tained in the deposit, together with six species of Radiolarians.'

South of Valparaiso to the Gulf of Pefias the Globigerina ooze is marked
again for the great number of species of Foraminifera recorded from the

1 For the distribution of the bottom deposits in the Pacific, see Chart 1 Deep-sea Deposits,
“ Challenger” Expedition, by Murray and Renard.

102 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

deposits at Stations 299, 2160 fathoms; 300, 1875 fathoms; 302, 1450
fathoms, accompanied by a small number of Radiolarians. At Station 300
there are over 140 species of Foraminifera found in the deposit and
nearly fifty species of Radiolarians. Only five of the species of Foram-
inifera are pelagic, yet they make up 835 per cent of the carbonate of

lime which constitutes over 54 per cent of the deposit at that station.

The Surface Organisms observed by the “ Challenger” in the Paceifie.

A comparison of the surface animals taken from the records of the

ai

“ Challenger” with those obtained by the “ Albatross” can at present
only show in a very general way their distribution.

The observations of the “Challenger” have not as yet been tabulated
with reference to the geographical range of the surface organisms.’ It
is hoped that a beginning may be made when the records of the present
Expedition of the “ Albatross” are properly arranged. It will be practi-
cable, then, to give some general idea of the distribution of such types as
the transparent Annelids, the Pteropods, the Salpze, and other Tunicates, the
pelagic fishes, and Cephalopods. But by far the greatest mass of material
relating to surface animals consists of the pelagic Crustacea, the greater
number of which consist of the Copepods; next come the Schizopods and
Macrurans, the Brachiurans being comparatively few in number. The
Ostracods are also fairly numerous. From a cursory examination we can
state that the surface fauna of the tropical Pacific has a very wide geograph-
ical range, a great many of the species reaching from the coasts of Central
America to the shores of the western Pacific.

On the “Challenger” line, Admiralty Islands to Japan, at Station 220,
lat. 0° 42’ S., long. 147° E., the surface haul was characterized by Diatoms,
Globigerine, Dyphies, Siphonophores, Sagitta, Alciopa, Saphirina, Copepods,
Hyperia, Oxycephalus, Lucifer Zoés, Pteropods, Appendicularia, Salpze,
Doliolum, and young fishes.

At Station 221, lat. 0° 48’ N., long. 148° 41’ E., red clay, in 2650 fath-
oms, a number of Diatoms were obtained from the surface, as well as

Globigerinze, Schizopods, Macrurans, Cephalopods, young fishes, and much

1 John Murray, Bathymetrieal and Geographical Distribution,

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 103

the same species of Copepods, Annelids, Siphonophores, Pteropods, and
Tunicates, as in Station 220; a very similar assemblage of surface animals
was also obtained at Stations 222, 223, 225, 226, 227, 228, 229, 230, 231,
as far as Japan, varying somewhat in the relative ivanaines of Diatoms,
Radiolarians, Globigerinew, Copepods, Pteropods, Tunicates, and Annelids.

At Station 225, lat. 11° 24’ N., long. 143° 16’ E., the surface fauna, as
noted by Dr. Willemoés Suhm, was especially rich, and the same may be
said of Station 230, lat. 26° 29’ N., long. 137° 57’ E.; at Station 229, lat.
22° OV N., long. 140° 27’ E., Velella, Porpita, Ianthina, and Glaucus make
their appearance, having been but seldom taken before on the way from
the Admiralty Islands. At Station 251, near the Japanese coast, the char-
acter of the water changed, and the tow-nets were filled with Diatoms and
Noctiluexe, and the proximity of a land mass was clearly indicated by the
change in the surface fauna.

As regards the surface organisms on the “ Challenger” line, — Japan to
Hawaii, —at Station 257, lat. 34° 37° N., Long. 140° 32’ E., off the coast of
Japan, no less than ee species of Radiolaria are recorded from the
surface, together with Copepods, Pteropods, Tunicates, and young fishes as
well as Annelids, Siphonophores, Ctenophores, Sagittz, Euphausia, Lucifer,
Cyprinide, Cuttle fish, Noctiluca, Diatoms, and Globigerine; very much
the same surface organisms occur at Stations 238, lat. 35° 18’ N., long. 144°
08’ E., where the character of the hauls was again quite oceanic; 239, 240,
lat. 35° 20° N., long. 153° 39’ E., where Copepods were specially numerous ;
241, 242, 245, lat. 35° 24’ N., long. 166° 35’ E., with the addition of Halo-
bates, Appendiculariz, Doliolum, Saphirinze, Phronima, Phyllosoma, Tomo-
pteris, Oxycephalus, Orbulina, Hastigera, and Diatoms in varying quantities.

At Station 244, lat. 35° 22’ N., long. 169° 55’ E., the number of species
of surface Radiolarians recorded is not less than forty-five. These have
diminished again to thirteen at Station 245, lat. 36° 23’ N., long. 174° 31’ E.
There are also about the same number recorded from Stations 247, lat.
35 48 a long. 179° 57’ W.; 248, 249, lat. 37° 59’ N., long. 171° 48 W.;
250, 252, lat. 37° 52° N., long. 160° 17’ W., and 253; though at the last
station ie surface Radiolarians have increased in number to over thirty
species. At Stations 254, lat. 85° 15’ N., long. 154° 43’ W., 255, 256, lat.

104 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

30° 22’ N., long. 154° 56’ W., Physalia appears, and the Radiolarians vary *
from twelve to seventeen species. At Station 257 there are not more than
four species recorded for the surface, off Molokai there were not more
than five surface Radiolarians obtained, and at Station 260, in the centre
of the Hawaiian group, there are recorded from the surface : Diatoms, Globi-
gerine, many Radiolarians, and other pelagic animals, such as Medusz,
Siphonophores, Sagitte, Annelid larve, Copepods, Hyperids, Euphausia,
Pteropods, Tunicates, and Gasteropod larve, though in the other groups
of pelagic animals there has been, as a general rule, a very marked uni-
formity in the surface hauls.

The (open) tow-nets at Station 241, lat. 35° 41’ N., long. 157° 42’ E.,
were sent to sixty fathoms, and at Station 246 they were sent into deep
water, and when brought up contained all the things found at the surface
and additional Radiolarians different from those found at the surface.

At Station 247, depth 2530 fathoms, lat. 35°48’ N., long. 179° 57’ W.,
the (open) tow-nets were sent down to 1200 and 1500 fathoms, and many
Radiolarians “abundant in deposits, but only rarely taken in the surface
nets’’ (the italics are mine). On the surface at Station 249, lat. 37° 59’ N.,
long. 171° 48’ W., the stomachs of the Cirriped Zoé were filled with
Coccospheres, Coccoliths, Rhabdospheres and Rhabdoliths, and their ex-
crements were composed of masses of these small Algae and Diatoms.
The stomachs of Euphausiz contained the remains of Acanthometrae and
Diatoms.

At Station 250, lat. 37° 49’ N., long. 166° 47’ W., the tow-nets attached
to the trawl “which must. have towed for a time at a depth of from 800
to 600 fathoms,’ contained Challengeridze, Tuscaroridee, and the like, which
were not found in the tow-nets dragged within thirty fathoms of the
surface.

At Station 251, lat. 37° 37’ N., long. 163° 26’ W., Velella was very abun-
dant again. At Station 254, lat. 35° 13’ N., long. 154° 43’ W., a tow-net
haul was made in 100 fathoms containing Challengeride. Murray again says,
at Station 257, distant 402 miles from Oahu, lat. 27° 33’ N., a haul of the
tow-net from 500 fathoms “brought up Globigerina, Orbulina, Pulvinulina,

Pheodaria, and other Radiolaria not usually observed at the surface” (the italics

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 105

are mine). At Station 259, in 2225 fathoms, 133 miles from Oahu, the
tow-nets were sent down to 1000 fathoms, but it does not seem to me
from the lists of the organisms brought up that they include any types
not found near or at the surface elsewhere in less than 250 fathoms, and
they were probably obtained in the upper belts.

The surface organisms of the line Hawaii to Tahiti are marked by the
large number of species of surface Radiolarians collected specially at Sta-
tions 270, 271, in the line of the equatorial belt, and immediately north and
south of it at Stations 268, lat. 7° 35’ N., 269, and 272-274, lat. 7° 25’ S.
At Station 268 there were collected nearly sixty species of Radiolarians
‘from the surface; at Station 269 about fifty species; at Station 270 the
number of species of pelagic Radiolarians had increased to over eighty ;
and at Station 271 no less than 400 species of Radiolarians are re-
corded from the surface. At Station 272 the surface Radiolarians had
decreased to about 120 species; at Station 275 to about seventy-five spe-
cies; and at Station 274 the species had increased again to about 120 in
number; and at Station 284, south of Tahiti, in nearly 50° south latitude,
not more than seven species of Radiolarians were collected at the surface,
about the same number which were collected at the surface at Station
262, in latitude 20° N., near Hawaii. At Station 263, lat. 17° 33’ N., long.
153° 36’ W., the surface Radiolarians had increased in number to nearly
twenty species; at Station 265, lat. 12° 42’ N., long. 152° OV’ W., to nearly
forty species, and at Station 267, lat. 9° 28’ N., long. 150° 49° W., to fifty,
the number of species gradually increasing towards the equatorial current
belt.

As regards the other surface animals noted by the “Challenger,”
they consisted of Diatoms, Pyrocystis, Noctiluca, Globigerine, Orbuline,
Pulvinuline, Diphyes, and other Medusz, Siphonophores, Sagitta, Echi-
noderm larve, and Zoéa, near the Hawaiian Islands ; Euphausia, Sergestes,
Saphirina, Copepods, Amphipods, Phronimids, Hyperids, Oxyrhynchus,
Pteropods, Appendiculariz, Alciopa, Annelids and their larva, Tomopteris,
Salpz, Ianthinee, young fishes, Sternoptyx, Scopelids, Cephalopods, Cteno-
phorze, Halobates, Coccospheres, Rhabdospheres, Ostracods, Hyalea, Spirialis,
Styliola, Tiedemannia, Stomatopods, Schizopods, Carinaria, Firoloides. These

106 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

genera occur, of course, in different combinations both in number of species
and abundance of specimens at the stations occupied, but none of them
were very marked types, or types which had not a wide geographical
distribution in the tropical Pacific, as can be noted by comparing the
above list with the notes of the contents of the surface hauls made by the
“ Albatross” in a nearly parallel line, but several hundred miles to the
eastward.

As has been shown, p. 94, from the examination of the bottom deposits,
a large number of pelagic Foraminifera were obtained by the “ Challenger”
on the line Tahiti to Valparaiso, as well as pelagic Radiolarians. Going
south from Tahiti, the “ Challenger” obtained three species of Radiolarians—
on the surface at Station 282, lat. 23° 46’S., long. 149° 59’ W., seven at
Station 284, lat. 28° 22’ S., long. 141° 22’ W., and no less than forty-two
at Station 288, lat. 40° 03’ S., long. 132° 58’ W., the point at which the
“ Challenger” turned east toward Valparaiso, distant nearly 5000 miles.
Along that line which runs somewhat north of the current setting east,
in a somewhat higher latitude, the number of surface Radiolarians collected
was quite remarkable. At Station 289, lat. 39° 41’ S., long. 131° 23’ W.,
seven species are enumerated, four from Station 290, lat. 59° 16’ S., long.
124° 07’ W., eighteen at Station 291, lat. 39° 13’ S., long. 118° 49’ W., the
same number at Station 295, lat. 38° 07’ S., long. 94° 04’ W., and five at
Station 297, lat. 87° 29’ S., long. 83° 07’ W.

The other surface organisms found by the “ Challenger” going south
from Tahiti to Station 288, in lat. 40° 03’ S., consisted of Pteropods, Dia-
toms, Hastigerina, Acanthometre and other Radiolarians, Siphonophore,
Ctenophore, Echinoderma larve, Sagitta, Cyprinida, Saphirina, Copepods,*
Euphausia, Sergestes, Lucifer, Atlanta, Appendicularia, Scopelids, Halobates,
Clio, Coecospheres, Rhabdospheres, Globigerinze, Alciopa, Tomopteris, Salpa,
young Lamellibranchs, Phronimids, Hyperids, Stomapod larve, Thysano-
poda, Benthocaris, Meduse, Ostracods,? Amphipods, Schizopods, Doliolum,
Scopelids.

On the line from Station 288 to Valparaiso the surface organisms, other

? went south from Tahiti.

2 The number of Ostracods at Station 296, lat. 38° 06’ S., long. 88° 02’ W., is very striking.

1 The Copepods inereased as the ‘‘ Challenger’

PRELIMINARY REPORT. 107

than the pelagic Foraminifera and Radiolaria, did not present any pecu-
liar types; they were the usual pelagic types of the Pacific, such as:
Siphonophores, Copepods, Amphipods, Pteropods, Cephalopods, Salpx, Dia-
toms, Pelagia, Sagitta, Ostracods, Pelagic Annelids, Tomopteris, Hyperids,
Sergestes, Euphausia, Lucifer, Atlanta, Appendicularia, Doliolum, Cocco-
spheres, Rhabdospheres, Pulvinulina, Sergestes, Alciopa, Macrura, Scopelus,
Ctenophorz, Cyprinida, Phronima, Stomatopods, Ianthina, fish eggs, young
fishes, Velella, Physalia, Ostracods, Macruran larvee, Schizopods, Doliolum,
This line is also characterized by the great number of Diatoms collected,
and at Station 298 Sir John Murray says that “on the whole there was
a great change in the general character of the surface fauna, pointing to

the nearness of a great continent similar to what was observed off Japan
and elsewhere.”

The Bathymetrical Range of the Pelagic Fauna.

With regard to the bathymetrical range of the so-called intermediate
fauna, the following notes are suggested by the records of the ‘ Chal-
lenger” deep tow-net hauls in the Pacific.

At several of the stations the open tow-nets were hauled at a depth
of 200 fathoms, and Challengeridx and other Radiolarians not found at
the surface were collected. It does not follow, because the tow-nets
attached to the trawl and the weights brought up similar organisms to
those obtained at 200 fathoms or more from the surface, that these types
are found living all the way from the surface to the bottom, different
species recurring at sundry bathymetrical ranges. The open nets attached
to the trawl and weights contained, according to the lists given by Murray,
only such genera as were also collected by nets sent down to less than 250
fathoms from the surface, and were probably caught by the trawl nets
while passing through the upper strata. The experience of Hensen and
of Chun has been like that of the earlier expeditions of the ‘‘ Albatross,”
as well as the present one, that at the depth of 250 fathoms there is a
very marked decrease in the number of organisms collected as compared
with those living in a belt nearer the surface. It does not appear from

the data given by Sir John Murray that there is any proof of the exist-

108 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

ence of the belts of bathymetrical range of pelagic organisms invented
by Haeckel, based by him on data of the “ Challenger.” On the contrary,
I would interpret the data of the “Challenger,” as well as the results I
have obtained in this and former expeditions, and those of the “ National”
and “ Valdivia” Expedition, as showing that within a certain distance from
the bottom, at sea, far from continental areas, there is a free-swimming
fauna related to that found on the bottom; and that the pelagic fauna,
so-called, away from the continents, where the surface fauna is a mixture
of shore embryos and of pelagic animals derived from a comparatively
short distance from the shore, extends to a very limited depth from the
surface,—three hundred fathoms, or thereabout, indicating, from our present
knowledge, the limit to which the so-called intermediate fauna extends ;
many of its members coming occasionally to the surface or near it, and
the members of the surface fauna often dropping to considerable depths
from disturbing atmospheric causes; near the surface these two faunse thus |
become mixed to a certain extent. From my earlier observations, I was
inclined to place the lower limit of bathymetrical range of the surface
organisms somewhat too high, though even at that limit the pelagic
fauna is already greatly reduced in numbers, as has been noticed also by

subsequent observers.

Newport, R. I.

October 25, 1900.

REMARKS ON THE BOTTOM DEPOSITS (Prater 1a).

By Str JOHN MURRAY, K.C.B.

Our knowledge of the deposits covering the floor of the tropical Pacific
has been much increased by an examination of the soundings taken by the
U.S.S. “ Albatross” in 1899 and 1900, under the direction of Mr. Alexander
Agassiz. It is true that no new type of deep-sea deposit has been dis-
covered, but the distribution of the deposits has been considerably modified.
The principal result, perhaps, is the enormous extension, towards the east,
of the Radiolarian Ooze area discovered by the “Challenger” between 5°
and 15° N. lat. and 145° and 155° W. long. Our examination of the samples
recently collected, and of those collected in 1891, by the “ Albatross,”
seems to show that this Radiolarian Ooze area extends uninterruptedly
through about 85° of long. into the Gulf of Panama (where it occurs in
comparatively shallow water), forming a band varying in width from 5° to
12° of lat. Another result is the eastern extension also of the Globigerina
Ooze area at the equator, and the introduction of Pteropod Ooze around
the coral islands of the Paumotu and Marquesas groups. The numerous
soundings taken by the “ Albatross” among the coral island-groups show
that in many cases deep water, where the bottom is covered by Red Clay,
approaches very close to the islands, but a curious circumstance regarding
the samples collected in the vicinity of the coral islands is the large pro-
portion of very small samples, from which all fine clayey and calcareous
material has apparently been washed away during process of collection, so
that it is often impossible to say, from the insufficient quantity of incoherent
material at our disposal, what the precise condition of the deposit i situ
may be. The “ Albatross,” like the ‘“‘ Challenger,” crossed the typical Red
or Chocolate Clay area, the trawl having, at Station 173 in lat. 18° 55’ S.,
long. 146° 32’ W., 2440 fathoms, brought up a large supply of stiff choco-

110 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

late clay, containing much Manganese in the form of larger and smaller
nodules and small grains, and many sharks’ teeth?

A peculiar assortment of large continental rock fragments more or less
impregnated and covered with Manganese was brought up by the trawl at
Station 2, lat. 28° 23’ N., long. 126° 57’ W., 2368 fathoms, 450 miles from
Guadalupe Island, the nearest land, where the deposit is an extremely
pure Red Clay. These look like fragments transported by ice.

A comparison of this map with the map published in the « Challenger ”
Report on Deep-Sea Deposits in 1891 shows at a glance that a large mass
of information bearing upon the distribution of marine deposits has been
collected in the interval. From the numerous surveys made under the
auspices of the British Admiralty in the S. W. Pacific, and northeastward
to the Sandwich Islands and the American coast, in connection with the
British cable between Australia and British Columbia, from the work of the
‘‘ Albatross” and other ships of the U. §. Navy and U.S. Fish Commission,
anid from other sources, we have derived much information both regarding
the depth and the deposits of the Pacific. The chief modifications on the
deposit map of 1891 are, —

(1) The increased area occupied by the Radiolarian Ooze, in lat. 3° to
12° N., extending from long. 165° to 80° W., and also in Jat. 8° S. to 6° N,
and long. 162° to 177° W.

(2) The alterations in the form of the Globigerina Ooze areas, which
are now, in the vicinity of the Coral Islands, more circumscribed, while the
Red Clay is proportionally increased in. area and more closely approaches
the islands.

(5) The introduction of Pteropod Ooze in many localities not indicated
on the earlier map; and

(4) The introduction of a band of Diatom Ooze in the extreme North
Pacific Ocean, extending from off Yezo Island, Japan, hugging the Kurile
and Aleutian Islands, to off Vancouver Island, British Columbia. The
existence of this Diatom Ooze band was recognized during the examination

1 Tt is rather Surprising that no Cetacean bones are included in the material from this Station,

indeed among the material sent to us for examination no Cetacean bones have been observed, although
Mr. Agassiz mentions having obtained them at Stations 2 and 13.

REMARKS ON THE BOTTOM DEPOSITS. a

recently of two series of deposit-samples, the one collected a quarter of a
century ago by the U.S.S. “ Tuscarora,” the other collected in 1890 by the
U.S.S. “ Albatross,” and it bears striking evidence to the bipolar distribution
of the pelagic Diatoms whose frustules fall to the bottom in such numbers
as to form continuous bands of Diatom Ooze on the seaward borders of the
Blue Mud areas both in the far south and, on a smaller scale, in the far
north,

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE 1.

Track of the “ Albatross” from San Francisco to Yokohama.

PLATE 1a.
Map of deposits of the Tropical Pacific. Prepared by Sir John Murray.

PLATE 1b.
Bathymetrical chart of the Central Pacific Ocean. Prepared by Sir John Murray.

PLATE 2.

Track of the “ Albatross ” from San Francisco to the edge of the Marquesas Plateau,
showing the position of the ‘“ Moser” Basin. Stations 1 to 22.

PLATE 3.
Track of the “ Albatross ” through the Marquesas Islands. Stations 19 to 30.

PLATE 4.

Track of the “ Albatross” from the Marquesas Islands to the Paumotu Archipelago
(Ahe). Stations 29 to 34.

PLATE 5.

Track of the “ Albatross” through the Paumotu Archipelago and the Society Islands. —
Stations 32 to 180.

PLATE 6.
Track of the “Albatross” from the Society Islands to Aitutaki (Cook Archipelago)
and Niue, November 18 to 25, 1899. Stations 181 to 183.
PLATE 7.

Track of the “Albatross” from Niue to the Tonga Islands and Lau Group (Fiji).
Stations 184 to 189.

PLATE 8.

Track of the “Albatross” through the Fiji Islands, December 6 to 20, 1899. Stations
189 to 193.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. 113

PLATE 9.

Track of the ‘ Albatross” from the Fiji Islands, through the Ellice Islands, December
20-29, 1899. Stations 194 and 195.

PLATE 10.

Track of the “ Albatross” through the Gilbert Islands, December 29, 1899, to January
7, 1900. Stations 196 to 208.

PEATE

Track of the “ Albatross” from the Gilbert Islands to Jaluit, through the Marshall
Islands and to Kusaie and Ponape (Caroline Islands). Stations 208 to 240.

PLATE 12.

Track of the “ Albatross” through the Carolines from Station 240 to Guam. Stations
240 to 249.

PLATE 18.

Track of the “ Albatross” from Guam to Yokohama, February 25 to March 4, 1900.
Stations 248 and 249.

PLATE 14.

1. Section across the “Moser” Basin from San Francisco Cal. to Nukuhiva, Mar-

quesas Islands.
2. Section across the Marquesas Islands Plateau.

PLATE 15.

1. Section across the basin separating Nukuhiva (Marquesas Islands) to Rangiroa
(Paumotus Islands).

2. Section across the channel separating Makatea (Paumotu Islands) from Tahiti
(Society Islands).

3. Section from Makemo to Takume across Taenga and Raroia (Paumotu Islands).

4. Section from Anaa to Kauehi, across Fakarava (Paumotu Islands).

5. Section from Rangiroa to Matahiva across Tikehau (Paumotu Islands),

6. Section across Rangiroa (Paumotu Islands) from off Ahe.

PLATE 16.

1. Section across channel separating Plateau upon which are Niau and Apataki from
Makatea. Paumotu Islands.

2. Section from Makemo and Hikueru across Ravahere Strait to Hao to Aki Aki and
Plateau of Nukutavake and Pinaki.

114 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

PLATE 17.

Section across channels separating Plateau upon which are situated Tahanea, Tuanake,
and Makemo from Anaa and from Takume (Paumotu Islands).

PLATE 18.

1. Section across channel separating Nukutipipi and Pinaki (Paumotu Islands).
2. Section along a line running about southeast from Tahiti to Mehetia to Hereheretue,

Anu Anuraro, Anu Anurenga, and Nukutipipi.

PLATE 19.

Section from off Rota (Ladrone Islands) to Miaki, South of Cape King, Japan, show-
ing the very irregular depth of the bottom in a line parallel to the volcanic islands of that
region. From the soundings of the “Challenger” and of the U.S.S. “Nero.” H. O.
chart No. 529.

Figures of Manganese Nodules . . . ...=. =.=. =. =. .. ~~ t0 face paged.

1. Station 13 Tat. 9° 57! N., Long. 137° 47’ W.; 2690 fathoms.
—4, GS aly GF als? EP OS EIS SI Nog aM)
6. a Dk Se 23/NINe a OG RIO WWise 0 OSS

or bo

All figures are natural size.

dlemoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vou. XXVI. No. 2.

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE
TROPICAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, BY THE
U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER “ ALBATROSS,” FROM AUGUST,
1899, TO MARCH, 1900, COMMANDER JEFFERSON F. MOSER, U.S. N.,
COMMANDING.

Tr

SOME SPECIES OF PARTULA FROM TAHITI.

A STUDY IN VARIATION.

By ALFRED GOLDSBOROUGH MAYER.

WITH ONE PLATE.

[Published by permission of Gzorcz M. Bowers, U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries.]

CAMBRIDGE, U.S. A.:
Printed for the fMuseum.

January, 1902.

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE TROPICAL
PACIFIC IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, BY THE U.S. Fish ComMMISSION
STEAMER “ ALBATROSS,” FROM AuGoUsT, 1899, TO Marcu, 1900, COMMANDER
JEFFERSON F. Mossr, U. 8S. N., COMMANDING.

i.

SOME SPECIES OF PARTULA FROM TAHITI.
A STUDY IN VARIATION.
By ALFRED GOLDSBOROUGH MAYER.
(Published by permission of Geo. M. Bowers, U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries.)

Tue snails studied in this paper were collected in Tahiti by Dr. H. F.
Moore, Ensign C. 8. Kempff, U.S. N., and the author during two visits of

’

the United States Fish Commission Steamer “ Albatross” to the Island,
from Sept. 27-Oct. 4, and from Noy. 6-13, 1899.

A great deal has been written concerning the classification of the species
of Partula inh’. -.. Islands of the Tropical Pacific. Unfortunately,
however, the various species have been distinguished only by inspection of
the color, form, etc., of the adult shells; and no attempt has been made to
dissect the young out from the full-grown snails and thus determine, by
direct evidence, whether or no the so-called “ species” intergrade, and if so
to what extent. There can be no doubt that if this method were pursued
with all the known varieties and so-called “species” of such variable snails
as Partula and Achatinella, the number of “species” would be much re-
duced; and above all our knowledge of the true relationships of the
various forms would become established upon a more trustworthy basis
than can be derived from decisions concerning merely the external re-
semblance or dissimilarity of the adult shells. A good example of the
confusion which has crept into the synonymy of these species may be in-
stanced in the case of Partula otaheitana (Figs. 3-8), where no less than

nineteen specific names have been proposed for the various color varieties.

118 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

An extensive collection and a careful study of the Partule of Tahiti has
been made by A. J. Garrett, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, Ser. 2,
1884-95, pp. 43-81. Pls. Hl. and HI. Garrett spent many years upon the
Island, and his accounts of the distribution and relationships of the various
forms is thus more accurate than are those of other authors who have not
visited Tahiti. From him we learn that Partula hyalina (Figs. 1 and 2),
although rare, is found everywhere in Tahiti, and it also inhabits the
Austral Islands, and Mangaia, one of the Cook group. It nowhere gives
rise to any varieties, and is the most widely distributed Partula known.
Also, according to Garrett, Partula otaheitana (Figs. 3-8) has its head-
quarters in Fautaua (“ Fautana’’) valley near Papeete, but is also found
“all around the Island.” I failed to discover it either in Maruapoo or
Vaihiria valleys, and if it exists now in either of them it must be very
rare. Partula filosa (Figs. 9, 10) is found only in Pirse (Pirai valley),
while Partula sinistrorsa (Figs. 11-13) is found only on the south coast of
“Tahiti, where it exists in profusion in the lowland forests for a distance
of about ten miles.” It is probable, however, that Garrett has confused
some of the varieties of P. sinistrorsa with P. otaheitana. Garrett found
the dextral P. nodosa restricted to a limited area about two miles up
Punaauia valley on the west coast of Tahiti. I discovered a similarly
colored sinistral snail in Maruapoo valley immediately south of, and ad-
jacent to, Punaauia valley, and have no doubt that it is merely a sinistral,
local, variety of P. nodosa (see Figs. 14,15). Systematic descriptions of the
Partule of Tahiti have been given by Pfeiffer, Pease, Reeve, Carpenter,
and others. A complete citation of their works is given by W. D. Hartman:
A catalogue of the genus Partula, West Chester, Pennsylvania, 1881, and
also in Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei. Philadelphia, 1885, pp. 203-223.

The general topography and the names of the valleys in the neighbor-
hood of Papeete is given in the British Admiralty Chart of the South Pacific,
No. 1158, published July 22, 1895. A good general map of the Tahitian
streams and valleys is given in “ Karte der Insel Tahiti,” J. A. Hecht, 1875.

As is well known the Island of Tahiti is figure 8-shaped, each half of the
8 being formed of a separate voleanic centre. The Island has been subjected

to much erosion, and more than 140 deep trough-like valleys extend down-

PARTULA. 119

ward from the high interior to the coast. The general trend of each of
these valleys is perpendicular to the coast-line situated at its base, and thus
it comes about that adjacent valleys are approximately parallel each to each,
and separated from each other by a sharp-edged ridge. Many of the valleys
are very broad at their bases near the sea-coast, but they all become narrow
gorges in the interior of the Island. The sides of the valleys are steep,
often 35—60°, and in many places precipitous. The copious rain-fall on the
upper slopes is sufficient to maintain a stream in almost every valley. The
valley-bottoms are thus well watered and support a luxuriant growth of
forest trees, such as the Tahitian chestnut (Inocarpus edulis), the “ Purau”
(Paritium tiliaceum), and others. The wild plantain, or “ Fei” (Mussa trog-
lodytarum Linn.), Turmeric (Curcuma), and Draceena grow in abundance in
the moist earth of the valley-bottom, while the Caladium (Colocasia) clusters
along the banks of the stream, and the ground under the trees is covered
with a carpet of moss and ferns. This vegetation extends for a considerable
distance up the sloping sides of the valley, and high up among the moun-
tains the wild plantain and Draceena often form a continuous forest crossing
the ridges from valley to valley. Lower down, however, the ridges between
the valleys are covered by a tangled mass of reeds and guava bushes, or are
wholly barren of vegetation for long areas; and probably constitute a bar-
rier over which it is impossible for snails to pass from valley to valley.
Indeed the physical features of the Island, in so far as the nature of the
valleys is concerned, are strikingly similar to the conditions found on the
Island of Oahu of the Hawaiian Islands; and in Tahiti, as in Oahu, we
find that the snails of each valley are possessed of marked and peculiar
characters which distinguish them more or less from the snails of adjacent
valleys.

It is evident that we have in Tahiti an opportunity to study the range of
variability of the several, more or less isolated colonies of snails living in the
different valleys, and to determine the relationships which may exist between
the various forms.

Snails were collected in the following six valleys: Pire, Hamuta, Fau-
taua, Tipserui, Maruapoo, and Vaihiria. Pire, Hamuta, Fautaua, and Tipe-

rui valleys are approximately parallel each to each, and are situated on

120 EXPEDITION OF THE * ALBATROSS,” 4899-1900.

the north side of the Island in the neighborhood of Papeete. Hamuta val-
Jey lies between Pire and Fautaua, while Tipeerul valley is situated to the
westward of Fautaua and 1s separated from it by three ridges. The base of
Pire valley 1s about two miles east of Papeete, while the foot of Tiperti
valley lies at the western end of the town, about three miles west of Pires
valley. Maruapoo valley 1s situated on the western side of the Island in the
district of Punaauia, and is distant about eight miles from Papeete, while
Vaihiria valley is upom the south side of the Island, twenty-seven miles from
Papeete. Pire, Fautaua, and Tiperul valleys are broad and well watered,
and contain a Juxuriant growth of wild plantains and Caladium, wpe? which
the snails are found in large numbers. Hamuta valley 1s a deep, narrow
trough lymg between Pire and Fautaua valleys. Few wild plantains are
found within it, and the Caladium is not very abundant. Indeed the ma-
jority of the snails obtained in this valley were found upon the leaves and
stems of Dracena. Maruapoo valley ig -a narrow gorge with precipitous
sides. There 1s put little wild plantain in the valley, and almost all of the
snails were found upon the Caladium, which grows in abundance. Vaihiria
valley 1s one of the largest and longest in Tahiti, A stream about ten yards
wide and one in depth flows through the valley, and dense thickets of Tur-
meric extend for miles along its banks. The vegetation of this valley is
very varied, all of the characteristic Tahitian trees and plants being repre-
sented in great numbers. The Caladium and the wild plantain grow here in
abundance, but most of the snails were found upon the wild Turmeric, almost
none being discovered upon the Caladium, and but few upon the leaves of
the wild plantain.

In all of the valleys except Vaihiria the snails were found high up, very
few of them being captured below 200 feet above sea-level, while above
this point they grew more and more abundant as one ascended the valley-
bottom. In Vaihiria valley, 07 the contrary, 1° snails were met with over
9()) feet above sea-level, while they were found in considerable numbers
from an altitude of 100 feet to near sea-level. It ;s remarkable that in
Vaihiria valley, despite its luxuriant vegetation, and abundant supply of
water, snails were much less common than in any of the other valleys which

we explored.

PARTULA. 121

The snails are probably nocturnal, for they were almost never found
crawling during the day. With five exceptions they were all found upon
the wader sides of the leaves and stems of the plants they affect. They
show a very decided preference for certain plants, and almost all of them
were discovered upon the wild plantain and Caladium. In Hamuta valley,
however, they were quite abundant upon Dracena; and in Vaihiria the
great majority of them were found upon the Turmeric. About half a dozen
snails were found upon the stems of Guava (Psidium guaiava), “ Purau”
(Paritium tiliaceum), and upon various species of ferns.

It was my habit to spend the greater part of a day in each of the valleys
and to take every snail which was seen.

As is well known, these snails are hermaphroditic and viviparous, and
bring forth their young in an advanced state of development; and in order
to facilitate the study of the relationships between the various forms, the
young were dissected out from every adult containing them. The follow-
ing table will show the number of snails captured in each valley, the
number of adults which contained young snails, and the number of young
which were dissected out from them. It will also show what might be
termed the “ratio of fecundity,” or the number of young for adult con-

taining them.

Name of vale. Date. roe niet | Router eteodtl tee aemitie | Caer eae
1899.

iBirsoewes fe. -- Noy. 13 164 61 91 1.5
Hamuta . . Oct. 2 27 64 127 2.0
Fautaua . . Sept. 29? 47 27 43 1.6
o shire Nov. 7 111 52 102 2.0
Tiperui . . Sept. 28 124 72 130 1.8
Maruapoo. Noy. 15 101 55 94 1.7
Vaihiria . . Nov. 9 61 19 23 1.2
mL Otalmee skin Some owes) cst 759 390 610 Avy lei

We see from the above table that the snails differ both in abundance,
and in their fecundity in the various valleys.

Certain general statements may, however, be made concerning the Par-
tulee of all six valleys. For example, the young of dextral or sinistral snails

1 These snails were collected in about two hours instead of in six-hours, as in other cases.

122 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900,

are usually dextral or sinistral respectively, but this is not invariably the
case. It is interesting to observe, however, that a// of the young developed
within any given adult are either dextral or sinistral, never some of them
dextral and others sinistral. The young are born one at a time; three
eggs and two or three young snails in various stages of development being
often found in a single adult animal. At the time of birth the shell of the
young one comprises two and a half whorls. No young are developed

until after the lip of the adult shell has been completely formed.

PARTULA HYALINA BRODERIP.
Figs. 1, 2; 1-1.

This snail is found in all six valleys, but is never abundant; constituting
but 2} per cent of the total number of snails in Piree, 3 per cent in Hamuta,
12 per cent in Fautaua, 7 per cent in Tiperui, | per cent in Maruapoo, and
2 per cent in Vaihiria valley. It is readily distinguished from all the other
snails by its milky-white, translucent shell, and the absence of a tooth upon
the columella. Every individual found is dextral, as are also the young
taken from the adults. In all forty-four specimens were obtained, and
nineteen of these yielded fifty-five young snails. The young are all white
in color, and show no tendency to intergrade with the young of any other
species, hence we conclude that this is a true species separate and distinct

from any other snail of the six valleys.

PARTULA OTAHEITANA BRUGUIERE.
Figs. 3-8.

Pire, Hamuta, Fautana, and Tiperui Valleys. The relationships of the color-
types represented in Figs. 3, 4, d, and 8.

These forms, which are represented in Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 8, are mere
color varieties of one and the same species. They are found in Pire,
Hamuta, Fautana, and Tipzerui valleys, but appear not to exist in Marua-
poo or Vaihiria. Fig. 3 represents the lightest colored type, where the

entire shell is of a horny-yellow hue, while Fig. 4 represents the darkest

type, the shell being of a uniform rich brown. In Fig. 5 we see a horny-

PARTULA. 123

brown shell streaked longitudinally with darker brown, while Fig. 8
shows a light horny-brown shell having the apex tinged with pink. Many
individuals which are intermediate in color between these various forms
are found. An idea of the relative abundance of these color varieties in
the different valleys may be obtained through an inspection of Table L.
at the end of this paper.

Shells of the color-type represented in Fig. 3 are abundant in all of the
four valleys, but are especially characteristic of Pires, where they constitute
58 per cent of the entire number of snails found in the valley.

Fig. 4 is drawn from the darkest snail obtained in Tipzrui valley.
It contained two young which were much lighter in color than their parent,
and resembled the young commonly found in snails of the type represented
by Fig. 5.

Snails of the type of Fig. 5 are abundant in Hamuta, Fautaua, and
Tiperui valleys, where they constitute 47, 62, and 53.5 per cent, respec-
tively, of the shells found in each valley. In Pire valley, however, they
are not so abundant, constituting but 19 per cent of the snails found.

Fig. 8 represents a snail which resembles Fig. 3, excepting that the
apex of the shell is tipped with pink.’ It is remarkable that in Hamuta
valley 63 per cent of the snails of the types shown in Figs. 3 and 5 are pink-
tipped. In Pir and Fautaua 9.5 per cent and 30 per cent respectively of
these snails are pink-tipped, while in Tipwrui valley none of them display
this peculiarity. This as well as all the other evidence which we have
collected concerning the biology of the Tahitian snails leads one to believe
that the constitutions and inherited tendencies of the snails of any given
valley are quite different from those of the snails of any other valley ;
for it would be difficult on any other grounds to account for the fact that
the horny epidermis is readily disintegrated in Hamuta, while it resists
weathering almost perfectly in Tipzrui valley.

In Tiperui valley al/ of the snails represented in Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 8
are dextral, while in Pire valley they are a// sinistral. In the two inter-
mediate valleys, Fautaua and Hamuta, however, the snails are some of
them dextral, others sinistral. For example, in Fautaua valley 54 per cent

1 This pink coloration is due to the partial disappearance of the outer epidermis of the shell.

124 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

are sinistral and 46 per cent dextral; while in Hamuta valley 69 per cent
are sinistral and 31 per cent dextral. We see, then, that the snails
gradually change from dextral to sinistral as we pass from Tiperui to
Pire valley.

Two hundred and eight snails of the type represented in Figs. 3 and 8
were collected in the four valleys, and 96 of them contained 150 young.
71 per cent of these young snails were of a light horny-yellow color very
similar to that of the parent snail; 10 per cent, however, were slightly
lighter than the parent, and 19 per cent were considerably darker in color
than the shell from which they were dissected, and resembled the normal
young obtained from snails represented by Fig. 5. Turning to the color-
type represented in Fig. 5, we find that out of 255 individuals collected
in Tiperui, Fautaua, Hamuta, and Pire valleys, 119 contained 198 young.
Of these young snails 55 per cent were very similar in color to the adults
from which they were dissected, 40 per cent were lighter in color and
resembled the normal young of the color type shown in Figs. 3 and 8,
while 5 per cent were slightly darker than the parent shell. It is evident,
therefore, that Figs. 3, 5, and 8 represent mere color sports of one and the
same species of snail, for the young intergrade freely.

In Tipzerui valley a// of these young snails are dextral, while in Pire
they are all sinistral, exactly as are the adults in the respective valleys.
In Fautaua valley, however, 54 per cent of the adults and 55.5 per cent of
the young are sinistral; while in Hamuta, which lies between Fautaua and
Piree valleys, 69 per cent of the adults and 73 per cent of the young are
sinistral. The small diserepancies between the percentages of sinistral
adults and their sinistral young are probably due to aberrations of chance
caused by the smallness of the number of snails observed, and would per-
haps tend to disappear were a larger number to be studied.

It is interesting to observe that in Fautaua valley the dextral adults
give 60 per cent dextral and 40 per cent sinistral young; while the
sinistral adults of the same valley give 68 per cent sinistral and 32 per
cent of dextral young. Also in Hamuta valley the dextral adults give
66.6 per cent dextral and 33.3 per cent sinistral young; while the sinistral

adults give 95.5 per cent sinistral and 4.5 per cent dextral young. We see

PARTULA. 125

that in both cases the sinistral snails breed truer to their type than do
the dextral.
PARTULA OTAHEITANA VAR. LIGNARIA GARRETT.
Figs. 6, 7.

The snail represented in Fig. 6 is found in Tiperui valley. The
ground-color of the shell is quite similar to that of snails of color-type 5,
but they are distinguished from the latter by the presence of a more or less
distinct whorl-stripe, which extends from the suture of the spire through
the middle of the body-whorl. Ina few individuals there are two separate
whorl-stripes, one through the middle of the body-whorl and the other
adjacent to the suture. These snails constitute 26.5 per cent of the fauna
of Tiperui valley. All of the specimens obtained were dextral, as were also
the young dissected from them. Nineteen adults yielded thirty-three
young, of which number twenty-eight were similar in ground-color to the
type of snail shown in Fig. 5, while two were as light as the snails
represented in Figs. 3 and 8, and three were slightly darker in color
than the parent shells.

Of these young ones 41 per cent exhibit a distinct whorl-stripe, while
59 per cent are unstriped, and resemble in all respects the normal young of
snails of type 5. Indeed among the sixty-one young taken from adults
of type 5 in Tipzrui valley, five exhibit the whorl-stripe characteristic of
the young of type 6. There can be but little doubt, therefore, that in
type 6 we have a race of snails which is derived from type 5, and which
under conditions of more perfect isolation might in time develop into a
distinct form. It is possible that this tendency may be prevented in _

Tiperui valley by constant intercrossing between the adults of types 5
and 6.

Fig. 7.

The sinistral snail with two whorl-stripes, which is represented in Fig. 7,
is found in Hamuta and Pirz valleys, where they constitute 3 per cent
and 4 per cent respectively of the snail-fauna. In Hamuta valley four
adults yielded seven young, five of which were as light in ground-color

126 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

as the young of type 3 from the same valley, while two were slightly
darker and resembled the ground-color of the young of type 5. Of these
seven young, only one exhibited the whorl-stripe, the others being of a uni-
form ground-color. All of the adults were sinistral, while of the young three
are dextral and four sinistral. There can be no doubt that type 7 of
Hamuta valley is derived directly from snails of types 5, 5, and 8, of -the
same valley, and that together they form a race between the members of
which no specific distinctions can be drawn. Snails of type 7 are also found
in Pire valley; unfortunately, however, only one young one was obtained
from the five adults collected. This young snail possessed the ground-
color of snails of type 5 with the addition of a very faint whorl-stripe.

PARTULA FILOSA PFEIFFER.

Figs. 9, 10.

This snail is found in Pire valley. It may at once be distinguished
from all other forms in this valley by its small size and the short blunt
spire, also the outer surface is furrowed by deep longitudinal striae, and the
shells are all dextral. Thirty adults were collected, of which fourteen are
dark brown in color and well represented by Fig. 9, while thirteen are light
in color and resemble Fig. 10; and two others are intermediate in hue
between Figs. 9 and 10. Ten adults of type 9 yielded twelve young, of
which five were as light as type 10, while seven were similar to their
parents in color. Eight adults of type 10 give eleven young, of which
eight were about the same color as their parents, while three were darker
and resembled type 9 in color. There can be no doubt, therefore, that
Figs. 9 and 10 represent one and the same species of snail.

Summarizing the preceding observations, we find that there are but three
species of Partule in Pire, Hamuta, Fautaua, and Tipzrui valleys. Two
of these species, represented in Figs. 1, 2, and Figs. 3-8, respectively, are
common to all four valleys; while the third, represented in Figs. 9 and 10,
is found only in Pirz valley. The snail represented in Figs. 1 and 2
(P. hyalina Broderip) is found in scanty numbers in every valley in Tahiti

which the author explored. It is a distinct species, and shows no tendency

PARTULA. NPAT

to intergrade with any other forms, the young being always dextral in whorl,
and of a white milky color very similar to the adult shell. Figs. 3-8 rep-
resent mere color varieties of one and the same species (P. otaheitana).
Snails of the types of Figs. 3 and 5 are very common in all four valleys.
Fig. 4 represents an extremely dark-brown individual found in Tiperui val-
ley. No other individual was found which displayed this degree of melanic
coloration, although many were found of a hue intermediate between Figs.
4 and 5. The pink-tipped snails illustrated in Fig. 8 are common in Ha-
muta valley, but are not very abundant in Fautaua or Pir valleys, and
were not discovered in Tipzerui valley. Figs. 6 and 7 represent a pecu-
liar color variety (P. otaheitana var. lignaria) which is evidently derived
from the snails shown in Figs. 35, 4, 5, and 8; for some of the young
taken from snails of the type of Figs. 6 and 7 resemble the normal
young! of types 3, 4,5, and 8, while some of the young of the latter exhibit
the whorl-stripes characteristic of the normal young of Figs. 6 and 7.
The snails of the type of Figs. 6 and 7 occur in the same valleys as their
close relatives of the types of Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 8, and it is not improbable
that their tendency to generate a whorl-striped variety is swamped by fre-
quent inter-crossing with the unstriped snails of the same valleys. Were
they isolated, it seems probable that they would soon initiate a new race,
and in time perhaps a distinct species.

Partula hyalina, Figs. 1, 2. Partula nodosa var. sinistralis, Figs. 14, 15.
Maruapoo Valley.

Maruapoo valley is situated on the western side of Tahiti, about seven
miles south of Tipzrui valley, from which it is separated by at least seven
ridges. Of the two species of snails found in Maruapoo, only one is common
to both Tiperui and Maruapoo. This one is the translucent milky-white
species, P. hyalina, represented in Figs. 1 and 2. The predominant species
of Maruapoo, P. nodosa Pfeiffer, var. sinistralis, is represented in Figs. 14
and 15, and constitutes 99 per cent of the snail-fauna of the valley. The shell
is blunt in shape, and the spire is short. The lip is quite thick, and is usually

1 The term “normal young” is applied to any young snail which is similar in color to the adult

which bore it.

128 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

provided with a well-developed tooth upon the columellar side, and there is
also a tooth upon the wall of the aperture. The surface of the shell is
smooth and slightly polished, and there are no deep longitudinal furrows.
About 57 per cent of these snails are well represented by Fig. 14. The
ground-color is a light horny-yellow streaked longitudinally with darker
brown, in addition to which there are two dark-brown whorl-stripes and a
white whorl-stripe adjacent to the suture of the spire. In about 43 per cent
the dark-brown whorl-stripes are either absent or very faint, and the ground-
color of the shell varies from light horny-yellow to rich brown. A snail of
this type is fairly well represented in Fig. 15, a dark-brown individual
being drawn. Ninety-seven per cent of the adult snails of type 14 and 91
per cent of type 15 are sinistral; while of the young, 100 per cent from
type 14 and 90 per cent from type 15 are sinistral. In the case of the
snails of type 15, twenty-six sinistral adults gave forty-six sinistral and one
dextral young; while two dextral adults gave four dextral and no sinistral
young. Among the snails of type 14, only one of the dextral adults con-
tained young, and this one gave a single sinistral offspring. Twenty-six
whorl-striped adults of the type of Fig. 14 gave forty-two young, of which
76 per cent display whorl-stripes, while 24 per cent are plain colored. On
the other hand, twenty-eight adults of type 15, which are either unstriped
or with very faint whorl-stripes, gave fifty-one young, of which 61.5 per
cent are marked with whorl-stripes and 38.5 per cent are plain colored. It
is very evident that the striped and unstriped forms intergrade.

Of the one hundred adults found in the valley, 94 per cent are sinistral,
while of the eighty-eight young taken from them, 94.5 per cent are sinistral.
This condition appears, therefore, to be stable from one generation to
another.

It will be observed that P. nodosa is somewhat like P. filosa (Figs. 9 and
10) from Pire valley; it differs from the latter, however, in that there is
a well-developed tooth upon the columellar lip, and the surface of the shell

is polished and never furrowed, with dull-colored longitudinal grooves.

PARTULA. 129

Partula hyalina, Figs. 1, 2. Partula sinistrorsa Pease, Figs. 11-18.
Vaihiria Valley.

Vaihiria valley is situated on the south side of the Island, about nineteen
miles from Maruapoo, from which it is separated by about thirty ridges.
There appear to be but two species of Partula in this valley, one of which is
P. hyalina, represented in Figs. 1 and 2. The other species, P. sinistrorsa,
represented in Figs. 11-13, constitutes 98 per cent of the snail fauna of the
valley. These snails are very variable in color, and were it not for the fact
that they all’ give light yellow-white colored young they might readily be
mistaken for several distinct species. Sixty-one per cent of the snails of
this species belong to the type illustrated in Figs, 11 and 12, where the
surface of the shell is smooth and polished and the ground color is of a light
horny-yellow. Two broad whorl-bands of darker color traverse the body-
whorl, and usually extend about the distance of another whorl up the spire
of the shell. In about 95 per cent of these shells the whorl-stripes are of
a rich dark-brown, as in Fig. 11, while in about 5 per cent they are faint
in color, as in Fig. 12, or absent.

In about 8 per cent of the snails belonging to the predominant species
of Vaihiria valley the ground-color is of a light horny-yellow, very similar
to the color of Fig. 3, while in about 16 per cent the ground-color is
of a light horny-brown, streaked longitudinally with darker brown, giving
very much the appearance of Fig. 5. Again, in about 10 per cent the
shell is of a uniform rich dark-brown, similar in color to Fig. 4. Finally,
in about 3 per cent of the snails the shell is parti-colored, the body-whorl
being light horny-yellow, while the spire is rich brown, as in Fig. 13.

The snails of Vaihiria valley may be distinguished from those of similar
color in Tipzrui, Fautaua, Hamuta, and Pire valleys by the following char-
acters: In Vaihiria valley the snails lack a tooth upon the wall of the
aperture, and the lip is relatively thin and fragile. The shell is also more
constricted at the suture than is the case in the snails of the valleys near

1 A single light-brown adult gave one light-brown young; all of the others gave light yellow-white col-

ored young ones.
9

130 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Papeete. Moreover, no matter what the color of the adult shell may be in
Vaihiria, the young is light yellow, almost white.

All of the snails of the types represented by Figs. 11-13 are sinistral, as
are also their young. Six snails of a uniform dark-brown color were
found, and of these five were sinistral and one dextral. Among these, only
one adult, a sinistral one, gave a single sinistral young.

Five light horny-yellow snails of uniform plain color were found, and all
of these were dextral. Among them two adults gave rise to four dextral
young. It is possible that these light-colored dextral snails may be con-
sidered specifically distinct from their darker associates, but as they give
rise to young of the same color and general appearance as do the other
snails of the valley, it seems probable that no specific distinction can be
drawn.

Ten snails of a light horny-brown ground-color, streaked longitudinally
with darker brown, were found. All were sinistral, and four of them gave
six sinistral young.

Altogether, 90 per cent of the snails of Vaihiria valley are sinistral, as
are also 90 per cent of the young dissected from them.

GENERAL CONCLUSIONS.

In Tahiti five species of Partula were found in the six valleys of Pirze,
Hamuta, Fautaua, Tipeervi, Maruapoo, and Vaihiria.

One species (P. hyalina Broderip), represented in Figs. 1 and 2, is rare
everywhere, and yet it is found in all of the valleys. This is the only
snail that is universally distributed. Another (P. otaheitana), shown in
Figs. 38-8, is predominant in Pire, Hamuta, Fautaua, and Tipzerui, but
is not found in the other valleys. The three other species are restricted
each to a single valley. For example, the species shown in Figs. 9, 10
(P. filosa) is found only in Pirew valley, while the forms illustrated in
Figs. 11-13 (P. sinistrorsa), and 14, 15 (P. nodosa var. sinistralis) are
found, the former in Vaihiria and the latter in Maruapoo valley.

Partula hyalina, represented in Figs. 1 and 2, is very stable in all
of the valleys, and gives rise to no varieties. All of the other species, how-

ever, are remarkably variable, and give rise to numerous color-sports.

PARTULA. 1B)

These color-sports tend to breed true to themselves, and therefore to origi-
nate new color-forms and finally new species. This tendency is, however,
held in check by frequent inter-crossing with the parent stock, and becomes
effective only when the new color-variety is isolated, or when it displays
a remarkably strong tendency to breed true. A good example of a color-
variety that tends to breed true, but which is nevertheless held in check
by frequent inter-crossing with the parent stock, is afforded by the type
of snail represented in Fig. 6, which is derived from the type shown in
Fig. 5, both coming from Tipzrui valley. Here we find that 59 per
cent of the young of Fig. 6 resemble the normal young of Fig. 5, while
8 per cent of the young of Fig. 5 exhibit the whorl-stripe character-
istic of the young of Fig. 6.

It is probable that geographical isolation plays a most important part
in the formation of new species. If two valleys be adjacent, their snails
are closely related each to each, whereas the wider the separation between
any two valleys, the more distant the relationship between their snails.
The ridges between the valleys, being either barren or covered with vege-
tation unsuitable to the snails, afford barriers over which the animals must
find it more or less difficult to pass. Thus the Partule in the Tahitian
valleys are isolated very much as are the Achatinellida of Oahu in the
Hawaiian Islands.

In Tahiti the snails are most abundant in the valley-bottoms, where they
usually occur on the under sides of the leaves of Caladium and Plantain,
although in some valleys they are frequently found on Draceena and Tur-
meric. Although more abundant in the bottom, they extend for some
distance up the sides of the valley and appear to be present in most places
where the plants which they affect are found. As far as the very limited
observation of the writer goes, there appears to be no difference in the
character of the snails in different parts of the same valley. The difference
between any two adjacent valleys is, however, very marked.

All of the snails of Tipzrui valley are dextral, while all of the same
species in Pire valley are sinistral. In the two intermediate valleys of

Hamuta and Fautaua some individuals are dextral and some sinistral.

132 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

TABLE I.

SHOWING THE ACTUAL NUMBER OF SNAILS COLLECTED, AND THE PERCENTAGE OF EACH COLOR-
TYPE IN THE SNAIL-FAUNA OF EACH VALLEY. THE GREATER NUMBER OF THESE COLOR-TYPES
ARE FIGURED ON THE PLATE.

Number and percentage of each color-type of snail in each valley,

Name or description of snail. Pire Valley. ae Malley. oe apts) we
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Partula hyalina Figs. 1, 2 yt eka) 22 aI 33) 200) a Oh ag eet 1) 2
( Figs. 3,8 | 95] 58 | 58| 46] 40) 26} 15] 12 ae
Partula otaheitana <~ Fig. 4 aeMliceies leeks Ibi) oe 2
U «© 5 | 31] 49 | 60] 47] 98| 62] 66] 53.5
Partula otaheitana ws All| aes ly Sllfacive 33 | 26.5 5
var. lignaria | Sie if 51 3 5) 4 Selpiolc one
“ee / 4
Partula filosa | u nA ie ie : ; Gm : 4 ; 5
Games isl 5 edt See 35 | 58
Partula sinistrorsa a ly $ 2| 3
Partula nodosa var.{ “ 14 Be orci ee ete ol ares eae Moen ra || Gee .
sinistralis GS 155 sins] cogs [eves ca | osoi'| etre leote) ces] ne sro ll icotuce call ities) Reece |
Plain’ colored light hormy=yello wa ier oil) tet |\ eee) tenses i] eae ese | eekeenn eee 5| 8
lem Koyreel CHod'e loons GB olla sila | sillocll aslo olls aloo || cull o - 6} 10
Light horny-yellow with longi-
tudinal brown streaks . oleae eed ome enc ollecaladpoca. {lo 10} 16
164 100 |127 100 |158 |100 |124 |100 {101/100 | 61 |100

PARTULA. 133

TABLE II.

SHOWING THE NUMBER, COLOR, AND CHARACTER OF WHORL OF YOUNG SNAILS DISSECTED OUT
FROM ADULTS OF P. OTAHEITANA OF THE TYPE SHOWN IN Fics. 3, 8.

Number of
young which are
darker than the
parent shell, and

resemble the
normal young of
snails shown in
Fig. 5.

Number of
young which
are similar in

color to the
parent shell,

Number of
young which
are slightly
lighter than the
parent shell.

Number and
character of
adults from
which young
were obtained,

Number
of sinistral
young.

Number
of dextral
young.

Tiperui
Fautaua
“

Hamuta
“

Pire .

i bo
SON AWS
Aypnanvnyy
bow bo orb

ite)
lor)

D indicates that the shell is dextral in whorl ; §, sinistral.

TABLE III.

SHOWING THE NUMBER, COLOR, AND CHARACTER OF WHORL OF YOUNG SNAILS DISSECTED OUT
FROM ADULTS OF P. OTAHEITANA OF THE COLOR-TYPE SHOWN IN Fig. 5.

Number of young
Reon Ue eeee nis | Namibenott ||) Number of
k ae reel ts aneCOLOG ft af a young which young which Number Number of
Name of valley. begs paren yeu nom are similar in are darker of dextral sinistral
from which: young resemble the color to the than the oung oun
were obtained. normal young of aren tahell arontehell y A y B
snails shown in P 2 P is
Fig. 3.
Tiperui 37 D 21 36 4
Fautaua . 21 D 12 23 0
Gs é 228 14 AG) 3
Hamuta . 8D 3 10 0
io - 218 21 14 3
isi 108 9 6 0
119 80 108 10
40% 55% 5%
ed
198

D indicates that the whorl of the shell is dextral; S, sinistral.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATE.

Five species of snails are represented on the Plate; as follows: Figs. 1, 2. Partula
hyalina Broderip; Figs. 3-8. Partula otaheitana Bruguiére; Figs. 9,10. Partula filosa
Pfeiffer; Figs. 11-18. Partula sinistrorsa Pease; Figs. 14, 15. Partula nodosa vay.
sinistralis Pfeiffer = P. trilineata Pease.

Figs. 1-15 represent adult or nearly full-grown snails, while Figs. 1*-3%, etc., show
young snails taken from adults of corresponding number. Thus: 3* is a young one taken
from the type of snail represented in Fig. 3, ete. These Figures of young snails are four
times the natural size, while the Figures of adults are one and a half times the natural
size.

Figs. 1, 2. Partula hyalina. From a snail obtained in Tiperui valley
near Papeete. This species is found in
all of the valleys of Tahiti, but is never
abundant anywhere.

Figs. 3-8. Partula otaheitana. These Figures show various common color-
varieties of one and the same species of
snail. Figs. 3-6 are taken from snails of
Tiperui valley; Fig. 7, from Pire; and
Fig. 8, from Hamuta valley.

Fig. 6 represents a color-variety derived
from the form shown in Fig. 5; while
Fig. 8 is similarly derived from Fig. 3.
All of these snails are dextral in ‘Tipserui,
and sinistral in Pire valley ; while in the
two intermediate valleys of Fantaua and
Hamuta some individuals are dextral and
others are sinistral. In Hamuta valley
the apex of the shell is often tinged with
red-brown, or pink, as in Fig. 8. This is
due to the wearing away of the outer epi-
dermis of the shell.

Figs. 9,10. Partula filosa. A species obtained in Pire valley.
Figs. 11-13. Partula sinistrorsa. Color-varieties of a species of snail obtained

in Vaihiria valley.

Figs. 14,15. Partula nodosa var. sinistralis. Color-varieties of a form obtained only in
Maruapoo valley.

PARTULA.

Figs. 1%, 1’, 1. Partulu hyalina,

Figs. 3°, 5% Partula otaheitana.

Figs. 6", 6°. Partula otaheitana var. lignaria.

Fig. 9%. Partula filosa.

Figs. 11%, 11°.

Partula sinistrorsa.

Figs. 14%,15*%, Purtula nodosa var. sinistralis.

135

Young of the snail shown in Figs. 1 and 2.

Young of the snails represented in Figs,
3 and 5. Many of the young of Fig. 3
resemble 5%, while very often the young
of Fig. 5 resemble 38%. Snails of the
color type shown in Figs. 4, 6, 7, and 8
often give young of the types represented
in Figs. 3% and 5%. °

Young of the snail shown in Fig. 8. Simi-
larly colored young are often given by the
snail shown in Fig. 7. Very often the
young of Figs. 6 and 7 resemble Figs, 3*

and.o%:

Young of the snails shown in Figs. 9, 10.
This is a young one of a medium hue,
some being darker and others lighter in
color.

Young of the snails represented in Figs.
11-15.

Young of the snails shown in Figs. 14 and
15. Some of the young of Fig. 14 re-
semble 15%, while some of the young of
Fig. 15 resemble 14%. Some of the young
are plain colored, while others exhibit
distinct whorl-stripes as in 14%.

PARTULA

“ALBATROSS” TROPICAL PACIFIC EX

\ ‘ Ge
6 a j

yb

152

he He

ihe :
a ‘.

B. Meisel, tith

Mayer cy

Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vor. XXVil. “Now 3:

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE
TROPICAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, BY THE
U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER “ALBATROSS,” FROM AUGUST,
1899, TO MARCH, 1900, COMMANDER JEFFERSON F. MOSER, U.S. N.,
COMMANDING.

III.

VED US. An.

BY

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ anp ALFRED GOLDSBOROUGH MAYER.

WITH THIRTEEN PLATES, AND A CHART OF THE ROUTE.

[Published by permission of GzEorcre M. Bowers, U. 8. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries, ]

CAMBRIDGE, U.S.A.:
Printed for the fMuseum,

January, 1902.

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE TROPICAL
PACIFIC IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ BY THE U.S. Fish Commission
STEAMER “ ALBATROSS,” FROM AUGUST, 1899, TO MArcH, 1900, COMMANDER
JEFFERSON F. Mossr, U. 8. N., comMANDING.

Ill.
MEDUS.

By ALEXANDER AGASSIZ AND ALFRED GOLDSBOROUGH MAYER.

(Published by permission of Geo. M. Bowers, U. 8S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries.)

INTRODUCTION.

Tue medusx described in the following paper were obtained in thirty-
four surface hauls, and in one bottom trawl made at 830 fathoms in the
Marquesas. In addition to these there were thirteen intermediate hauls with
an open net, one at 100 fathoms, five at 150 fathoms, and seven between
250-350 fathoms and the surface.

The haulsin which medus were captured were distributed as follows :—

Surface. Intermediate. Bottom trawl.
Between San Francisco, Cal., and the Marquesas . . 16 4 F
Among the Marquesas, Paumotus, and Society Islands 17 8 1
After leaving the Society Islands . ...... 6 1 Pat
Aoi oot nso) Gene, Wana: echies a ONee wor ee 84 15 1

We were unable to make many hauls after leaving the Society Islands,
and it is therefore impossible for us to draw any accurate conclusions con-
cerning the relative abundance of pelagic life in the eastern and western
regions of the tropical belt of the Pacific. It is worthy of note, however,
that while our tows among the Paumotus and Society Islands were very

oor, and almost no pelagic life was to be seen, as soon as we entered the
poor, g ;

140 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

region of the Japan current north of the Ladrones the water teemed with
lite, and the display of phosphorescence at night was truly remarkable. In
fact it is evident that pelagic animals are not abundant in regions far from
large land masses or where there are no well defined oceanic currents or
counter currents. As soon as one approaches the region of great currents
or counter currents, or the coasts of continents and larger islands, the number
of animals increases with remarkable suddenness.

It was very noticeable that during the daylight hours our surface tows
were generally deficient in animal life, while those made at the same time
with an open net at depths varying between 300 fathoms and the surface
were remarkably rich both in number and variety of the specimens
obtained. It is evident that in the regions we examined the pelagic
animals sink to an unknown depth during the daytime. It should also be
noted that these same animals rise to the surface during the night, for our
surface hauls made at night were almost without excepticn much more suc-
cessful than those made in the same locality during the day.

Among the twenty Hydromedusz obtained by the ‘“ Albatross,” seven are
Trachylina and thirteen Leptolina forms. The relatively great number of
the Trachylina forms is quite striking, for these medusz are rare in waters
adjacent to the coasts of continents. In the open sea, however, they
constituted the greater number of the pelagic types. Our hauls in the
free expanse of ocean between California and the Marquesas were wonder-
fully rich in such Trachylina forms as Rhopolonema, Aglaura, and Liriope,
while /Zgina and Solmaris were met with occasionally. Almost all of the
Leptolina forms were captured near some coast or among the islands of an
archipelago. There. were, however, two remarkable exceptions to this
rule: A young Sarsia was obtained in N. Lat. 9° 45’, W. Long. 137° 47,
where the nearest land (the Marquesas) was more than 1000 miles away ;
and a Tiara was found 600 miles north of the Marquesas. In general, how-
ever, the results support the conclusions of Maas,’ in the case of the Plankton
Expedition, that Leptolina forms are creatures of the shallower waters near

coasts, while the Trachylina are animals of the open ocean.

1 Maas, O., 1893; Craspedoten Medusen der Plankton-Expedition. Also On some Problems of the
Distribution of Marine Animals, Natural Science, London, Vol. II., p. 92-99.

MEDUSZE. 141

The following table will serve to show the extent of our captures: —

Number of Species | Number of Species Number of Species
obtained. new to Science. already known.
Eira mMedUsee cies ele cele el ky a 20 a 9
Sepphomeduss, : 2 . « 2 2 4 = 8 4 4
SHDN AYN NOS 5 Go so) bp idea in 10 6
Cleno phorus Gen cueienns ce = 4 2 2
42 21 21

The following forms are represented in both the Tropical Pacific and
Atlantic by identical or very closely allied species: Aglaura prismatica,
Liriope hyalina, Nausithoé punctata var. pacifica, Abyla quincunx, Necto-
physa Wyvillei?

DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIES.
HYDROMEDUS£.

Sarsia sp.

A single specimen of a young Sarsia in a greatly damaged condition was
found on the surface when the nearest land (the Marquesas Islands) was
over 1000 miles away. It is remarkable that this Leptolina form should

have been taken so far out upon the open ocean.

S7;1 Station 13; September 5, 1899; N. Lat. 9° 57’, W. Long. 137° 47’,

Tiara oceanica, sp. nov.

Plate 1, fig. 1.

The bell is acorn-shaped and 5 mm. in height. The walls are very thin,

and there is a small, solid, apical projection. There are eight long, eight

medium size, and sixteen short tentacles. The long ones are about as great
in extent as the bell height. The medium tentacles are about one-third as
1 S?@ indicates a surface tow made in the daytime ; S* a surface tow made at night; (150f —S)¢

indicates a haul made with an open net dragged between 150 fathoms and the surface during the day ;
(150 f — S)” indicates the same made at night.

142 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

long, and the small ones are mere rudiments. All of the tentacles arise
from the bell-margin. The basal bulbs of the long and intermediate ones
are conical, and each one bears a single ocellus upon its aboral side near the
base. The velum is well developed. There are four narrow radial tubes,
the mid-regions of which display jagged edges. The proboscis is bound to
the radial canals by means of four mesenteries. The proboscis is short and
extends only about one-half of the distance from the inner apex to the
velum. The gonads occupy four radially situated linear swellings, the
surfaces of which are complexly folded. The four lips are large and are
much folded. The proboscis and tentacle bulbs are of a delicate purple-pink
and the ocelli are dark red. A single specimen was found about 600 miles
north of the Marquesas.
(250 £—S)?; Station 16; September 9, 1899; N. Lat. 2° 38’, W. Long. 137° 22’.

Turris pelagica, sp. nov.

Plate 1, fig. 2.

The bell is 16 mm. in height, and the sides are barrel-shaped, being
wider at the middle than at either end. There is a small, solid, apical
projection. The bell walls are very thin and quite flexible. There are
about thirty short tentacles, all being of the same size. These tentacles all
arise from the bell-margin, and their bases are large and conical. There
are no ocelli. The velum is well developed. There are four radial tubes
which are flat and quite broad, being narrower near the circular canal than
at any other place. Their outer edges are jagged, excepting in the narrow
parts near the circular canal. The proboscis is large and fills the greater
part of the bell-eavity. It is bound to the four radial canals by means of
four mesenteries. The gonads occupy four radially situated double rows
which extend about two-thirds of the distance from the inner apex of the
bell-eavity to the velar opening. The outer surfaces of the gonads are
transversely folded and give rise to numerous papilla. There are four well
developed, complexly crenulated lips. The lips and tentacle bulbs are of a
light port-wine color, and the gonads and radial canals are of a still lighter
shade. A single specimen of this medusa was found in a surface haul.

S’; Station 1; August 26; N. Lat. 31° 10’, W. Long. 125°.

MEDUS&. 143

PSYTHIA, gen. nov.

Williadxe with four simple unbranched radial canals.

In all previously known genera of the family Williadee the radial canals
are branched. The general form, color, shape of proboscis, and method of
budding of the present medusa, however, all incline one to place it among
the Williadse. It may be a primitive, or ancestral, form in which the canals
have remained simple, or possibly an atavistic sport from some of the more
complex Williade, or an immature individual which may give rise to

medusa-buds before attaining its complete development.

Psythia prolifera, sp. nov.
Plate 1, fig. 3.

In the single specimen obtained, the bell was much shrivelled by con-
traction, so that its exact shape could not be ascertained. It appeared,
however, to be slightly flatter than a hemisphere, and 4 mm. in diameter.
The gelatinous substance was of uniform and only moderate thickness.
There were four stiff, radially situated tentacles, each of which was about
one-half as long as the bell-height. The entoderm of these tentacles was
composed of chordate cells, and a very fine axial canal appeared to extend
throughout the length of each tentacle. There were four straight, simple,
radial canals; and a simple, slender, circular canal. The proboscis was
eruciform in cross-section, and about three-quarters as long as the height
of the bell-cavity. The four lips were small and slightly recurved. Four
medusa-bearing stolons arose from the four radial corners of the stomach
very near the points of entrance of the four radial canals. Each of these
stolons gave rise to from two to six medusa-buds in various stages of devel-
opment. When about to be set free the young medusa possesses four simple
tentacles and radial canals, as in the adult; but its proboscis shows no
trace of the proliferating stolons. The ex-umbrella of the young medusa
is sprinkled over with nematocyst cells. The entoderm of the proboscis and

stolons is ochre-yellow, all other parts being colorless. A single specimen

144 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

of this medusa was obtained, in an open net towed between 300 fathoms
and the surface, off Marokau Island, Paumotus Group.

(300 £— S)¢; Station 136; October 28, 1899; S. Lat. 18° 08’, W. Long. 141° 49’,

Lymnorea ocellata, sp. nov.

Plate 2, figs. 9-12.

The top of the bell is flat and the sides flare outward in a bell-shaped —

manner. The animal is about 4 mm. in diameter, and is about as high |

as it is broad. The bell-walls are thin, and quite flexible. There are
about fifty short stiff tentacles which are each about one-half the length of
the bell-height. These tentacles are usually carried curled upward, and
their entodermal cores are solid and composed of vacuolated chordate
cells. The basal bulbs of the tentacles are large, and each one contains
amass of red pigment. In addition to this there is a prominent ectoder-
mal ocellus upon the ventral (lower) side of each tentacle at a short
distance centrifugally from the basal bulb. The velum is small. There
are four straight, narrow radial canals and a slender circular tube. The
peduncle of the proboscis is wide and quadratic in cross-section, and its
lower portion, near the gastric region, consists of highly vacuolated ento-
dermal cells. The gastric part of the proboscis is pear-shaped, and the
mouth is a simple round opening. The entire proboscis extends about
one-half the distance from the inner apex of the bell-cayvity to the level
of the velar opening. There are four well developed oral tentacles, each
one of which is about half as long as the height of the proboscis. Each oral
tentacle branches dendritically four times, thus giving rise to sixteen distal
knobs. Each knob is thickly covered with a bristling cluster of fusiform
nematocyst cells. In addition to these there are several patches of nema-
tocystic bristles upon the sides of the main trunk of each oral tentacle.
The gonads are developed in four radial regions within the gastric part
of the proboscis. The entoderm of the tentacle bulbs and of the gastric
part of the proboscis is brick-red. The ectodermal ocelli are black. A
number of these medusw were obtained on the surface in the lagoon of

Makemo Island, Paumotus, on October 23, 1899.

|

|

MEDUS. 145

Bougainvillia fulva Acassiz and Maver.

Bougainvillia fulva AGassiz and Mayer, 1899; Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl., Vol. XXXIL.,
p. 162, Pl. 2, Fig. 6.

Plate 2, fig. 8.

An immature individual of this species was found by us among the Fiji
Islands in 1898, and a mature specimen was obtained off Funafuti Atoll,
Ellice Islands, on December 22, 1899.

The bell is about 6 mm. in height and the sides are straight and verti-
eal. The gelatinous substance is of uniform thickness everywhere. There
are four bunches, each containing seven tentacles, which arise from the bases
of the four radial canals. These tentacles are solid and their entodermal
cells are chordate. A single dark-colored ocellus is situated upon the under
or centripetal side of each tentacle near the basal bulb. The velum is
narrow. There are four straight, narrow, radial canals and a slender circular
vessel. The proboscis is quadratic, and its base is wide. It extends about
one-third of the distance from the inner apex of the bell-cavity to the velar
opening. Four oral tentacles, each of which branches dichotomously four
times, arise from the four radial corners of the proboscis near the mouth.
The mouth is a simple round opening. The gonads are situated in the
proboscis. The entoderm of the proboscis and tentacle bulbs is rosin-yellow.
The tentacles are of a translucent milky color, and the bell is transparent.
A single specimen was obtained in an open net towed from a depth of 150
fathoms to the surface.

(150 £—S)*; Station 195 ; December 22, 1899; S. Lat. 10° 47’, W. Long. 179° 30’.

Epenthesis rangiro®, sp. nov.
Plate 1, fig. 4.

The bell is slightly flatter than a hemisphere, and is 7 mm. in diameter,
The bell-walls are thin and flexible. There are sixteen well developed
tentacles with large conical basal bulbs. Sixteen otocysts, each containing
a single spherical otolith, alternate in position with the sixteen tentacles.
The velum is broad. There are four straight, slender, radial canals, and a

narrow circular vessel. The proboscis is very short and quadratic in cross-
10

146 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

section, and there are four slightly recurved lips. The four gonads are
found upon the four radial canals very near to the circular vessel. In the
single specimen obtained, each gonad contained from six to eight prominent
eggs. The medusa is transparent with the exception of the proboscis gonads
and tentacle bulbs, which are translucent and milky in color. This form
was found in the lagoon of Rangiroa Island, Paumotus, on September 23,
1899.
(150£—S)*; Station 195; December 22, 1899 ; S. Lat. 10° 47’, W. Long. 179° 30’.
Phortis elliceana, sp. nov.
Plate 2, figs. 5-7.

The bell is much flatter than a hemisphere, and is about 16 mm. in
diameter. ‘The gelatinous substance is thick at the aboral pole, but becomes
thinner towards the bell-margin, which is sharp-edged. There are about
fifty-six hollow tentacle bulbs. Four of these are large, and are situated at
the bases of the four radial canals. Twelve others are of medium size, and
three of these are found in each quadrant. In addition to these there are
about forty very small rudimentary tentacle bulbs upon the bell-margin.
There are no lateral or marginal cirri. There are about fifty-six otocysts
which alternate in position with the tentacle bulbs. Each otocyst contains
two or three spherical otoliths. The velum is well developed. There are
four simple, narrow, radial canals, and a slender circular vessel. The pedun-
cle is about as long as the bell-diameter, and projects a considerable distance
beyond the bell-opening. The basal part of the peduncle has the shape of a
four-sided truncated pyramid, while the distal portion is leng, and tapers
gradually toward the gastric part of the proboscis. The four radial canals
extend down the angles of the peduncle to the gastric portion of the
proboscis. The latter is short and flaring, and there are four well developed,
recurved, crenulated lips. The gonads are linear, and are developed upon
the sub-umbrella regions of the radial canals. The entoderm of the tentacle
bulbs and gonads is pink in color, while that of the gastric portion of the
proboscis is rosin-yellow. A single specimen of this medusa was found in
an open net which was towed from a depth of 150 fathoms to the surface,
off Funafuti Atoll in the Ellice Islands.

(150 £—S)4; Station 195; December 22, 1899; S. Lat. 10° 47’, W. Long. 179° 30’.

MEDUS®. 147

Rhegmatodes lacteus, sp. nov.
Plate 3, figs. 15, 16.

The bell is flatter than a hemisphere, and is 50 mm. in diameter. The
gelatinous substance is thick at the apex, but thin at the bell-margin. A
long funnel-shaped depression, at the apex of the bell, extends downward
almost to the level of the stomach. There are ten well developed tentacles,
each of which is about one-tenth as long as the bell-diameter. These ten-
tacles are provided with large hollow, bulbular bases. In addition to these
large tentacles there are about 250 very small rudimentary ones. There
are about 500 otocysts, each containing two small spherical otoliths. The
velum is delicate and narrow. There are 105 straight, narrow radial canals,
upon the middle and lower regions of which the gonads are developed. The
stomach is 25 mm. in diameter, and the canals arise from its periphery. The
proboscis is short, and there are 105 simple lips. The tentacles, proboscis,
and genital organs are of a translucent milky color. A single specimen
was found in a stirface haul a few miles north of Tahiti.

Station 73; October 5, 1899; S. Lat. 17° 27’, W. Long. 149° 32’.

Mesonema macrodactylum Branpr.

Mesonema macrodactylum Branpr, J. F., 1838; Mem. Acad. Imp. St. Petersbourg, Sci. Nat.
Ser. 6, Tom. IV., p. 359, Taf. IV.

Large numbers of this medusa were found swimming at the surface in
the lagoon of Likieb Atoll, Marshall Islands, on January 20-21, 1900. The
tentacles are not quite so long as in Brandt’s figures. The entoderm of the
canals, tentacle bulbs, and lips is slightly milky in color; all other parts of
the medusa being colorless. Brandt describes this species from the tropical
Pacific, and Chun (1896; Mitt. Nat. Mus. Hamburg, Jahrg. 13, p. 7) records
it from the coast of Zanzibar.

Polycanna purpurostoma Acassiz and Mayer.

Polycanna purpurostoma AGassiz and Mayer, 1899; Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXXII.,
p. 169, Pl. 8, Figs. 26-28.

A single specimen of this medusa, 50 mm. in diameter, was obtained in
a surface tow made off Tahaa Island, Society Islands, on November 16, 1899.
We found it among the Fiji Islands in December, 1897.

148 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Liriope hyalina Acassiz and Mayrr.

Liriope hyalina AGAssiz and Mayer, 1899; Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXXII, p. 166,
Pl. 9, Fig. 32.

Specimens of this medusa were found by the “ Albatross”? in the Mar-
quesas, Paumotus, Society, Ellice, and Marshall Islands; and they were
especially common in the tropical part of the open ocean between California

and the Marquesas. We found this species in the Fiji Islands in 1897-98.

S¢; Station 13; September 5, 1899; N. Lat. 9° 57’, W. Long 137° 47’.

S¢; a4; “ bo “ 6°41 137°.
S"; a 16; ss bh s PIB cs LS72e2 2%
(300 f—S)*, S*; Gr Dye ce 14, “ Between Ua Huka and Marchand Islands, Marquesas.
Ss"; qe Bl Gr 19'S. Wat. 1122.20", Wi. Lone. 144en5!
Ss"; — October 22; Lagoon of Makemo Island, Paumotus.
(100f—S)?; Station 173; | November 4; S. Lat. 18° 55’, W. Long. 146° 32’.
Ss"; — 17; off Bora Bora Island, Society Islands.
(150f—S)¢; Station 195; December 22; S. Lat. 10° 47’, W. Long. 179° 30’.
Ss"; — it 25; Lagoon of Funafuti, Ellice Islands.
Ss’; — January 20, 1900; Lagoon of Likieb Island, Marshall Islands.

Dipleurosoma pacifica, sp. nov.
Plate 3, figs. 13, 14.

The bell is very flat, being about three times as broad as it is high, and
23 mm. in diameter. The surface of the ex-umbrella is reticulated by a
regular system of hexagonal elevations bounded by shallow furrows. There
are about one hundred short tentacles with narrow bulbular bases. The
entodermal core of these tentacles is solid and composed of chordate cells.
At the bases of most of the tentacles, upon the lower side, there is a single
black ocellus. Slender club-shaped sensory bodies are scattered at frequent
and irregular intervals between the tentacles. The entodermal core of these
bodies is solid, and very similar to that of the tentacles. There are no
otoliths. The velum is narrow. Six radial canals arise in groups of three
from diametrically opposite sides of the stomach. In the single specimen
examined two of these canals bifurcate, and thus eight canals reach the
circular vessel. The gonads are linear and occupy the middle region of
the eight canals. Their surfaces are slightly papillate, and the ova stand
out as hemispherical protuberances. The stomach is elongated in the

direction of the two opposed groups of radial canals. The proboscis is

MEDUS. 149

very short, and there are six small, slightly crenulated lips. The tentacle
bulbs, genital organs, and proboscis are milky white, all other parts of the
medusa being transparent. A single specimen was obtained in a surface
haul about fifty miles north of Tahiti.

Geryones mexicana, sp. nov.

Plate 4, fig. 17.

The bell is broad and pear-shaped and is about 5 mm. in diameter. The
gelatinous substance is very thick at the aboral pole, but becomes thin
near the bell-margin. There are six large, hollow, interradial tentacles, the
centrifugal sides of which are provided with wart-like neimatocyst-bearing
swellings. There are also six slender, solid radial tentacles, each of which
arises from the side of the bell at a short distance above the margin. There
are six otocysts which are situated near the bases of the six interradial ten-
tacles. Each otocyst contains a single spherical otolith. The velum is well
developed. There are six straight radial canals which are wider near the
proboscis than they are near the circular vessel. The proboscis is short and
lacks a peduncle, and there are six slightly recurved lips. No gonads were
observed. The entoderm of the proboscis, radial canals, and interradial
tentacles is of a delicate pink. A single specimen of this medusa was
obtained ina surface haul off the coast of Mexico.

S¢; Station 3; August 28, 1899; N. Lat. 26° 18’, W. Long. 128° 54’.

Carmaris rosea, sp. nov.

Plate 4, fig. 18.

The bell is hemispherical, and about 6 mm. in diameter. The gelati-
nous substance is thick at the aboral pole, but diminishes toward the bell-
margin, which is sharp-edged. There are twenty-four incisions, forming
twenty-four distinct lappets upon the bell-margin. Two lappets are situated
between each successive pair of tentacles. There are twelve tentacles, Six
of these, which are long, flexible, and hollow, are situated at the bases of
the six radial canals. These tentacles are thickly covered with rings of

nematocyst cells, and are about as long as the bell-diameter. The six other

150 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

tentacles are solid, and are interradial in position. Their centrifugal sides
are studded with about six to ten wart-like, nematocyst-bearing swellings.
These tentacles are about as long as the bell-radius, and are carried curled
stiffly upwards. There are twelve otocysts, one at the base of each tentacle.
Each otocyst is hollow and contains a single spherical otolith. There are
six broad, flat, radial canals, upon the mid-regions of which the gonads are
developed. In addition to the radial canals there are eighteen blindly
ending centripetal canals, three between each successive pair of radial
canals. Six of these centripetal canals are longer than the others, and
extend about half the distance from the bell-margin to the base of the
stomach. The circular canal is wide and flat. The velum is well developed.
The proboscis is long and pyriform, and the mouth projects beyond the level
of the velar opening. The mouth is situated at the extremity of a long
narrow neck, and there are six short, slightly recurved lips. The entoderm
of the medusa is of a delicate rosy-pink, and all other parts are colorless. A
single specimen was found in a surface haul made south of the Marquesas

Islands.
S?; Station 31; September 19, 1899; S. Lat. 12° 20’, W. Long. 144° 15’.

Aglaura prismatica Maas.

Aglaura prismatica Maas, 1897; Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXIII., No. 1, p. 24, Pl.
III., Figs. 4, 5.

We first obtained this medusa in N. Lat. 12° 7’, W. Long. 137° 18’; and
thereafter it became one of the commonest objects in the tow. Large num-
bers were obtained among the Marquesas and Society Islands, and in 1897
we found it to be abundant among the Fiji Islands.’ It was discovered in:
considerable numbers by the ‘ Albatross” off the west coast of Mexico and
Central America in 1891, and it seems safe to conclude that it is widely
distributed over the tropical regions of the Pacific.

S¢; Station 12; September 4, 1899; N. Lat. 12° 07’, W. Long. 137° 18’.

St; « 43; ceo Nongae «9857 1879 ah,

Ses. et eines, Beye! « 4935', © 136° 54,
(300f—S)"; 66 25: «14; Marquesas Islands.

S*; «73; October 5; S. Lat. 17° 27’, W. Long. 149° 32/.

Ss; — November 17; off Bora Bora Island, Society Islands.

1 Bull, Mus. Comp. Zodl., Vol. XXXIL, p. 165, Pl. 4, Fig. 13.

MEDUS&. 151

#Egina sp.

Two specimens of Aigina were obtained in an open net which was
dragged from 250 fathoms to the surface. One of them was 28 mm. in
diameter, and they both possessed four slender, slightly greenish-colored

tentacles. They were too much damaged for description.

(250 f —S)¢ ; Station 16; September 9; N. Lat. 9° 38’, W. Long. 137° 22’.

Solmaris sp.

Two specimens of Solmaris, one 25 mm. and the other 40 mm. in diame-
ter, were brought up in an open net which had been dragged between 150
fathoms and the surface. They each had sixteen tentacles, and the gonads
were of a milky-yellow color. Unfortunately the margins of their bells were

too much damaged for specific identification.

(150f—S)¢; September 1, 1899; N. Lat. 17° 32’, W. Long. 135° 40’.

Solmissus marshalli, sp. nov.
Plate 5, figs. 23-25.

The disk consists of a thick doubly convex, central portion, and a thin
outer annulus or collar region, and is 60 mm. in diameter. The gelati-
nous substance of the central region is very rigid, while that of the collar
region is flexible. Fourteen equally spaced stiff tentacles arise from the
periphery of the central disk. Each tentacle possesses a well developed
conical insertion base. The entodermal cells of the tentacles are chordate,
and are very thin and much crowded together.

A well developed peronial thickening extends radially outward from the
base of each tentacle to the outer margin of the collar region. Owing to
the specimen being ina somewhat imperfect condition, only one sense organ
could be observed upon thé outer edge of the collar region. This one
contained a single highly refractive otolith of remarkably small size. The
velum is well developed, and its powerful contractions serve to propel the
animal through the water. The stomach is wide and flat, and gives rise to

fourteen radiating pockets which are situated in the radii of the tentacles.

152 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

The mouth is a simple round opening at the centre of the sub-umbrella.
The fourteen gonads are situated at the centripetal edges of the fourteen
stomach pockets. The gonads and tentacles are slightly milky in color,
while all other parts of the medusa are transparent. A single specimen was
obtained off Kwajalong Atoll, Marshall Islands. It came up in an open net

which had been towed between 150 fathoms and the surface.

150f—S)#; Station 220; January 16, 1900; N. Lat. 8° 38’, W. Long. 167° 37’.
A fe ° ? ’ to}

Rhopalonema typicum Maas.

Homceonema typicum Maas, 1897; Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXII., p. 22, Taf. III,
Figs. 1-3.

Plate 5, figs. 21-22.

Maas describes this species from the west coast of Mexico. We first met
with it on September 7, 1899, at N. lat. 6° 41’, W. long. 137°. We also
found it at the Marquesas and Paumotus Islands, and at Tahiti. It was
especially common in surface hauls made at night, and appeared to be most
abundant about 5° north of the equator in W. long. 137°.

The bell is broad and hemispherical, and there is a small solid apical
projection. The largest specimen obtained by us was about 15 mm.
in diameter, but Maas records one of 20 mm. in breadth. The bell-walls
are very thin but are remarkably stiff and rigid, swimming being accom-
plished by means of the strokes of the powerful velum which is exceed-
ingly flexible. There are eight well developed tentacle bulbs situated at
the bases of the eight radial canals. In addition to these there are about
twenty-five or thirty smaller tentacles which are interradial in position, It
seems probable that the shafts of all of the tentacles were broken off in all
the specimens found by us, leaving only the basal bulbs. There are about
sixteen exceedingly small otocysts upon the bell-margin, each one of which
contains a single spherical otolith. The velum is large, and the contractions
of its powerful muscles cause it to vibrate with remarkable rapidity. A
well developed system of circular muscles is found in the ectoderm of the
sub-umbrella. The proboscis is urn-shaped, the proximal part being nar-
rower than the mid-region. There are four recurved lips. There are six

gonads, one upon the middle region of each of the radial canals. Young

MEDUS&. 153

individuals are of a glassy transparency, while older ones are slightly trans-
lucent and milky in color, especially in the proboscis, gonads, and marginal
tentacles.

S¢; Station 14; September 7, 1899; N. Lat. 6° 41’, W. Long. 137°.

Sea 96% 15; “ 8,“ Oe NG 136° 54’.
Sema TGs |. oe SP ROY es ORGS It 137° 29’.

Gi e841 Legh ce S. Lat. 12° 20’, « 144° 15
Sipe 8255 Sm 20s ace G3 ISI BE, | 145° 49/.

SA —— se 23, “ Lagoon of Rangiroa Island, Paumotus Islands.
S"; — se 24, “ off Avatoru pass, Rangiroa.

Sik — October 5, “ off Pt. Venus, Tahiti.

SCYPHOMEDUSA:.

Charybdea grandis, sp. nov.
Plate 6, figs. 26-31.

Adult Medusa. The bell is high and cone-shaped, with a blunt apex.
It is 230 mm. high, and 140 mm. in diameter. The gelatinous substance
is quite thick and is of a remarkably tough consistency. There are four
interradial, wing-like pedalia, the broad sides of which extend outward
in a radial direction. These pedalia are each about 40 mm. long, and
25 mm. wide. A wide canal extends through the substance of each of
them into the flexible portion of the tentacle, which arises from the
distal end of the pedalium. The flexible part of the tentacle is about
140 mm. long, and its surface is ringed and covered with transverse rows
of nematocyst cells (Fig. 28). Four sense organs, or rhopalia (Figs.
29, 30), alternate in position with the four tentacles. Each sense organ
arises from a deep niche situated about 27 mm. above the level of the
velarium. The sense organ is knob-shaped and is mounted upon a short
stem, and contains from one to three ectodermal ocelli, and an entodermal
otolith. In old meduse there is usually a single, median ocellus in each sense
organ, but in a young specimen 30 mm. in height there was a large median,
and two small lateral ocelli. These ocelli are all directed so as to perceive
objects within the bell-cavity. The velarium is well developed and is sus-
pended by four mesenteries, or frenulee, in the regions of the sense organs.
Twenty-four short tree-like velar canals (Figs. 26, 51) extend centripetally

154 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

inwards into the substance of the velarium. The proboscis is short, and
there are four slightly recurved lips. There are four interradial crescentic
areas of numerous, short gastric cirri; the horns of each crescent pointing
centripetally. Four wide radial pouches extend outward from the stomach.
These pouches are separated one from another by four interradial partitions,
but are placed in communication one with another by means of the lateral _
canals leading into the lumen of the pedalia. The gonads consist of eight
leaf-like folds attached to the sides of the interradial septa and hanging free
in the radial pockets. The gelatinous substance of the bell is hyaline. The
entoderm is translucent and milky white, and the gastric cirri and flexible
parts of the tentacles are pink or yellow-pink. The sensory knobs of the
rhopalia are dull ochre in color and the ocelli are deep brown — almost
black. We first found a single specimen of this medusa in an open net
which had been towed from a depth of 300 fathoms to the surface, south
of Fakarava Island, Paumotus. The next day we discovered a large swarm
of mature individuals off Anaa Island, floating very near the surface of the
sea. This species is by far the largest Charybdea known.

(300 £ —S)?; October 14, 1899; off Fakarava Atoll, Paumotus.
S¢; — “15, “ — off Anaa Island, Paumotus Islands.

Nausithoe picta, sp. nov.
Plate 7, fig. 33.

The bell is quite flat and is 17 mm. in diameter. There are eight
solid, stiff tentacles, each of which is about as long as the bell-radius.
Eight marginal sense organs alternate with the tentacles. Each sense
organ contains a centripetal ocellus and a centrifugal otolith. There are
sixteen prominent marginal lappets which alternate in position with the
tentacles and sense organs. The mouth is situated at the centre of the
sub-umbrella, and is a cruciform slit surrounded by four simple, short lips.
Four interradial groups of gastric cirri are arranged so as to alternate
in position with the lips. Each of these groups contains about a dozen
short cirri. There are eight large gonads which lie in the tentacular radii.

In the female the ova are large and prominent. In the sub-umbrella there

MEDUS&. 155

is a well developed system of circular muscles which forms a ring, the outer
circumference of which meets the bases of the tentacles, while the inner
edge coincides in position with the middle points of the gonads, In addition
to these circular muscles there are sixteen strands of radial muscles which
extend outward on either side of the gonads to the middle of the lappets.
There are also eight radial muscle strands in the ex-umbrella which extend
outward toward the sense organs, and in addition to these there are eight
well developed groups of radial muscles at the bases of the eight tentacles.
The stomach consists of a wide lenticular space at the centre of the disk,
and this gives rise to eight radial pouches extending outward in the radii of
the eight sense organs. Each of these pouches bifurcates and sends a pair
of branches into the lappets, making in all sixteen terminal pouches. The
bell is translucent and milky in color. The ocelli and gonads are of a rich
brown color, and the entodermal core of the gastric cirri are dark blue.
Two specimens, one male and the other female, were found at night on the
surface south of Rangiroa Island, Paumotus, on September 24, in 8. lat.
15° 22’, W. long. 147° 57’.

Nausithoé punctata var. pacifica Aassiz and MAYER.

Nausithoé punctata var. pacifica AGASSIZ and Mayer, 1899; Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol.
XXXII, p. 170.

Plate 7, fig. 32.

The disk is quite flat and is about 4 mm. in diameter. There are
eight solid tentacles which are quite rigid. These tentacles are each
about three-quarters as long as the bell-diameter. They arise from sockets
on the sub-umbrella edge of the disk. There are sixteen sharply cleft
marginal lappets, two between each successive pair of sense organs.
The eight sense organs alternate in position with the eight tentacles, and
are situated at the bottom of the niches between the lappets. Each
sense organ contains a centrifugal otolith and a centripetal dark-brown
ocellus. Eight gonads lie in the eight tentacular radii. In the female
the ova are large and prominent. The mouth is a simple cruciform
opening in the centre of the sub-umbrella, the arms of the cross passing

through two of the tentacular diameters. There are four groups of gastric

156 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

cirri which alternate in position with the lips of the medusa. Each of
these groups contain from four to seven cirri. The gelatinous substance
is slightly bluish or milky in color, and the genital organs are dull cream or
slightly ochre colored. In the majority of specimens there are no spots
upon the ex-umbrella, but in some there is a brownish or yellowish spot
upon the upper surface of each of the eight lappets. This form appears to
differ from the Atlantic-Mediterranean species only in its duller coloration
and the frequent absence of spots upon the ex-umbrella. Compare the Figure
we here present with the drawing of the Atlantic species given in the Bull.
Mus. Comp. Zoidl., Vol. XXXVII., Plate 26, Fig. 87.

We obtained this medusa in considerable numbers in Neiafu Harbor,
Vavau Island, Tonga, on December 5 and 6, 1899, and we also found it
among the Fiji Islands in December, 1897. Our Figure is taken from a

specimen obtained near Suva, Fiji.
Atolla Alexandri Maas.

Atolla Alexandri Maas, 1897; Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXIII, No. 1, p. 81, Taf. XI,
Fig. 2, Taf. XIV., Figs. 4, 5.

A single specimen, in good condition, was brought up in a bottom trawl
at 830 fathoms between Ua Huka and Marchand Islands, Marquesas, on
September 14, 1899. It was 24 mm. in diameter, and there were forty-
eight marginal lappets and twenty-four tentacles. A number of specimens
of this deep-sea form were obtained by the “ Albatross” in 1891 in trawls

made off the Pacific coasts of Mexico and Central America.

Linerges aquila Harcxet.
Linerges aquila Harcket, E., 1880; Syst. der Medusen, p. 496.

An immense swarm of ephyre of this species, all about 3 mm. in
diameter, were found in the lagoon of Hikueru Island, Paumotus, on
October 27, 1899. Another swarm of somewhat older medusz was met
with in the lagoon of Funafuti, Ellice Islands, on December 24-25; and
a single mature individual was captured in the lagoon of Rongelab Atoll,
Marshall Islands, on January 17, 1900. We found large numbers of both
ephyre and mature medusz of this species among the Fiji Islands in 1897."

? Agassiz and Mayer, 1899; Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXXII., p. 170, Pl. 10, Figs. 33, 34.

~I

MEDUS&. 15

Zonephyra corona, sp. nov.
Plate 4, figs. 19, 20.

The bell is a little more than a hemisphere and is about 15 mm. in
diameter. The gelatinous substance is quite thick at the aboral pole,
but becomes thinner near the bell-margin. The surface of the ex-
umbrella is thickly sprinkled with nematocyst cells. There are eight
short hollow tentacles and eight marginal sense organs. ach sense
organ contains an entodermal mass of red-colored granules. There are
thirty-two broad lappets, two between each successive tentacle and sense
organ. The sub-umbrella is provided with a well developed set of circular
muscles. In addition to these there are sixteen spear-head-shaped radial
muscle strands in the sub-umbrella; the broad ends of these muscle
strands are centripetal. These strands extend to the notches between
each successive tentacle and sense organ. Sixteen narrow radial muscle
strands are also found in the ex-umbrella, and they alternate in position
with the strands of the sub-umbrella. The proboscis is broad and flask-
shaped, and there are four recurved, crenulated lips. The four gonads
are interradial in position and are horseshoe shaped, the concavity being
directed outward. Each gonad is thrown into complex corrugations, and in
the female the eggs are easily seen on account of their deep purple color.
Each gonad is provided with from eight to ten gastric cirri. The gastro-
vascular cavity extends outwards in thirty-two pockets, one in each lappet.
The gelatinous substance of the bell is of a greenish-amber tinge. The
entoderm of the tentacles and the sensory entoderm of the marginal sense
organs is of a claret color, as are also the eggs. The entire entoderm of the
gastro-vascular cavity is of a delicate claret color, and the radial muscle
strands of the sub-umbrella are of a glistening white. A single specimen
of this medusa was found. It differs from the two species described by
Haeckel, 1880, in that there are thirty-two lappets instead of sixteen as in

Haeckel’s forms.

S¢; Station 14; September 7, 1899; N. Lat. 6° 41’, W. Long. 137°.

158 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Pelagia tahitiana, sp. nov.
Plate 8, figs. 34, 35.

Immature individual. The disk is twice as broad as it is high, and is
about 16 mm. in diameter, The ex-umbrella is quite regularly sprinkled
over with large wart-like papilla which bear nettling cells. The papille
near the aboral apex of the disk are larger than the others, those near
the bell-margin being very small. There are eight hollow tentacles, the
distal three-quarters of which are covered profusely with nettling cells.
These tentacles are each about three-quarters as long as the bell-diameter.
Eight marginal sense organs alternate with the tentacles. Each sense
organ contains a mass of dark-red pigment of entodermal formation.
There are sixteen partially cleft lappets. The mouth is surrounded by
four well developed crenulated palps which are about three-quarters as
long as the bell-diameter. There are four inter-radial gonads, each one
of which is horseshoe shaped, with its concave side turned outward
(centripetally). Each gonad is furnished with from eight to twelve
short gastric cirri and a well developed sub-genital pit. The stomach is
a wide lenticular space at the centre of the disk. It gives rise to sixteen
radial pockets which extend outward, eight to the tentacles and eight to the
sense organs. These pockets are entirely separated each from each, and there
is no ring canal. There is a well developed set of circular muscles in the
sub-umbrella, and also a powerful radial set of sixteen muscle strands which
alternate in position with the tentacles and sense organs, and extend down
the septe between the radial pockets. In addition to these there are sixteen
radial muscle strands in the ex-umbrella. These extend to the bases of the
tentacles and sense organs. The disk and palps are of a dull amber-yellow
color and the tentacles are of a darker hue. The nematocyst cells over the
ex-umbrella and the palps are orange-red, and the genital organs are of a
dull ochre color. A single specimen of this medusa was found on the sur-

face south of Rangiroa Island, Paumotus.

S"; September 24, 1899 ; off Rangiroa, Paumotus Islands.

MEDUS®. 159

Aurelia vitiana Acasstz and Mayer.

Aurelia vitiana AGassiz and Mayer, 1899; Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXXII., p. 171,
Plate 10, Fig. 35.

This species was very abundant upon the surface during the afternoon
hours in Neiafu Harbor, Vavau Island, Tonga, on December 5 and 6, 1899.
None were to be seen in the morning. We found it also in Suva Harbor,
Fiji, in December, 1897; but here it appeared during the early morning
hours, and then only on perfectly calm days. It is interesting that although
it was very calm while we were in Neiafu Harbor, yet the meduse did not

come to the surface in the morning, but swarmed there during the afternoon.

SIPHONOPHORZ:.

Porpita pacifica Lesson.

Porpita pacifica Lesson, R. P., 1830; Voy. de la “ Coquille,” Zool., Tom. 2, Zodphytes, Pl. 7,
Figs. 3, 3’.

This species is widely distributed over the tropical belt of the Pacific.
The general color of the pneumatocyst and polypites is not so gray but
more yellowish than in Lesson’s figure.

S"; Station 7; September 1, 1899; N. Lat. 18° 19’, W. Long. 134° 57’.

Sz; 13; oO bs OEY ie 1879.47’,

S?¢; Gayle “ 119. se Ss ilate 12220 &“ 144° 15/.

Ss; — November 17, “ off Bora Bora Island, Society Islands.
Ss?7; —— December 25, ‘“ Lagoon of Funafuti Atoll, Ellice Islands.

Velella pacifica Escuscuotrz.
Velella pacifica EscuscHo.mz, F., 1829; Syst. der Acalephen.

S?; Station 14; September 7, 1899; N. Lat. 6° 41’, W. Long. 137°.
Sz; November 16, “ Tahaa Island, Society Islands.

160 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

DIPHYOPSIS APPENDICULATA.
ERSHA APPENDICULATA.

Diphyopsis appendiculata Acassiz and Mayer.

Diphyes appendiculata Escuscuo vz, F., 1829; Syst. der Acalephen, p. 138, Taf. XII., Fig. 7.
Diphyes appendiculata Huxtry, T. H., 1859; Oceanic Hydrozoa, p. 34, Pl. L, Figs. 2-2¢.

Plate 9, figs. 38, 39.

This species was first obtained by the “Albatross” in N. lat. 17° 324,
W. long. 135° 40’, and it continued to be abundant throughout the tropical
regions of the Pacific. In the Pacific species the entoderm of the polypites
and nematocyst batteries is milky, or slightly yellow or pink in color, while
in the Atlantic form the polypites are of a more or less intense green and
the nematocyst batteries of the tentacles are yellow or orange (see Bull.
Mus. Comp. Zoil., Vol. XX XVII., No. 2, Pl. 34, Fig. 114). A still more
important difference between the two species lies in the fact that in the
Pacific form the monogastric sexual generation belongs to the genus Erszea,
and lacks a manubrium within its swimming-bell; while in the Atlantic form
it belongs to the genus Eudoxia, for it possesses a manubrium within its bell.
The Pacific form, therefore, is a Diphyopsis, while the Atlantic form belongs
to the genus Diphyes.

The animal is 18-20 mm. in length, and the anterior swimtming-bell
is somewhat larger than the posterior. The anterior bell is angular and
pyramidal and its cavity is voluminous. There are two ascending, curved
radial canals and a simple circular vessel. The phyllocyst is long and
narrow and contains an “oil globule” near its distal extremity. There is
a moderately deep conical hydroecium upon the ventral face of the anterior
nectophore, and the siphosome arises from its inner apex. The first appen-
dage of the siphosome is the large posterior swimming-bell (ps, Fig. 39).
This is somewhat smaller than the anterior bell, and a deep groove covered
by a projecting tooth runs down the side upon which the siphosome is situ-
ated. Indeed the siphosome lies within this groove and is protected by
the covering tooth. The second appendage of the siphosome is the small
auxiliary swimming-bell (as, Fig. 39). Iminediately below this comes a

cluster of immature feeding polypites, the older ones being successively

MEDUSA. 161

lower down the siphosome. The tentacles bud out from the sides of the
polypites, and then come the bracts which protect them. The units upon
the siphosome are separated by free internodes. When set free as Ersxa
appendiculata, each unit is provided with a covering scale, polypite, tentacle,

and immature swimming-bell.

S"; Station 7; September 1, 1899; N. Lat. 18° 19’, W. Long, 134° 57’.
S4; « 412; “ 4, « & 120 Q7/, “ 137° 18/,
(150f—S)4; « 15; «“ Sy cs « 4 35/, “& 136° 54’,
(250 f— S)25 Sn tallye ce Eis oe 2Or3 8 Cs NEMO OR
(800 £— S$)"; 6 D5; “ 14, « Marquesas Islands.
S25 Co Sule 6“ gs =e S. Lat. 12° 20’, W. Long. 144° 15’.
S¢; ey an ce 205) = OP SSIS Ti, £6 145° 42’,
S50 — October 23, “ Lagoon of Makemo Island, Paumotus Islands.
S?¢; — ee Phe off Marokau, Paumotus Islands.
s¢; — December 24, “ Lagoon of Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

Ersea appendiculata.
Plate 9, fig. 40.

The mature animal is 5 mm. in leneth. The anterior covering scale
is irregularly pyramidal, one face being plane, with angular edges. The
ventral side is concave and fits over the anterior part of the swimming-bell.
The phyllocyst is long and is composed of highly vacuolated cells, and there
is generally an “oil globule” near its distal extremity. The swimming-
bell is quadratic in cross-section, having four longitudinal, sharp edges.
The cavity of the bell is quite wide at the base, but tapers to a narrow
inner apex. There is no manubrium, but there are four straight, narrow,
radial canals and a simple circular vessel. The velum is well developed,
and its contractions serve to drive the animal forward with considerable
speed. The single polypite is fusiform, and its entodermal gastric cells are
arranged in wart-like protuberances upon the inner wall of the stomach.
There is a single tentacle which gives rise to side branches, each one of
which terminates in a well developed nematocyst battery. Several gono-
phores in various stages of development arise from the side of the polypite
immediately proximal to the tentacle. Each gonophore contains four sim-
ple radial canals and a circular vessel. The entoderm of the polypite
is usually faint yellow, but occasionally it is of a delicate pink or milky
color. The radial canals of the swimming-bell are usually colorless, but
sometimes they are tinged with yellow spots. This form is common every-

11

162 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

where in the tropical Pacific wherever the Diphyes generation is found,
This species may be Eudoxia Lessoni of Kschscholtz, figured by him in
Syst. d. Acal., p. 126, Taf. XII., Fig. 2, and by Huxley in 1859 under the
same name in Oceanic Hydrozoa, p. 57, Pl. III., Fig. 6.

DIPHYOPSIS ANGUSTATA.
ERSHA ANGUSTATA.

Diphyopsis angustata Harcket.

Diphyes angustata Escuscno.mTz, F., 1829; Syst. der Acal., p. 136, Taf. 12, Fig. 6.
Diphyopsis angustata Harcket, 1888; Challenger Report, Zool., Vol. XXVIII. p. 152.

Plates 8, 10, figs. 37, 42.

This species was first obtained by the ‘“ Albatross” in N. lat. 6° 41,
W. long. 137°, and from this time on throughout the cruise in the tropical
regions of the Pacific it continued to be the commonest of all Siphonophore.
Several perfect specimens were obtained in which the posterior nectophore
remained attached to the siphosome. ‘This is very readily broken off at the
time of capture, and it was not observed in any of the specimens obtained
by usin 1897 among the Fiji Islands (see Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl., Vol. XX XIL.,
p. 179, Pl. 17, Fig. 54). The posterior swimming-bell is quite similar in
relative size and general appearance to that of D. compressa figured by
Haeckel, 1888; in Sipbonophore of the ‘Challenger’
XXXIII., Figs. 1-4.

We give two figures, one showing a complete unit of the siphosome a

>

expedition, Pl.

short time before it is detached from the stem, and the other a drawing
of the terminal nematocyst battery of the tentacles. The monogastric sexual

generation, Erseea angustata, nov. sp., was met with quite frequently.

S¢,S"; Station 14; September 7, 1899; S. Lat. 6° 41’, W. Long, 1379,
(300f—S )"; Station 25; September 14, 1899; Marquesas Islands.

(300 £f — S)4, S¢; oS 30; fe psy 0 S. Lat. 10° 29’, W. Lone. 141° 52!.

(300 £ — S)4 Sa; oe 325 oS vai Ge LS onsies xe 145° 49’,
50 — October Dyamce off Point Venus, Tahiti.
See a “ 14, * off Fakarava Atoll.
Gis (2 = “ 23, « Lagoon of Makemo Island, Paumotus Islands.
S¢; Station 173; November 4, “ S. Lat. 18° 55’, W. Long. 146° 32’,
Si. «180 «“ 15, « “ 17°30, « 149° 41/,
es December 25, ‘“ Lagoon of Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

Ss; — January 20,1900; Lagoon of Likieb, Marshall Islands.

MEDUS. 163

Ersza angustata, sp. nov.
Plate 10, fig. 41.

The animal is about 6 mm. in length. The anterior covering-scale is
irregularly pyramidal and is provided with a deep fissure upon its ventral
face, which embraces the upper portion of the large posterior swimming-
bell. The upper apex of the anterior covering-scale is usually pointed, and
the two dorsal edges are quite sharp and angular. The phyllocyst is long
and sometimes contains a highly refractive “ oil globule,” situated near its
distal extremity. The single feeding polypite is quite long and is capable of
being extended beyond the lower edge of the covering-scale. A group of
tentacles arises from its side, and immediately above this there are one or
two gonophores in various stages of development. The entoderm of the
polypite and phyllocyst is rose-colored, while the terminal nematocyst bat-
teries of the tentacles are orange as in the Diphyopsis generation. The
posterior swimming-bell is rectangular in cross-section with four sharp-edged
longitudinal ridges, which are often serrate. A deep trough-like longitu-
dinal groove extends down the ventral side of the swimming-bell. The
bell-cavity is irregularly conical, and the velum is very powerful. There
are four straight, narrow, radial canals and a simple, slender, circular
canal; and these are placed in communication with the gastrovascular
space of the polypite by means of a short, straight duct. There is no manu-
brium within the swimming-bell.

This Siphonophore may readily be distinguished from the Atlantic form

by its pink coloration, the Atlantic species being green.

Abyla quincunx Cuuy.

Abyla quincunx Cuoun, C., 1897; Verhandl. d. Deutsch. Zool. Gesell., p. 71, Fig. 13. (Atlantic
form.)

Plate 11, figs. 46, 47.

164 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Aglaisma quincunx Maver.

Aglaisma quincunx Mayer, 1900; Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXXVII, p. 78. (Atlantic
form. )

Plate 10, fig. 45.

A large number of specimens of this Siphonophore were obtained
throughout the Tropical regions of the Pacific. A comparison of the
Figures here given with those of the Atlantic form by Chun, 1897, and
Mayer, 1900, will serve to show the close relationship which exists between
the Pacific and the Atlantic representatives of this Siphonophore. It will
be noticed that in Figure 45 a saw-toothed projection extends down the
open groove of the inferior nectophore, and that this is absent in the Fig-
ures of the Atlantic form given by Chun and Mayer. This peculiarity is,
however, not seen in all individuals, and seems to occur quite as commonly
in the Atlantic as in the Pacific specimens, and it cannot, therefore, be used
as a basis of distinction between them. The Pacific and Atlantic specimens
are, moreover, of the same size, being about 7-9 mm. in length for the
Diphyes, and 4-5 mm. for the Aglaisma generation. The only fairly con-
stant difference appears to be that in the Atlantic specimens the terminal
nematocyst batteries of the tentacles are usually orange or yellow in color,
whereas in the Pacific forms they are generally colorless. This distinction
is not invariable, however, for some Pacific specimens are found in which
they are slightly yellow, while other specimens from the Atlantic have them
colorless... We therefore conclude that there can be, at most, but a varietal
difference between the Atlantic and Pacific forms of this Siphonophore, and
venture to assert that they belong to the same species.

(800 f—S)"; Station 25; September 14, 1899; Marquesas Islands.
(300f—S)¢; « 30; ss Up, S. Lat. 10° 29’, W. Long. 141° 52!.
(300 f — S)4, S¢; October 28, “ off Marokau Island, Paumotus.
87; Station 173; November 4, “ S. Lat. 18° 55’, W. Long. 146° 32’.

Ss; December ut Suva Harbor, Fiji Islands.
S¢; a ie Diy ot Lagoon of Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

1 We had also found this species in Fiji in 1897-98. See Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 1899, Vol.
XXXII, No. 9, p- 180,

MEDUS®. 165

Abyla Leuckartii Huxtey.

Abyla Leuckartii Hux.ry, T. H., 1859; Oceanic Hydrozoa, p. 49, Pl. IIT., Figs. 2-2.

Two specimens of this Siphonophore were obtained by the ‘“ Albatross,”
one in the Marquesas, and the other about 100 miles north of the Paumotus
Islands. Huxley found it off the east coast of Australia. The smaller of
our specimens is well represented by Huxley’s Figure 2; in the larger,
however, the anterior nectophore is 22 mm. in length and has the shape of a
narrow, elongate, five-sided pyramid ; the apex of which is sharp and pointed.
It is much flattened laterally in the plane passing through the axes of the
phyllocyst, hydroecium, and bell-cavity. The cavity of the anterior swim-
ming-bell is long and tapers to a point very near the apex of the bell.
There are four radial canals and a simple circular vessel, and these are put
into connection with the gastro-vascular cavity of the hydrosoma by means
of a short, straight duct, which reaches the side of the bell-cavity at about
its middle point. The velum is well developed and is provided with
powerful muscles by the rapid contraction of which the animal is en-
abled to dart through the water. A deep, funnel-shaped hydroecium
is situated midway between the bell-cavity and the phyllocyst. The hy-
drosoma arises from the inner apex of this cavity. In both Huxley’s
and our specimens there were but two well developed polypites, but there
were several other smailer ones, probably in course of development. The
largest polypite is terminal and a cluster of small or undeveloped tentacles
arises from the side of its proximal end. Among these tentacles there is
one which is much longer than the rest, and this one terminates in a coiled,
helical, nematocyst battery. The nematocyst batteries of the short tenta-
cles, however, are straight and finger shaped. Close to the proximal end
of the hydrosoma there is a cluster of small immature polypites and among
them a single small, auxiliary swimming-bell. No large inferior swimming-
bell existed either in Huxley’s or in our specimens, and it is probable that
it had been lost through accident. The phyllocyst is large and cucumber
shaped, and is connected with the hydrosoma by means of a short, straight
duct. It lies imbedded in the gelatinous substance, and extends downward

parallel with the longitudinal axis of the animal. It is composed of large,

166 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

highly vacuolated, reticulated cells; and contains several small “oil glob-
ules.” The gelatinous substance of the animal is of a translucent milky
color, the entoderm of the polypites being somewhat more opaque. In
one of our specimens the phyllocyst was milky, while in the other it was
of a decided green color. This form is evidently quite closely related to
Abyla carina (Haeckel 1888; Siphonophore, “ Challenger”? Report Zodl.,
Vol. XX XVIIL, Pl. 55) of the Tropical Atlantic.

S¢; Station 27; September 15, 1899; off Marchand Island, Marquesas.
S¢; “« 32. “ 20, “ §. Lat. 13° 37’, W. Long. 145° 42',

Abyla Huxleyi Harcket.

Abyla pentagona Huxtey, T. H., 1859 ; Oceanie Hydrozoa, p. 40, Pl. II., Figs. 2-2°.
Calpe Huxleyi Harcker, E., 1888; Siphonophore, ‘‘ Challenger” Report, Zodl., Vol.
XXVILL., p. 164.

Plate 11, fig. 48.

A number of specimens of the tropical Pacific form of Abyla were found
by us at various places during the cruise through the warm regions of the
ocean. The Pacifie species is certainly very close to, if not identical with,
the Atlantic form (see Calpe Gegenbauri, Haeckel, 1888; p. 164, Pls.
XXXIX., XL.). The remarkable range of individual variability in different
specimens, and the great difference which arises with successive stages of
growth, renders it extremely difficult to decide whether the Atlantic and
Pacific forms be identical or not. The only difference which seems to be
fairly constant is that in the Pacific form the entoderm of the feeding poly-
pites is usually milky in color, whereas in the Atlantic form it is generally
of a more or less decided green. The Pacific species attains a length of
about 25 mm. We give a figure drawn from an individual obtained near
Rongelab Atoll, Marshall Islands. Other specimens were obtained in the
Marquesas, Paumotus, Society, and Ellice Islands.

S7. —e September 15, 1899; Tai-o-hae, Marquesas Islands.

(300 £—S)?; Station 32; % iy, Ve S. Lat. 18° 37’, W. Long. 145° 42’.
Ss"; — November 17, “ off Bora Bora Island, Society Islands.
Ss: == December 24, “ Lagoon of Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

(150 £—S)?; — January 17, “ off Rongelab Atoll, Marshall Islands.

MEDUSZ. 167

Anthemodes Moseri,' sp. nov.
Plate 12, figs. 49-57.

The entire animal varies in length from about 100 mm. to 450 mm., ac-
cording to its state of contraction. All of the units arise from one and the
same side of the stem, although the twisting of the animal often gives one
the impression that this is not the case.

The pneumatophore is small and pyriform and is situated at the anterior
extremity of the nectosome. Its opening is small and circular, and is situ-
ated at the pointed anterior end of the organ. Gas may be extruded
through this opening, thus enabling the animal to alter its specific gravity,
become less buoyant, and sink.

The nectosome is a straight, rigid tube, which comprises about one-fifth
of the entire length of the animal. It is provided with from twenty to thirty
diametrically opposed, dove-tailed swimming-bells, the sudden and simul-
taneous contraction of which enables the animal to dart through the water
with remarkable rapidity. The gelatinous substance of these swimming-
bells is tough and rigid, and their cavities are capacious. Each bell (Fig. 51)
is provided with four radial canals, a circular vessel, and a well developed
velum.

The siphosome is highly flexible and contractile and is covered through-
out its length with numerous tough, gelatinous, spear-head shaped bracts
(Figs. 55-57). The various groups of units upon the siphosome are separated
by free internodes.

There are about two dozen (only six are shown in Fig. 49) feeding-poly-
pites (Fig. 53). These are separated from one another by long intervals.
Each polypite is attached to the stem by means of a short, cylindrical
pedicle. The body of the polypite is long, slender, and flexible, and the
mouth is capable of being expanded into a trumpet shape. Several small
rudimentary, or immature, and a single long, functional tentacle arise from

the side of the polypite near the distal end of the pedicle. The tentacles

1 Named after Commander Jefferson F. Moser, U. S. N., in command of the U. S. F.C. S.
“ Albatross.”

168 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

give rise to several side branches, and each of these, as well as the distal
end of the tentacle itself, terminates in a coiled nematocyst battery, protected
by a gelatinous funnel-shaped hood, and ending ina simple terminal filament
(Fig. 54).

The gonostyles (Fig. 52) are much more numerous than the feeding
polypites. They are spindle shaped and are attached to the siphosome by
means of a short, cylindrical pedicle. It is probable that there is an opening
at the distal extremity of each of these organs, and that they are, therefore,
equivalent to the Cystons of Haeckel. A single long, slender, unbranched
tentacle arises from the upper side of each gonostyle near the distal end
of the pedicle. Clustered near the base of this tentacle there are three or
four male and from six to ten female gonads. The male gonads are long
and finger shaped and contain each a single unbranched axial canal. The
female gonads are small and spherical and each one contains a single ovum,
which is surrounded by a winding system of slender canals.

The entoderm of the siphosome and feeding polypites is slightly milky in
color, while the gelatinous substance of the swimming-bells and bracts is of
a glassy transparency. The pore of the float is surrounded by port-wine-
colored polygonal cells, and the invaginated portion of the float is of a
delicate amber hue. The entoderm of the nectosome and siphosome is
marked with small, scattered port-wine-colored blotches. There are two port-
wine-colored spots at the distal ends of each of the two lateral radial canals
in every swimming-bell ; and the entoderm of the gonostyles and feeding
polypites is marked with the same color. The nematocyst cells in the
batteries of the lateral tentacles are of a deep port-wine color, as are also
parts of the entoderm of the male gonophores.

Large numbers of this beautiful siphonophore were found swimming
during the morning hours, upon the surface, in the lagoon of Funafuti Atoll,
Ellice Islands, on December 24-26, 1899,

This Pacific species differs in many respects from the Atlantic form of
the genus described by Haeckel, 1888 ; “Challenger”’ Report, Zoél., Vol.
28, p. 229, Pls. XIV., XV.

MEDUSA. 169

Nectophysa Wyvillei? Haxcxer.
Nectophysa Wyvillei Harcket, 1888; “Challenger” Report, Zool., Vol. XXVIII., p. 327, Plate 23.
Plate 8, fig. 36.

A single specimen of a Siphonophore that we are unable to distinguish
from N. Wyvillei was found by us on August 28. The specimen came up
attached to the end of a wire rope, which had been lowered to a depth
of 500 fathoms. Haeckel’s specimens were found at Lanzerote, Canary
Islands. The pneumatophore of our specimen is egg-shaped and the
pore is situated at its upper apex. The invaginated air-sac hangs free in
the general cavity of the pneumatophore, and gives rise at its lower end
to a number of finger-shaped villi, which branch sparsely and irregularly.
The feeding polypites and tentacles all arise from one side of the stem,
The polypites are elongate and flask-shaped and are capable of much
contraction or expansion. The mouth is often seen expanded outwards
in a trumpet shape. A single tentacle arises from the upper side of each
feeding polypite. Simple unbranched tentilla arise at regular intervals
from the side of each tentacle. The body of the pneumatophore is clear
amber-yellow color, and an iris-like ring, composed of radiating lines of deep
brown pigment, surrounds the pore of the air-sac. The entoderm of the air-
sae near the region of the pore is pink in color. The stem and feeding
polypites are pink. The main shafts of the tentacles are transparent and the
side branches are of a fleshy-pink color. The animal was about 500 mm. in
length when expanded, and the pneumatophore was 6 mm. long and 4 mm.
in diameter. No gonads were observed.

Station 3; August 28, 1899; N. Lat. 26° 18’, W. Long. 128° 54’.
Physalia utriculus Escuscnourz.
Physalia utriculus Escuscuortz, F., 1829; Syst. der Acal., p. 163, Taf. XIV., Figs. 2, 3.
Plate 10, figs. 43, 44.

A large number of specimens of this Siphonophore were found by us
throughout the Tropical regions of the Pacific. The adult has been well
figured by Lesson (1830; Voy. de la “Coquille,” Zoophytes, Pl. V., Fig. 1).*

1 See also Huxley, T. H., 1859; Oceanie Hydrozoa, p. 101, Pl. X., Figs. 1-15¢, Pl. XIT., Fig. 12.

170 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

A number of young individuals between 2 mm. and 4 mm. in length were found
by the “ Albatross” among the Paumotus and Society Islands. Those 2 mm.
in length (Fig. 43) possess but one primary axial polypite, from the side of
which there arises a single tentacle. This tentacle bears a number of wart-
like nematocyst-bearing swellings upon one side. The float at this stage is
simple and terminal, and the air-sac is oval and communicates with the outer
world by means of an apically situated pore. The gastric portion of the
axial polypite contains a number of disk-shaped hepatic villi. Two very
small evaginated protuberances are seen projecting outward from the ven-
tral floor of the float. These are the beginnings of the secondary polypites
and tentacles, which in the adult are much larger and more numerous than
the primary. In specimens about 4 mm. in length (Fig. 44) the secondary
tentacle has become larger than the primary, and there are several feeding
polypites of the secondary set budding outward around its conical base.
Unlike the adult, these young individuals possess the ability to sink
beneath the surface; a feat which they accomplish by extruding a bubble
of gas through the pore of the float. In a few minutes the gas regenerates,
and then the animals rise to the surface. Figure 44 shows the creature in
the act of forcing a gas bubble out of the pneumatophore, and it will be seen

that the muscular inner wall of the air-sac exhibits an annular contraction.

S?; Station 13; September 5, 1899; N. Lat. 9°57’, W. Long. 137° 47’.

mege GL abe x Us os ue COC ha a 137°.

st. « 146; “ 9, 4 “ 9° 38), 137° 29!
S?; “ 173; November 4, “ S. Lat. 18° 55’, % 146° 32°,
s7;. —— January 22, 1900; Lagoon of Wotje, Marshall Islands.

8 ; Fiji Islands; 1897-98.

CTENOPHORA.
Pieurobrachia ochracea, sp. nov.
Plate 12, fig. 58.

The animal is egg-shaped and about 12 mm. in length. The body is
somewhat compressed in the diameter perpendicular to the tentacular axis.
The aboral pole is quite blunt. The outer surface is smooth and there
are no papilla. The apical sense organ is quite large and contains a mass

of spherical otoliths. There are eight meridional canals which extend

MEDUS 2%. iia

from the region of the apical sense organ to about two-thirds the distance
down the sides of the animaly and end blindly. Eight rows of ciliated
plates follow the courses of the eight meridional canals and extend about
two-thirds of their length. Each of these rows contains about fifteen
combs of cilia. The lateral tentacles arise from the bottom of two deep,
narrow clefts, one in each side in the plane of the wide lateral diameter of
the animal. These clefts open quite high up on the sides not far from the
aboral pole, but their deep-lying portions extend downward to about one-
third of the distance from the mouth to the apex. The two lateral tentacles
are simple and quite thick, and no lateral tentacula were observed, although
a large number of specimens were examined. In this respect this species
differs from all other Pleurobrachiz. The mouth is a narrow slit. The
funnel canal and the radiating canals to the meridional vessels are straight
and slender. The entoderm of the stomach is of a decided yellow color and
the tentacles are slightly milky, all other parts of the animal being of a
glassy transparency.

This Ctenophore was first obtained in N. lat. 31° 10’, W. long. 125°. It
became rarer as we went southward, and disappeared before we reached the

Tropics.
S¢; Station 1; August 26, 1899; N. Lat. 31° 10’, W. Long. 125°.
Ste 6; at, «90° 26, 1389 287,

Lampetia fusiformis, sp. nov.
Plate 13, figs. 59, 60.

The animal is narrow and pear-shaped, and about 40 mm. in length.
The oral pole is long and narrow, and the aboral quite blunt. The body
is compressed laterally, the tentacular diameter being the longer. The
apical sense organ is half egg-shaped and contains a large mass of otoliths.
It is surrounded by raised ridges. The eight meridional canals arise from
the vicinity of the apical sense organs and extend about two-thirds the
distance down the sides of the body, where they end blindly. Each canal
is covered throughout its length with numerous (about forty) combs of
ciliated plates. The lateral tentacles arise from the bottom of long, nar-

row, tortuous clefts, which open upon the sides of the body about one-

172 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

third of the distance down from the apical sense organ. These clefts
extend downward along the sides of the stomach for about three-quarters
of the distance between the apex and the mouth. The tentacles are
capable of considerable expansion and contraction, and are furnished with
simple lateral branches. The mouth is a narrow slit at the bottom of a
shallow trough in the oral pole of the animal. The stomach is flat and
narrow and gives rise to two blindly ending lateral canals in the tentacular
diameter. These canals extend downward along the sides of the stomach
to points very near the region of the mouth. The funnel canal and
the radiating canals, which connect the middle points of the meridional
vessels with the stomach, are quite broad and straight. The tentacles
are milky in color, and the entoderm of the stomach is of a faint steely
blue. All other parts of the animal are of a glassy transparency.

This Ctenophore was first obtained in N, lat. 28° 11’, W. long. 111° 16’,
It became more and more abundant as we approached the Tropics, and we

met with swarms of them among the Paumotus Islands.

S¢; Station 2; August 27,1899; N. Lat, 28° 23’, W. Long. 126° 57’.

S129 i 7; September 1, “ Se S COMO a 134° 57’.
St; « 14; ee hy °& goat « 137°.
Se; 14; “ Dae “5040, 136° 47/,
S*; «© 15; “ Biot iB 401g ae 136° 54’.
Gass Uther ages | SiC iota Gee 013g 0am are 137° 29,
S'; — es i, Lagoon of Rangiroa Island, Paumotus Islands.
S#: = “ 23, “ “ce “ “ “ec “
Ss"; — e Dae off south shore of Rangiroa Island.
Cestus sp.

Several fragments of a Cestus, the largest being about 100 mm. in length
and 23 mm. in width, were found by the “ Albatross.”

S"; Station 14; September 7, 1899; N. Lat. 6° 41’, W. Long, 137°.
Sf; «de es Syne # 4035, 186° 5d’,

Beroeé australis Acassiz and Mayer.

Beroé australis AGAssiz and Mayer, 1899; Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXXII., p. 177, Pl.

16, Figs. 49, 50.
A single specimen of this Ctenophore was captured by the “ Albatross.”

S?’; December 23, 1899; off Funafuti, Ellice Islands,

—

“

“

Fig.

c=)
“

“

“

bo

Rese

DOI Ot

> USE
14.
15.
16.

LT.
18.
19.
20.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE 1.

Tiara oceanica, sp. nov.

Turris pelagica, sp. nov.

Psythia prolifera, gen. et sp. nov.
Epenthesis rangiro@, sp. nov.

PLATE 2.
Phortis elliceana, sp. nov.
& cc Gastric portion of the proboscis.
“ ce Portion of the bell-margin.
Bougainvillia fulva Agassiz and Mature medusa.
Mayer.
Lymnorea ocellata, sp. nov. Side view of mature medusa.

se sf Side view of a tentacle-bulb, showing the ec-

todermal ocellus.
es ss Terminal portion of one of the oral tentacles.
Nematocyst capsules on the terminal portion
of one of the oral tentacles.

PLATE 3.
Dipleurosoma pacifica, sp. nov. Oral view of mature medusa,
ot < Portion of the bell-margin.
Rhegmatodes lacteus, sp. nov.
§ 6 Portion of the bell-margin.
PLATE 4.
Geryones mexicana, Sp. Nov. Immature medusa.
Carmaris rosea, Sp. NOV.
Zonephyra corona, sp. nov. Side view of mature medusa.
se cc Oral view of one of the marginal sense or-

gans.

174

Fig.

“

27.

2

2. Of.

oo.

36.

40.

a

EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

PLATE 5.

Rhopalonema typicum = Homeo-
nema typicum Maas.

Rhopalonema typicum. Portion of bell-margin showing the very mi-
nute otocysts.
Solmissus marshalli, sp. nov. Side view, natural size.
“ 6c Oral view of medusa, natural size.
ce ce

View of marginal sense organ.

PLATE 6.

Charybdea grandis, sp. nov. Side view of a young medusa.
a ss Side view of a tentacle from a mature me- ©
dusa, natural size.
OC 6G Enlarged view of a portion of the flexible
part of the tentacle, showing the linear
arrangement of the nematocysts.

ee ue Enlarged side view of a sense organ of a
mature medusa.

6g ot Surface view of a sense organ of a young me-
dusa.

6 Hs Enlarged view of one of the velar canals.

PLATE 7.
Nausithoé punctata var. pacifica
Agassiz and Mayer.

Nausithoé picta, sp. nov. Oral view of 9 medusa.

PLATE 8.

Pelagia tahitiana, sp. nov.
“ “cc

Oral view of a portion of the disk.
Nectophysa Wyvillei? Haeckel.

Diphyopsis angustata Haeckel. Terminal nematocyst-battery of a tentacle.

PLATE 9.

Diphyopsis appendiculata. Side view of the polygastric generation.

i us Side view of the siphosome, showing the order
of development of the the polypites, tenta-
cles, and bracts. (ps) Inferior swimming-
bell; (as) auxiliary swimming-bell.

Lrsea appendiculata. The monogastric, sexual generation of
Diphyes appendiculata.

“

Fig. 5
59.

to
“ee

“

ig. 46.
47.
48.

MEDUS. ily

aU

PLATE 10.

Ersea angustata, sp. nov. The monogastrie sexual generation of Diphy-
opsis angustata.

Diphyopsis angustata Haeckel. Enlarged view of one of the units upon the
siphosome. (2) Immature swimming-bell ;
(c) covering-scale ; (p) polypite ; (ss) sipho-
some; (¢) tentacle.

Physalia utriculus Eschscholtz. Young individual 2mm. in length; with pri-
mary polypite and tentacle.

a fs iw Young individual 4 mm. in length; with sec-
ondary tentacle and polypite.
Aglaisma quincunx Mayer. The monogastric sexual generation of Abyla
quincunx. ;
PLATE 11.
Abyla quincunz Chun. Specimen obtained at Suva, Fiji.
ss s¢ es Terminal nematocyst-battery of a tentacle.
Abyla Huaxleyi = Calpe Hualeyi
Haeckel.

PLATE 12.

Anthemodes Moseri, sp. nov. The entire animal.

ss ut Side view of the fioat.

se Hs Side view of a swimming-bell.

ee ‘ A gonostyle. g male, 9 female gonophores.

fs f A feeding polypite.

Ci ef Side view of one of the terminal nematocyst-
batteries of the tentacles.

Ke os Side view of an immature bract.

cs a View looking down on a mature bract, show-
ing the upper surface.

“s “ Lower surface of a mature bract.

PLATE 18.
Pleurobrachia ochracea, sp. nov.

Lampetia fusiformis, sp. nov.

ee is Side view of apical sense organ.

PLATE 14.
Track of the “ Albatross.”

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SPECIES.

HYDROMEDUSZ.
PAGE
/Eginasp. . . - . . . . . . 151 | Polyeanna purpurostoma Agassiz and Mayer
Aglaura prismatica Sa\ee 6 2 . . 150 | Psythia prolifera, gen. et sp. nov. .

Borealis fulva Agassiz and May er . . 145 | Rhegmatodes increuse sp. nov. =
Carmaris rosea, sp-nov. . - = - = - . 149 Rhopalonema typicum = Homecsaeed typi-
Dipleurosoma pacifica, sp. nov.. . . . . 148 cum Maas. .
Epenthesis rangirom, sp.nov. . . . . . 145 Sarsia sp.
Geryones mexicana, sp. nov. . . . . . 149 | Solmaris sp. . oe ee oe
Liriope hyalina Agassiz and Mayer . . ~. 148 | Solmissus mar seit = nov.
Lymnorea ocellata, sp. nov. . . . . . 144 | Tiara oceanica, sp. nov.
Mesonema macrodactylum Brandt. . . . 147 | Turris pelagica, sp.nov. . . . - + + +

Phortis elliceana, sp. nov. . - . =. . . 146

SCYPHOMEDUSZ.
Atolla Alexandri Maas . . . . . . ~ 156 | Nausithoé punctata var. pacifica Agassiz
Aurelia vitiana Agassiz and Mayer . . . 159 and Mayer ed
Charybdea grandis, sp.nov.. . . - . - 133 | Pelagia tahitiana, sp.nov. - . . . . -
Linerges aquila Haeckel . . . . . . ~ 156 | Zonephyra corona, sp.nov. . . + +
Nausithoé picta, sp.nov... . . - . . . 154

SIPHONOPHOR.

Abyla Huxleyi = Calpe Huxleyi Haeckel . 166

Aby la Leuckartii Exley ee ee eGo
Abyle 1 guincunx Chun ; Narseris quineunx

M: WEG 6 Ser cn ee eerie BLOG
Anthemodes Moeent TewOnG a go 5 a Wale

Diphyopsis angustata Haeckel; Ersaa an-
gustata, sp.nov. - . + - . « « = 162

Diphyopsis appendiculata Eschscholtz; Er-
sea appendiculata, sp. nov. 3
Nectophysa Wyvillei? Haeckel. . .
Porpita pacifica Lesson . . . . «. . »
Physalia utriculus Eschscholtz . . . .
Velella pacifica Eschscholtz . . . . . .

CTENOPHORZ, C

seroé australis Agassiz and Mayer . . . 172
Cestus#sp. 2) 200s vel eh cy ae oem tle

Lampetia fusiformis, sp. nov. . . + + +
Pleurobrachia ochracea, sp. nov. . .

PAGE
147
143
147

152
141
151
151
141
142

155
158
157

160
169
159
169
159

171
170

“TROPICAL PaciFic MEDUSAE. PLATE. 1.
:

B Meisel lith Boston,

PLATE. 2.

WL

B Meisel lth Boia.

=

TROPICAL PACIFIC MEDUSAE PLATE. 3

BMetsel lith,Soston. =

|

oo

PLATE. 4.

B Meisel lith, Boston.

CIFIC MEDUSAE. PLATE. 5.

2/ a.

Ti.
abs Zi D 4Q 2 Rae

re

B Metsel lith Boston.

PLATE. 6.

TT

IRI

OPICAL PACIFIC MEDUSAE.

28

pe

STI ay
/

B Meisel lith, Boston.

PLATE. 7

TROPICAL PACIFIC MEDUSAE.

B Meisel hth, Boston,

PACIFIC MEDUSAE. PLATE. &

B Mersel hth. Boston.

PLATE. 9

ROPICAL PACIFIC MEDUSAE.

B Meisel lith Boston.

TROPICAL PACIFIC MEDUSAE. PLare 10

B Mersel With Boston

B Mersel lith. Boston.

PLATE. Il.

fai
<
a
=)
a
i
=
°
S
z
=)
=
=
a
o
=

12.
TROPICAL PACIFIC MEDUSAE. PLATE 1

B Meisel lith Boston.

B Meisel ith. Boston.

AGM del,

ru

[ 140°

Hathijo

Bayonnaise I

Lots Wife

Rosanio I

Uluths or

* Feys

PAPUA
OR

“St Augustino

W GUINEA

"ALBATROSS TROPICAL PaciFic EXPEDITION

Enderbyls
Numoluk ls

Mortlock Is

ONES

3
elit NE

Greenwich L

BISMARCIC
ARCHIPELAGO

New
Pomerania

emhoursiape
ARCH GO

5 CORAL

(> .C.Flattery

SEA

“Tibou RE

an)
1s us 8s
Matador

Lord Howe Is

Ongtong Java Is

pugainville 1
hoiseul I*

Se att

GST
ning

SOLOMON

160
1s
a2 |
: |
\
*Farallon de Pajaros
RECT = |
eAgrigant
San" MARIANA
? Pagan 1
eAlamagan I
‘Guguant OR
f Sariguant
ps LADRONE
Saipan I
ziz0\2¢ } 5 IDs » Alligator Shl
Tintanl ISLANDS
|e Rota I
” GGuam or Guajant
Nr
ree
‘ Eniwetok=s
Mackanzie Is vail
eaten Halange
Namonuito Isc Hall is
B ACs
* Eetruk oie !
2 Marti e
Wolk ME Xe 28 an, weMtavina 1s
—“S Tosap = tae Mokil

Pingelap

180"
s 100"
2M
ai Curel Midway Is
Pearl RF
Lisiansky I hate
4 sGardner I
Two Brothers Kf © French Fri
Birdt
Kauni
Niihan || 4 (
Tahura) Kaula Pa
¥
3
= = = — —— — = — = ae kee. o a POs Fe
Wakes Is
Gaspar Rico
Bikar |
Vikin Is Rongerupis |
aif & sUtiriks
an tT Likieh
Mejil
Mensehikov <eWotje
itenachikay Wot} sf
s Kowa - an
1, i 32 =
Ke
“
ana) Kingman St
Sali <4, Mulgrave a
— heh 5 (7S Palmyra f
Ebot ui = Washing
oo
gee ? Fant
sTaritari
= 2o8\ 2
Apaiang -,p'araki
| Howland |
ed KS antucket 1 et A! 2 od ey >
E Puarvis |
Nauru f
c ® ¢Nukunau | ? |
*s TWroatoa |
be Canton I
PHO NIX nderburyT
McKeon}. Birney! » Phoenix! |
| ISLANDS ssyaney I
| ardner [+ Hull 1 ‘ F |
|
Victoria I, |
Is |
ela |
x Funatuty a Matu |
Nukunono
.STA CRUZ IS Nukulaflal 9 Fakaofu
; 4 UNION . Rakphanga
7 ba GROUP naalhibct | Hl
tacruzt Pong.in 5 Lyrhaw aceenermaney Danger Is
®_Vanikoro “ | Swaltt acai
@ 194\
‘un dora. = Lode
BPI Rotumah T \ peep
| Vea MOAN OR NAVIGATOR IS Suvarov Is
% om Torresis I nia |
nan & *sMannals
p . Hanks Is ee

1 Santol
Fspirilus Santo es sAurore

2
Matlicolo Aaa, Pentoroat
a

Api

<Palmerston Is
oy | Ailutaksi

YK TSLAND

tay

Kandave *-pONGA OR tel
apal Groupé ‘4 . = *
z Tae =I ih =a Group yas
@0noi Lau ls . DLY IS = |
2 | © TwanaiTholo+* ee, a5 Sf plabi 86, = 2 i * Rarotor
= > re ai 180° 16
160°

Curel Midway Is

Lisiansky Ts

Howland |
et

HAWATLIAN

ISLANDS _

Hawaii

A,
Patty

tmston T

Kingman Sh
Palmyra 1

«Washington orNewYork I
°F:

ning L

& Christmas 1

= = MEDUSAE PLATE 14
160 j
“ : SS eS rem mo |
> Reed orRedfield Rks San Francis
Aug SontaCraz)
Pt. Pinos |
SRS
}
| |
os}
/
| Augiz6. /
| i |
> Pearl Rf ae |
|
| |
|
sGardner I | |
TwoBrothers REE French Frigate Sh is
. Necker I
Bird i
| |
ifeual 1 ; |
Tohur) Riles @| ~~ Oahut

fs. Bs SS = — +192
—— cket Sas — - == |
|
|
anton I | |
nderburyl |
eo hoenaeT | Malden! 4
ISLANDS , caney 1 | I
Gardner I «+ Hull T ‘ | |
| 4
| “Starbuck I A TRACK OF THE |
| Ts : = |
| MARQUE/SAS I5 VAIDIBAMRO BS?”
| Victoria I, | Hatutw.,Corall Is
| Natt Pe SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS,
ukufetau | PA septits |
Funafuti Aten Denia ef Svamwilca
‘ukunono y ae
Nukulaflai ) Falsaofu N | %
UNION ~ Rakahanga Vostokl¢ roline Mol) =A Fatuhivap ©
‘ : 1 + Mahahilsi | Humphrey 1) E04
+) Nurakita GROUP “ y |
* 8 - Danger Is | / |
aGenteHermosa I | aklintl |
Sw # Nassanl } |
Mop, Py |
sie fs o
Ven AMOAN OR NAVIGATOR 1S Suyaroy Is | OR My |
Horne Is Sayaii TO Apia Disappointment Is 7 O oats
te ppo’ sae ~Manogals of eo rtaPila Fy, “C |
Tub) Sept fie $ ss Se ee
{Torani Bellingshuusen. Le, tC ego PN )
Nivatobutabu | heppel I F ia As SS Reknreka
Mop: 5 are 2 2
oe ess yo 2 Amon “
. 29 Hao > Clermé ’
anualai 4 Palmerston Is kutavake ~?e |
18 Lette =>@:Vovau far ory | Aitutalsi Si whee 3 C |
mee at e-TONGA ORY wiCOOK ISLANDS So ks E <= KOS a 7 - 20
Valon a Inpal Group Tollutea @, @ Mitlero : erenertue x a
0no falcon Fi ka Gee AW *Mauki Gloue @ & Turelo
hia mays Ono Ftaw st ogame ok i Dur AIMCO oo
—_Non2 fongalabar es, * Rarotonga 3 Tho =Moerenhoult OO
= 160° + Mangaia Pangatauta
Anuygareva lk
Morane® Peard tig.
*Oeno
* Henderson
Ducie
© Piteairn

Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogqy
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vou. XXVI. No. 4.

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE
TROPICAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, IN THE
U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER “ ALBATROSS,” FROM AUGUST,
1899, TO MARCH, 1900, COMMANDER JEFFERSON F. MOSER, U.S. N,,
COMMANDING.

V.
SHARKS TEETH AND CETACEAN BONES

FROM THE

RED CLAY OF THE TROPICAL PACIFIC.

By C. R. EASTMAN.

WITH THREL PLATES.

[Published by permission of Georce M. Bowens, U.S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries.]

CAMBRIDGE, U.S. A.:
Printed for the sMuseum.
June, 1903.

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE TROPICAL
PACIFIC IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ BY THE U.S. Fish CoMMISSION
STEAMER “ ALBATROSS,” FROM AUGUST, 1899, ro Marcu, 1900, COMMANDER
JEFFERSON F. Moser, U.S. N., COMMANDING.

Ve

SHARKS’ TEETH AND CETACEAN BONES FROM THE RED
CLAY OF THE TROPICAL. PACIFIC.

By C. R. EASTMAN.
(Published by permission of Geo. M. Bowers, U. 8. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries.)

WHEN, more than sixty years ago, Edward Forbes sought to explain the
so-called “ Northern outliers” (or assemblages of marine animals inhabiting
certain depressed areas of the sea-bottom in the vicinity of the British
Islands, and differing from those found over adjacent and shallower regions)
as remnants of a preglacial Arctic fauna, an ingenious suggestion was put
forward, which subsequently received a wide application, and has indeed
been carried to unwarranted extremes in some cases.

For instance, while there can be no question that Sir Charles Lyell was
wrong in declaring that “to talk of chalk having been uninterruptedly

_ formed in the Atlantic is as inadmissible from a geographical as a geological

sense,” and that Professor L. Agassiz’s conclusion’ is abundantly confirmed
that “the present continental areas within the 200-fathom line, as well
as the oceans, have preserved their outlines and positions from the earliest
times,” nevertheless the generalizations once so popular, that “‘ we are still
living in the Cretaceous epoch,” or that “‘ Cretaceous outliers” are repre-
sented by the archaic types still existing at great depths, are now accepted
only in a very much modified sense.

Amongst the forms brought to light by dredging at great depths in mid-

ocean which have interesting paleontological relations are semi-fossil sharks’

1 Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl., Vol. I. (1869), pp. 368, 369.

_—

180 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

teeth belonging to species characteristic of the middle or late Tertiaries in
Europe and America, hence implying that these bodies have been lying on
the sea-floor at least ever since the Pliocene, becoming buried with incon-
ceivable slowness by the gradually accumulating sediment.t Large numbers
of these teeth, together with hundreds of Cetacean bones, were obtained by
the “ Challenger” Expedition in 1875, all of them more or less impregnated
with, and their substance sometimes entirely replaced by the oxides of iron
and manganese. These accumulations of vertebrate remains are not limited
to any one ocean, but are most abundant at extreme depths in the red clay
areas of the central Pacific and other oceanic deposits, being only excep-
tionally found in calcareous oozes or telluric deposits. The “ Challenger”
collections were described in great detail by Murray and Renard in their
Report on Deep-Sea Deposits, * published in 1891, which was the first
attempt to deal systematically with deep-sea deposits and the geology of the
sea-bed throughout the whole extent of the ocean. The Mammalian bones
were still further investigated and described by Professor Sir William
Turner.

No additional material of this nature was obtained until Mr. A. Agassiz
in 1880 dredged off the eastern coast of North America a few Cetacean
bones and one or two sharks’ teeth from the existing sea-bed at a depth of
only 333 fathoms.* The teeth belonged to the genus Lamna, and differed
from those dredged by the “ Challenger” in that the root and vasodentine
remained essentially unaltered, hence implying a comparatively recent

1 The excessively slow rate of deposition of sediment in the central Pacific since the Glacial
period is indicated by the unique assortment of continental rock fragments, coated with a thin layer
of manganese, which was dredged by Mr. A. Agassiz in 1899 at Station 2 of the ‘* Albatross ” Expe-
dition. Cf. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXVI. (1902), pp. 71, 110.

2 Murray, J., and Renard, A. F., Report on Deep-Sea Deposits ; Scient. Results “ Chall.” Exp.
(1891), pp. 267-276. Chapter IV. of this volume, dealing with the materials of organic origin, was
written wholly by Sir John Murray. Not more than four genera appear to be represented with
certainty by the sharks’ teeth, namely, Lamna, Oxyrhina, Carcharodon, and either Galeus or Car-
charias; and owing to their imperfect condition, accurate specific determinations are in most eases
impossible. Nevertheless, Mr. Murray regards these same organic remains, together with the
associated manganese nodules, voleanic lapilli, and zeolitic minerals, as “ by far the most interesting
result of the dredgings between Tahiti and Valparaiso.” (Loc. cit., 1891, p. 181.)

8 T'urner, W., Report on Bones of the Cetacea ; Zool. «Chall. Exp., Vol. I. (1880), pt. iv., pp. 1-45.

4 Agassiz, A., Three Cruises of the ‘ Blake ” ; Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XIV. (1888), p. 276.
Murray, J., “ Blake” Deposits ; Thid., Vol. X11. (1885), p- 42.

SHARKS’ TEETH AND CETACEAN BONES. 181

burial. It should be stated that in the great majority of the “ Challenger”
teeth, all that remains is the hard dentine or enamel, the root and whole
of the vasodentine having been dissolved away.

During the years 1887-1889 extensive deep-sea dredging operations were
earried on in the Indian Ocean by English and French hydrographers, the
scientific results of which were discussed by Dr. Murray in two communi-
eations published in the Scottish Geographical Magazine.’ Among the
more striking features of these investigations was the discovery by Captain
Pelham Aldrich in H. M.S. “ Egeria” of semi-fossil teeth of sharks and ear-
bones of whales, all more or less encrusted with peroxide of manganese, as
had already been observed by the “Challenger” in similar areas of the
Atlantic and Pacific. The author again calls attention to the fact that two
of these species, Carcharodon megulodon and Oxyrhina hastilis, are charac-
teristic of the middle Tertiaries, and, so far as known, are not now existing.

The most recent and only other source from which this class of organic
remains has been derived is the “ Albatross” Expedition of 1899-1900,
which forms the basis of the present report. During this cruise vertebrate
material was dredged from five stations in the Pacific, whose positions, depths,

and bottom characters are given in the following table : °

List or “ AtBarross” Srations YIELDING Suarks’ TeETH AND CETACEAN Bones.

Station Number. Position. Number of Specimens
se Nature of Bottom.
ALA iz |““Albatross’’ . nO :
Besal. Serial. Latitude. Long. W. Fishes, | Cetaceans
°o , fo) ,

2 3681 8 25N. | 126 57 2368 | Red clay; light brown ooze. 153 15
13 3683 9 57N. 137 47 2690 | Red clay; light brown Rad. ooze. 5S 7
17 3684 0 50N. 137 54 2163 | Grayish yellow Globigerina ooze. 1 0

173 3691 18 55s. 146 32 2440 | Red clay; voleanie mud. 6 0
183 3692 19 O48. 167 41 2472 | Red clay; Radiolarian ooze. 1 0
219 22

1 On some Recent Deep-Sea Observations in the Indian Ocean ; Scottish Geog. Mag., Vol. III.
(1887), pp. 553-567. On Marine Deposits in the Indian, Southern, and Antarctic Oceans; Jbid., Vol.
Y. (1889), pp. 405-436. Cf. also Geol. Mag. [3], Vol. VI. (1889), pp. 514-517, Figs. 1-4.

2 Agassiz, A., Preliminary Report and List of Stations, with Remarks on the Deep-Sea Deposits
by Sir John Murray; Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XX VI. (1902), pp 1-114. Cf. also Townsend,
C. H., Dredging and other Records of the United States Fish Commission Steamer “ Albatross,’’
U.S. Fish Com. Rept. for 1900 (1901), pp. 387-562.

182 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Comparison OF VERTEBRATE REMAINS DREDGED BY THE “ ALBATROSS”
AND “CHALLENGER” [iXPEDITIONS.

As the line run by the “ Albatross” from San Francisco to Tahiti con-
verges toward that run by the “ Challenger” from the Hawaiian Islands to
Tahiti, where the two cross, it is interesting to compare the results of deep-
sea dredging accomplished on these voyages. On the run from San Francisco
to Tahiti the “ Albatross” made eleven deep-sea dredgings, four of which
brought up sharks’ teeth, as shown in the above table. On the course west-
ward to the Fiji Islands, and thence northwesterly to Japan, three such deep-
sea hauls were made, one of which (at Station 185, between Cook Islands
and Tonga) yielded vertebrate remains.

Following the track of the “Challenger” from Yokohama, Japan, due
east to the meridian passing through the Hawaiian Islands, and thence south
to Tahiti, we find that eight stations are distributed along this route which
yielded the same class of organic remains; but on the run from Tahiti to
Valparaiso material of like nature was dredged at but one locality to the
eastward of the Paumotu group, namely, at Station 295, The comparative
paucity of vertebrate remains on the ocean-floor for a distance of 4,000 miles
between parallels 50° and 40° of south latitude, as contrasted with their wide
distribution and abundance elsewhere in the Pacific, is probably to be
accounted for by the fact that this belt lies outside the south equatorial
current, and that it has not been frequented by large sharks and Cetaceans
since Tertiary times, or even longer. During the Tertiary, however, Car-
charodons of enormous size ranged along the western coast of America from
California to Patagonia, as is shown by their fossil remains.

Numerous Cetacean bones were dredged by the ‘“ Challenger” from the
red clay in the vicinity of Tahiti (Stations 276-285), and it is regarded by
Sir John Murray as rather surprising that none were in the material from

the “ Albatross”? Station 173, which lies within the same area.’

However, it
is well known that the percentage of Mammalian remains brought up in the
great majority of the “Challenger’s” deep-sea dredgings was very small,
and that, as Dr. Murray has himself stated,’ “in all the terrigenous deposits

1 Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XX VI. (1902), p. 110.
* Report on the Deep-Sea Deposits; Scient. Results ‘* Chall.” Exp. (1891), p. 270.

SHARKS’ TEETH AND CETACEAN BONES. 183

and caleareous oozes they were not observed.” Furthermore, Mammalian
remains brought up from the sea-floor are for the most part limited to bones
of extremely dense structure, such as the ear-bones and fragments of the
beaks of Ziphioid whales, the preservation of which is to be “ accounted for
by the great density of these portions of the skeleton, and the consequent
small amount of surface presented to the action of the sea-water when
compared with the cancellated bones.” '

To our mind, the failure of the “ Albatross” to bring up Cetacean remains
at Station 173 is devoid of special significance, and does not affect the
question of general distribution. More likely is the absence of such remains
at this point, in close proximity to the Paumotus, to be explained as the
result of local conditions affecting the solvent power of the sea-water.

The discovery of Cetacean bones by the “ Albatross” at Station 2 in
latitude 28° 23’ N., and also at Station 13 in north latitude of about 10’,
is interesting, since no remains of this nature had been previously found
north of the equator, in either the Atlantic or the Pacific. With the excep-
tion of two fragments, all the bones of Cetaceans procured by the “ Chal-
lenger” Expedition were dredged from red clays and Radiolarian oozes,
and “these were all situated in the central South Pacific, excepting Station
160, 2,600 fathoms, in the southern Indian Ocean, 500 miles southwest of
Australia.”

The general facts of distribution of sharks’ teeth as observed by the
“Challenger” Expedition are thus stated by Dr. Murray:” “ The distribution
of the sharks’ teeth in the deposits is similar to that of the bones of Ceta-
ceans, although they were dredged more frequently. They are most
abundant in the red clay areas far removed from land, and especially in those
of the central South Pacific ; they were less frequently taken in the organic
oozes of the deep sea, and only in one or two instances in the terrigenous
deposits surrounding continental or other land. It seems undoubted that
many of the teeth of sharks and the bones of the Ziphioid whales belong
to Tertiary and extinct species.”

To facilitate comparison, and to show at a glance the distribution, the
following table has been prepared, which shows the position, depth, and

1 Loc. cit., p. 276. 2 Loe. cit., p. 276.

184 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

bottom characters of all the “Challenger” stations in the Pacifie where
sharks’ teeth and Cetacean bones were obtained. At various other stations
not included in this list, on the run from Hawaii to Peru, a few small teeth
and otoliths of indeterminable fishes were brought up. Otoliths, on account
of their dense structure and different chemical composition, are less readily
destructible than other bones of the fish skeleton. Only in three or four
instances were any fish bones, other than otoliths and teeth, observed in all
the deposits brought to light by the “ Challenger.”

List or “CHattencer” Stations in THE Paciric YIELDING Suarks’ TeErm anp Cetacean Bones.

Position. No. of Specimens.
aaa | Dereh, ] Nature of Bottom. § | -——_H+———_—_ Remarks.
No. fathoms
Latitude. Longitude. Sharks. | Cetacea.
237 1875 | 34 37N.|140 32 £.} Blue mud. Several. 0
941 | 2300 | 35 41 N.| 157 42 ¥.} Red clay. 1 0 | Small Lamna tooth.
944 | 2900 | 35 22n.|169 53 x.| Red clay. il 0 ‘ Me S
248 | 2900 | 37 41 N./177 O4-w.| Red clay. 1 0 < § fs [na.
952 | 2740 | 37 52n.| 160 17 w.| Red clay. 5 0 | 1 Careharodon; 4 Oxyrhi-
256 | 2950 | 30 22n.| 154 56 w. | Red clay. 9 0 |4 Oxyrhina; 5 Lamna.
974. 2750 7 25 s.} 152 15 w.| Reddishbrown Ra-|Numerous.| 13 2 Caicharodon; 9 Oxy-
diolarian ooze. rhina; 5 Lamna.
276 | 2350 | 13 28 s.|149 30 w.| Red clay. 250 16+
281 2385 | 22 21 s.|150 17 w.| Red clay. 116 9
285 | 2375 | 32 36 s.|137 43 w.| Red clay. 1500 50+
286 | 2335 | 33 29 s.|133 22 w.| Red clay. 350 90+
289 | 2550 | 39 41 s.|131 23 w.| Red clay. 1 5 | Perfect Oxyrhina.
293 | 2025 | 39 04s.) 105 05 w.| Globigerina ooze, 2 1 | 1 Careharodon; 1 Oxy-
brown. rhina.
299 | 2160 | 33 31s.) 74 43 w.| Blue mud. 0 1 | Globicephalus.
2236+ | 185+

SyNoPSIS OF THE GENERA AND SPECIES REPRESENTED IN THE COLLECTION.

Of the rather over two hundred sharks’ teeth dredged by the “ Alba-
tross,’ by far the greater number belong to the Lamnide, the only other
family represented being that of the Carchariide. The five genera to
which these teeth are referable with certainty may be arranged in order
of their numerical abundance as follows: Oxyrhina, Lamna, Carcharodon,
Carcharias, and Hemipristis. As already observed, the absence of the root
and lateral denticles (in all cases where such were present) are serious

obstacles to the precise identification of species, since the form and serra-

tion of the crown alone are not sufficiently distinctive characters. With

re

SHARKS’ TEETH AND CETACEAN BONES. 185

the exception of Oxyrhina crassa and Carcharodon megalodon, therefore, the
specific determinations must be regarded as more or less provisional. It is

interesting to note that the last two species became extinct in the Pliocene.

Oxyrhina Agassiz.
Oxyrhina crassa AGAssIZz.

Plate 1, Figs. 11-20.

Over one hundred specimens of Oxyrhina teeth were obtained at Sta-
tion 2, and about half that number from Station 15, which may be referred
with little hesitancy to this species. Anterior and lateral teeth are repre-
sented in about equal proportions, the former signalizing themselves by
their high and narrow crowns, not unlike those of the existing O. spallanzani,
and the postero-lateral teeth only differing from those of 0. hastalis in their
considerable thickness. The outer coronal face is flat, the inner strongly
convex, and the enamel smooth on both faces. The lower lateral teeth are
triangular and erect; in those referable to the upper jaw the apex is some-
times lightly reflexed, and the crown often curved backward. All the teeth
from Station 2 exhibit but a slight coating of manganese. The largest-
sized anterior and lateral teeth which have been obtained of this species
are shown in Figs. 13 and 19 respectively One nearly perfect crown,
much perforated by sponge borings, was obtained at Station 17, and a
fragmentary one at Station 183, both belonging to this species.

This species has not been recognized as such by the authors of the
“Challenger” Reports, but unnamed Oxyrhina teeth evidently identical
with those here described are illustrated in Pl. VI, figs. 8-11, 13-17, and 22.
Of these only the ones shown in Figs. 14-16 are anterior teeth. Although
numerous specimens of O. hastalis were dredged by the “ Challenger,” the
* Albatross” Expedition was not fortunate enough to obtain any.

Oxyrhina crassa ranges from the Eocene to the Pliocene in Europe, and
is of rare occurrence in the Phosphate Beds of South Carolina. The latter
deposits, however, contain such an agglomeration of early and late Tertiary
fossils that the age of the formation is indeterminate. No good figures of
this species having been published heretofore from American localities, two

perfect examples are shown in the accompanying text-figures, with which

186 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

the deep-sea crowns may be profitably compared. The originals are from
the Phosphate Beds of Coosaw, South Carolina, and are preserved in the

Museum of Comparative Zodlogy.

Fries. 1-3. — Oxyrhina crassa Agassiz.

Phosphate Beds, Coosaw, S.C. Two lateral teeth referable to the upper jaw, one seen from

the inner face and in profile (1, 2), the other showing the outer face (3). x 4.

Lamna Cuvier.
Lamna sp. ind.
Plate 1, Figs. 9, 10.

Twenty-two slender and sharply pointed teeth were obtained at Station 2,
and one imperfect crown at Station 15, which belong to a small, indetermin-
able species of Lamna. These teeth have the outer face faintly and the
inner very strongly convex, with smooth enamel on both sides. None of
the specimens exceed 1.5 cm. in height. Similar teeth are figured in Pl. VL.,

figs. 12, 19, and 21 of the “Challenger” Reports, and are stated to occur
plentifully in the Pacific.

Carcharodon Miitrer anp Hen te.
Carcharodon megalodon AGASSIZ.
Plate 1, Figs. 21-28.
Fifteen comparatively small-sized teeth belonging to this species were

brought up by the dredge at Station 2, and fragments of eight larger ones

SHARKS’ TEETH AND CETACEAN BONES. 187

at Station 13, these latter being quite heavily encrusted, and their sub-
stance impregnated with manganese. The most heavily encrusted of all,
however, are six large teeth from Station 173 (Pl. 2, figs. 31-33), on
which the deposit of manganese exceeds 1 em. in thickness, The largest
tooth anywhere obtained is from Station 13, its crown being preserved for
a height of 7 em.

This species enjoys the same range in the fossil state as Oxyrhina crassa,
but is more cosmopolitan in distribution. In the Tertiaries of the Pacific
coast it is known to have extended at least as far north as California, and
teeth either of the same or a closely allied species occur in the Patagonian
formation of Chubut.' A tooth in the Museum of Comparative Zovlogy
from the Tertiary of Aria, Peru, has a total height of 13.5 cm., and a large
upper lateral tooth from Coquimbo, Chili, described as O. gigas by Philippi,
was found in a deposit which has yielded teeth indistinguishable from those
of the existing C. rondelctti.® The type-specimens of several of Professor
Agassiz’s species of Carcharodon are now preserved in the Museum of

Comparative Zoilogy.

CARCHARIIDE.

Carcharias Cuvier.

Plate 1, Figs. 1-6.

The large family of Requiem Sharks comprises twenty or more recent
genera and about sixty recent species, the latter being often closely related
and difficult of determination. In many cases the detached teeth of Galeo-
cerdo can only be doubtfully separated from those of certain species of
Carcharias. The fossil forms having the teeth in both jaws all more or
less serrated are usually placed in the subgenus Prionodon (Prionace); those
having the upper teeth serrated at the base only, and the lower teeth erect

and entire, in the subgenus Hypoprion. ‘The serrated condition of the cor-

? Woodward, A. S., Observations on Seior Ameghino’s Notes on the Geology and Paleontology
of Argentina, Geol. Mag. [4], Vol. IV. (1897), p. 22.
2 Zeitschr. f. gesammt. Naturw., Vol. LI. (1878), p. 685, Pl. XIX.
3 Woodward, A. S.,On Some Fish-remains from the Parana Formation, Argentine Republic, Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, Vol. VI. (1900), p. 4.

188 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

onal margin is well shown in the accompanying text-
figure 4, which represents the outer face of the same
specimen as shown in Pl. 1, fig. 4. It is evidently
with the group represented by Prionodon that five
small serrated teeth from Station 2 and three some-
what similar ones from Station 15 belong, but a closer
identification than this appears impossible. The nar-
row erect teeth shown in PI. 1, figs. 1 and 5, are
evidently anterior and lower in position, and those

shown in Figs. 2, 8, 4, and 6 are by the same token

Fig. 4.— Carcharias sp. ind. : :
a % ces a postero-lateral teeth belonging to the upper jaw.
Station 2. uter face

of same specimen shown The originals of Figs. 1-4 are all from Station 2, and
A a ae ie possibly represent a distinct species from those shown
in Figs. 5 and 6, which are from Station 15. All these teeth agree in their
considerable thickness with certain Miocene species rather than with most

existing forms.

Hemipristis Acassiz.

Plate 1, Figs. 7, 8.

This genus comprises several Tertiary and one still living species, the
latter being an inhabitant of the Red Sea. The teeth are readily distin-
cuishable from those of Galeus, Galeocerdo, Carcharias,
and the like by the peculiar denticulation of their
coronal margins. In Pl. 1, figs. 7 and 8, are shown

two teeth belonging to an unidentified species of

Hemipristis, both from Station 2. An enlarged view

Fig. 5. Hemipristis sp. ind. . ° = . 5
BE EPYSLELONS showing the serrations of the coronal margin is given
Station 2. Inner face :

of same specimen shown in the accompanying text-figure 5. Two Hemipristis

in Pl. 1, fig. 8. x 4. teeth were also obtained by the “ Challenger” Expe-

dition, and are figured in the volume on Deep-Sea Deposits, Pl. V., figs.

10 and 11. Figs. 8 and 9 of the same plate are probably of Carcharias
teeth.

cet i

SHARKS’ TEETH AND CETACEAN BONES. 189

TELEOSTEI.

The solitary evidence of bony fishes from the deep-sea deposits obtained
by the “ Albatross” is afforded by a small scapula brought up by the dredge
from Station 2. The paucity of fish-remains, other than teeth and otoliths,
has already been commented on as a striking fact, the explanation of which
is probably to be sought in their different chemical composition and lesser
density.

CETACEA.

Relatively few Cetacean remains are contained in the collection, fifteen
specimens having been dredged at Station 2 and seven at Station 15.
With the exception of several unrecognizable fragments, these consist of
the tympanic and petrous bones of dolphins (Globicephalus or allied forms)
and Ziphioid whales. The tympani and periotics usually occur in the
detached condition, but in one or two cases they remain fused. None of
these bones attain the size of the corresponding elements in Globicephalus
melas of existing seas, and no large tympani of baleen whales, such as were
obtained by the “ Challenger” Expedition, are represented in the collection.
Owing to lack of material for comparison, it is impossible to make more
than approximate determinations. Several of the better preserved ear-
bones are shown of the natural size in Pl. 2, figs. 25-29. In Pl. 1, fig. 24,
and PI. 2, fig. 30, is shown a peculiar bone of small size and dense structure,
with three projecting prongs, which may perhaps be regarded as a Cetacean
incus.

Figs. 1-4. _
DG.
Gites
cc Okan

ios. 11,

Figs. 12, 13.
“ 1418.

Fig. 19.

OS GAVE
Figs. 21-23.
Fig. 24.

Fig. 25.
met 626.

HE
28.
es 29.
me 30.
“ 81
om 632.

33.
é:

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

PLATE 1.
(All figures are of the natural size.)

Carcharias (Prionodon) sp. ind., Station 2. All of these specimens are seen
from the inner or convex face; the original of Fig. 1 is an anterior lower
tooth, and the remainder are postero-lateral teeth referable to the upper
dentition.

Carcharias (Prionodon) sp. ind., Station 18. Inner face of an anterior and
an antero-lateral tooth of a small species possibly distinct from that illus-
trated in Figs. 1-4.

Hemipristis sp. ind., Station 2. Inner face of two much decomposed crowns.

Lamna sp. ind., Station 2. Two anterior teeth of a small species seen in
profile and from the inner or posterior aspect.

Oxyrhina crassa Ag., Station 2. Inner face of a small anterior tooth.

Oxyrhina crassa Ag., Station 2. Inner face of two large anterior teeth.

Oxyrhina crassa Ag., Station 2. Average-sized examples of the postero-
lateral dentition.

Oxyrhina crassa Ag., Station 13. Inner face of a large specimen belonging
to the lateral series.

Oxyrhina crassa Ag., Station 2. A rather heavily encrusted lateral tooth
corresponding in size to the anterior teeth shown in Figs. 12 and 13.

Carcharodon megalodon Ag., Station 2. Rather lightly encrusted lateral teeth.

Supposed Cetacean incus from Station 2; also shown ip Pl. 2, fig. 30.

PLATE 2.

(All figures are of the natural size.)

Right petrous bone of Globicephalus (?). Station 2.

Left tympanic and petrous bones still retained in natural association and
apparently referable to Globicephalus. Station 13.

Left tympano-pteriotic of Globicephalus (?). Station 2.

Left petrous bone of a Ziphioid whale. Station 2.

Left tympano-pteriotic of a Ziphioid whale. Station 13.

Supposed Cetacean incus, also shown in Pl. 1, fig. 24. Station 2.

Carcharodon megalodon Ag., Station 173. A comparatively large-sized and
very heavily encrusted speciinen.

Carcharodon megalodon Ag., Station 173. A lateral tooth having a moder-
ately thin coating of manganese on the outer face, and a very thick deposit
on the inner, which presumably lay uppermost.

Carcharodon megalodon Ag., Station 173. A lateral tooth evidently buried
in reverse position to that shown in the preceding figure.

PLATE 3.

Track of the “ Albatross” from San Francisco to Yokohama.
191

“ALBAT

16

“

—— a —_ ».> —~
ae ee ee ee ee

c EX. SHARKSTE

"ALBATROSS' TROPICAL PAG

ALBATROSS’ TROPICAL PACIFIC EXPEDITION. 1899-00

140'

160!

A
el 180 ——___—_—_
+ or
,
|
| «| Hathijo |
Bayonnaise I |
Lots Wita| |
Morell f
| | Curel Midway Is
| Byer | Midway Is
Rosanio I eee > Pearl RF
r |
\ 421 |
Forfana I \ |
: \ | Lisiansky [5
; 9 cLaysan I
Yoleano Is aa s
*St.Augustmo | SEardngny
Two Brothers RF © French Frigate Sh
% ANecker [
\ er’ Bint
2 \ wunan [eben
\ | ‘Tahura) Kaula 2 #
\*Farallon dePajaros 4
- | “Assumption 1 ms = = aa = - pa — oS £ |
|
21a Wakes Ls
| eAgriganT
| > Stee. MARIANA
| * Pagan |
eAlamagan L
| «<Guguant °*
= Sariguant
les LADRONE sléhnston T
| Saipan I
vival * = All rShl
e120! Prinian I ISLANDS “ . |
|e Gaspar Rico
Feb 211900 PGyam or Guajan I
= 2aByoaia
2* |
> {Bikar |
zs ; 4
miwetoke Bikim Is rapis c
Pnlwetoke PIS Ulirik “7 |
ae net Tikich
Uluth: or Mackanzie Is =Mejit © |
* Peys 24d Ujalang’
¥ Menschikov Wotje |
5 Namonuito Is Hall Is R . . a
{Yap % @ 1 Kyrajaloi % |
Sorol Is . ae. = |
‘1 . o
) ' Martires «ye Truk ano
, Wolea ri =e Sentavina Is Wuanaae V2
Enderby] eee 7Bonmpic Moki Meee Forgman sh
Namoluk Pingelap Mulgraye s
Mortlockls? s| : — =Pnimyral
Cc We e!
WROTE pone ISLA | Feb.7 h .Washit
203~~2005
Jord Fal
sTaritani
Matador pay baie peal
Greenwich L | “Si stonsrtisog Rainn aHowland I
ee - eas at L. a E x head A E. _kuria rs wer (83 _gNantucket I Nes ba iaee Ss
= | Nora \ |
| | \o #Nukunau
| i VORoatoa :
oo Tamanas \VArorai
| Dec 29 PHC NIX
| | McKean. Birneyl® Phoenix
ISLANDS , sydney I
Lord Howe Is Gardnerl- — jfullt
PAPUA & "
sOngtong Java Ts Wanomiea,
OR QM pougainvinet :
NEW GUINEA a animes Nai
| age Wi, SOLOMON IS Ne Vieloria I,
Rs eS) tkufetauw
fee oa $ . " Furjafuti _Atafu
Seu Malaita Pec.e3 Nukunono
oa nA “anA\GHIe Nukulaflai 5 Fakaofu
s is : : UNION . Rakpian
é we Cristobal ae is Nurakita GROUP * Mahaliile
=10U1stADE eS @ Stacrur : "0in ayy 2GenteHermosa I Danger Is |
< a ob aon Swain * Nassonl
Gee 2 1o4\ |
FSRennell I Pandora si ee atess c |
A Rotamahl \ penx |
Shoe Yeo. BAMOAN OR NAVIGATOR 1S Suvarov Is
7 Es a LI | lorne Is H 4 ya |
CORAL SEA eae | \ Horne 1 a Beales! yoo Manas
S Pp 2 ®Rose
Espirilu Santot 190 Tul
pe ce FIJI ISLA
Mallicolo hyd Pentecost /
VA Api
& => Libou RE & Sandwich | gPalmerston Is |
gEromango . ipe
2, Kandayu # zona
2, g Tanna
“¥_*Erronan pees
== = ¢:= Anell
, : qanelyum s!0noi Lau ls
m% ca] ® TuyanaiTholo™ vox2s Sefungalnbi
e xs ~
160° 180

SHARKS TEETH, PLATE 3.

190° V0"
= = 100 ————— — —— = ie
|
| | 2 Reedorfediveld Rky San Francisé
|
| | |
|
|
|
| ,
| y
lcuret. ; /
a, Cure ie | 4 |
Peorl Rr. | 2d |
| yA |
|
LisianskyL |
sGardner I
Two Brothers Rf © _, reach Frigate Sh fous
*Necker I /
Bindi /
' (thenh| @ oe aren akene
Tahura) Raul 0 aie HAWAIIAN | ‘
sional it o | i/3
| » Maui > =u /
= se eee 3 a 4 yo os DBitoure ISLANDS | eLeno
| + = - Me} S sy — a ten
Hawaii }
Maloy +f
Yanai |
) 1}
fi |
slahnston I | SPE
| ° | '°lyoaa
| | |
| |
| |
| ufsees
| / |
| 1 Janos |
| | |
| |
2 +2600 |
| | | |
| |
| \ | |
\ |
Kingman Sh
“Palmyra [
» Washington or New York I ie yssou
*Farining I
|
| & Christmas |
2Howiand I
- pNantucket I : ll = i > a | foe
Puarvist
unau a |
ya. ot | a
rorai ntonI |
ec 29 PHOENIX EnderburyT |
McKean!. Birneyl= = Phoenix! Matdent |
Z, 7 | lalden
ISLANDS 4 syaney 1 | a ?
GardnerI- Hull t a |
mea | Starbuck I p
D TRACK OF THE
matala| - Pinot “ALBATROSS”
} Erin |
‘etau |
SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS |
ages aEMEO NO Penrhyn. Nununiget svahulea
jukulailai & 5 Falkaofu As, attivaos
UNION . Raknhanga YVostokts Caroline Atoll ss |
GROUP = Mahahilci | Humphrey ) ase Patuhivad
Nurakita E Danger Is
, 2Gente Hermosa T tc eFlintl |
(Swain ) © Nassan | 13m
| |
: “
sales Urn SAMOAN OR NAVIGATOR IS oSuvarov Is :
| \ Horne Is Savaiil = +yMannals |
. upol™ \e @Rosel
1960 Tu oh |
ANDS Ninafous ‘Tarai Alaea pees cle |
C 1 nu Puss ‘Niuatobutabu (keppel 1) hl
eas rom = | |
PV gbastern hese ay aan | |
gPalmerston!s HA0 $220 Clermont Tonnerre | |
y ° eNukuta ake | |
\4 i |
2-7 ONGA OR eae: wv
> S gvaton “Mapai Grou = ae. |
~_ Ralcon I+ amuka Group ip “Geer ® & Tureia | |
#0n0i Lau Is nERSEY LB py 74 eth
Tuyanai Molo nee bit 8 140" eit mates pease
Too" i 160" »Mangaia. < Pangalbure erenhout 3
Morane® Peard op Mantarers Is
eOeno |
Haile rad = Ducie
= Pitcairn

Be Ss Se ee

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE TROPICAL
PACIFIC IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, BY THE U, S. FisaH CommMis-

SION STEAMER “ ALBATROSS,” FROM AUGUST, 1899, Tro MARcH, 1900, Com-
MANDER JEFFERSON F, Mossr, U. 8S. N., COMMANDING.

VALET.

THE PELAGIC TUNICATA.

By WILLIAM E. RITTER anpn EDITH S. BYXBEE.

(Published by permission of Geo. M. Bowers, U. 8. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries.)

_ ‘Tue occasion for the present paper was the request of Alexander Agassiz
that the authors should examine the pelagic Tunicates secured by the

“ Albatross” during her cruise in the tropical Pacifie from August, 1899,

especially interesting.
The collections upon which report is made have been brought together

from many localities in the Pacific Ocean. By far the most important were

Cyclosalpa bakeri Rirrer.
Stn. 7 A.A., Sept. 1, 1899, Lat. N. 10°19’, Long. W. 134° 57’, surface temp.

u6, surface net, 8 p.m. Two specimens, solitary generation, were taken.

1 For a list of the Stations and a chart of the route see Memoirs M. C. Z., XXXVI., No. 1,
January, 1902.

196 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

dinal glands, make the identification reasonably certain.

Cyclosalpa affinis Cuamisso.

Stn. 31 A.A., Sept. 19, 1899, Lat. S. 12° 20’, Long. W. 144° Toy, surface
temp. 80°; taken in deepest part of channel separating the Marquesas from
the Paumotu, 7 p. M. Two specimens of the solitary generation.

Stn. 2928, Jan. 23, 1889, off Southern California, Lat. N. 32° 47,
Long. W. 118° 10’, surface temp. 69”. Six specimens of the negreet

generation,

Salpa confoederata-scutigera Forsk. Cuv.

This species seems to be common off the coast of California and very
variable. It is rare in the south seas. It was collected at four stations om
these voyages. }

Stn. 2928, Jan. 23, 1889, off Southern California, Lat. N. 382° 47° 30%)
Long. W. 118° 10’, surface temp. 59°. One specimen of the aggregate

generation.
The test over the posterior part is much thickened and ridged, the ridges
covered with papillae.
Stn. noe Feb. 4, 1889, off the coast of Southern California, tal N.
33° 04’ 30”, Long. W. 117° 42’, surface temp. 62°. A number of the aggre-
cate cenenien of various sizes was collected.
All have the test much thickened over the viscera. The larger specimens
have short processes scattered over this thickened portion, and a few ov
the soft anterior part. . 5
Stn. 2946, Feb. 6, 1889, off Southern California, Lat. N. 33° 58’, Long. W |
119° 30’ 45’, surface temp. 56.5’. A number of large chains.
The specimens are in such poor condition that no internal characteristics

can be made out, but they seem to belong to this species.

THE PELAGIC TUNICATA. 197

Stn. 15 A.A., Sept. 8, 1899, Lat. N. 4° 35’, Long. W. 136° 54’, surface temp.
79. A single young specimen of the solitary generation was collected
on the surface.

Salpa democratica-mucronata Forsk.

: This species was taken at two stations, both off the coast of Southern
California.

Stn. 2928, Jan. 23, 1889, Lat. N. 32° 47’ 30’, Long. W. 118° 10’, surface
temp. 59°. A number of both generations was collected. The solitary
generation has very long, slender processes at the posterior end. In some cases
these processes are almost as long as the body. In this particular they ap-
proach Traustedt’s var. flagellifera, but there is no other resemblance between

_ the two.

Stn. 2937, Feb. 4, 1889, Lat. N. 33° 04’ 30”, Long. W. 117° 42’, surface
temp. 62°. Both generations were collected, exactly similar to those taken
at station 2928.

Salpa fusiformis-runcinata Cvv.-Cuam.

This is the most common species in the collections. Large numbers of
both generations were taken at different stations from the coast of Alaska
to the South Pacific.

Stn. 2869, Sept. 21, 1888, Lat. N. 47° 38’, Long. W. 124° 39’, surface

temp. 60°. Between Sitka and the Columbia River. Specimens in a very

poor state of preservation.
- July 12, 1887-88, Beaver Harbor (no such date given in printed records),
British Columbia. There are a number of both generations bearing this
Jabel.

The test is somewhat thickened over the posterior part and provided
with ridges.

Stn. “Sur. 35,” 1887-88.

Stn. “Sur. 36,° + 1887-88.

1 Mr. C. H. Townsend writes us as follows concerning these stations: “I think surface tow-net

station No. 36 must certainly have been made immediately north of the Galapagos Islands. The sur-
face tow-net records of that voyage were not printed in the ‘ Albatross’ report for that year.”

198 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

No record of these two tow-net stations can be found. From the nearest i
record it would seem that the “Albatross” was in the vicinity of the
Galapagos Islands.! There are a large number of the aggregate generation:
in this collection.

Stn. 7 A.A., Sept. 1, 1899, Lat. N. 18° 19’, Long. W. 134° 57’, surfaces
temp. 76°. A number of specimens of the solitary generation were taken _
at the surface, 8 P.M. 4

Stn, 12 A.A., Sept. 4, 99, Lat. N. 12° 07/, Long. W. 137° 18. Surfacems
temp. 81°. Four large specimens of the aggregate g veneration were collected
between a depth of 150 fathoms and the surface. Two of them measure —
6.5 cen. in extreme length and the smallest measures 4.5 cen. The test
over the nucleus is much thickened and ridged, and the posterior processes
show a tendency to become prismatic. Variations of this kind are men-—
tioned by Herdmann as oceurring in large specimens collected in the South —
Pacifie by the “ Challenger.” ;

Stn. 14 A.A., Sept. 7, 1899, Lat. N. 6° 41’, Long. W. 137°, surface temp.
82°. One specimen of the solitary and three of the aggregate generation
were taken on the surface at 8 P.M. 4

Allof the aggregate generation have the anterior and posterior processes”
very short and bifurcated. Two of them have a short process at the level of |
the branchial orifice on the left side. :

Stn. 15 A.A., Sept. 8, 1899, Lat. N. 4° 35’, Long. W. 136° 54’, surface ©
temp. 79°. Two of the solitary and four of the aggregate generation were
collected on the surface at 8 P.M.

All are more or less angular. Those of the aggregate generation have
the serrate ridges strongly developed, and the test much thickened over
the nucleus. ,

Stn. 31 A.A., Sept. 19, 1899, Lat. S. 12° 20’, Long. W. 144° 15, ourihod
temp. 80°. Two specimens of the solitary generation were taken on the
surface, 7 P.M. -

Sin, 89 A.A., Oct. 14, 1899, Lat. S$. 16° 03.5’, Long, W. 145° 43’, surface!
temp. 80°. Anat one inile N. 28° W. of north extant to Fakarava. Two
specimens of the aggregate generation were taken between 350 fathoms and

the surface
1 See note on page 197.

THE PELAGIC TUNICATA. 199

Salpa fusiformis-runcinata form echinata.

‘'wo specimens of this form were taken on successive days not far from
the equator.

Stn. 14 A.A., Sept. 7, 1899, Lat. N.6° 41’, Long. W. 137°, surface temp.
§2°. One specimen of the solitary generation was taken at the surface at
8 p.m. It is 6 cen. in length, 15 mm. in breadth near the posterior end
and about 10 mm. at the anterior end. The chain of blastozooids is well
developed.

Stn. 15 -A.A., Sept. 8, 1899, Lat. N. 4° 35’, Long. W. 186° 54’, surface
temp. 79°. One specimen of the solitary generation.

Salpa cylindrica Cov.

Stn. 2928, Jan. 23, 1889. Off the coast of Southern California. Lat.
N. 32° 47’ 30’, Long. W. 118° 10’, surface temp. 59°. A number of the

solitary generation were taken.

Salpa tilesii-costata Cuv.-Quoy et Gar.

Stn. 2928, Jan. 23, 1889. Off Southern California. Lat. N. 32° 47’ 30’,
Long. W. 118° 10’, surface temp. 59°. A number of specimens apparently
‘belonging to this species were collected. They are in very bad condition
and only the general shape serves to identify them.

Stn. 236 A.A., Jan. 28,1900. About forty-six miles southwest of south
point of Arhno. Lat. N. 6° 34’, Long. E. 170° 59’, surface temp. 81°. Four
specimens were taken on the surface by electric light. They are in very
good condition. ‘There are numerous sharp-pointed papillae scattered over
the test of the dorsal side.

Salpa zonaria-cordiformis Pa11-Quoy et GaAIM.

Specimens of this species were collected at four localities :
Sin. 2 A.A., Aug. 27, 1899, Lat. N. 28° 23’, Long. W. 126° 57’, surface

200 EXPEDITION OF THE ‘ALBATROSS,’ 1899-1900.

temp. 66. Four specimens of the aggregate generation were collected on
the surface at night.

Three are about 1 cen. in length and have rather narrow muscle bands.
One of these has the posterior extremity prolonged into a prominent process
about 1 mm. in length. The fourth specimen is 2 cen. long and has much
broader muscle bands than the other three.

Stn. 12 A.A., Sept. 4, 1899, Lat. N. 12° 07’, Long. W. 137° 18’, surface
temp. 81°. One specimen of the aggregate generation was collected. It is
1.5 cen. in length, with a process at the posterior end measuring 5 mm.

Stn. 15 A.A., Sept. 8, 1899, Lat. N. 4° 35’, Long. W. 136° 54’, surface
temp. 79°. One specimen of the solitary generation was taken at 8 P.M.

Stn. 31 A.A., Sept. 19, 1899, Lat. S. 12° 20’, Long. W. 144° 15’, surface

temp. 80.

One specimen of the solitary generation and four of the others have a —

short bifid process.

Salpa hexagona Qvoy et Gar.

This species was collected at three stations in the tropical Pacific.
Stn. 8 A.A., Sept. 2, 1899, Lat. N. 17° 13’, Long. W. 136° 09’. A single

young specimen of the solitary generation was taken in the trawl, which had

been down to a depth of 3088 fathoms. It measures 11 cen. in length, ex- —

clusive of the two posterior processes which are 1 cen. long, and is 3 cen. in

breadth. This makes it almost exactly twice the size given by Traustedt in
his description of the species. The processes, however, in Traustedt’s figures —

are about } the length of the body and are serrate. In this specimen the
processes are only 34
other respects the specimen agrees perfectly with Traustedt’s figures.

Stn. 12 A.A., Sept. 4, 1899, Lat. N. 10° 57’, Long. W. 137° 35°, surface?
temp. Sl. Fifteen specimens of solitary generation were collected.

They are all young with a large part of the eleoblast still present. Their
average length is 3 cen. and the processes at the posterior end are } of the
length of the body.

of the length of the body and are smooth. In all |

|
|

THE PELAGIC TUNICATA. 201

Sta. 12 A.A., Sept. 4, 1899, Lat. N. 10° 54’, Long. W. 137° 35’. Fifteen
specimens of the aggregate generation were collected on the surface.

Their ridges are only slightly serrate.

Stn. 14 A.A., Sept. 7, 1899, Lat. N. 6° 41’, Long. W. 137°, surface temp.
82°. A single specimen of the solitary generation was taken on the surface

a) OP. M.

Pyrosoma giganteum Les.

soues4(4.) Dec. 6, 1891, Lat. N. 21° 12’, Long. W. 157° 38° 307,
Hawaiian Islands. Surface temp. 77. ‘Two specimens measuring respec-
tively 8 cen. long and 6 cen. broad at closed end and 2 cen. broad at open
end; and 6 cen. long and 2.5 cen. broad at open end; .9 cen. broad at closed

end ; colony narrowing abruptly toward closed end.

Pyrosoma atlanticum.

Stn. 14 A.A., Sept. 7, 1899, Lat. N. 6° 41’, Long. W. 137°, surface temp.
82°. Fourteen specimens were taken in the surface tow-net at 8 p.m. The
largest measures 11.8 cen. in length, 2.7 cen. in greatest breadth, 2.4 cen. at
the open, and 1.3 cen. at the closed end. The smallest measures 5.5 cen.
length, 1.3 cen. greatest breadth, .9 cen. at open, and .6 at closed end. All

are of a beautiful clear shining white color.

Pyrosoma agassizi, sp. nov.

External Characters. Colony cylindrical, flaccid, 12 cen. long, 1 cen.
broad in the middle, tapering very slightly toward both extremities. Sur-
“face covered with small quadrangular processes, 1 to 5 mm. in length,
tapering abruptly from a broad base to an acute point; all curving toward
the open end of the colony. Common atrial opening 6 mm. wide, guarded
| by four large processes of the test. These processes 6 mm. long, non-
“muscular, quadrangular, tapering to a blunt point; placed in pairs on

opposite sides of the opening over which they eurve. Test between

202 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

processes thin. Vessels carrying muscles running down into this thin
test, Pl. 1; fig. als
Test 5 mm. thick, gelatinous, transparent.
Zooids visible through the test, numerous, much flattened laterally, all
placed with the dorsal edge toward the common opening of the colony, the
9

larger zooids averaging 2 mm. long by 3mm. broad. Young zooids and

buds thickly scattered among the older zooids, Pl. I, figs. 2 and 3.

Mantle delicate. Muscles of the prebranchial zone well developed, espe-
cially one immediately above the peripharyngeal band. Atrial sphincter

strong.

Lranchial Apparatus. Branchial orifice at the base of a process of the
test which curves over it, on.the side toward the open end of the colony.
Ventral tentacle present, also about twelve others; these slender and

irregularly placed, varying in number and size in zooids of different ages. —

Branchial sae, with usually 20-26 stigmata on each side; 16 longitudinal
bars on each side. Endostyle large, strongly curved. Dorsal lJanguets,
about six in number, very slender. Peripharyngeal band delicate, limbs not

meeting on the dorsal side, but the two turning back and forming a broad —

angle, within which the dorsal tubercle is situated.

Ganglion large. Gland conspicuous; its duet long and bent near the
middle; opening cireular. Phosphorescent bodies large and prominent in
the young zooids, becoming less conspicuous in the older ones, the cells
composing them apparently decreasing in number and becoming somewhat
scattered.

Ligestive tract compact. Ocsopbagus short, funnel-shaped, entering the
stomach near its middle. Stomach nearly globular. Rectum bent sharply
hack immediately on leaving the stomach and remaining parallel to it,
Pl. I, fie. 4.

Atrial chamber small. Atrial orifice large, circular, furnished with a
single tentacle on its dorsal edge; this tentacle long, somewhat flattened,
abruptly tapering to an acute point, Pl. I, figs. 3 and 7.

Gonads not seen.

Lids. Eyery large zooid provided with a stolon bearing three buds,
the largest of the buds with stolon well developed before it breaks loose

.

THE PELAGIC TUNICATA. 203

from the stolon by which it is produced. Branchial tentacles fewer in
number and relatively much larger in young blastozooids than in older
ones.

This species differs strikingly in external appearance from any of the
described species of Pyrosoma, unless it be P. spinosum. The colony is more
eylindrical than is usual, is very slender, and especially is altogether flaccid,
the test lacking entirely the rigidity of that of P. atlanticus and gigantewm.
The most noticeable external difference, however, is the character of the
common cloacal opening.

Instead of the muscular diaphragm, which is a characteristic of all species,
this one is provided with four non-muscular guarding processes. The test
connecting these processes forms a very thin wall. The characteristic vessels
bearing muscle fibres run from the zooids down into this wall of test and
terminate there. No muscles could be detected in the processes themselves.
The processes arise from bulb-like enlargements of the test about the common
cloacal opening. These enlargements are somewhat wrinkled, as though by
the movement of the processes, Pl. I, fig. 1. It would seem that such
movement could only be caused by water currents, however. The spines
covering the test of the colony resemble those described by Herdman for
P. spinosum.

Turning to the interior of the colony, the shape of the zooids is char-
acteristic. In all the previously known Pyrosomae, the mature zooid is
elongated antero-posteriorly. In P. agassizi, however, all the zooids, young
and old, are much broader than long, fig. 3. These proportions obtain also
both for the branchial sac and the atrial chamber, as well as for the zooid as
a whole. The branchial sac is one third broader than long. The atrium is
at least four times as wide as deep. While no gonads have been found,
the zooids seem to be fully developed in, all other respects, but in no case
was there found an appreciable departure from the proportions above given.
The zooids are much flattened laterally.

The musculature resembles that of P. spinoswm, which the species seems
most nearly to approach. There are the usual muscles in the prebranchial
region, and besides there is a strong sphincter just above the ganglion, Ph bE
fig.6. The atrial sphincter is strong, especially under the atrial tentacle,

204 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

where it is at least three times as wide as elsewhere, fig. 7. Its nuclei are
arranged in bunches running across the muscle and giving it a banded appear-
ance, figs. 7 and 8. Under the atrial tentacle the nuclei are more irregularly
scattered than elsewhere. The mid-atrial muscle is absent (?). At least
a prolonged search has failed to reveal it. Its absence is probably correlated
with the extreme shortness of the atrial chamber.

The oesophagus is cone-shaped, resembling that of P. atlanticum, but
instead of entering at the end, it runs back in a fold of the stomach and

enters it near the centre, fig. 4. The compactness of the whole digestive —

tract is characteristic. Instead of spreading across nearly the entire end of

In fact, from the right side, only the stomach is visible, Pl. I, fig. 3. The
digestive tract is situated a little to the dorsal side of the median line. Both
the endostyle and row of dorsal languets approach it, and as a result curve
around under the rows of stigmata. The endostyle is very strongly bent,

fig. 3.

ward, forms a large angle about the dorsal tubercle, and extends along the
dorsal side of the zooid — another point of resemblance to P. spinosum.

The large ganglion, Pl. II, fig. 6, has two large and two smaller nerves
arising from its posterior end, At the anterior end there are two large ones
and two pairs of smaller ones. The duct of the gland is long and bent near
its middle.

The shape of the atrial chamber somewhat resembles that figured by
Seeliger for young zooids of P. allanticum var. laevatum. It is shallow and |
very broad, and the opening is large, figs. 2 and 3. The presence of the
tentacle on its dorsal edge is distinctive, however. As is shown in Pl. I,
fiz: 7, this is formed of mantle alone. The test about the atrial orifice
stops at its base. For a short distance on each side of it the mantle is much
thickened. The edges of the tentacle are also thickened.

There does not seem to be as much difference as usual between the
ventral tentacle and the other smaller branchial tentacles, Pl. I, fig. 3.
This seems due both to the ventral tentacle being somewhat smaller and the

others somewhat larger than usual.

.
.
the branchial sac, it is confined toa space not much larger than the stomach.

THE PELAGIC TUNICATA. 205

There is only one specimen of this peculiar form in the collection. It
was taken with the trawl, which had been down 830 fathoms, at Station 25
A. A. (in the vicinity of the Marquesas Islands) on Sept. 14, 1899, Lat. 8.
8° 48’, Long. W. 159° 48’. Surface temp. 80°. Bottom temp. 38°.

It seems probable that, like P. spinoswm, to which it is most nearly
related, it is a deep-sea form. It resembles P. spinoswm in the character of
the spines covering the test and possibly in the character of the test itself,
though descriptions of this structure in this latter species are meagre. It
also resembles it in the arrangement of muscles about the branchial orifice
and in the course taken by the peripharyngeal band. It differs in size, in the
possession of an atrial tentacle, and probably in the shape of the zooid and
in the character of the digestive tract.

Tt will probably appear to students of the pelagic Tunicata that the
species here described is sufficiently distinct from any hitherto known
Pyrosoma to deserve being regarded as the type of a new genus. This was
the view held by us until a considerable collection of Pyrosomae recently
came into our hands through the kindness of Professor C. H. Gilbert of the
Leland Stanford Junior University, that was secured by the ‘ Albatross ”
on her Hawaiian cruise during the summer of 1902. In this collection are
several specimens identical with the colony here described, excepting that in
some of them the four processes about the cloacal orifice are absent. We
had regarded these as the most important characteristic of the new genus
which it was our intention to establish. We consequently decided to adopt
the more conservative course and, for the present at least, treat the new

form as a highly distinct species of the old genus.

206 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

‘a 4
Species. Station. Date. Latitude. Boneitide pee Depth.
o , ” re ° =
Cyclosalpa bake TE, ets i aes 7A. A. | Sept. 1, 799 |N.1019 134 57 76 — Surface.
GQoafinis ete 31 A. A. | Sept. 19,99 |S. 1220 |14415 80 Surface.
2928 Jan, 23, ’80 |N.3247 3011810 | .59
Salpa confede rata-seuligerad . . 2928 Jan. 23, 789 |N. 3247 30}118 10 59
2937 Feb. 4, ’89 |N. 33.04 80)117 42 62
2946 Feb. 6,789 |N.3358 |1198045) 56.5 :
15 A. A.| Sept. 8, ’99 IN. 485 |186 54 79 Surface.
S. democratica-mucronata. . . . 2928 Jan. 23, ’89 |N. 32 47.30|118 10 59
29387 Feb. 4, ’89 |N. 3304 80|117 42 62
S. fusiformisruncinata . . . 2869 Sept. 21,88 |N.4788 |12439 60
July 12 ’87-’88| Beaver | Harbor.
Stn.Sur, 35] “ “ ’87-’88 Surface.
Stn.Sur. 36] “ “ 787-88 Surtace.
7A. A.| Sept. 1,99 |N.1819 13467 76 | Surface.
12 A. A.| Sept. 4,799 |N.1207 {18718 81 |150 fathomis to surface
14A.A.| Sept. 7,799 IN. 641 1387 82 Surface.
15 A. A.| Sept. 8,99 JN. 485 18654 79 Surface. 4
31 A. A. | Sept. 19, 99 |S. 1220 14415 80 Surface. 7
89 A. A. | Oct. 14, 99 |S.16035 |14543 80 |350 fathoms to surface
S. fusiformis-runcinata form echinata.| 14 A. A. Sept. 7,’99 |N. 641 {187 82 «
15 A. A. | Sept. iM 99 IN. 485 [18684 79 a
Swejlndricas. werden 2928 Jan. 23, ’89 |N. 32 47 30/118 10 59
ISG Atilestizcostald. sa Gee 2928 Jan. 23, 789 |N. 32 47 30/118 10 59
| 236 A. A. | Jan. 28,1900 IN. 634 |E 17059) 8&1
}
S. zonaria-cordiformis . . . + -» 2A. A.| Aug. 27,99 IN. 2823 |126 57 66 Surface.
12 A. A. | Sept. 4,99 |N.1207 {18718 81
15 A. A.| Sept. 8,99 IN. 435 |18654 79
31 A. A. | Sept. 19,99 |S.1220 |14416 80 Surface.
Si heragona. 2) - is een 8 A. A. | Sept. 2, 99 |N.1718 136.09 78 3088 fathoms (2)
12 A. A. | Sept. 4,99 |N.1057 |13785 81
| 14 A. A. | Sept. 7,’99 |N. 641 {187 82 Surface.
Pyrosoma giganteum . . » = + dA74 Dec: 6,791 |N.2112 {1573830} 77
P.atlanticum:. < 32) Re 14 A. A.| Sept. 7,’99 IN. 641 [187 82 Surface.
JRC Som Bay go oD 25 A. A. | Sept. 14,99 |S. 848 139 48 80 830 fathoms —
- Bottom temp. 38°. f

Oikopleura huxleyi (Huxvry) Rirrer.

Syn. Appendicularia flagellum Huxvey.

There is almost no doubt that the species before us is the Appendicul
fuage Uh described by pes in 1851, nos) ae the material ¢ at

enolate econ on the point. wile
Leneth of body of largest specimens 2 mm.+; length of tail 7 mm. to |

f
f

}
q

THE PELAGIC TUNICATA. 207

10 mm.; maximum width of tail 1.75 mm. Anterior two thirds of body
nearly cylindrical, posterior, visceral third considerably larger.

Tail broadest a short distance behind its attachment and gradually
narrowing from here to its long, pointed extremity. Notochord rather thick,
though scarcely visible through the highly developed musculature. Muscle
layer considerably broader on each side of the notochord than the notochord
itself, and leaving but a narrow band between its outer edge and the margin
of the tail, unoccupied by muscle.

Branchial orifice very large, elliptical, regular in outline excepting for a
broad, short process on its ventral side.

Hypophyseal organ large, cone-shaped, the base of the cone directed ven-
trally and somewhat backward. Extremely long and strong cilia within the
duct, situated on some of the cells at the basal end, and extending up into
the apex.

Ganglion considerably smaller than the hypophyseal organ, and apparently
connected with the apical end of the latter. O¢ocyst, with its contained ofolith,
rather small and indistinct.

Peripharyngeal band broad, its dorsal limbs reaching far back behind the
ganglion and hypophyseal organ.

Endostyle typically very large and conspicuous, owing to the great develop-
ment of the four series of gland cells.

Oesophagus curved to nearly a semicircle so as to enter the dorsal side of
the stomach. Sfomach large, left lobe much larger than the right, the former
rounded-quadrilateral im outline as seen from the left side, the antero-ventral
angle extended into a broad coecum which reaches down along the left side
of the rectum. Right side scarcely developed into a true lobe. Intestine
arising from the right side, running forward, with a sharp bend toward the
median line near its middle, then extending on forward in a nearly straight
course to terminate close under the posterior end of the endostyle. Sexual
organs, situated on the postero-ventral side of the stomach, small in all the
specimens seen, hence not recognizably composed of male and female elements ;
apparently consisting of a single compact mass.

The “house,” the gill openings and the integumentary glands alongside the

anterior end of the endostyle, we have not found, none of the specimens

208 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

being well enough preserved, probably, to show the last two structures.
Furthermore, we are unable to give any definite information about the
different areas of oikoplast epithelium distinguished by Lohmann, 1896, —
and other writers. Along the dorsal side of the body Pl. Il, fig. 9,
occurs a band of epithelium with distinct, cuboid cells that may be
«* membranophasts.” q

The absence of the enormous secreting cells situated on each side of
the body, well toward the anterior end, and constituting what is called by —
Lohmann the “oval” has surprised us not a little. We were at first inclined’
to interpret the endostyle, or rather the great gland cells in it, as being”
these organs; but microtomic sections of the body revealed at once the
erroneousness of this conjecture.

The gland cells of the endostyle, fig. 9, are apparently quite similar in
size, structure of the cell body, and size and form of the nucleus, to those of
the “oval.” In none of the species of the genus hitherto described do we
find special reference to the great development of the gland cells of the —
endostyle, though in some, e.g., O. intermedia, it appears from the figures of —
Lohmann, 1896, they do become much like those here described. Again,
Salensky, 1903, in his recently published detailed anatomical study of 0.
vanhoffeni, speaks of the organ as being constituted “de grosses et hautes
cellules glandulaires.’ We are unable, however, to recognize an anterior
as distinguished from a posterior part of the organ in any such definite way
as is described and figured by Salensky. There are, it is true, a few cells j
at the extreme anterior end, somewhat larger than those of the rest of the
organ, fig. 9; but that they are different in character or relation is not
obvious. We count about twenty of the large cells in each of the four
series. Their nuclei are nearly perfect spheres, regular in outline, and con-
siderably clearer than is the cell body. They are situated at the extreme”
outer ends of the cells. It should be mentioned that our description of the
endostyle is made chiefly from specimens examined in toto, sectionized
material not being sufficient to enable us to do much more than make out
definitely that the large cells belong to the organ. We do not wish to be
understood as casting doubt on Salensky’s interesting observation relative
to the anterior and posterior coeca of the endostyle, both communicating

THE PELAGIC TUNICATA. 209

with the pharynx through a common small orifice. We mean only that,
examined in toto, the presence of these coeca is not recognizable in our
specimens.

Although Huxley’s work on Appendicularia is so admirable from the
point of view of general morphology, many of the details, upon which the
present-day characterization of species and genera rests, he touched very
meagrely or not at all. For example, the glandular areas by which the

?

*¢ House” is secreted, the “ oikoplast”’ epithelia of Lohmann, he knew noth-
ing about. In fact his studies on Appendicularia flagellum were made with-
out his coming in contact with the “house” at all. Likewise his description
of the intestinal tract is rather too meagre to satisfy the importance that
this structure has assumed for purposes of classification at the hands of
recent students of the group.

These deficiencies in Huxley’s description and the incompleteness of our
own data render the identification of the two forms as one and the same
somewhat less certain than could be wished; nevertheless it is, we believe,
justified by the following readily recognizable similarities: The two are

essentially of the same size and dimensions (compare the measurements of
our specimens given above with the size diagram marked “N.S.” in Hux-
ley’s Pl. XVIII). This fact will be seen to have special importance when

attention is called to the further fact that the length of the tail in this
species is nearly three times that of the next largest species of the genus
excepting O. cophocerca, which it just about equals.

The general outline of the body (compare fig. 9 with Huxley’s Pl. XVIII,

fig. 1, and fig. 2) of the two forms is essentially the same, and would seem
to be rather sharply differentiated from most other species by the relatively

‘large diameter of the anterior end to accommodate the unusually large

“branchial orifice, or mouth. The great length of the rectum and the far
forward position of the anus in both forms is another apparently common
characteristic.

Again, the tails agree in being narrowly pointed at the posterior end in
both forms, and while this is not an exclusive character, the tails of so many
of the other species of the genus are of some other form that considerable

weight attaches to this similarity.
, M4

————

210 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Finally the part of the world from which the two animals come supports —

the view that they are the same. They are both from the South Pacific.
Huxley’s specimens were taken on the coast of New Guinea, situated in
Lat. 0° to 10° 8. and Long. 132° to 152° W., while the specimens under con-
sideration in the present paper are from Station 16 A. A. Lat. 2° 38’ N.,
Long. 137° 22’.

There are two points only in which the information at hand seems to

indicate rather important differences between the two forms. Huxley says”

‘“‘a very distinct spherical auditory sac” is attached to the ganglion, and his
figures indicate still more distinctly than do his words that this structure is

much larger than it seems to be in our specimens. We assume, however,

that the difference is due to the fact that Huxley studied living animals,

ee

while we have, of course, been able to examine only preserved ones and

rather poorly preserved ones at that.

The other seeming difference is in the musculature of the tail. Huxley’s
figures certainly do not indicate as wide a band of muscle on each side of
the notochord as is present in the specimens examined by us. As shown in

fiz. 11, there is almost no muscleless zone between the outer border of the

muscle and the margin of the tail, while Huxley’s figures show a wide zone
of this kind. So far as this fact by itself is concerned, we might suppose
the difference to be due again to shrinkage in preservation suffered by our
specimens. It seems, however, that the muscle bands in our specimens are
broader relatively to the notochord than is Huxley’s, and it is not apparent
that shrinkage could account for this. However, we cannot believe that in
view of the many strong resemblances this one apparent difference should
have much weight.

It remains to say a few words concerning the name of our species.

The name Appendicularia flagellum applied by Huxley, not only to his
New Guinea specimens, but also to all the Appendicularians subsequently
studied by him, he adopted from Chamisso, who had given it in 1821 to an

animal taken by him “near Behring Sea.” Oikopleura was proposed by
Mertens in 1831 for an animal discovered in the same region, and called

by him O. chamissonis. Neither Chamisso nor Mertens defined their genera

with much accuracy, Chamisso being especially brief and general in his

EE es

’

Ss eee ©6hC

THE PELAGIC TUNICATA. PAA

4

description. No serious attempt was made to establish the genera of the
group on a secure foundation until Fol published his important memoir in
1872. This author satisfied himself of the generic distinctness of the species
studied by Chamisso and Mertens, and gave an exact definition of Oikopleura.
Fol’s treatment of the subject has been accepted by all subsequent writers.
There can, it would seem, be no question, then, that our species is an Oiko-
pleura and not an Appendicularia, as these genera are now understood. The
important and somewhat difficult question to be answered is should the
specific name flagellum stand ?

Most recent writers have regarded flagellum as a nomen nudum so far as
Chainisso’s description is concerned. It would be permissible, by the recog-
nized rules of nomenclature, for us to take this view of the matter, to then
consider the name as re-established and adequately defined by Huxley, and
so to retain it as Huxley’s not Chamisso’s. There is, however, the practical
objection to this that future research may discover that the name will have
to stand for the animal to which Chamisso applied it. We have conse-
quently thought it wiser to name the species anew, and certainly no more
fitting name co ild be selected than that of the famous zoélogist who first
recognized and made clear the place of Appendicularia in the zoélogical
scale.

be

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

APSTEIN, CARL.
_ 1894. Die Thaliacea der Plankton-Expedition.
B. Vertheilung der Salpen.
Ergebn. d. Plankton-Expedition d. Humboldt-Stiftung, Bd. II, E. a. B.
Brooks, W. K.
1895. ‘The Genus Salpa.
Memoirs from the Biological Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University, No. II.
Cuamisso, A.
1820. De anim. quib. e classe Verm.: De Salpa.
Oken, Isis, Bd. I (Lit. auz.), col. 273-276. Jena.
Eisen, Gustar.
1874. Vexillaria speciosa n. sp. ett Bidrag till Appendiculariornas anatomi.
Kongl. Svenska Vertenskaps-Akademiens Handlingar, Bandet 12. No. 9, Stock
holm.
For, H.
1872. Etudes sur les Appendiculaires du détroit de Messine.
Méin. Soc. Phys. Hist. nat. Geneve, tome 21, Geneve et Bale.
For, Hermann.
1876. Schleimdriise der Tunicaten.
Morpholog. Jahrb. Ba. I.
HerpMman, W. A.
1888. Report on the Tunicata.
Scientific Results of the Voyage of H. M. S. Challenger, Zoology, Vol. XXVII.
Hpsnmy, c. HH.
1851. Observations upon the Anatomy and Physiology of Salpa and Pyrosoma.
Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. of London, pt. I, p. 267.
Hux tey, T. H.
1851. Remarks upon Appendicularia and Doliolum, two Genera of the Tunicata.
? Philosoph. Trans. of the Royal Soc. of London for the year 1851, pt. II, p. 595.
Loumann, H.
1896. III. Die Appendicularien der Expedition.
Zoologische Ergebnisse d. v. d. Gesellsch. f. Erdkunde z. Berlin u. Leitung Dr. v.
Drygalski’s ausgesandten Gronlandexpedition nach Dr. Vanhoffen’s Sammlungen
bearbeitet. a
Bibliotheca Zoologica, Hft. 20, Lfg. 2.
1896. Die Appendicularien der Plankton-Expedition.
Ergebnisse der Plankton-Expedition der Humboldt-Stiftung, 6d. IT. E. e.

214 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Quoy et GATMARD. 2
1835. Voyage d. découy. de l’Astrolabe sous Dumont d’Urville.
Observ., ete. Isis, col. 850. Jena. ;
Ritrer, Wo. E. j
1904. The Pelagie Tunicata of the San Diego Region, excepting the Larvacea.
Univ. of California Publications Zoology, Vol. 2, No. 3, pp. 51-112.
SALENsKy, W. :
1903. Etudes anatomiques sur les Appendiculaires. I. Oikopleura vanhoeffeni Loh-
mann. : ; ;
Mém. de L’académie impériale des sciences de St. Pétersbourg, VIII* Ser., Classe
phys.-math., Vol. XIII, No. 7. y
Savieny, J. C.
1816. Mémoires sur les Animaux sans Vertébres.
SEELIGER, OSTWALD.
1895. Die Pyrosomen der Plankton-Expedition. ey
Ergebn. d. Plankton Expedition d. Humboldt-Stiftung. Bd. I. E. b.
Trausteptr, M. P. A. ;
1885. Bidrag til Kunskab om Salperne. .~
Vidensk Selsk. Skr., 6 Rekke, Naturvidng Math. Afd. I, 8, pp. 339-400, Pls. I,
IL, Kjobenhayn. A i
Travustept, M. P. A. er
1893. Die Thaliacea der Plankton-Expedition. ee
A. Systematische Bearbeitung.
Ergebn. d. Plankton-Expedition d. Humboldt-Stiftung. Bd. II. E. a. A.
Voer, Cart. :
1854. Sur les Tuniciers nageants de la Mer de Nice.
Mém. de l’Instit. Geney., t. II, p. 1.

ABBREVIATIONS.
Atrial sphincter muscle. O. Orifice of hypophyseal duct.
__ Atrial tentacle. Pe B: Peripharyngeal band.
s. Branchial siphon muscle. PaO! Phosphorescent organ. —
bs Dorsal languets. R. lo. st. Right lobe of stomach.
Digestive tract. S. Branchial stigmata.
nd. ——_ Endostyle. S. O. Duct of subganglionic gland.
3. a. Esophagus. St. Stolon.
a3 meee St. f. B. Bud still attached to stolon.
_ -Gonad: : Sub. Gl. Subganglionic gland.
Longitudinal bars of branchial sac. | T. Test.
st. Left lobe of stomach. Ten Atrial tentacle.
_ Mantle. Tl. Tails
Nerves from ganglion. Wes Ventral tentacle of branchial circle.

.

p=

Oo

~l
.

oo Or

oe

Otho urd hucleyt, the body of the animal, seen from the right side. ' i.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

oe

» Pyrosoma agassizi, the circle of branchial tentacles, showing the larger yentral one

‘

PLATE I. a,

the orifice. >
three nearly adult zooids, looked at en the posterior see 3 ie,
the side of the atrial orifice, and each with a stolon and |

younger zooids. os
a single zooid seen from its right side. eas
the intestinal tract, with a portion of the branchial sac, and of the
posterior end of the endostyle. ; =

the atrial tentacle and the atrial sphincter muscle, with its groups
of nuclei.

PLATE Ii.

the ganglion and hypophyseal gland and adjacent structures,
seen from the inside. ;
an enlarged view of one of the groups of nucle of the atrial
sphincter muscle. .

the intestinal tract and gonad, seen from the ventral side. —
the tail. t

na
Fa
BS)
5
Tl
fa

S
oe

In\
|

y

Ar

WRN

\

ESTP IT TON & REY 8.

- ?

PLATE I

EE-TUNICATES.

Sy,

Ke}

Raa
Sea

ZnS a

TIT AAP TON & Pa a

Hemoirs of the Museum of Comparative odlogy

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vou. XXVI. No. 6.

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE
TROPICAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, BY THE
U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER “ ALBATROSS,” FROM AUGUST,
1899, TO MARCH, 1900, COMMANDER JEFFERSON F. MOSER, U.S. N.,
COMMANDING,

x

THE LANTERN FISHES.

By CHARLES HENRY GILBERT.

WITH SIX PLATES.

[Published by permission of Georce M. Bowers, U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries,]

CAMBRIDGE, U.S. A.:
Printed for the fAuseum.
JULY, 1908,

eee: BAL 5°

2\ 22 e D Geode ae

= 2
ee =
= a oi
qe : wes
ee. ;
ee ee 6 ene ee Pa Se
i:
: “+ a ee .
eee x = * Fe
&
= ,
«
—
(
.
- ' :
= } . 2 ii
. - «Ff t
. {ie ae i
epee > Vs ° Ff oh
:

‘ 5 wees

REPORTS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE TROPICAL
PaciFic, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ ON THE U. S. FisH Com-
MISSION STEAMER “ ALBATROSS” FROM AvcGusT, 1899, To Marca, 1900,
COMMANDER JEFFERSON T. Moser, U. S: N., coMMANDING.

X.
THE LANTERN FISHES.

By CHARLES HENRY GILBERT.
(Published by permission of Gro. M. Bowers, U. 8. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries.)

Tue collections, which form the subject of the present paper, were made
by the “ Albatross,’ during the month of September, 1899, on a cruise from
San Francisco to the Marquesas Islands and thence to Tahiti of the Society
Islands. Frequent hauls were taken with the surface net and the open
intermediate net to a depth of 300 fathoms. Fifteen species of Lantern
Fishes were obtained, five of which are described as new, the others being
known variously from Australia, the China Seas, Hawaii, the Pacific Coast
of tropical America, or Southern California. One species is known also
from the Eastern Atlantic. A very wide distribution is thus shown for the
pelagic fishes of the tropical Pacific.

Myctophum affine (Lirkey).

Scopelus affinis Liitken, Spolia Atlantica, 1892, 2, p. 32.

Myctophum nitidulum Garman, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., 1899, 24, p. 266, pl. 56, fig. 3.
Rhinoscopelus oceanicus Jordan and Evermann, Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1903, 22, p. 168.
Myctophum margaritatum Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1905, 23, p. 596, pl. 68, fig. 2.

Direct comparison of types has failed to develop any differences between
Myctophum affine from the Atlantic and M. nitidulum, M. oceanicum, and
M. margaritatum from the Pacific. The oldest name, affine, is here used.

The species has been shown to be abundant throughout the Hawaiian
Group as far to the west as Laysan Island and as far to the northeast as
Lat. N. 28° 13' 42”, Long. W. 145° 44’. The present collection extends the

218 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

range from this point almost directly south to the Marquesas Islands, as is

shown by the following list of stations:

Lat. N. 17° 32’ Long. W. 135° 40’
10° 57’ 33” 137° 35’ 25”
3° 28’ 136° 54’
1° 45’ 137° 36°
Marquesas Islands (approximately) Lat. S. 9° Long. W. 139° 45’

Throughout this extensive area, the species shows a striking uniformity.
The photophores are invariable in number and position, except in the anal
series. For comparison with the extensive Hawaiian collections previously
reported, we give below the variation in the antero- and postero-anals in the
17 specimens of the present collection, the two sides of each specimen being

listed separately: Antero-anals, 8 in 9 cases, 9 in 23 cases, 10 in 2 cases;

postero-anals, 5 in 21 cases, 6 in 13 cases; 8 + 5 occurs in 4 cases, 8 + 6 in ©
5,9+5in15,9+ 6in8,10+5in2, The three specimens from Lat. N. 10°57!

35", Long.W. 137° 35! 25” have the numbers i = a te is 2 ie i 3 thus aver-

aging one less than the others in this collection and in that from the —

Hawaiian Islands.
In the type of M. nitidulum, the anals are 8 + 5 on one side, 8 + 6 on the

‘

other.

Myctophum evermanni Giveerrr.
Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1905, 23, p. 597, pl. 70, fig 2.

Kleven specimens from the following localities :

Lat. N. Long. W, 4
17° 32’ 135° 40°
10° 57’ 35” 137° 35’ 25”

5° 49” 136° 47’

Lat. S.
16° 39’ 149° 11’

The range is thus extended from the Hawaiian region directly south to
beyond the Marquesas Islands. No differences are evident in the southern
specimens, so far as the limited material is adequate to determine that point.

The usual number of anal photophores is 8 + 5, which occurs bilaterally in

Pees Qeorn © oer

mend Hes

eal

THE LANTERN FISHES. : 219

5 specimens and on one side of 3 others; 9 + 5 occurs bilaterally in 1
specimen, 8 + 6 bilaterally in 2; 7+ 5 occurs unilaterally in 3 specimens.

This species has been compared with specimens of M. humboldti and
M. californiense and is very distinct from both.

Myctophum reinhardti Lirxen.

Scopelus reinhardtii LUTKEN, Spolia Atlantica, 1892, 2, p. 257, fig. 16.

Myctophum atratum Garman, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., 1899, 24, p. 268.

Myctophum braueri GILBERT, Bull. U.S. Fish Com., 1905, 23, p. 598, pl. 70, fig. 1; not Mycto-
phum (Lampanyctus) braueri LONNBERG, Zool. Anz., 1905, 28, p. 764.

Six young specimens from near the equator, Lat. N. 1° 46’, Long. W.
137 36’. The anals number 11 to 13 instead of 13 to 15, as in Hawaiian
specimens. The following combinations are present: 6+7 in 5 cases,
Som 3, 50+8 inl, 5+7 in 1,5+6 in 2. As in D. spinosus, the
southern specimens show a lower average number of photophores, but the
limited amount of the material makes the comparison inadequate. The
type of M. atratum, from near the entrance to the Gulf of California, was
in rather poor condition, so the number of posterior anals could not be
determined with certainty. Six can be made out on one side of the type
specimen and 5 on the other, but others may have been present in life.

Liitken’s account of M. reinhardti as having 11 dorsal and 16 anal rays
and with antero-anal photophores varying from 4 to 7, seemed to indicate
a species distinct from this Pacific form. Examination of the two specimens
which Liitken designated as types shows, however, that they represent two
very distinct species. The one figured by him, from 347 22 No lat... 18> 10%
W. Long., may be considered the type, and has 14 dorsal and 24 anal rays,
as in M. atratum. On direct comparison with the latter no important
differences appear. Liitken’s fin-counts were taken from his second speci-

men, which belongs to a species still undescribed.

220 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900. 4
“4
Dasyscopelus spinosus (Sre1npAcHNeER).

Scopelus spinosus STEINDACHNER, Sitz. akad. wiss. Wien, 1867, 55, p. 711, pl. 3, fig. 4. g

Twenty specimens of this species were obtained at the following localities:

Lat. N. 13° 32! Long. W. 135° 40: B
Lat. N. 3° 28’ Long. W. 136° 54’
Lat. S. 15° 24’ 30” Long. W. 147° 59’ 40” 1
Lat. S. 16° 39’ Long. W. 149° 11’ :

The number of individuals is too limited for satisfactory comparison with —
Hawaiian material. The photophores of the anal series are present in —
numbers as follows: 7+5 in 4 cases, 7+6 in 20, 7+7 in 9, 6+6 in 3, ~
6+ 7 in 8,6+8in 1. Thus in the anterior group, 7 occurs in 33 cases, 6 in
7 cases; in the posterior group 8 occurs in 1 case, 7 in 12 cases, 6 in 23
cases, and 5 in 4 cases. Comparing these with data given for Hawaiian
material (Bull. U. 8. Fish Com., 1905, 23, p. 599), it appears that the more —
southerly specimens average one less photophore in the anal series. The -
total number varies from 12 to 14, 15 prevailing, while in Hawaiian material —
the range was from 13 to 15 with 14 prevailing. In the southern material,
the number 8 is absent from the anterior group, and 6 occurs not infre-
quently, while in Hawaiian species, 8 is common and 6 very rare. A
similar difference is found in the posterior group.

The serrations on the scales are very evident in specimens 30 mm. long,
but are not apparent in those 20 mm. long. The serrations develop first on
the scales along the dorsal profile behind the dorsal fin.

Dasyscopelus pristilepis Gitzerr & Cramer.

Gilbert & Cramer, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1897, 19, p. 412, pl. 39, fig. 1; Gilbert, Bull. U. S.
Fish Com., 1905, 23, p. 600.

Three young specimens from the following stations :

Lat. N.. ‘1°45! Long. W. 137° 36’
Lat. S. 16° 39’ Long. W. 149° 11’

In the number of anal photophores 7+ 4 occurs bilaterally in one
specimen, 7+ 5 bilaterally in another, 7 +4 and 7+ 5 in the third.

w.*

THE LANTERN FISHES. ZIP

Dasyscopelus asper (Ricuarpson).
-Myctophum asperum Ricwarpson, Ichth. Erebus & Terror, 1845, p. 41, pl. 27, figs. 13-15.

Four specimens not exceeding 20 mm. long, taken at the surface Sept. 8,
1899, in Lat. N. 3° 28’, Long. W. 136° 54’, about 700 miles north of the
Marquesas Islands.

Most nearly related to Myctophum pristilepis, Gilbert & Cramer, from the
Hawaiian Islands, differing in the higher, more compressed head, the
blunter, somewhat projecting snout, the much smaller eye, which is far
below the upper profile, the more angulated supra-anals, and the slightly
more distant precaudals. The number of anal photophores is larger.
~ Measurements in hundredths of length to base of caudal: length of head
32; eye 9; axial length of snout 4.5; greatest depth of body 26; least
depth of caudal peduncle 9; distance from snout to front of dorsal 46; to
base of ventrals 47; to front of anal 62; to adipose dorsal 82.

Dorsal 13, anal 17, pectoral 15, lateral line 37.

Head and body comparatively deep and compressed, eye small, well
below the upper profile, snout high and compressed, slightly protruding
beyond premaxillaries. Maxillary little widened posteriorly, extending
beyond eye a distance less than half orbital diameter. Teeth all straight,
in very narrow bands, consisting of a series of somewhat longer teeth with
‘smaller ones interspersed. Cheeks not oblique, the posterior border of
-preopercle vertically rounded.

Pectorals long, extending to or slightly beyond middle of ventrals ;
ventrals reaching vent, inserted a trifle behind origin of dorsal; first anal
Tay under the last of the dorsal, its last rays under the adipose fin.

Seales mostly fallen, those present showing a few coarse serre. Two
‘minute antorbital photophores, one above the other below level of nostrils,
the two connected by a narrow black bar. Supra-pectoral slightly nearer
“pectoral fin than lateral line; upper infra-pectoral opposite base of lower
pectoral ray, the lower infra-pectoral nearer the upper than the first pair
of ventrals. First pair of ventral photophores nearest the median line, the

second, third, and fourth pairs nearly equidistant from it, the fifth pair

222, EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

more divergent, but not markedly so; interval between third and fourth
pairs shortest, that between fowth and fifth but slightly longer; second
interval but little shorter than the first. Supra-ventrals slightly nearer
ventral fins than lateral line. First pair of ventral photophores nearly in
contact on median line, the others farther apart and equidistant from
median line, the fourth pair at the sides of the vent and somewhat an-
terior to it; second interval longest, the first shortest. Upper supra-anal
immediately below lateral line on its seventeenth scale, and in a vertical line
passing through the second anal ray; middle supra-anal slightly nearer
upper supra-anal than fourth ventral, in an oblique line joining the two;
lower supra-anal below and well in advance of middle supra-anal, in a
line joining middle supra-anal with first ventral. Antero-anals 7 (6 in one
specimen), equally spaced, forming a gently curved line with the concavity
downwards. Postero-lateral immediately below lateral line, above or slightly
behind last antero-anal. Postero-anals 5. Precaudals 2, in an oblique line,
the interspace a little wider than that separating those of anal series.

In the four specimens before us, the anal photophores number as follows:

(7+5 §7+5 pare 6+5
17+ 5,17 +5, eee

General color very light brown, marked with distinct blackish spots
distributed as follows: one immediately behind nape, one before dorsal fin,
one at base of adipose fin, — these all on median line; a humeral spot; a
very small spot at base of caudal.

It seems highly probable that D. naufragus Waite (Waite, Records Austra-_
lian Museum, 1904, 5, p. 154, pl. 18, fig. 3), should be placed in the synon-
omy of this species, the differences indicated by the author being drawn
from the somewhat inaccurate drawing of the immature type of D. asper.

Rhinoscopelus tenuiculus (Garman).
Myctophum tenuiculum Garman, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., 1899, 24, p. 262, pl. J, fig. 5.

A single specimen, 50 mm. long, was taken September 4, 1896, in Lat.
N. 10° 57’ 35”, Long. W. 137° 35! 25”. The species is considered by Brauer”
(Zou). Anz., 1904, 28, p. 390) to be a synonym of &. coccoi, but comparison

THE LANTERN FISHES. 223

with specimens of the latter from the Atlantic Coast of the United States
off Cape Hatteras shows that the two are distinct. A. tenwieulus has a much
larger head, with deeper, blunter, scarcely protruding snout, and much
larger eye. The mouth is smaller compared with length of head. The
upper profile is much more curved than the lower, the two nearly equally
curved in coccoi. In the single specimen before us, the ventral fins contain
but seven rays, as in Garman’s type, while in all specimens of F. coceo’ which
we have examined there were eight ventral rays; no outer rudimentary
ventral ray could be detected in either form. Scales along dorsal and
ventral outlines produced and narrowed backward, terminating in an acute
point which is more pronounced in £2. tenwiculus than in R. coccoi.

For purposes of comparison, there is given below a table of comparative
measurements of /. ¢enwiculus and A. coccoi in hundredths of total length

without caudal.

= ]

Tenuiculus Coccoi
Length of head (in hundredths) . . . .. . . 26 23
Diameter of eye ow 22S eae 8 6
MtlenetMGLSsnOUbe ss ) = + << « + = 4 6
Interorbital width 8 7.5
Length of maxillary . 5 16! 0. S0t AOp ste 17 16
smeduesindepthiofhead 5 9s 3 s+ 5 1 ee 21 18
Wepiimatorigim of dorsalfin. - . .- 1... .- . 22 21
Eramutitomrontordorsal. 8.0. 2 6 -) - » » + 43 43
Muonontto base of ventrals . . . . . ... - 33 34
| Snout to origin of anal 50 53
Snout to adipose fin 2 16) OD. Ect R Ae ae 73 71
Menpuntbosbaserofcaudalyy . - 4. - - - « = - 43 mm. 42 min.
Meetumber or dorsalrays; / 9. . 2. . eee il 11
PREIGETEOLAUAITAVS esis fess eek 18 20
MemeMcamberof ventralrays. . . . . ....- . G 8
mumibemot pectoralrays =. « © . « + - - 14 13
SPeMERRMLeruliMe mM itaes sh. ek 38 or 39 41 or 42

lel Me le,

224 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Centrobranchus choerocephalus Fow.rr.

Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci., Phila,, 1903, 55, p. 754; Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1905, 23, p. 594, pl.
69, fig. 1.

One small specimen, from Lat. 8. 16° 39’, Long. W. 149° 11’, extends the
range from the Hawaiian Islands to a point well south of the Equator. No
differences are apparent between this and northern specimens. The anals |
number 6 + 11 on one side, 5 + 10 on the other.

Diaphus nanus, sp. nov.
Plate 1.

Type 17 mm. long, from Hydrographic Station 3798 (A. A. 27), near
Nukuhiva Island, Marquesas Group; taken in open intermediate net from
surface to 500 fathoms.

Most nearly related to D. theta Eigenmann and Eigenmann, from the
coast of California, agreeing with this species in its short, bluntly rounded
snout, its pair of small circular preocular organs, which are directed forwards, —
but little visible laterally, and are closely approximated on the median line
of the snout; the subocular organ is also short and narrow, often with a
minute detached point posteriorly. The species differs from D. ‘hela among
other respects in the more slender form, the more elevated first antero-anal,
the angulated supra-anals, and the closer approximation to the lateral line
of the upper supra-anal, the postero-lateral, and the fourth precaudal. —
Diaphus fulgens Brauer apparently has the preocular not circular in shape,
widely visible laterally, and the upper series of photophores more distant
from the lateral line.

Measurements in hundredths of total length to base of caudal: length of
head 31; depth of head at oceiput 21; axial length of snout 4; diameter
of eye 12; length of maxillary 19; greatest depth of body 23; least depth
of caudal peduncle 11; distance from snout to origin of dorsal 48; to in-
sertion of ventrals 46; to origin of anal 61; longest gill-raker 5.

D.13; A.13; P.12; V. 9; lateral line 36; gill-rakers 5 + 13, including ¥

all rudiments, Br. 9.

THE LANTERN FISHES. 225

=

Snout very short, comparatively wide, bluntly rounded; maxillary nearly
horizontal, extending beyond orbit a distance nearly equaling half diameter
of orbit, its posterior portion not widened; preopercular margin nearly
vertical.

Pectorals slender, of 12 rays, broken in all our specimens, but probably
not reaching the ventrals ; ventrals inserted slightly behind origin of dorsal,
reaching vertical from front of anal; origin of dorsal slightly in advance of
middle of body ; origin of anal just behind last dorsal ray, the adipose dorsal
over last anal rays.

Seales all fallen, but those of lateral line apparently not enlarged.

Preocular photophore small, circular, scarcely equaling half diameter of
pupil, occupying a pit immediately above nostrils, the two organs narrowly
separated mesially by the ethmoidal ridge. They are placed on the anterior
aspect of the snout, directed forwards, scarcely visible from the side. Sub-
ocular organ short and narrow, below the anterior half of the pupil or a
little farther forwards, a minute detached point behind it often to be made
out with difficulty. Supra-pectoral spot below opercular angle, its distance
from pectoral base scarcely more than half its distance from lateral line; a
very narrow white luminous body below it, often scarcely visible. Upper
infra-pectoral at base of lower pectoral rays, in a straight line with lower
infra-pectoral and first thoracic. Second thoracics only slightly nearer first
than fifth pairs, the second and third pairs closely approximated, the elevated
fourth pair a little higher on sides than the middle pectoral rays, vertically
over interspace between third and fourth thoracics. Supra-ventrals half way
between lateral line and the base of ventrals. Ventral organs typically
arranged, the first three equally spaced, in an oblique line, the fourth and
fifth near median ventral line. Supra-anals forming an angulated line, the
upper one on lower margin of the eighteenth scale of lateral line, the middle
one half way between the upper and the vent, the lower one in advance of
and slightly below the middle spot, the interspace between the two upper
spots nearly twice that between the two lower; lower supra-anal very near
the fifth ventral, a little above the line connecting fifth ventral and the
middle supra-anal. Antero-anals 5, in a wide curve, the first distinctly

elevated, forming with the second a very oblique line passing above the
15

226 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

middle supra-anal; second antero-anal nearest the anal base, the third, fourth,
and fifth forming a gently diverging curved line which passes behind the
postero-lateral. Postero-lateral on the twenty-fourth scale of the lateral line ~
near the lateral line but not in contact with it, its distance from fifth antero-
anal nearly twice that separating fifth from fourth. Postero-anals 5 (or 6)
in number. Precaudals in a wide shallow curve, nearly evenly spaced, the
fourth distinctly below the lateral line.

Color apparently deep brown, lighter on cheeks, mandibles, and snout ;
black on opercles. ’

Two co-types from Hydrographic Station 3797 (A. A. 25), and two from
3798 (A. A. 27), near the Marquesas Islands. All are smaller than the type.

Diaphus agassizil, sp. nov.
Plate 2.

Type 21 mm. long, from Hydrographic Station 3798 (A. A. 27), near
Nukahiva Island, Marquesas Group; taken with open intermediate net down
to 500 fathoms.

Characterized by the deep compressed head and snout, by the absence of
preocular or subocular luminous areas, and by the normal number and ar-
rangement of photophores. In Diaphus wrolampus, the only other species of
the genus described without preocular luminous area, there are but two
supra-anals, and the second and third ventrals are equally elevated.

Total length, excluding caudal, 18 mm.; length of head, 32 hundredths
of this length; diameter of eye 7; length of snout 6; length of maxillary —
23; greatest depth of body 23; least depth of caudal peduncle 9; distance
from snout to front of dorsal 45; to front of ventrals 42; to front of anal
60; to adipose fin 78.

D. 14; A. 16; P.13; scales in lateral line 36 to 38; gill-rakers 8 + 13.

Head unusually deep and compressed; eye small, but little above middle
of head, barely longer than snout; maxillary not widened posteriorly, its
middle point a trifle behind vertical from center of eye; preopercular
margin comparatively little oblique.

Pectorals mutilated but evidently weak, probably not reaching the —

THE LANTERN FISHES. 227

ventrals ; ventrals overlapping front of anal, their insertion under the first
rays of the dorsal; origin of anal under last dorsal rays; front of adipose
fin vertically above last anal ray.

Seales and much of the epidermis lost, but the ground color evidently
dark brown or blackish. An evident pigment line dividing the photophores.
A minute round photophore, smaller than any of the others, on the anterior
upper margin of the orbit immediately above the nostril, under the anterior
projecting rim of the supraorbital portion of the frontal. A similar minute
photophore is frequently present in this exact location in many species of
Diaphus and Myctophwn, and is frequently to be recognized as distinct from
the large preocular luminous area, where this is present in Diaphus. In
D. urolampus, this minute photophore is represented by a densely pigmented
black globular body, apparently no longer functional.

Supra-pectoral photophore slightly nearer lateral line than base of pectoral,
without the glandular body usually associated with it in this genus; the two
infra-pectorals forming with the first thoracic a straight, obliquely ascending
line, the spots evenly spaced; first pair of thoracics separated from second
pair by a wide interval, about twice the length of the space separating the
second pair from the third and the third from the fifth ; fourth pair elevated
as usual, above and slightly behind the third pair; first three ventrals form-
ing an obliquely ascending line, the second more widely separated from the
third than from the first ; distance between upper and middle supra-anals
more than twice that between the middle and lower; lower supra-anal very
near the fifth ventral and a little behind it; antero-anals 7 or 8 in number,
the first above and slightly in front of the second, the line joining the two
traversing the lateral line slightly behind the upper supra-anal; last antero-
anal also elevated, above and behind the next to the last, the line joining
the two passing behind the postero-lateral ; all antero-anals, except the first
and last, in a straight line parallel with the base of the anal fin; postero-
anals 4 or 5 in number; precaudals 4, equally spaced, following the curve
of the base of the fin; upper supra-anal and the postero-lateral immediately
below the lateral line, the upper precaudal somewhat more distant from it,
the supra-ventral very slightly nearer lateral line than base of ventrals.

Two small specimens secured at Hydrographic Station 3798 (A. A. 27).

228 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Diaphus signatus, sp. nov.
Plate 3.

Type 60 mm. long, from the surface at Hydrographic Station 3798 (A. A.
27), near Nukuhiva Island, Marquesas Group.

Most nearly related to Diaphus (Nyctophus) splendidus Brauer (Zoél. Anz.,
1904, 28, p. 399, fig. 7), differing in the smaller head and shorter snout, the
less elevated interorbital region which scarcely protrudes above the orbital
rim, and the more anterior insertion of the ventral fins. The preocular
luminous organ is apparently not divided into upper and lower portions,
but has immediately above it a distinct luminous dot surrounded by the
black pigment. In general proportions, fin rays, and number and distri-
bution of photophores, this species does not differ from D. splendidus.

Length of head 28 hundredths of total length without caudal; diameter
of eye 7; length of snout 4.3; length of maxillary 20; greatest depth of
body 18; least depth of caudal peduncle 8; distance from snout to front
of dorsal, 45; to insertion of ventrals 41; to front of anal 64; to adipose
fin 80.

D. 15; A.15; P. 12; V.9; lateral line 38; the 11th scale over the
supra-ventral photophore, the 18th scale over the upper supra-anal, the
25th over the postero-lateral.

Form slender; snout short and bluntly rounded, its length little more
than half the diameter of orbit; maxillary long and slender, not widened
posteriorly, its middle well behind the pupil; preopercular margin very
oblique; gill-rakers slender, 6+ 15 in number on outer arch, the longest
three-fourths the diameter of the eye.

Pectorals small, inserted low, but little above the level of the ventrals,
which they fail to reach. Ventrals inserted well in advance of the dorsal,
unusually well developed, their longer inner rays extending to base of
third or fourth anal ray. The vertical from the last dorsal ray falls
between the vent and the front of the anal, Last anal ray under the
middle of the adipose fin.

Scales and much of the integument lost, but the general color was

THE LANTERN FISHES. 229

evidently blackish, the bases of the vertical fins black. Dorsal, anal, and
caudal fins with the articulations of the rays finely dotted with black, the
fins thus with fine wavy cross-lines, which are especially noticeable on
the caudal. Two broad dark bars cross the mandibles, one below the
posterior part of eye, the other immediately in front of mandibular joint.

Preocular luminous organ occupying the space between the eye and
the nostril, extending but little above or below the latter, not extending
on the suborbital region. Its anterior margin is deeply indented opposite
the nostril, but there is no evident division into an upper and a lower
portion. At its upper margin, but separated from it, is a minute round
photopore surrounded with pigment, as in D. agassizii. No subocular spot,
the anterior half of suborbital region bright silvery. Supra-pectoral slightly
nearer the lateral line than the pectoral fin, there being associated with it a
whitish glandular organ, as in nearly all species of this genus. Lower
infra-pectoral spot midway between upper infra-pectoral and first thoracic.
First and second thoracics widely separated, the third midway between
second and fifth; fourth thoracic elevated as usual in the genus, a little
higher than the base of the ventral fins, and slightly behind the third
thoracic. Second and third ventral photophores progressively elevated,
as usual, the third slightly in front of the vertical from the fourth and
below the direct line joining the first and second; the second is much
nearer the first than the third. First antero-anal elevated, slightly in
advance of the second, which is widely separated from the third; third
to sixth antero-anals equally spaced and less widely separated, the third,
fourth, and fifth almost equally distant from base of anal, the sixth dis-
tinctly elevated, but less so than the first. Postero-anals four in number
(five in splendidus), the last separated by a wide interval from the first
precaudal, which is inserted distinctly in advance of the rudimentary caudal
rays. Distance from supra-ventral spot to lateral line two-thirds its distance
from ventral fins. The upper supra-anal, the postero-lateral, and the upper
‘precaudal encroach on the scales of the lateral line. Supra-anals slightly
angulated, the lower two forming with the fifth ventral an obliquely
ascending straight line, which intersect the lateral line behind the upper
supra-anal.

250 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

In addition to the type, there is a co-type, of equal size, from the

same locality.

Dr. Brauer has kindly re-examined the types of D. splendidus at the

request of the writer and states that the ventral is always inserted under

the beginning of the dorsal, the supraorbital region projects always above
the eye as shown in the figure, and the snout, although somewhat variable
in length, is always more than half the diameter of the eye. In three speci-

mens in which the snout is 1.5 cm., 1.75 cm. and 2 em. long, the diameter

of the eye is 2.1 cm., 2.2 em. and 2.5 em. in length,

Lampanyctus townsendi (Ereznmann and EigENMANN).

Plate 4.

Myctophum townsendi EIGENMANN and E1GENMANN. West American Scientist, 1889, p, 125,
from Cortez Banks, south of San Diego, California.

A single young specimen, 26 mm. long, from Hydrographic Station, 3797
(A. A. 25), near Ua Huka Island, Marquesas Group, taken with the open
intermediate net between the surface and 300 fathoms.

Measurements in hundredths of length without caudal: Length of head
34; diameter of eye 10; length of snout 7; length of maxillary 25; great-
est depth of head 20.5; distance from snout to dorsal 49; to ventrals 48;
to anal 63; to adipose fin 79; least depth of caudal peduncle 9.

Dorsal 13; anal 13; pectoral 14; lateral line 38; well-developed gill-
rakers 4 + 11, in addition to two short rudiments on vertical and three on

horizontal limb of arch.

Body slender, snout short but not bluntly rounded, the premaxillaries

mesially about on the level of middle of orbit; maxillary oblique, noticeably
but not greatly widened at tip, extending beyond eye a distance about
equaling half diameter of orbit. Teeth in very narrow bands, mandibular
teeth straight, the inner series somewhat longer than the outer; in the pre-
maxillaries, the inner series is more enlarged, the teeth strongly curved.
Preopercular margin rounded, little oblique.

Pectorals mutilated; ventrals reaching at least to front of anal, probably

t
‘

_

—

THE LANTERN FISHES. 231

overlapping, their insertion a little in advance of dorsal; origin of anal under
last dorsal ray ; adipose dorsal immediately behind anal.

Photophores: A minute antorbital photophore between eye and nostril.
Pectorals as usual in this section in a nearly straight vertical line, the upper

‘immediately below the lateral line, the middle in front of base of fin im-

mediately above its middle, the lower nearly vertically below the second, not
on shoulder girdle, and not concealed by opercular margin; the line which
joins the three passing a little in advance of the second pair of thoracics.
Thoracics 5, none of them elevated, the first four pairs forming gently di-
verging lines, the fifth abruptly diverging, in front of outer ventral rays ;
interval between first and second pairs longest, nearly equaling that separat-
ing second from fourth pairs; third interspace shortest, the fourth less than
the second. Supra-ventral vertically over axil of ventral fin, midway
between base of ventral and lateral line. Ventrals 5, the anterior pair
nearer median line than are the inner ventral rays; second and third pairs
more widely separated, opposite the outer half of ventral base; fourth pair
nearer median line, fifth pair again diverging. Supra-anals distinctly but
slightly angulated, the third pair on lateral line, vertically above first anal
ray, the second above or slightly behind the vent, the first farther forward,
in a line joining the second supra-anal and the fourth ventral ; space between
first and second supra-anals about half that between second and third.
Antero-anals 7, the first nearest the anal base, the second, third, and fourth
in a slightly diverging line, the fifth, sixth, and seventh in a more strongly
diverging curve which includes the postero-lateral ; the seventh more widely

spaced than the preceding photophores, but distinctly nearer the sixth than

the postero-lateral. Postero-lateral on the lateral line, under middle of

adipose fin, a little behind last anal ray. Postero-anals 5, widely separated
from the precaudals, the fifth postero-anal equidistant between second
postero-anal and first precaudal. On one side there are apparently two scars
of photophores between the post-anal series and the first precaudal, indicating
that the two series are continuous. But these cannot be found in other
specimens of fownsendi, nor on the other side of the specimen in question.
They may be scars of the minuter photophores which are generally distributed.
Precaudals 4, the first three equally spaced, in a gentle curve, the first

232 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

opposite first caudal ray; the fourth on the lateral line, well behind and
above the third, and separated from it by a wide interval. Luminous patch
on underside of caudal peduncle involving rudimentary caudal rays and
extending forwards to below first postero-anal photophore ; that on back
of caudal peduncle short, extending but little in advance of the rudimentary
caudal rays, which it covers. Integument of body rubbed so that complete
distribution of luminous patches cannot be given, but a series is evident
along base of anal fin, and another of four or five luminous scales on median
line between ventral and anal fins.

General color blackish, the mouth and gill cavities, including gills and
gill-arches and gill-rakers, jet black.

The Ceratoscopelus section of Lampanyctus, to which this species belongs,
contains also L. maderensis and L. warming?, and is characterized as follows :
(1) thoracic and ventral photophores each five in number, none of them
elevated ; (2) middle pectoral photophore in front of base of pectoral fin ;
(3) antero-anals forming an -shaped curve, the first are nearest the
anal base, the last one or two elevated, forming a curve which includes the
single postero-lateral ; (4) precaudals 4 in number, sharply distinguished
from pestero-anals; (5) dorsal and anal short, about equal in length;
(6) luminous patches following a definite arrangement which is similar in
all the species.

Most nearly related to LZ. warmingt Liitken from the Atlantic, the latter
having apparently a much blunter, more rounded snout, but the description

inadequate for detailed comparison.

Lampanyctus omostigma, sp. nov.

Plate 5.

Type 62 mm. long, from the surface at 10° 57’ 35” N. Lat., 137° 35! 25”
W. Long., in the open Pacific about 1000 miles north of the Marquesas

Islands.
Very closely allied to Z. macropterus Brauer (Zoil. Anz., 1904, 28, pp. 397,
404, fig. 5, p. 581), from the Indian Ocean, apparently differing in the

following respects:

THE LANTERN FISHES. 233

1. The first anal ray is vertically below the next to the last dorsal ray
instead of the middle of the dorsal fin ;

2. The supra-pectoral, supra-ventral, and the fourth thoracie photophores
are less elevated ;

3. The middle pectoral photophore is opposite the upper instead of the
middle pectoral rays;

4. The second ventral photophore is in advance of the first instead of
behind it;

5. The upper and middle supra-anals are more anteriorly placed and the
lower one is more depressed ;

6. Interspaces between antero-anals (excepting between first and second
pairs) not noticeably greater than between postero-anals.

Measurements in hundredths of total length without caudal: length of
head 52; diameter of eye 7.5; axial length of snout 4; length of maxil-
lary 21; greatest depth of body 21; least depth of caudal peduncle 10;
distance from snout to front of dorsal 47; length of base of dorsal 16 ;
distance from snout to adipose dorsal 79; to insertion of ventrals 44; to
front of anal 60; length of base of anal 21; length of longest gill-raker 5.

Dorsal 14; anal 18; pectoral 13; ventral 9; lateral line 39; gill-rakers
5+12. Snout short but not rounded, the upper profile not descending
more steeply in front; the snout much shorter than in ZL. macropterus ;
little more than half diameter of orbit. Maxillary little widened pos-
teriorly, nearly reaching margin of preopercle, extending beyond the eye
a distance about equaling the diameter of the latter.

Fins somewhat mutilated, both pectorals and ventrals evidently extend-
ing beyond origin of anal; origin of ventrals in advance of dorsal; anal
originating under the next to last ray of dorsal, the adipose fin over the
last two anal rays. In Z. macropterus, the origin of the anal is under the
middle of the dorsal fin, a character which Dr. Brauer has kindly verified
for me on the types of LZ. macropterus.

A minute preorbital photophore surrounded with much black pigment
between the eye and the lower portion of nostril. Humeral photophore
present, as in Z. macropterus. Supra-pectoral almost in a direct line joming
the lower two pectorals, its distance from lateral line two-thirds its distance

234 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

from pectoral; middle pectoral photophore opposite the upper, not the —
middle, pectoral rays, its distance from lower pectoral spot two-thirds its —
distance from the upper; line joining middle and lower pectoral photo-
phores passing well in advance of the second thoracic pair. Fourth thoracie
ereatly elevated, slightly below the middle pectoral (not above as in
LL. macropterus), over anterior part of interspace between third and fifth
pairs ; other thoracics nearly equidistant from the median line, the posterior
slightly diverging; the interval between second and third pairs is the —
narrowest, that between third and fifth pairs one third the distance between —
first and fifth, a little shorter than that between first and second. Supra-
ventral vertically above ventral axil, its distance from lateral line two--
fifths its distance from base of ventrals. First ventrals closely approximated
at base of inner ventral rays; second ventrals elevated, about on the
level of the lower pectoral photophore and slightly anterior to the vertical
from the first ventrals (not well posterior to this vertical as in JL. macro-
plerus); third ventrals slightly elevated, nearly equidistant between first
and fourth pairs; fourth pair closely approximated, at the sides of the
vent and a little anterior to it. Supra-anals angulated, the upper in ©
contact with the lateral line, vertically above the first anal ray; middle ~
supra-anal slightly anterior to the upper, in a vertical which passes between
vent and first anal ray; lower supra-anal nearly equidistant between
middle supra-anal and third ventral, the angle between the three much
less than in Z. macropterus, a line joining the two lower supra-anals
traversing the base of the ventral fins. Antero-anals 6, the first and —
fifth closely approximating anal base and equally distant from it, the first —
above the fifth anal ray, the fifth above the twelfth; second antero-anals .
widely diverging; the third and fourth intermediate in position between
second and fifth pairs; sixth pair (designated by Brauer as one of the
postero-laterals) abruptly elevated, nearer the fifth pair than the postero-
lateral, which is in contact with lateral line. Postero-anals 8 or 9, evenly
spaced, the second spot immediately above base of last anal ray, the series
continuous with the two lower precaudals, which are in no way distin- —
guished from them. Precaudals 4, consisting of the two mentioned, a
fourth on the lateral line and a third below and in front of the fourth,

THE LANTERN FISHES. 235

nearly midway between latter and second precaudal. We do not follow
Brauer in counting the two anterior precaudals with the postero-anals in
eases like the present in which no gap separates the two series. According
to Brauer, such an interval may or may not occur in different individuals of
ZL. macropterus. In both specimens, the luminous scales are four in number
on back of caudal peduncle and nine below, the most anterior of the lower
luminous scales being under the interspace between second and _ third
postero-anals (not under fifth postero-anal as in LZ. macropterus).

The general color was evidently dark, blackish on opercles and at bases
of fins. Vertical fins with fine wavy lines, due to pigment along the

lines of articulation of the rays.

A second specimen, here designated as co-type, of equal length and
from the same locality.

Lampanyctus stilbius, sp. nov.
Plate 6.

Type 20 mm. long from Hydrographic Station 3798 (A. A. 27), near
Nukuhiva Island, Marquesas Group, taken in open intermediate net be-
tween the surface and a depth of 300 fathoms.

Near LZ. guentherz, differing in the presence of photophores on the cheeks
and in having numerous minute scattered photophores on head and body,
in having 4 instead of 5 ventral photophores, and in a number of details
in arrangement of thoracic, ventral, anal, and supra-anal photophores; the
eye is also larger. It is still more closely allied to L. dongipes Brauer (Die
Tiefseefische, 1906, p. 236, text-fig. 155), but has the preocular on the ven-
tral instead of the dorsal side of the nostril.

Measurements in hundredths of total length without caudal: length of
head 36; diameter of eye 13; axial length of snout 6; length of maxillary
23; greatest depth of body 22; depth of caudal peduncle 9; distance from
snout to dorsal 51; to ventral 52; to anal 58.

Dorsal 11; anal 13; pectoral 15; lateral line about 38. Snout short
but not bluntly rounded; eye very large, more than one-third length of
head ; maxillary moderately widened posteriorly, extending beyond eye a
distance not much exceeding half its diameter; body slender.

236 EXPEDITION OF THE “ ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

A small but distinct antorbital photophore between the orbit and the —
lower edge of nostril. Three small photophores on the cheek near the —
posterior border of the orbit, and apparently a fourth immediately above
the maxillary near its end. Apparently a small humeral spot present above
anterior part of opercle. Upper pectoral spot on the lateral line, the second
in front of pectoral fin just above the middle of the base, the third below —
and a little behind the second, the three about in a straight line. Thoracics—
5, the fourth pair elevated, vertically over middle of interspace between '
third and fifth pairs; photophores of first pair separated from second pair
by an interspace longer than distance from second to fifth pairs; third pair —
about equidistant from second and fifth pairs; photophores of first pair very
close together, those of second pair but little farther apart, those of third
pair widely distant (three times the width separating first pair), photophores
of fifth pair apparently larger than the others, nearer together than those of
third pair, farther apart than those of second pair. This condition is very
different from that in ZL. guentheri, where the first, second, third, and fifth
pairs form two regularly diverging lines. Supra-ventrals on the lateral line.
Ventral photophores 4, the anterior pair opposite middle ventral rays and a
little removed from them; second pair elevated, above and behind the first
pair, a little lower than fourth thoracies; third pair but slightly nearer fourth
than first pair, the photophores of third pair a little farther apart than those
of fourth pair, the latter at sides of vent. Supra-anals slightly angulated,
the upper distinctly above lateral line, vertically above second anal ray, the
second above the first anal ray, the third above the fourth ventral pair;
second supra-anal a trifle nearer the lower than the upper one of the series ;
line joining middle and lower supra-anals passing through the third ventrals.
Antero-anals 7, forming a slight U-shaped curve, the first a little
nearer anal base than the following, the sixth slightly diverging, the
seventh more so, the interspaces equal or nearly so; the curve of the last
antero-anals crossing lateral line well behind the postero-lateral. Postero-
lateral above the lateral line. Postero-anals 4, the last well separated from
first precaudal. Precaudals 3 or 4, the two lower well-developed, horizon-
tally placed, approximated at base of rudimentary rays of caudal, the upper
above lateral line, the third intermediate in position, sometimes faint or absent.

THE LANTERN FISHES. 237

Minute scattered photophores on head and body, but the integument largely
rubbed off, so these are now visible infrequently and are not represented in
the drawing. Luminous scales can be made out only on upper and lower
sides of caudal peduncle, but such were probably present at base of ventrals
and of anterior dorsal and anal rays.

Short luminous patches on upper and lower margins of caudal peduncle,
not extending more than one-third distance from caudal rays to anal and
adipose fins.

Paired fins broken, their length uncertain; ventrals inserted a_ trifle
behind origin of dorsal; anal originating slightly behind last dorsal ray ;
adipose dorsal over last anal rays.

A single small specimen in poor condition.

Vinciguerria lucetia (Garman).
Maurolicus lucetius Garman, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., 1899, 24, p. 242, pl. J, fig. 2.

Several small specimens, in poor condition, from Hydrographic Station
3798 (A. A. 27), near the Marquesas Islands. It is not clear in what respects
this species differs from typical V. aftenuata (Cocco) from the Atlantic, as
characterized by Liitken and Bellotti (see Liitken, Spolia Atlantica, Scope-
lini, 1892, pp. 270-2). In its slender habit, posterior anus, and the limita-
tion of silvery pigment to the preanal region, as also in the somewhat smaller
number of photophores, it agrees with a/tenuata. On the other hand,
Zalarges nimbarius Jordan and Williams (Proc. Cal. Ac. Sei., 1895, ser. 2, 5,
p-. 793, pl. 76), a true Vineiguerria, agrees with V. poweriae (Cocco) from
the Atlantic in its deeper form, anterior position of anus, the extension of
the silvery pigment to near the base of the caudal fin and the increased
number of photophores. Liitken was unable to distinguish attenuata and
poweriae on the examination of a large amount of material. If his conclusion
is valid, it may well prove that lucetia and mimbaria are the Pacific represen-
tatives of a variable and widespread species for which the name adtenuata
must be used. The dorsal fin contains 14 rays in the types of Z. mmbarius,
not 9 as given.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE 1. _
Diaphus nanus Gilbert. 1
Hydrographic Station 3798 (A. A. 27), near Nukuhiva, Marquesas Islands.

PLATE 2.
Diaphus agassizii Gilbert.
Hydrographic Station 3798 (A. A. 27), near Nukuhiva, Marquesas Islands, =a

PLATE 3. “a
Diaphus signatus Gilbert. .
Hydrographic Station 3798 (A. A. 27), near Nukuhiva, Marquesas Islands.

PLATE 4.
Lampanyctus townsendi (Kigenmann and Higenmann)
Hydrographic Station 3797 (A. A. 25), near Ua Huka, Marquesas Islands. ug

PLATE 5.

Lampanyctus omostigma Gilbert.

Pacific Ocean, 10° 57! 35” N. Lat., 187° 35! 25” W. Long., about 1,000 miles north ¢ of
the Marquesas Islands.

PLATE 6.
Lampanyctus stilbius Gilbert.
Hydrographic Station 3798 (A, A. 27), near Nukuhiva, Mrarqeeeee Islands.

“LYAGTD SANYN SMHdtId

COC ONICUNY EP
—

‘| alld “SAHSd NYALNYT — "Xd CID THOIOUL « SSOULYETY ,

‘LY4GTD IZISSHOY SMHayid

NON
Fe ONO

: WY YY
sone i Re : aX .

x

¢ alld “SHHSI4 NUFINYT—'X4 Ol4lOWd THOMOYL .. SSOMLYETH.,

“LYAGT1D SALUNOIS SMHdYid

rae

vie piri aes a Sees!
ie s: veo

€ alwld “SHHSId NYAINYT —'Xd OldldWd THOIdOYL .. SSOULYETY,,

“CNNHWNOIA 2 NNYWNADI9) IONASNMOL SALOANHAWHT

AAS ; VAY ai
- SL

y AlWd SHHSI4 NYAINYT —"Xd O1dIOWd TWOIdOYL .. SSONLHATY ,,

nee

“LUAdTI0 WWOLLSOWO SALOANAWYT

by ea oe. a to
—S ES |

———

eS eA

G alld “SHHSId NYAINYT—X4 O1lDYd TWOMdOUL «. SSOULYATY.,

DANWAWAT

Q MW ld ‘QAHSLY NYAINVT —'X4 OLIDHd TWOMONL « SSOMLWATY ,,

“

<
>
>

-

Memoirs ot the Auseum of Comparative Zodlogyv
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.
Vor. XXXVI. No: 7:

REPORZS ON THE SCIENTIFIC RESULTS OF THE EXPEDITION TO THE
TROPICAL PACIFIC, IN CHARGE OF ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, BY THE
U. S. FISH COMMISSION STEAMER “ALBATROSS,” FROM AUGUST, 1899,
to MARCH, 1900, COMMANDER JEFFERSON F. MOSER, U. S. N., COM
MANDING.

XIII.

THE SHORE FISHES.

By WILLIAM C. KENDALL anp EDMUND L. GOLDSBOROUGH.

WITH SEVEN PLATES.

{Published by permission of Georcr M. Bowers, U.S Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries.]

CAMBRIDGE, U. S. A.:
Printed for the Museum,

Fepruary, 1911.

242 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

In the present paper fifty-three families and two hundred and thirty-one
species are represented, of which eight species and one genus, Paragobioides, are
new.

The new species are Kuhlia proxima, Lutianus marginatoides, Therapon
maculatus, Dascyllus pomacentroides, Rupiellia lacunicola, Paragobioides grando-
culis, Petroscirtes quadrimaculatus, and Canthigaster constellatus.

The table (p. 338-343) shows the distribution of the species among the groups
as indicated by the collection.

The Friendly Islands, owing to their proximity to the Tonga Group, have
been included with the latter.

The plates were made from drawings by Miss Violet Dandridge.

Specimens representing 143 species contained in this collection have been
sent to the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, others including the types of the

new species to the U. S. National Museum.

ANNOTATED LIST OF THE SPECIES.

CARCHARIDAE.

Carcharias melanopterus Quoy & GAIMARD.

Voy. Uranie. Zool., 1824, p. 194, pl. 43, fig. 1, 2. Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm.,
1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 38, pl. 1.

No. A50, skin of a specimen 36 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.
ta)

ALBULIDAE.

Albula vulpes (LINNF).

Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 28, pt. 1, p. 55, fig. 9.
Esox vulpes LINN, Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 313.

Albula glossodon GN THER, Fische der Siidsee, 1909, 8, p 385.

Three specimens, No. 08836, 23 to 3 inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

M. C. Z. 29467 (1 specimen).

THE SHORE FISHES. 243

CHANIDAE.

Chanos chanos (I*orskAL).

JorpAN & EVERMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1905, 28, pt. 1, p. 56, fig. 10. Ginruer, Fische der
Siidsee, 1909, 8, p. 387.

Mugil chanos ForskAu, Deseript. Anim., 1775, p. 74.

The collection contains the following specimens from the Paumotu Islands,
Nos. 05833, 05834, and 05835, M. C. Z. 29772, each 7 inches long, from Makemo,

and 05831, M. C. Z. 29771, and 05832, each 7 inches long, from Niau.

CLUPEIDAE.

Stolephorus delicatulus (BENNETT).

Clupea delicatula BENNETT, Proc. Comm. Zool, Soc. Lond., 1831, p. 168.
Spratelloides delicatulus BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1866-72, 6, p. 89, 96, tab. 264, Clup., 6, fig. 3.

No. 09023, fifteen specimens § to 27 inches long, and three specimens, No.
te!

09028, M. C. Z. 29520, 13 to 13 inches long, all from Taritari, Gilbert Islands;
fan)

No. 09062, forty-nine specimens 175 to 17% inches long from Arhno, Marshall

Islands, and two specimens, No. 09007, small and mutilated, from Rangiroa,

Paumotu Islands.

Harengula kunzei BLrreker.
Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1856, 12, p. 209.
Clupea (Harengula) kunzei Bueexker, Atlas Ichth., 1866-72, 6, p. 89, 91, 100, 107, tab. 263, Clup.

fab. 5, fig. 1.

Clupea kunzii GUNTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1909, 8, p. 382.

Two specimens, No. 08931 and O9000, 23 and 44 inches long from Jaluit,
Marshall Islands, and eighty-six specimens, Nos. 05791-92, M. C. Z. 29459

(14 specimens) and 09006 (young) 13 to 2 inches long, all from Suva, Fiji Islands.

Harengula sundaica BLEEKER.

Clupea (Harengula) sundaica BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1866-72, 6, p. 89, 99, 105, tab. 261, Clup. 13,

fig. 5.

Thirty-two specimens, No. 05794, 13 to 3 inches long, from Nukuhiva,

Marquesas Islands. M. C. Z. 29507 (7 specimens).

244 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Harengula commersoni (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Clupeonina commersoni Cuy. & VAL., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1847, 20, p. 350.

Alausa melanura Cuy. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1847, 20, p. 324.

Clupea (Harangula) melanurus BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1866-72, 6, p. 89, 100, 111.
Clupea (Paralosa) melanurus, tab. 269, Clup. 11, fig. 5.

2Clupea atricauda GUNTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1909, 8, p. 381.

Two specimens, Nos. 05788-9, M. C. Z. 29386, each 42 inches long, from
Vavau, Tonga Islands. One specimen, No. 05798, 3¢ inches, Papeete, Tahiti,

Society Islands; six specimens, Nos. 08817-19, 08825, O8887-8, 42 to

ml
O5
inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

SYNODONTIDAE.

Saurida gracilis (Quoy & GaIMArD).

GUNTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1909, 8, p. 376.

Saurus gracilis Quoy & GarmarDb, Voy.-Uranie. Zool., 1824, p. 224.

One specimen, No. 09005, 63 inches long, from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.
Three specimens, No. 08907, M. C. Z. 29525, 14-24 inches long, Truk Group,
Caroline Islands.

ANGUILLIDAE.

Anguilla mauritiana Bennerr.

Proc. Comm. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1831, p. 128. Jorpan & Seaxe, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p.
192.
No. A196, M. C. Z. 29737, 27 inches, and No. A197, 32 inches long from
Kusaie, Caroline Islands.

Anguilla otaheitensis Kaur.

Neue Aalachnliche Fische des Hamburger Mus., 1859, p. 17, tab. 2, fig. 2.

Anguilla anielensis GUNTHER, Chall. Rept., 1880, p. 58.

We have the following specimens from Papeete, Tahiti, Society Islands:
No. A383, a specimen 174 inches long. Vomerine teeth extending almost or
quite as far back as the maxillary teeth; gape about 3 in head, extending past

posterior border of eye; dorsal beginning about an inch in front of vent.

THE SHORE FISHES. 245

No. A32, a specimen 183 inches long. Vomerine teeth extending nearly as
far back as maxillary teeth; gape about 3 in head and extending past posterior
border of eye; dorsal beginning about { inch in front of vent.

No. A34, M. C. Z. 29752, a specimen 15 inches long. Vomerine teeth not
extending back quite so far as maxillary teeth; gape extending but a little
beyond posterior border of eye, about 3 in head; dorsal beginning about is
inch in front of vent.

A specimen, no tag or locality, 20¢ inches long. Vomerine teeth not ex-
tending so far back as maxillary; gape about 3 in head extending back con-
siderably farther than eye; dorsal begins 17s inches in front of vent.

Jordan & Seale (Bull. U. 8S. Bur. Fish., 25, p. 192), place Anguilla aneitensis
Giinther (Chall. Rept. p. 58), as a synonym of A. megastoma. We cannot see
upon what grounds this is done, as all that Giinther says about it is that it was
a malformed specimen from a river near Lake Waihirra.

Three of our specimens come from the type locality of A. olahettensis and
they are undoubtedly that species. There is some variation in the relative
position of the origin of the dorsal and the relative extent of the vomerine teeth,
which suggests that these characters are not of much specific value. The other
specimen shows no tangible differences, and there is a possibility that they all

belong to some earlier described species.

MYRIDAE.

Muraenichthys macropterus DLEEKER.

Act. Soc. Sci. Indo-Nederl., 1864, 4, p. 11, Amboina 8, p. 91. Atlas Ichth., 1864, 4, p. 31, tab. 151,

Mur. 7, fig. 3.

Six specimens, No. 09966, 22 to 475 inches long from Arhno Atoll, Marshall

Islands. M. C. Z. 29500 (2 specimens).

Muraenichthys schultzei BLerker.

Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1857, 18, p. 366. Atlas Ichth., 1864, 4, p. 31, 33, tab. 148, Mur. 4, fig. 3.

ml . s yrs : + - . IG : ; ur
Three specimens, 22 to 3 inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands. M. C. Z.

29594 (1 specimen).

246 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

In dental characters our specimens agree with Bleeker’s description but the
origin of the dorsal, so far as can be discerned, seems to be situated more poste-

riorly, more like M. gymnotus.

OPHICHTHYIDAE.

Leiuranus semicinctus (Lay & BENNETT).

Ophisurus semicinctus Lay & BENNETT, Zool. Beechey’s Voyage, 1839, p. 66, pl. 20, fig. 4.

Leiuranus colubrinus BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1864, 4, p. 42, tab. 163, Mur. 19, fig. 1.

One specimen, No. 09063, 6 inches long from Arhno Atoll, Marshall Islands.

MURAENIDAE.

Gymnothorax richardsonii BLEEKER.

Atlas Ichth., 1864, 4, p. 85, 100, tab. 186, Mur. tab. 42, fig. 2.
Muraena richardsonii BLEEKER, Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1852, 3, p. 296.

Two specimens, No. 05783, 05784, M. C. Z. 29792 (small), Bora Bora, Society
Islands.

Gymnothorax pictus (AHL).

Muraena picta Ax, Specimen Ichthyologicum de Muraena et Ophichtho, 1789, p. 8, pl. 2, fig. 2.

The collection contains the following specimens from Paumotu Islands:
No. 08822, 143 inches long from Anaa. No. A52, M. C. Z. 29760 163 inches long
from Fakarava; No. 05771, 132 inches long, No. 05770, 133 inches long, and
No. 05772, M. C. Z. 29761, 143 inches long, from Makemo. No. A36, 203 inches
long from Tikei. No. A20, 23 inches long from Rangiroa. Another specimen,
No. A156, 18 inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands, and Nos. 09044, 6 inches
long and 09043, 93 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

The following notes were taken from the above specimens:

Color of No. 08822, in aleohol, creamy white, thickly speckled with brown
on back and sides, belly plain white, specks arranged in irregular, crowded
groups, same color on dorsal fin; this grouping on the white background gives

a faint reticulated effect, the reticulations being of the pale color; anal white;

THE SHORE FISHES. 247

dots on the head not extending forward beyond posterior edge of eye, or below
upper jaw, though on one side there are two or three dots in front of eye.

Color of Nos. 09043-4, in aleohol, ground color yellowish, probably gray
in life; dorsal, back and sides with small irregular brownish rings and broken
rings and irregular groups of coalescing spots; spots on lower side of abdomen
distinct, not coalescing; belly unspotted, top and side of head with small dis-
tinct spots, extending to end of snout, but none on jaws, or under lower jaw.

No. A156, M. C. Z. 29759. This specimen is very thickly speckled with
small purplish brown specks, which sometimes coalesce into larger spots; lower
jaw and throat with numerous small spots and specks; belly plain.

No. A52. Color similar to A156, but with fewer specks on lower jaw and
throat.

No. 05771. Color similar to that of A52.

No. 05770. Color similar to No. 05771, in addition, however, it has a few
small spots on belly; spots on throat and lower Jaw are a little larger and more
scattering.

No. A386. Very thickly spotted with larger spots than the last, amongst
which the ground color makes a fine reticulated effect; throat and lower jaw
thickly spotted with comparatively large spots.

No. A20. Color cannot be clearly made out, seemed to be finely speckled;
lower jaw has scattering small spots, none on throat.

No. 05772. Color badly faded, seemed to have had fewer spots, which were
more coalescing into rings and groups; throat not spotted; lower jaw with very

few small specks.

Gymnothorax rupelliae (McCLELLAND).

Dalophis rupelliae MCCLELLAND, Calcutta Journ. Nat. Hist., 1845, 5, p. 213.

—— )

Gymnothorax reticularis BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1864, 4, p. 85, 98, tab. 177, Mur. 33, fig. 1, and tab.
183, Mur. 39, fig. 2; tab. 181, Mur. 37, fig. 4 (not of Bloch).

One specimen, No. 05786 (small), Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands.

Gymnothorax tessellatus (RicHAarpson).

Bierker, Atlas Ichth., 1864, 4, p. 85, 93, tab. 171, Mur. 27, fig. 3.
Muraena tessellatus RicHarpson, Zool. Voy. Sulphur. [chth., 1845, p. 109, pl. 55, fig. 5-8.

One specimen, No. 05785, 3% inches long from Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands.

248 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Gymnothorax stellatus (LacKPrpE).

Muraenophis stellatus Lactebpn, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1803, 5, p. 622, 629, 644.
Muraena fimbriata Bennett, Proc. Comm. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1831, p. 168. Day, Fishes of India,
1878, p. 670, pl. 172, fig. 1.
= Se : 3e= Sie 50 93 :
No. 05775, a specimen 7% inches long, and 05782, M. C. Z. 29580, 32 inches

long, from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

Echidna tritor VaitLhanr & SAUVAGE.

Rey. et Mag. Zool., 1875, 3, p. 287.

Eehidna leihala Jenkins, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1903, 22, p. 428, fig. 9. Jorpan & Spain, Bull.
U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 203.

No. 05773, a specimen 93 inches long and 05774, M. C. Z. 29579, 54 inches
long, from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands. In the position of the vent, which is

nearer the tip of snout than the tip of tail, these specimens agree with H. psalion.

Enchelynassa canina (Quoy & GaIMARD).

Jorpan & Seaver, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 197.

Muraena canina Quoy & Gammarp, Voy. Uranie. Zool., 1824, p. 247.

No. A51, 182 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

Uropterygius pantherinus (Lesson).

Ichthyophis pantherinus Lesson, Voy. Coquille. Zool. Poiss., 1830, 2, p. 131, Atlas, pl. 13.
Gymnomuraena pantherina BueeKxnr, Atlas Ichth., 1864, 4, p. 112, 118, tab. 175, Mur. 31, fig. 3.

Number A49, a specimen 233 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotus.

Sharp curved teeth in both Jaws in several irregular rows that are hard to
count; at least four rows anteriorly, bunched in front of vomer and at the
junction of upper jaw; vomer with two rows of teeth anteriorly, single row
posteriorly, those in front curved backward, the posterior three curved forward.
No vestige of fin except at extremity of tail.

This specimen is very certainly identifiable with Gymnothorax pantherina
in Bleeker’s Atlas. Bleeker states that his specimens are quite certainly the
same as Lesson’s Ichthyophis pantherinus, and suggests the possibility of its

being the Gymnomuraena marmorata Lacépede. It is, however, quite as certain

THE SHORE FISHES. 249

that our specimens, as well as Bleeker’s, are not Gymnothorax marmorata, if
those recorded from the Hawaiian Islands by Jordan & Evermann, and those
from Samoa by Jordan & Seale, are correctly identified.

While Lesson’s [chthyophis pantherinus has been included in the synonymy
of Uropterygius marmorata, it has not the same character of vertical fins on the
tail, in fact it has practically none, while U. marmorata from Hawaii has the
vertical fins extending a short distance on the tail both above and below. There
is nothing in Lesson’s description to show the number of the rows of teeth or
whether the posterior nostril was tubular or not. In fact no posterior nostril
is shown in the figure, but the color, shape, and character of the tail, are much
like those of our specimens, which have the posterior nostril tubular. We there-

fore retain Lesson’s specific name and place it in Uropterygius.

1 Uropterygius marmorata in Fishes of Hawaiian Islands, Jordan & Evermann, is incorrectly illus-
trated by a figure of Callechelys marmorata copied from tab. 155, Mur. 11, fig. 2 of Bleeker’s Atlas.
Probably Gymnomuraena macropterus, p. 118, 115, and G. xanthoplerus, p. 112, 114 and tab. 164, Mur.
20, figs. 2 and 4 of Bleeker’s Atlas and possibly G. macrocephalus, p. 112, and 114, tab. 166, Mur. 21,
fig. 2, are correctly included in the synonymy of U. marmorata.

2In Fishes of Hawaiian Islands Jordan & Evermann place the genus Ichthyophis Lesson in the
synonymy of Uropterygius as follows: ‘‘Ichthyophis Lesson, Voy. de la Coquille, 1829, 2, p. 131, (pan-
therinus = marmoratus); not of Fitzinger 1829 (1826) a genus of reptiles.”

Also in their synonymy of Uroplerygius marmoratus occurs: — Ichthyophis pantherinus Lesson,
Voy. Coquille. Zool. Poiss., 1829, 2, p. 151

In the Proceedings of the U. S. Nat. Mus. 1901, 23, p: 886, Jordan & Snyder establish the genus
Scuticaria, retaining as type of the genus Ichthyophis ligrinus Lesson, having the posterior as well as
the anterior nostril tubular.

In Fishes of Hawaiian Islands, (Bull. U.S. Fish Comm. 1905, 28, pt. 1, p. 112) Jordan & Evermann in
the synonymy of Scuticaria have:— ‘‘ Muraenoblenna Kaup, Cat. Apod. Fish., 97, 1856 (tégrina); not of
Lacépéde, 1803, which is a Myxine.” In the same work (p. 113) in the synonymy of Scuticura tigrina,
they include “ Ichthyophis tigrinus Lesson, Mem. Soe. Hist. Nat. Paris, LV, 399, 1829.”’ Riippell shows,
in the figure of Uropterygius concolor, a short tube at posterior nostril, and says in the description of this
species:— ‘‘Nasenlocher wie gewohnlich bei den Muraenen mit Kurzen Hautfiihlern versehen.” This
does not necessarily exclude posterior nostrils.

Jordan & Evermann in the description of U. marmorata, state that the anterior nostrils are in short
tubes and the posterior have elevated rims. A specimen of theirs, from the Hawaiian Islands, shows
the posterior tube as long as the anterior. Specimens in the U. 8. Nat. Mus. from the same locality
and labeled Uropterygius marmorata, that are 5 to 6 inches long, show, in the smaller examples, no rim,
and in the larger, a very slight rim at posterior nostril.

These resemble specimens of the same size from Samoa, labeled Uropterygius concolor, all of which
are.exactly like specimens in our collection which we have identified as young U. marmorata. Larger
specimens from Samoa labeled ‘“Scuticaria marmorata,’’ show posterior nostril tubes as they are in a

specimen of Scuticaria tigrinus of the same size from Hawaii.
It thus seems that the presence or absence of posterior nasal tubes affords no basis for separating
the genera on this character, and the genus Scuticaria will have to be dropped in favor of Uropterygius.
The type of Ichthyophis is ligrinus and not pantherinus (Lesson, Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris, 1828,
4, p. 400).

250 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Uropterygius marmoratus (LAcEPEDE).

Jorpan & EverMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 111, fig. 33.

Gymnomuraena marmorata LACEPEDE, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1803, 5, p. 648.

We have the following specimens from Paumotu Islands: —

Nos. A54, 05776, 05777, M. C. Z. 29581, 4 to 93 inches long from Fakarava,
and 05787, two small specimens from Makemo, M. C. Z. 29471.

In No. A54 the color in alcohol is dark olive-green, thickly marbled with
darker; fins at the end of the tail not noticeably lighter.

In the smaller (young) examples, in which we can detect no other tangible
differences, the color is uniform purplish brown without evident marbling, fins
at the tail yellowish white.

U. marmoratus and concolor are very probably the same species. In very
young individuals we can find no differences except a slight difference in color

and these do not show in alcoholic specimens.

Uropterygius concolor RipPe.L.

Neue Wirb. Fische, 1835, p. 83, taf. 20, fig. 4.

ae = ail 2 :
[wo specimens, No. 09009, 172 and 23 inches long from Rangiroa, Paumotu

Islands. M. C. Z. 29475 (1 specimen).

BELONIDAE.

Belone platyura BENNETT.

Proc. Comm. Zool. Soc. London, 1830, p- 168. GUNTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1909, 8, p- 349.

Three specimens, No. A136, 12 to 143 inches long from Kambara, Fiji
Islands.

The specimen numbered A136 has dorsal I, 14; anal I, 17; eye equals inter-
orbital; another specimen has dorsal I, 13; anal I, 17; eye slightly greater
than interorbital width; the other has dorsal I, 13; anal I, 18; eye slightly
greater than interorbital width.

Another specimen, No. 08847, M. C. Z. 29774, 13 inches long from Funafuti,

has dorsal I, 14; anal I, 18; eye equals interorbital.

THE SHORE FISHES. 251

HEMIRAMPHIDAE.

Hemiramphus dussumierii Cuvirr & VALENCIENNES.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1846, 19, p. 33 (24), pl. 554. Ginwrumr, Fische der Siidsee, 1909, 8, p. 354.

Five specimens, No. A117, 83 to 10 inches long from Namuka, Tonga Is-
lands, give the following measurements:

Dorsal I, 15; A. I, 14; dorsal and anal sealed, the anal especially so; ventral
nearer caudal than head; scales 52?

Dorsal I, 13; A. I, 13; dorsal sealed, the anal shghtly so; ventral midway
between head and base of caudal, slightly nearer head if anything; scales 52?

Dorsal I, 14; A. I, 13; dorsal and anal sealed; ventral exactly midway
between head and base of caudal; seales 55.

Dorsal I, 13; A. I, 13; dorsal and anal sealed; base of ventral slightly nearer
caudal than head; seales about 55.

Dorsal I, 14; A. I, 14, no seales on dorsal; anal closely scaled; base of
ventral midway between head and caudal, scales about 52; eye equals inter-
orbital, 1.25 in postorbital part of head.

The collection also contains the following specimens:

No. 09034, 32 inches long from Mille, Marshall Islands. No. 08947, 8 inches
long from Kusaie, Caroline Islands. Twenty-one specimens (young) from
Fakarava, Paumotu Islands. Seven specimens 8% to 104 inches long, and Nos.
A121, M. GC. Z. 29731, A122, 8 and 11 inches long, from Vavau, Tonga Islands.
No. A147, 113 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands. One specimen, No. 09013
(young) from Guam. This specimen had dorsal 15; anal 14; scales about

52; ventral midway between caudal and head.

Hemiramphus affinis GUNTHER.

Cat., 1866, 6, p. 267.

One specimen, No. 09045, M. C. Z. 29503, 4$ inches long from Tarawa,
Gilbert Islands. Dorsal I, 15; scales about 60; ventral nearer caudal than head.
One specimen, No. 08958, 93 inches long, from Kusaie, Caroline Islands.
Two specimens taken in the Caroline Islands, one No. 08958, 975 inches
long at Kusaie, and one No. 09058, 3 inches long at Moen. This last specimen

has 16 dorsal rays and 16 anal rays, ventral midway between head and eaudal.

252 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Seventeen specimens from Marshall Islands, two of them, No. 08959, 5% and
53 inches long from Wotje Atoll; fourteen of them (young) No. 09075 and one

small mutilated specimen, No. 09041 from Arhno.

Hemiramphus far (lForskAt).
Géntuer, Fische der Sitidsee, 1909, 8, p. 357.
Esox far ForskAu, Deseript. Anim., 1775, p. 67.
No. A118, a specimer 17 inches long and No. A119, M. C. Z. 29730, 15 inches

long from Vavau, Tonga Islands.

Zenarchopterus dispar (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Ginvuer, Fische der Siidsee, 1909, 8, p. 358.

Hemirhamphus dispar Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1846, 19, p. 42 (58), pl. 558.

Zanarchoplerus vaisiganis JORDAN & SpAcE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 208, fig. 11

Two specimens, Nos. 09022, and 08925, M. C. Z. 29366, 6% and 635 inches
long from Kusaie, Caroline Islands. Fourteen specimens, Nos. 08881 and 08993,
43 to 6¢ inches long, and No. 05943, in very bad condition, all from Suva, Fiji.
Two specimens, No. 09094, M. C. Z. 29390 from Guam, very bad condition,
unidentifiable with certainty, with longer bill than the others, but this seems
to be an age character.

All these specimens have been compared with specimens in the U. 8.
National Museum, with three specimens of Z. dispar from the Philippines, with
types and cotypes of Z. vaisiganis, with descriptions and figures in Cuvier &
Valenciennes, Bleeker, and in Day, and no differences can be detected

by which to separate them from Z. dispar; Z. vaisiganis seems identical.

EXOCOETIDAE.

Exocoetus volitans LINNF.
Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 316. Jorpan & Evprmann, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1,

p. 133, fig. 45.

No. 05809, 1%; inches long from tow-net, open Pacific, Albatross, Sept. 8,
1899, 8 Pp. M., in Lat. 4°, 35’ N., Long. 136°, 54’ W.

THE SHORE FISHES. Dire

This is provisionally identified as above, it being too small for positive iden-
tification.

Back dark brown, lower parts silvery; dark brown band extending between
the posterior half of dorsal and anal and extending somewhat on fins; base of
eaudal dark brown; pectorals pale with a large very dark brown blotch, occu-
pying upper posterior half of fin, but not extending to the tips of the rays

which are pale.

Cypsilurus speculiger (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Jorpan & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 209, fig. 18 (poor).
Exocoetus speculiger Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1846, 19, p. 69 (94). GtnTHER, Fische der
Siidsee, 1909, 8, p. 366.

No. A200, M. C. Z. 29765, two specimens 10 and 11 inches long from off Guam.

Cypsilurus bahiensis (RaNnzan1).

Jorpan & EVERMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 156.

Exocoetus bahiensis RaNzANI, Nov. Comm. Ac. Sci. Inst. Bonon., 1842, 5, p. 326, pl. 38. GiNnTHER,
Fische der Siidsee, 1909, 8, p. 369.

No. A184, 12 inches long from Arhno, Marshall Islands.

This specimen agrees very well with Day’s description (Fishes of India,
p. 519) except that, in our specimen, the anal fin is inserted opposite the end of
the first third of the dorsal. Day says that it commences below the last third
of dorsal fin, but his figure (Plate 121, fig. 10) shows that it commences very

slightly in advance of the middle of the dorsal.

ATHERINIDAE.

Atherina lacunosa ForsTER.

Buocu & Scunerper, Syst Iechth., 1801, p. 112. Deseript. Anim. Ed. Lichtenstein, 1844, p.
298. Cuvier & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1835, 10, p. 337 (454).

Sixteen specimens, No. 09078, 1 to 2} inches long from Wotje Atoll, Marshall
Islands. Also M. C. Z%. 29464, No. 09084, 13 inches long, from Moen, Truk

Group, Caroline Islands.
Dorsal VI to VII —I, 9 to I, 10; anal I, 12 to I, 14; scales about 44 or 45

counting entire longitudinal series. Of six specimens three have 6 dorsal spines

254 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

and three have 7; only one has 9 rays, the rest have 10. Of the anal rays, one

has 12, four have 13, the others have 14.

Atherina endrachtensis Quoy & GaImarD.

Voy. Uranie. Zool., 1825, p. 334. GUnvTHER, Cat., 1861, 3, p. 401.

Four specimens from Marshall Islands, No. 09035, 13 inches with dorsal
VII-I, 10: anal I, 10 or 11 from Likieb and three specimens, No. 09071, 115 to
2} inches long from Ahrno. Origin of dorsal a little nearer ventral than anal.

1. D. VIE-I, 9; A. I, 10 or 11; seales 42 counting all the developed scales
in longitudinal series.

2. D. VE-I, 9; A. I, 10 or 11; scales 42.

3) DIVE OF AS Tae seales 42%

Fourteen specimens from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline Islands, as follows:—

No. 09084 (part) six specimens 13 to 1% inches long and No. 08906 (part)
eight specimens, M. C. Z. 29394, to 1? inches long.

No. 08906, had D. VI-I, 9; A. I, 10 or 11 for seven specimens, the other
specimen has D. VII-I, 9; A. 1, 10 or 11.

Twenty-seven specimens, No. 09055 (poor condition) 1 to 1y5 inches long,
from Suva, Fiji Islands. Five specimens, jf to 13 inches long from Rangiroa,
Paumotu Islands.

One specimen, part of No. 09017, 13 inches long from Guam.

Head 22 in length; depth 53; eye about equal interorbital, 2§ in head;
snout about $ of eye; mouth very oblique, maxillary reaching anterior margin
of eye; origin of dorsal slightly nearer ventral than anal, about midway between
tip of snout and base of caudal.

We have identified this as A. endrachtensis, although it differs slightly from
current descriptions, most noticeably in length of snout and width of inter-
orbital. It is close to A. vaigiensis, but is generally more slender and with a
deeper caudal peduncle, proportionally smaller eye, and considerably longer

snout.

THE SHORE FISHES. 255

Atherina vaigiensis Quoy & Gaimanrp.

)

Voy. Uranie. Zool., 1825, p. 335.

Fifteen specimens, No. 05820, 33 to 47 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu
Islands. Six specimens No. 09017, 12 to 2 inches long from Guam. One hun-
dred and thirty-eight specimens from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline Islands,
as follows :—

M. C. Z. 29394, No. 08906, forty-eight specimens 13 to 23 inches, M. C. Z.
29488, No. 09084, thirty-one specimens 14 to 23 inches, and No. 08983, fifty-
nine specimens 1 to 33 inches long.

Of the 59 specimens twenty examined show dorsal spines to vary from IV
to VI, and rays 1, 10 or 11; anal I, 14 to I, 16; there are but two with IV spines
in dorsal, seven with V, and eleven with VI. There are five with 10 dorsal
rays, the others having llrays. There are three with 14 anal rays, sixteen with
15 rays, and one with 16 rays. There seems to be a true spine in front of the
anal and a simple ray in front of the dorsal. Seales range from 43-46 but they
cannot be counted with certainty, three of them apparently having 43, thirteen
44, two 45, and two 46. The eyes vary somewhat in relation to interorbital,
but this is due doubtless to the action of the preservative. In some instances
the eye is very little longer than interorbital width, in others somewhat more
so, and in others very much more so. Some of these specimens have a slightly
longer maxillary than others, and some are somewhat darker than others.
These latter differences do not seem to be related to any particular variation
shown in the other differences mentioned.

Giinther has identified this species, erroneously we believe, with Atherina
lacunosa. It is very close to, if not identical with, Atherina forskalii of Riippell.

It agrees with Day’s description and figure of A. forskalii.

Atherina uisila Jorpan & SEALR.

Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 216, fig. 25.

One specimen No. 09046, 32 inches long from Wotje Atoll, Marshall Islands.
Dorsal VI-I, 9; anal I, 12; scales 44 (48).

256 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

MUGILIDAE. ©

Liza caeruleomaculatus (LAcEPErDE).

Jorpan & SEAR, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. Die

Mugil caeruleomaculatus LackrkpE, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1808, 5, p. 385, 386, 389, 392.

Sixteen specimens from Caroline Islands, No. 09090, fifteen specimens
1} to 13 inches long from Moen and one specimen, No. 09020, 6 inches long
from Kusaie. Thirty specimens, No. 05818, + to 2? inches long from Vavau,
Tonga Islands. Sixteen specimens, M. C. Z., 27510, ¢ to 23 inches long, from
Tongatabu, Tonga Islands. One specimen M. C. Z. 29532, 2 inches long
from Suva, Fiji Islands. Three specimens, No. 08981 (part) each 1} inches

long from Guam.

Liza melinoptera (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Jorpan & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 217.

Mugil melinoptera Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1836, 11, p. 108 (146).

Three specimens 13 to 12 inches long from Tongatdbu, Tonga Islands.
M. C. Z. 29418 (1 specimen).

Liza troschelii (BLEEKER).

Mudgil troschelii Buerxer, Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1858, 16, p. 277. Ginruer, Cat., 1861, 3, p. 448.

Seventeen specimens, 2¢ to 42 inches long and No. 05818, 4 inches long from
Makemo, Paumotu Islands. Thirty specimens, 05814, 13 to 4 inches long from
Bora Bora, Society Islands. One specimen, No. 09095, M. C. Z. 29529, 4h
inches long, from Ponapi, Caroline Islands. Five specimens, No. 08933, M.C. Z.;
29506, § to 23 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands. Three specimens, Nos.
088846, 4} to 53 inches long, and two specimens, M. C. Z. 29509, 2 and 2) inches
long from Suva, Fiji Islands. Ten specimens, 5 to 6% inches long, from Aitutaki,
Cook Islands. Three specimens Nos. 08877, 08972, 08968, 2% to 3 inches long
from Funafuti, Ellice Islands. Nine specimens, No. 08980, 1 to 2 inches long
from Guam. Seventeen specimens from Tonga Islands, M. C. Z. 29479, 1

specimen, 14 specimens, M. C. Z. 29484, 1 to 2? inches long from Eua, Friendly

THE SHORE FISHES. 257

Group, and No. A115, a specimen 9% inches long, No. 05817, 43 inches long,
No. 08940, 4% inches long.

A115, has in upper lip a single row of outer close set teeth and behind these
a band of slightly smaller teeth, close set and in several series; anal rays 9; scales
34, 11 in transverse series, pectoral pale, no axillary spot; at least the anterior

third of anal in advance of soft dorsal.

Liza vaigiensis (Quoy & GaImMArRpD).

Mugil vaigiensis Quoy & Garmarb, Voy. Uranie. Zool., 1825, p. 337, pl. 59, fig. 2.
Mugil waigiensis JoRDAN & Seat, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 218.

fod

One specimen, No. 08827, 7 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands. Three
specimens, Nos. 08843, 08970-71, 275 to 37 inches long from Funafuti, Ellice
Islands. Eight specimens, No. 09042, M. C. Z. 29478, 2 to 23 inches long from
Marshall Islands. Four specimens No. 08984, M. C. Z. 29473, 13 to 13 inches
long from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline Islands. Ten specimens from Paumotu
Islands, seven of them No. 05815, 13 to 3% inches long from Makemo, and Nos.
A28, 83 inches, A13, M. C. Z. 29785, 83 inches, and A26, 83 inches long from
Rangiroa. No. A146, M. C. Z. 29781, a specimen 8 inches long from Suva,
Fiji Islands.

In the A numbers the scales are 26 plus a few rudiments, 9 in cross series
from front of dorsal to vent; minute wide set teeth in upper jaw in a single
series; anal 8; all have black pectorals with lower part pale.

Four specimens from Tonga Islands, one of them, No. 05819, 3 inches long
from Vavau, and three specimens 12 to 13 inches long from Tongatdbu.

Fourteen specimens, No. 09016 (young), M. C. Z. 29531, from Guam.

L. vaigiensis and L. melinopteras are separated only by the numbers of anal
rays, the former having eight and L. melinopleras having nine. The last anal
ray is frequently divided to the base and it is difficult to say whether there
are 8 or 9 rays. We do not believe the species different, Giinther (Fische der
Siidsee) unites them.

The name vaigiensis has priority.

258 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Liza borneensis (BLEEKER).

Mugil borneensis BLEEKER, Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1851, 2, p. 201. Day, Fishes of India, 1876, p.
357, pl. 76, fig. 1.

One specimen, No. 08810, M. C. Z. 29794, 53 inches long (poor condition),
from Kusaie, Caroline Islands. Three specimens from Vavau, Tonga Islands,
No. A131, 52 inches long; No. 08893, 83 inches long, and No. A120, 113 inches
long, No. A120 has teeth in two rows in upper jaw; dorsal IV-8; anal III, 9;
scales 35, 11 in cross series. Nos. 08810 and A131, M. C. Z. 29778, show no
teeth in upper jaw, the latter has 19 scales before dorsal, a moderately long

axillary scale, otherwise it agrees very well with Day’s description of L. borneensis.

Liza compressa (GUNTHER).

Mugil compressus GUNTHER, Cat., 1861, 3, p. 51.

One specimen, No. 08815 (about 6 inches long), from Kusaie, Caroline Islands.

Liza crenilabis (ForskKAt).

Mugil crenilabis ForsKAu, Descrip. Anim., 1775, p. 73.

Querimana crenilabis, JorpDaAN & SEawg, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 218.

Four specimens, No. 08981, 17 to 17 inches long from Guam. Four specimens,
No. 05816, M. C. Z. 29376, 13 to 1) inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.

No. A193, a specimen 8: inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands. No.
A193 has head 4.66 in body; depth 4.17; eye 4 in head; dorsal IV-1, 8; anal
III, 9 or 10; first dorsal midway between snout and base of caudal; origin of
anal slightly in advance of dorsal; origin of first dorsal over 10th seale, second
over 2lst; a long scale in axil of pectoral and in axis of ventral and one on each

side of spinous dorsal.
Neomyxus.

The genus Myxus based on M. elongatus Giinther, Cat., 3, 466, has according
to Giinther ‘‘a single row of teeth on the upper jaw, sometimes in the lower and
on the palate; upper lip not particularly thick.”

Specimens in the U. S. National Museum from Bateman Bay, N. 8. Wales,

Australia, called Myrus elongatus, agree in having a moderately thick upper

THE SHORE FISHES. 259

lip, with a single row of teeth which are short, compressed and either rounded or
slightly notched and slightly constricted at the base; lower lip with an outer
fringe of fine simple cilia and some very much finer, scattered ciliae on its upper
surface; many rows of small, sharp, curved teeth on vomer and palatines.

Chaenomugil of Gill is based on Mugil proboscideus Giinther. The generic
characters according to Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1863, p. 169, are: “the
longitudinal cleft of the mouth, the narrow and pointed lower jaw and the thick
and angular upper lip”; the last of which is the only one in this description
which actually separates it from Myxus.

In Fishes of the Hawaiian Islands, Jordan & Evermann give as generic
characters of Chaenomugil, ‘Cleft of mouth lateral; lower jaw narrow; denti-
form cilia in very many series, broad flat and somewhat paved; upper lip very
thick; no adipose eyelid.”

Species of Chaenomugil proboscideus in the U. 8. National Museum col-
lected at Mazatlan by Dr. Jordan, and probably identified by him, agree in the
above characters and differ from Myxus elongatus in having no vomerine or
palatine teeth; they also agree with the specific requirements of C. proboscideus
as given by Giinther.

In Fishes of Hawaiian Islands, Jordan & Evermann describe and figure a
species which they identify as Chaenomugil chaptali and include in its synonymy
Myaxus (Neomyxus) sclateri Steindachner. They give another species which
they identify as Myxus pacificus Steindachner, but in the synonymy of the
genus Myxus they give Neomyxus Steindachner, based on N. sclaterv.

Specimens in the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries reserve series, and U. 5. National
Museum labeled Chaenomugil chaptali from the Hawaiian Islands, being the
specimens upon which Jordan & Evermann based their descriptions, agree
neither with the generic requirements of Chaenomugil nor Myxus but agree
perfectly with Steindachner’s description of Myxus (Neomyxus sclater’) in which
the rather slender labial ciliaform, pectinate, movable teeth are in two rows in
each lip with sometimes a portion of a third row indicated. The character of
these teeth, so widely different from those of Myxus, and the difference in the
number of rows from those of Chaenomugil were indicated by Steindachner as
sufficient basis for a new subgenus. We believe it, however, to be of generic

value and that Neomyxus is a good genus.

260 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

In Fishes of Samoa, Jordan & Seale have represented the genus Myxus with
one species, W. leuciscus, and Chaenomugil with two species, C. chaptali Eydoux
& Souleyet and C. nauticus Bryan & Herre.

In the synonymy of C. chaptali they place Myxus pacificus Steindachner,
and in a translation of Steindachner’s description by Jordan & Eyvermann in
Fishes of Hawaii, it is indicated that there are two rows of small movable
teeth on the upper lip. Steindachner states that the intermaxillary has a band
of small movable teeth in which those of the outer row are larger than those
of the other rows; the border of the mandible is sharp, with a horizontal row
of small movable teeth; he also distinctly states that the upper lip is rather
small and the eye has a well developed adipose eyelid.

This last character removes it from Chaenomugil or Myxus. In the deserip-
tion of Chaenomugil nauticus Bryan & Herre, the teeth are not described with
sufficient definiteness to indicate clearly whether it is a Chaenomugil or Neo-
myxus but the upper lips ‘“‘not thick”? would indicate that it belongs to the latter
genus. Furthermore there is nothing in the description to indicate that it is
not a Neomyxus. In the larger number of scales, large eye?, narrow inter-
orbital, and long first ray of dorsal and of anal it seems to differ from any de-

scribed species.

Neomyxus chaptali (Hypoux & SouLEYET).

Mugil chaptali Eypoux & SouLEyEt, Voyage Bonite. Zool., 1842, 1, p. 171, pl. 4, fig. 1.
Mycxus (Neomyxus) sclaleri STEINDACHNER, Sitz Ak. Wiss. Wien, 1878, 77, p. 384.
Chaenomugil chaptalii JoRDAN & EverMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 40, fig. 49.

One specimen, No. 08834, 32 inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands,
three specimens, No. 08981, each 2 inches long from Guam; three specimens;
No. 08914, M. C. Z. 29514, 1% to 2 inches long from Arhno Atoll, Marshall
Islands; twenty-two specimens, No. 05816, 1) to 2% inches long from Makemo,
Paumotu Islands.

No. 08834 has head 3.73 in length; depth 4.17; eye 3.8 in head; interorbital
2.37; dorsal midway between snout and base of caudal; origin of anal one half
in advance of dorsal; maxillary hidden; cilia in two rows in each jaw; dorsal
IV-1, 9; A. II, I, 10; scales 13 or 14—44 or 45.

THE SHORE FISHES. 261

PAT. ARQIA 92; ARE :

One of No. 05816, 23 inches long had head 3.65 in length, depth 4.2; eye 3
in head; dorsal midway between snout and base of caudal; anal origin 2 in
advance of dorsal; maxillary hidden; cilia in two rows in each jaw; dorsal

IV-I, 9; anal II, I, 10; scales 13 or 14-45; preorbital serrated at extremity.

SPHYRAENIDAE.

Sphyraena obtusata Cuvirr & VALENCIENNES.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1829, 3, p. 350 (258).

Sphyraena forsteri JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 219, not of Cuvier & Valenciennes.

One specimen, 13 inches long from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline Islands.
Two specimens, No. A141, 143 inches long, and A142, 16 inches long, from Suva,
Fiji Islands.

No. Al41 M. C. Z. 29719, has 85 developed scales; two black spots on
caudal peduncle on right side, the anterior of which is on lateral line, the pos-
terior near the end of the series of large scales just above lateral line; on left
side two spots, first on lateral line and second just below the lateral line and in
line with front half of soft dorsal.

No. A142: Head 3.26 in length without caudal; eye 5.88 in head, equal to
interorbital; snout 2.25; maxillary 2.12; mandible 1.49; dorsal V—-I, 9; A.
I, 8; developed scales in longitudinal series just above lateral line about 85.
There are two spots on right side of caudal peduncle not so far back as in the
other specimen, the posterior spot just below the lateral line; on the left side
there is only one spot, on the caudal peduncle, the lower part of which touches
the lateral line.

These specimens have been compared with a specimen about 93 inches
long from Apia, Samoa, identified by Jordan & Seale as Sphyraena forsteri,
and we can detect no differences except those that can be accounted for by the
difference in size. It shows the following measurements -—

Head 3.17; depth 6.70; eye 5.70; snout 2.18; maxillary 2.18; mandible
1.50; interorbital 6.33; dorsal V-I, 9; anal I, 8; scales about 85.

The specimen which Jordan and Seale identified as Sphyraena obtusata is

not available.

262 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Sphyraena forsteri Cuvirr & VALENCIENNES.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1829, 3, p. 261 (353) and La Sphyréne de Forster, ibid., 1831, 7, p. 382 (509).
BLEEKeER, Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1852, 3, p. 82.

Sphyraena toxeuma Fowurr, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1904, ser. 2, 12, p. 502, pl. 9, fig. 2 (middle).

One specimen, No. A140, 172 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

This specimen agrees almost exactly with the description and figure of
Sphyraena toxeuma Fowler (loc. cit.). Our specimen has 120 developed scales,
but counting to a line across from origin of marginal caudal rays there are only
110.

Head from tip of snout 3.23 in length without caudal, from tip of lower
jaw 2.97; eye 4.88 in head, considerably greater than interorbital, 2.28 in snout;
maxillary not quite reaching eye, 2.21+ in head; mandible 1.46+; dorsal
V-I, 10; anal II, 8; scales 13-120-13 (oblique rows counted downward and
forward from front of first dorsal to and including the one in lateral line, and
from lateral line to front of anal.

S. toxeuma is based on a specimen which Fowler considers specifically identi-
cal with a species described by Bleeker and referred with doubt to S. forsteri.

Fowler considers Giinther’s Siidsee figure of a fish from Tahiti as certainly
referable to S. forsteri. It shows more longitudinal scales and a much smaller
eye.

S. forsteri of Giinther, Cat., 2, p. 337, is doubtless the same as Bleeker’s,
so far as the description indicates, but his figure in Siidsee is of a different species
with a much smaller eye. The statement in the description that the scales
are 90 must be an error, as many more are shown in the figure.

The description of ‘‘Sphyraena forster’” in Histoire Naturelle des Poissons, 3,
is based on a drawing made by Forster from a specimen taken at Otaiti, but the
description is brief and insufficient and there is no character mentioned to
distinguish it. It is stated, however, that the form is exactly that of the Sphy-
raena of Europe. In that species the eye is 8 in head and the scales 150 accord-
ing to Cuvier & Valenciennes. But nothing indicates that these are so in S.
forsteri. In the additions and corrections in vol. 7 (Hist. Nat. Poiss.), it is
stated however that further specimens show that it is really different. Its

dorsal and ventrals are advanced, as in S. jello, in front of the points of the pee-

THE SHORE FISHES. 263

toral, the eye ts very large, therefore it would seem that if the name of Cuvier &
Valenciennes is used it must be applied to a large-eyed species, such as NS. for-
ster. of Bleeker, and of Giinther Catalogue 2, and it will include S. loxewma
Fowler. But it is not S. forstert of Giinther’s Siidsee, with its small eye, accord-
ingly the latter must be identified with some other species or be given a new name.
It may be Sphyraena jello Cuvier & Valenciennes, with Day’s description of
which the figure agrees fairly well.

Sphyraena forstert of Jordan & Seale, Fishes of Samoa is specifically identical

with the form that we have identified with S. obtusata.

POLYNEMIDAE.

Polydactylus kuru (BLEEKER).
Polynemus kuru BureKker, Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1851, 2, p. 600. GtnrTuer, Cat., 1860, 2, p. 325.
Twenty-three specimens, No. 05836, M. C. Z. 29779, 2+ to 8 inches long

from Nukuhiva, Marquesas Islands. Dorsal VIII-I, 13; anal III, 11; scales

about 60; pectoral filaments 6; caudal long, upper lobe 3.33 in total length.

FISTULARIDAE.

Fistularia petimba Lacreprpe.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1803, 5, p. 349, 350.

Fistularia depressa GUNTHER, Fische der Stidsee, 1881, 7, p. 221.

Twenty specimens (young), from Papeete, Tahiti, Society Islands. Two
specimens, No. 09074 (small, dried up), from Arhno Atoll, Marshall Islands.
One specimen, No. 08900, 8 inches long from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline
Islands. No. 05810, 14% inches long from Vavau, Tonga Islands. No. 05812,
43 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands. Three specimens from the Paumotu
Islands as follows: Nos. A67, M. C. Z. 29724, 26 inches long, and A64, 26 inches

long from Makemo; and 05811, 10¢ inches long from Fakarava.

264 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

SYNGNATHIDAE.

Corythroichthys conspicillatus (JENyns).

Syngnathus conspicillatus JENYyNS, Zool. Voy. Beagle. Fish, 1842, pt. 4, p. 147, pl. 27, fig. 4.
GUNTHER, Cat., 1870, 8, p. 174.

Two specimens, No. 08929, a male 53 inches long and No. 08930, a female 53

inches long, from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.
The male specimen has dorsal 28; rings 17+37. The female specimen has
dorsal 29; rings 17+36. M. C. Z. 29387.

Corythroichthys specifer (RtUppr.t).
Syngnalhus specifer Rippruy, Neue Wirb. Fische, 1835, p. 148, taf. 33, fig. 4. Ginraer, Cat.,

1870, 8, p. 172.

. 1 qqo cL: : rete . :
One specimen, No. 08992, 576 inches long from Kusaie, Caroline Islands.

Microphis brachyurus (BLEEKER).

Syngnathus brachyurus BLerKER, Verh. Bat. Genoot., 1853, 25, p. 16. Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1854,
7, p. 105. Ginrner, Cat., 1870, 8, p. 184.

Two specimens, Nos. 08990-1, each 53 inches long from Kusaie, Caroline
Islands.

No. 08990 has the rings 21 +22; dorsal on 3+8; dorsal rays 39; head 4+ in
total length; snout not quite twice rest of head. No. 08991, M. C. Z. 29401,
has the rings 21+23; dorsal on 7+8; dorsal rays 42; head 4+ in total length;

snout nearly twice rest of head.

Hippocampus guttulatus Cuvier.

Régne. Anim. ed. 2, 1829, 2, p. 363. GintTHeEr, Cat., 1870, 8, p. 202.

One specimen, No. 09031, 4 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands, an adult
with pouch full of young.

Dorsal rays 17; body rings 11; branching filaments on the most prominent
spines of head and body, some elsewhere over the body, these mostly simple.

Color, uniform dark brown.

THE SHORE FISHES. 265

HOLOCENTRIDAE.

Holocentrus spinifer (Il’orsKAL).

JorDAN & Swag, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 223.

Sciaena spinifer ForskAu, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 49.

No. AS81, 123 inches long, from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.
Traces of red spots behind eye and base of pectoral; no distinet whitish
spot on caudal peduncle above, but it is slightly lighter or silvery; preopercle

very oblique; not vertical as in H. caudimaculatus.

Holocentrus tiereoides BLEEKER.

Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1853, 5. p.334. | Bryan & Herre, Occ. Papers Bishop Museum, 1903, 2, p. 128.

No. 05844, 4% inches long, and No. 05845, 43 inches long from Papeete,

Tahiti, Society Islands; No. 08966, 54 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

Holocentrus punctatissimus Cuvier & VALENCIENNES.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1829, 3, p. 160 (215). Jorpan & Swap, Bull. U. 8. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 224.

Nos. 05843, 2% inches long, 05841, 4 inches long, 05842, 4 inches and 05837,
oD SD

4} inches, from Makemo, Paumotu Islands. M. C. Z. 29389.
Holocentrus diadema [acrrrepe.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 4, p. 335, 372, 374, pl. 32, fig. 3. Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U.S. Tish

Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 159, pl. 10.

One specimen, No. 05846, 23 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

Holocentrus sammara (l*orsK AL).

BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1877-78, 9, tab. 360, Trachichth. 6, fig. 9 (figure only).
Sciaena sammara ForskAu, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 48.

Flammeo achromoplerus FowLeR, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1904, p. 236, fig. 6

No. 08875, 53 inches long from Taritari, Gilbert Islands. Four specimens

from Paumotu Islands, No. 05840, 6 inches long, and No. 05839, M. C. Z. 29372,

63 inches long from Makemo, and two specimens (young) from Fakarava.

266 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Three specimens, Nos. 08869, 08870, 08871, 33, 5f and 5} inches long from
Suva, Fiji Islands.

The two specimens from Makemo seem to be typically colored, except the
dorsal which lacks the black spot on the front of spinous portion, but there is a
faint suggestion of a dusky band below the upper margin of the membrane;
and there are milky white blotches at the upper margin of the membrane im-
mediately behind each spine. In this respect they agree with Bleeker’s figure
of this species in Atlas Ichth., 9, pl. 360, fig. 5.

The one from Taritari is much paler in color, the longitudinal bands hardly
indicated, and those only on the back above the lateral line; faint spots on cheek
and spinous dorsal similar to those above.

In reserve series of Bureau of Fisheries the specimens marked H. laevis from
Dr. Jordan’s Samoan collections, and regarding which he says there is never
any black on spinous dorsal, two are similar in coloration to our pale examples
of H. sammara from Makemo; one has a black blotch on the front of spinous
dorsal, but is otherwise indistinguishable from the other specimens, except that
the bands along the sides are a little more distinct than in the other two; we
cannot separate them from H. sammara. In Fishes of Samoa, H. thorntonensis
Fowler is included in synonymy of H. sammara, which cannot be correct if
Fowler’s figure can be relied upon, as it has with lower jaw included a very

different head.

CARANGIDAE.

Scomberoides sanctipetri (Cuvirr & VALENCIENNES).

Jorpan & EverMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 181.
Chorinemus sancti petri Cuy. & VAu., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1831, 8, p. 279 (879), pl. 236.

No. ALO, a specimen 19 inches long from Nukahiva, Marquesas Islands.
Depth 4 in length to end of seales; head 5; eye (not orbit) 5 in head, about 1.5 in
snout; maxillary reaches to posterior margin of eye; dorsal spines do not
overlap, not reaching each other; dorsal VII, I, 20; anal II, I, 18; teeth in
several series in upper jaw anteriorly, becoming two series posteriorly, the
other series are the largest anteriorly, the inner is the larger of the two poste-

rior series; in lower jaw the teeth are similar to those of upper Jaw, but the

THE SHORE FISHES. 267

outer teeth are the smaller all the way around the jaw; soft dorsal with an outer,

large dark brown blotch, covering most of the elongated portion of fin.

Scomberoides tolooparah (Cuvier).
Lichia ioloo-parah Cuvirr, Riippell’s Atlas, 1828, p. 91.

Two specimens, Nos. 08828, 08830, each 8 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

Two specimens, No. 09003, 33 and 53 inches long from Rangiroa, Paumotu
Islands. One’ specimen, No. 08848, 43 inches long from Vavau, Tonga Islands.
No. 08978, 43 inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands. No. 09026, 23 inches
long from Gilbert Islands. Six specimens from Nukuhiva, Marquesas Islands,
M. C. Z. 29497 (3 specimens) as follows: Nos. 05795, three specimens 2 to 23
and 05825, three specimens 82, 92, and 9% inches long. Three specimens from
Marshall Islands, as follows, Nos. 09065, 14 inches long from Arhno; 08982,
1? inches long from Jaluit; 09040, 1% inches long.

The 83 inch specimen has depth 3.41 in length; head 4.83; eye 4.23 in head;
snout 3.6; maxillary reaching nearly to posterior margin of eye; dorsal VII, I,
PO anal WL 1, 18:

The 93 inch specimen has depth 3.74 in length; head 4.92; eye 4.55 in head;
snout 3.41; maxillary reaching to posterior margin of eye; dorsal VII, I, 21;
anal IJ, I, 19.

The 93 inch specimen has depth 3.62 in length; head 4.88; eye 4.30 in head;
snout 3.58; maxillary reaching to posterior margin of eye; dorsal VII, I, 19;
anal II, I, 18. The seven dorsal spines include the first procumbent spine which
is sometimes concealed under the skin, there are only 6 vertical spines, these
all overlapping. The teeth in the upper jaw are in several rows anteriorly,
two posteriorly, the outer teeth larger anteriorly and the inner posteriorly; in
the lower jaw there are two rows for the entire extent of jaw, the outer of close
set incisor-like teeth, the inner conical, not so close set; on each side of the
symphysis of lower jaw are one or two enlarged canines in the inner row;
a large dark brown blotch occupying the angle and greater portion of elongated
part of soft dorsal.

We cannot distinguish these from S. sanctipetri except in depth and fewer

dorsal rays in one specimen and the overlapping dorsal spines. Inasmuch as the

268 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

type of S. sanctipetr? was a 20 inch specimen and the specimens described in
the Hawaiian Fishes, 16; inches long and all the S. tolooparah in this latter
work were of small size (1 to 102 inches), it suggests that S. sanctipetri is only

the adult form of S. tolooparah.

Trachurops crumenophthalma (Btocn).

JorpaN & Speaxe, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 230.
Scomber crumenophthalmus Buocn, Ichth., 1793, 10, p. 65, pl. 343

Nos. A46, M. C. Z. 29780, and A45 each 9 inches long from Fakarava, Pau-

motu Islands.

Caranx melampygus Cuvier & VALENCIENNES.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1833, 9, p. 87 (116). Jorpan & Seats, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 230.

Fifteen specimens as follows from Vavau, Tonga Islands: Nos. O08890-92,
three specimens 63 to 8 inches long, No. 05855, nine specimens 3% to 43 inches
long, No. A126, M. C. Z. 29786, 8% inches long, No. A127, 112 inches long and
No. A124, 13 inches long. Three specimens from Funafuti, Ellice Islands, Nos.
08979, 32 inches long, 08856, 08841, 33 and 67 inches long. Thirteen specimens
from Paumotu Islands: Nos. 05854, M. C. Z. 29375, twelve specimens 32 to 43
inches long from Fakarava, and 05856, 5 inches long from Makemo. Two
specimens No. 05857, 23 to 2% inches long from Bora Bora, Society Islands. One
specimen, No. 08829, 82 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands. One specimen,
No. 09087 (part), 3 inches long from Marshall Islands. No. 05824, seventeen
specimens, 2¢ to 8% inches long from Nukuhiva, Marquesas Islands. The
smallest specimen has 5 or 6 broad dark cross bands. We are unable to
identify these with any other species. They agree fairly well with C.

melampygus, except that they lack the dark spots on the body.

Caranx forsteri Cuvier & VALENCIENNES.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1833, 9, p. 81 (107).
Caranx hippos GUNTHER, Cat., 1860, 2, p. 449.

Two specimens, Nos. 08876-7, 73 and 94 inches long from Taritari, Gilbert
Islands. Six specimens, Nos. 08851, 08845, M. C. Z. 29800, 08850, M. C. Z.

THE SHORE FISHES. 269

29800, 08844, M. C. Z. 29810, 08842, 08839, M. C. Z. 29800, 3 to 42 inches long
from Funafuti, Ellice Islands. One specimen, No. 09087, 3 inches long from

Marshall Islands.

Caranx ignobilis (lorsk\t).

Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 55. Jorpan & Swaue, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 231.

Nos. A6, AS, A9, M. C. Z. 29751, each 14 inches long from Nukuhiva, Mar-
quesas Islands.

There are about thirty-three scutes, counting all in straight portion of
lateral line; there are more than twenty-seven shown in the figures of Riippell

(C. sansun) and Jordan & Evermann, when counted as above.

Caranx ferdau (IorskKA1).

GunrtueEr, Fische der Siidsee, 1876, 5, p. 134, taf. S7, 8S.
Scomber ferdau Forsk&t, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 5!

5.
Carangoides ferdau JoRDAN & EVERMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 198, fig. 77.

No. A71, a specimen 133 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.

Head 3.42 in length to base of caudal; depth 2.48; eye 4.75 in head; snout
3.04; maxillary 2.53; pectoral 2.57 in length to base of caudal, slightly shorter
than longest dorsal ray; base of dorsal 2.26 in length to base of caudal, slightly
greater than its longest ray; longest anal ray 3.66; base of anal equal to pectoral;
dorsal rays 31; anal 26; scutes 29 on right side, 25 on left.

Color: no spots now evident on body; axil of pectoral dusky; margin of
soft anal pale.

This specimen is somewhat deeper than indicated by most descriptions and
seems most like that represented by Giinther’s Siidsee, plate 87; it also has many

points in common with Caranz gilberti Jordan & Seale in Fishes Samoa, p. 234.

Trachinotus Lackprpe.

Day’s description and figure of Trachynotus baillonii do not agree. It is
stated that ‘‘the maxillary nearly reaches to beneath the centre of the orbit,”

but in the figure it barely reaches the front of the eye. It is also stated that the

270) EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

lobes of the dorsal and arial, if laid back, nearly reach the end of those fins.
In the figure, the dorsal reaches about the middle and the anal a little beyond
the middle. If the length of the lobes of dorsal and anal fin are of any impor-
tance, Day’s figure of 7’. baillonii is certainly not the same as Riippell’s C. quad-
ripunctatus, which in other respects it somewhat resembles; but Day’s figure
does not show as great length of vertical fin lobes as he indicated in the deserip-
tion, nor does it show them as long as those described by Lacépéde, but the
latter’s figure is poor and does not show the fins as long as he describes them.
Day’s T. russellii agrees better with Lacépéde’s figure of C. baillonit. The lobes
of the fin are not as long as Lacépéde describes, but they are longer than Day’s
figure of T. baillonii, and the spots are much larger. Lacépéde’s description
and poor figure of C. baillonii are insufficient for the identification of the species,
but they show longer vertical fin lobes than are indicated by Cuvier & Valen-
ciennes and by Day for this species, and in this respect they are much more like
the 7. russelli of Cuvier & Valenciennes and of Day.

Cuvier & Valenciennes record four species of this group of Trachinotus with
black spots. Day includes them all in two species and Jordan & Seale recognize
the same two species in Oceania. Under 7. russelli, Jordan & Seale include
T. coppingeri Giinther. In the description and figure of this species Giinther
does not indicate that there are any spots.

Comparisons of the descriptions and figures indicate that the names have
been incorrectly applied by Day, and his description and synonymy is somewhat
mixed. Three of the four species mentioned by Cuvier & Valenciennes are
valid. Day’s T. russellii in part should become 7’. baillonw in the synonymy
of which 7. russellii of C. & V. should be placed, and Day’s figure and part of
his description of T. baillonii* is probably Cuvier & Valenciennes’s 7’. oblongus
to the synonymy of which 7’. coppingeri belongs, if it is a synonym of any species.
There are thus in these waters three valid species with black spots: 7. bailloni
Lacépéde, 7. quadripunctatus Riippell, 7. oblongus Cuvier & Valenciennes.

In the collection there are two of the three species: 7. baillonii and T. ob-
longus.

The three species may be separated by the following key which is made up
from descriptions and figures and from specimens.

‘To the synonymy of 7. quadripunctatus (Riippell) belongs T. baillonii Day in part, not figure.

THE SHORE FISHES. 271

A. Ventrals comparatively long; long dorsal and anal lobes.

B. Comparatively blunt muzzle, comparatively small eye; maxillary

reaching front of pupil; body deep, 2.22 in length without caudal,
baillonii.
BB. Comparatively sharp muzzle, large eye; maxillary reaching middle

of eye; body more slender, 2.44 in length without caudal,

quadripunctatus.
AA. Ventral fins comparatively short, comparatively short dorsal and anal
lobes; muzzle rather sharp; eye large; maxillary short, reaching front

of eye, oblongus.

Trachinotus ovatus (LINN«&).

GinTuHER, Cat., 1860, 2, p. 481. Jorpan & Sware, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 235.

Gasterosteus ovatus LINN®, Syst. nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 296.

7 ‘ : spay r 5
No. A128, a specimen 8% inches long from Vavau, Tonga Islands.

Trachinotus baillonii (LAackpEpE).

Cuvier & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1831, 8, p. 317, 319 (431).

Caesiomorus baillonit LactripE, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 3, p. 92, 93, pl. 3, fig. 1.

Trachionotus russellii Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1831, 8, p. 320 (436). Day, Fishes of India,
1876, p. 233 (in part), pl. 51B, fig. 3.

Plate 2, figure 1.

Five specimens. Nos. 08987, M. C. Z. 29799, 08809, 08857, O8854, 08852,
M. C. Z. 29799, 42 to 9% inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

No. 08857, 9% inches long, has head 4.28 in length; depth 2.22; eye 4.3 in
head; snout 3.73; dorsal VI-I, 24; anal II-I, 23; scales about 90; lobe of
soft dorsal 2.95 in length; lobe of anal 2.85 in length.

Color in spirits, silvery grayish on back, lobes of soft dorsal, anal, and caudal
dusky; four spots on lateral line on right side, the anterior very small, next two
half diameter of eye, the Jast minute; three spots on left side, first a little anterior
to a line from last dorsal spine, .6 diameter of eye, next smaller, and last very
small under posterior part of soft dorsal.

No. 08352, 5g inches long, has head 3.65 in length; depth 2.28; eye 3.71
in head; snout 4; dorsal lobe about 3.27 in length; anal 3.65; upper caudal

lobe 2.87; lower 2.71; dorsal VI-I, 24; anal II-I, 24.

272 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

First rays of all fins dusky at tips; two very small dusky spots on each side
of lateral line.

No. OS809, a small broken specimen, has dorsal VI-I, 23; anal II-I, 22;
anal lobe reaches to last anal ray; black-tipped fins.

No. 08987, 4.75 inches long, has dorsal VI-I, 23?; anal II-I, 23; anal lobe

reaches to posterior fifth of anal fin.

Trachinotus oblongus Cuvier & VALENCIENNES.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1831, 8, p. 321 (437).

Trachynotus baillonii Day, Fishes of India, 1876, p. 233 (in part), and pl. 514A, fig. 1.

Trachynotus russellii Day, Fishes of India, 1876, p. 233 (in part), synonymy. Strap, Edible
Fishes of New South Wales, 1908, p. 92, pl. 62.

Plate 1.

Seven specimens, Nos. Al-4, A5, 29733, 7 and 11, M. C. Z. 29734, from
10.5 to 12.5 inches long, from Nukuhiva, Marquesas Islands.

No. Al, M. C. Z. 29732, 11 inches long, has head 4.12 in length; depth
2.27: eye 3.42 in head; snout 4; dorsal VI-I, 24; anal II-I, 23; dorsal lobe
4.3 in length; anal lobe 4.12; each reaching slightly beyond middle of fins;
scales about 97 or 98, counting all.

Color in spirits: general color silvery with grayish on back, one large black
spot about size of eye on each stde under the lobe of the dorsal and on lateral
line; in front of this spot and just above middle of pectoral is a very faint spot,
immediately above lateral line, its lower edge touching it.

No. A2, 10% inches long, has head 4.14 in length; depth 2.23; eye 3.76 in
head: snout 4.08; lobe of soft dorsal 4.51 in length, 1.53 in its base; lobe of
anal 4.41, 1.67 in its base; dorsal VI-I, 23; anal II-I, 28.

One large black spot on each side about in line with front rays of soft dorsal,
.75 of the spot on one side and .66 of the spot on the other side above the lat-
eral line diameter of the spot 1.3 in eye.

No. A3, 103 inches long, has dorsal VI-I, 23; anal II-I, 23; dorsal lobe
1.40 in base of dorsal fin; anal lobe 1.55 in the base of fin; two large black spots
on right side of body, the greater portion of the anterior one above lateral line,
and directly under sixth dorsal spine, its diameter about 1.3 in eye; a second

spot under 11th dorsal ray, about .66 of it above lateral line; on left side one

THE SHORE FISHES. 273

large black spot about on a line just anterior to 6th dorsal spine; a very small
spot partly on lateral line and under 11th dorsal ray.

No. A4, 108 inches long, has head 4.15 in length; depth 2.09; eye 3.83 in
head; snout 3.83; dorsal VI-I, 24; anal II-I, 23; dorsal lobe 1.27 in dorsal
base; anal lobe 1.36 in anal base. A large black spot on right side, about .66
of it above lateral line, its largest diameter about 1.08 in eye; situated about
under middle of soft dorsal lobe; a small faint dusky spot just under 3d dorsal
spine, partly on lateral line, but mostly above it; a similar large spot on left
side and correspondingly located; a faint trace of very small black spot back
of this and under 15th ray of dorsal.

No. A5, 92 inches long, has dorsal VI-I, 24; anal II-I, 23; dorsal lobe 1.52
in dorsal base; anal lobe 1.65 in anal base.

On the right side a very small spot under 3d dorsal spine; almost wholly
above lateral line; a large black spot under middle of dorsal lobe, about .66 of
the spot above lateral line, its diameter about 1.18 in eye; on left side a spot .38
of eye and under 3d dorsal spine, almost wholly above lateral line; another large
one under middle of lobe of dorsal .84 of eye in diameter, about .6 of it above
lateral line.

No. A7, 123 inches long has head 4.25 in length; depth 4.52; eye 3.7 in head;
snout 4; maxillary 2.74; dorsal VI-I, 24; anal II-I, 24; lobe of dorsal 1.79
and of anal 1.70 in base of each fin respectively; scales 24-97-34.

On right side, a trace of a small spot below 2nd dorsal spine, entirely above
lateral line; a large black one about size of eye, under anterior part of soft
dorsal, about .6 of it above lateral line; another minute spot on lateral line about
under 15th ray of dorsal; on left side is a small faint spot under 2d dorsal spine,
wholly above lateral line; under anterior part of soft dorsal is a large spot,
about .6 of it above lateral line, considerably larger than eye; a slight trace of a
minute spot, entirely on lateral line and under 15th dorsal ray; another slight
trace of a spot on lateral line on the middle of caudal peduncle, a similar one on
right side; lobes of dorsal, anal, and caudal dusky.

No. All, 11 inches long. On right side a spot almost wholly above lateral
line and under 3d dorsal spine, small but distinct; a large spot about size of eye,
under middle of dorsal lobe, about .6 of it above lateral line, on left side is the

merest trace of a spot above lateral line and under first dorsal spine; a large

274 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

spot about size of eye, under anterior part of soft dorsal, about .66 of it above
lateral line; merest trace of another spot under 15th dorsal ray and nearly on

lateral line.

EQUULIDAE.

Leiognathus fasciatus (LAcKhPrpe).

JorpDAN & Spawn, Bull. U. 8. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 273.

Clupea fasciata Lactbrbpe, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1803, 5, p. 425, 460, 463.

One specimen, No. 08816, 4 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

Leiognathus splendens (Cuvier.)

Bquula splendens Cuvier, Reg. Anim. ed. 2, 1829, 2, p. 212. Day, Fishes of India, 1876, p. 239,

>

pl. 52, fig. 3.

Two specimens, Nos. 08882, M. C. Z. 29795, 08826, 3¢ and 44 inches long
from Suva, Fiji Islands.
Leiognathus edentula (Brocn).

Scomber edentulus Buocn, Ichth., 1795, 12, taf. 428.
Equula edentula Day, Fishes of India, 1876, p. 238, pl. 52, fig. 1.

~3 = 1 5 a "| ain
Five specimens (young) 14 to 12 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.
. tan) tan) q

APOGONIDAE.

Apogon Lackprpr.

In 1854 in Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind. 6, p. 321, Bleeker founded the genus Apo-
gonichthys, basing it on A. perdix and giving, before his description of A. perdix,
a list of species comprised in the new genus; A. auritus (Cuvier & Valenciennes,
7, p. 332) heading this list.

The distinctive characters of Apogonichthys, he states, are the smooth
preopercle and intramarginal crest, and the presence of palatine teeth. Later,
in the description of A. perdix he states that the lateral line anteriorly consists
of perceptible simple tubes and inconspicuous tubes posteriorly. Thus the

only character wherein Apogonichthys differs from Apogon is in the smooth

THE SHORE FISHES. 275

preopercle and intramarginal crests. This character is not constant and we
do not deem it of generic importance.

In 1903, in Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., p. 180, Jordan & Eyvermann establish the
genus Fowleria basing it on A. auritus, the first species Bleeker mentioned under
his description of Apogonichthys. They state that Fowleria differs from Apo-
gonichthys solely in the character of the lateral line, which is developed only
on the anterior part of the body. This character does not separate Fowleria
from Apogonichthys as defined by Bleeker. Cuvier & Valenciennes in the
original description of A. auritus do not mention the lateral line or the palatine
teeth. Should the palatine teeth prove to be absent, Fowleria could stand
if based on the absence of palatine teeth.

In 1905, in Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., p. 210, Jordan & Evermann establish the
genus Foa, basing it on Fowleria brachygrammus Jenkins, described on page 447,
and state that ‘‘the genus differs from Amia [Apogon] only in the character of
the lateral line which is developed only on the anterior part of the body, the
preopercle being as in Mionorus without serrations * * * * and differing from
Apogonichthys in having palatine teeth.”

In 1906 in Fishes of Samoa, Bull. Bureau of Fisheries, page 248, Jordan &
Seale still further characterize Foa, by the entire preopercle, incomplete laterai
line and the presence of teeth on the palatines. In the same report, page 250,
they place Fowleria in the synonymy of Apogonichthys, stating that Apo-
gonichthys, ‘‘is based on a species A pogon auritus Cuvier & Valenciennes, which
we have not seen. It is, however, very closely related to three Samoan species,
with which it is doubtless congeneric. These species differ from the group
ealled Foa, in having no teeth on the palatines. In all of them there is a large
black ocellus on the opercle, and the lateral line, although interrupted, shows
rudimentary pores on the caudal peduncle.”

The characters given above for Foa are not different from those given by
Bleeker for Apogonichthys and do not therefore separate it from Apogonichthys.
If the three species mentioned above do not possess palatine teeth, they should
be placed in the genus Fowleria and not in Apogonichthys since Apogonichthys
possesses palatine teeth.

Jordan & Richardson, in Fishes of the Philippines, in Bull. U. 8. Bur. Fish.

1908, 27, p. 255, state that ‘‘the original type of Apogonichthys Bleeker is A.

276 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

perdix Bleeker (Floris). This species has an incomplete lateral line, an entire
preopercle and teeth on the palatines. The genus Apogonichthys is therefore

’

the same as Foa, and Fowleria (aurita) is generically distinet.’”’ The validity
of Fowleria depends upon whether A. aurita has palatine teeth.

Professor Vaillant has kindly examined the type of Apogon auritus in the
Museum at Paris and states that there are teeth upon the vomer but none on
the palatines, and that it can be said that it has palatal but not palatine
teeth. Fowleria, based on the absence of palatine teeth, is therefore a valid
genus.

Amia Gronovius, Zoophylaceum, 1763, p. 80 (nonbinomial).

Apogon Lacépéde, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 3, p. 411 (ruber).

Apogonichthys Bleeker, Nat. Tijds, Ned. Ind., 1854, 6, p. 321 (perdiz).

Foa Jordan & Evermann, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, 210 (brachy-

grammus).

Apogon frenatus VALENCIENNES.

Nouv. Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat., 1832, 1, p. 57, pl. 4, fig. 4. GitnrHer, Cat. 1859, 1, p. 241.
GtnTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1873, 1, p. 19, taf. 19, fig. A.

Amia frenata BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1876, 7, p. 75, 89, 8, tab. 342, Perc. 64, fig. 2.

Amia melanorhynchus BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1877, 8, tab. 343, Perc. 65, fig. 1 (not description).

A pogon snyderi JORDAN & EverRMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1903, 22, p. 180.

One specimen, No. 05828, 3 inches long from Papeete, Tahiti, Society
Islands.

We have carefully compared this specimen and specimens of A. synderi in
the reserve series U. 8S. Bur. Fish. with Valenciennes’s description and figure
of A. frenatus and cannot find that they differ. Jordan & Evermann (loc. cit.)
propose the name A. synderi for the fish which they say Giinther in Siudsee
erroneously calls A. frenatus; they neglect, however, to say wherein Giinther is
in error. We find no discrepancies between figures and descriptions of Giinther
and Valenciennes, unless it be a slightly narrower lateral stripe in Valenciennes’s
figure, which we consider unimportant. Bleeker has a figure and description
of A. frenatus which agrees with our specimens and which he says is the same.as
the A. frenalus of Giinther’s Catalogue, but not the same as the A. frenatus
described and figured in his Siidsee, the latter being according to Bleeker

A. fasciata, But Bleeker’s description and figure of A. fasciata do not agree;

THE SHORE FISHES. Qe

the figure agrees in its serrations with A. frenatus, but not in its color; and in
the description of A. fasciatus both the serrations and color certainly indicate a
different species.

Bleeker figures a species which he calls A. melanorhynchus; the figure agrees
with our specimens in serrations and color, but his description does not agree
in the serrations. In the synonymy of this species he places Apogon (Pristi-

‘

apogon) frenatus WKlunzinger, and says ‘‘ melanorhynchus, sometimes confounded
with frenata, appears to me that it ought to be considered as a distinct species
with a chunkier body and with the intramarginal preopercular crest smooth
and the shoulder bone toothed and the Apogon frenata of Kliinzinger from the
Red Sea ought probably to be reported as melanorhynchus.” But his figure
shows A. melanorhynchus with intramarginal preopercular crest toothed as in
A. frenatus of Valenciennes, and the shoulder bone toothed; in A. frenatus the
shoulder bone is said to be smooth.

In his discussion of the genus A pogon, Day says ‘It seems also questionable
whether any considerable value can be placed upon the serrations about the
bones of the head, especially of the orbits, as such appear to be more distinct
in some specimens than in others, and many vary with age.”

In the seven specimens of A. snyderi in the U. 8. Bur. Fish. reserve series,
varying in size from 23 to 43 inches, the serrations of the preopercular mar-
gins and orbit are constantly present, but vary somewhat in amount in orbit.
In some specimens the shoulder bone is serrated and in some it is not. We
judge from this that the serration of the suprascapular or shoulder bone is

without value.

Apogon orbicularis Kuni & Van Hassevr.

Cuvier & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1828, 2, p. 115 (155). Giinruer, Fische der Siidsee,
1873, 1, p. 22, taf. 20, fig. D. Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 65, pl. 17, fig. 7.

Seven specimens, No. 09080, 1 to 13 inches long, and No. 08909, M. C. Z.

29533 six specimens 1 inch long, from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline Islands.

Apogon savayensis (GiNTHER).

Proc. Zool. Soe. Lond. 1871, p. 656. Fische der Siidsee, 1873, 1, p. 21, taf. 19, fig. B. Day,
Wishes of India, 1875, p. 60, pl. 16, fig. 5.

: ™ : ‘37 9QXxN* : : D1 inches .
Two specimens, No. 08942, M. C. Z. 29503 (1 specimen) 24 inches long,

Kusaie, Caroline Islands.

278

EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Apogon ceramensis [LEEKER.
Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1852, 3, p. 256. Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 65, pl. 17, fig. 6.
Amia ceramensis BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1876, 7, p. 75, 91; 1877, 8, tab. 336, Pere. 58, fig. 1.

No. 08902, six specimens ¢ to 1 inch long and four specimens, No. 09083,
M. C. Z. 29517, 1 to 1% inches long from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline Islands.

Six specimens, No. 09049, 2 to 23 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

Five
specimens, No. 09073, 33 to ¢ of an inch long, from Arhno, Marshall Islands.
i
Apogon vaiulae (Jorpan & SEALE).
Foa vaiulae JonDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 249, fig. 43. =

One specimen, No. 09030, 13 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

We identify this specimen with A. vaiulae after having compared it with

tne type, although it is somewhat deeper and now shows no shoulder spot,

otherwise it agrees perfectly. It is hardly possible that these slight differences,

due to difference in size, are of importance.

Apogon exostigma (Jorpan & Srarks).

Amia exostigma JoRDAN & Starks, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 238, fig. 31.

No. A87, a specimen 63 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.

Head 2.6 in length to base of caudal; depth 2.7; eye in head 3.84; snout

3.12; interorbital 4.54; maxillary+premaxillary 2.27; longest dorsal spine

(3d) 1.78; ray 1.78; longest anal (2d) 5; dorsal VII, I, 92; anal II, 82; scales

Preopercle and intraopercle coarsely serrated or toothed; shoulder bone

or scale serrated; pectoral and ventral reaching anal; color same as that given
by Jordan & Starks.

Apogon punctulatus Rippe.u.

Neue Wirb. Fische, 1835, p. 88, tab. 22, fig. 4.

\ pogonichthys marmoraltus JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 250, fig. 44.

One specimen, No. 05868, 1% inches long from Vavau, Tonga Islands.

THE SHORE FISHES. 279

Riippell’s description and figure of A. punctulatus do not admit of its being
put in the synonymy of A. auritus of Day or A. polystigma of Bleeker. Riippell
says nothing of palatine teeth, and our specimen agrees very well with the
specimens of A. marmoratus in the reserve series of the Bureau of Fisheries
which are those recorded by Jordan & Seale in Fishes of Samoa. In all

particulars our specimen agrees with Rippell’s description of A. punctulatus.

Mionorus waikiki (Jorpan & EvEeRMANN).
A pogonichthys waikiki JonpaN & EVERMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1903, 22, p. 179.

One specimen, No. 09067, 3 of an inch long from Arhno Atoll, Marshall

Islands.

Head 2.33 in body; depth 2.8; eye 3; snout 3.42.

This specimen agrees with the description of M. warkiki, save for slight
differences in color; there are no distinct bars on the fins, and the caudal is

plain yellowish.

Paramia quinquelineata (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).
Jorpan & Sware, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 252.
Cheilodiplerus quinquelineata Cuv. & VaAu., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1828, 2, p. 124 (167).
No. 05829, a specimen 3g inches long from Papeete, Tahiti, Society Islands.
No. 05830, two specimens 13 and 1? inches long from Vavau, Tonga Islands.
M. C. Z. 29470.

AMBASSIDAE.

Ambassis urotaenia DLEEKER.

Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1852, 3, p. 257. Atlas Ichth., 1877, 8, p. 133, 135, tab. 344, Perc. 66, fig. 2,
and tab. 351, Perc. 73, fig. 1. GiinTHER, Cat., 1859, 1, p. 224.

Five specimens, No. 08800, 08994, 3 to 4 inches long from Kusaie, and No.
09093, 2 inches long from Ponapi, Caroline Islands. Twelve specimens, No.

08923, M. C. Z. 29486, 13 to 2 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

280 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

KUHLIIDAE.

Kuhlia malo (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Pole Sud. Zool. Poissons, 1853, 3, pl. 3, fig. 4.

Dules malo Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1831, 7, p. 360 (479). Dumont p’Urvitin, Voyage |
Dules mato Lesson, Voyage Coquille. Zool., 1830, 2, p. 223. |

Dules leuciscus JeNyNs, Zool. Voy. Beagle. Fish., 1842, pt. 4, p. 17.

Plate 2, figure 2.

Eight specimens, No. 05827, 37 to 6 inches long from Tipaerui River, Papeete,

5

Society Islands, M. C. Z. 29367 (2 specimens).

The eight specimens are from the type locality of A. malo. The description
of Cuvier & Valenciennes of K. malo agrees with our specimens, there being one
character in particular,—the dorsal, anal, and ventral have brown spots,
separated by whitish lines,— which agrees with our specimens and which
emphasizes its separation from current descriptions of AK. malo.

In the following, measurements are given of our largest specimen (160 mm.)
and in parentheses the average measurements of the eight examples:

Head in length to base of caudal 3.39 (8. 30); depth 2.88 (2.85); eye in head
3.71 (3.338); snout 3.55 (3.73); maxillary 2.29 (2.346); interorbital 3.12 (8.475);
soft dorsal base 1.69 (1.816); anal base 1.21 (1.336); longest dorsal spine (fifth)
2.05 (1.637); last dorsal spine 2.29 (2.168); longest anal spine (third) 2.60 (2.54);
pectoral 1.5 (1.45); ventral 1.5 (1.45); dorsal IX, I, II; anal iii, 12 (11 rays in
one specimen); scales 6 to 8-42-8 to 9.

General shape and appearance of Pomoxis; profile of head slightly concave;
preorbital serrate; suborbital entire; preopercle finely serrate on both limbs,
its ascending limb concave; maxillary reaching not quite to middle of eye;
lower jaw slightly projecting. Seales large anteriorly, rapidly decreasing in
size from a line in front of soft dorsal to base of eaudal. Color in spirits, silvery
gray; cheeks, throat, and breast with brassy reflections; body thickly covered
with black spots about size of pupil, these chiefly above lateral line; narrow
silvery interspaces giving a reticulated effect; tip of lower jaw black; tips of
soft dorsal and anal white; interspinous dorsal membrane dusky, especially

at the base and tips of the spines; the soft dorsal with rather large black spots

THE SHORE FISHES. 281

on the membranes with yellowish white interspaces and with a black anterior
upper angle and margin; soft anal similarly colored with a row of black spots
on scales at base; pectoral soiled yellowish externally, with a black base behind,
and a dusky cross bar near the base; ventrals yellowish translucent with the
outer membranes somewhat dusky; caudal with spots similar to soft vertical
fins, the extremities of the caudal lobes black with narrow white margin on the
upper and lower edges of the lobes; the ends of all the rays black making a

narrow terminal margin of black.

Kuhlia maculata (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Dules maculatus Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1831, 7, p. 857 (475).

? Moronopsis ciliatus BLerKer, Atlas Ichth., 1876, 7, p. 120 (in part) tab. Perc., 38, fig. 1.
Plate 3, figure 1.

Eight specimens, Nos. 08996—99, OS8802—3, 08805, 08832, 4 to 5¢ inches from
Kusaie, Caroline Islands. M. C. Z. 29369 (2 specimens).

In the following, measurements are given of our largest specimen (145 mm.)
and in parentheses the average measurements of the eight examples:

Head in length to base of caudal 3.28 (3.275); depth 2.67 (2.86); eye 2.91
(2.838); snout 4.12 (4.185); maxillary 2.33 (2.32); interorbital 3.5 (3.47);
soft dorsal base 1.59 (1.675); anal base 1.20 (1.298); longest dorsal spine (fifth)
1.84 (1.81); last dorsal spine 2.50 (2.26); longest anal spine (third) 2.69 (2.59) ;
pectoral 1.45 (1.47); ventral 1.45 (1.47); dorsal IX, I, 11, (12 rays in one speci-
men); anal iii, 11 in 3, 12 in 5 specimens; scales 5 or 642-7 or 8.

The shape and form of this species is similar to that of A. malo; preorbital
serrated; preopercle finely serrated on its lower limb, the ascending limb entire,
except at the upper end where there are a few minute teeth, and it is not concave.

General color of this species is the same as that of A. malo, but the dorsal
differs in having the membrane of the spinous dorsal not so dusky and with no
spots on soft dorsal or on scales at base; the soft dorsal is entirely dusky, most
intense at upper anterior angle and along upper margin, with an indication of a
longitudinal darker dusky band just above its base; the tips of rays are white;
the fine scaly sheaths at the base of the soft dorsal and anal are dusky and with-

out spots; the soft anal not spotted as it was in the other, but the rays are dusky,

282 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

most intense at about the middle of their length and near the ends; membrane
between the spines and Ist ray entirely dusky and the middle duskiness of the
other rays sometimes extends a little on the membranes presenting a sort of
interrupted longitudinal band; margin of fin similar to that of the other
specimen.

Bleeker’s figure in Atlas Ichth., 8, Perc. tab. 46, fig. 2, resembles our speci-
mens in shape, but the spots are scarcely indicated on the body and there are
none on the dorsal, anal, or caudal. The description of Perca ciliata Kuhl &
Van Hasselt in the Hist. Nat. Poiss., 2, p. 38, of Cuvier & Valenciennes, does
not agree with our specimens. In the description of Dules marginatus Cuvier &
Valenciennes, ibid., p. 87, there are a few points that apply to our specimens,

but in color ours bear no resemblance to the figure.

Kuhlia proxima, sp. nov.
Plate 3, figure 2.

Type No. 65889 U. 8. N. M. (field no. 08920), 5 inches long from Fiji Is-
lands. Cotype No. 29420 M. C. Z. (field No. 08919), 3% inches long from the
same place.

Head 3; depth 2.60 in body; eye 2.53 in head; snout 4.12; maxillary 2.35;
interorbital 3.66; base of soft dorsal 1.94; last dorsal spine 2.75; longest dorsal
spine (fifth) 1.65; longest dorsal ray 1.94; base of anal 1.57; longest anal spine
(third) 2.53; longest anal ray 2.53; pectoral 1.65; ventral 1.65 (not quite to
vent); dorsal X, I, II; anal III, 11; seales 5 (6)-52-9. No. 08920 has D. IX,
Leal

Body similar in shape to AK. sandvicensis; eye large, snout short; maxillary
reaching to anterior edge of pupil; lower jaw projecting; preopercle serrate on
both limbs, its ascending limb not concave; preorbital serrate on its lower
anterior edge; scales moderate, rather closely imbricated, decreasing in size to
the base of the caudal.

Color generally silvery, darker on back; snout and lower Jaw dusky; the
membranes of spinous and soft dorsal and anal soiled dusky, extreme edge of
dorsal black but not making a black border; a broad dusky terminal margin
to the caudal, most intense at end of middle rays. This species differs from

K. sandvicensis in the longer head; much larger eye; in having the ascending

THE SHORE FISHES. 283

limb of preopercle serrated, and fewer scales in transverse series; and a wider
black terminal caudal margin. It differs from A. marginata from Samoa in
having more scales in longitudinal series. It lacks the black margin on soft
dorsal and anal; and it has a much larger eye; AK. marginata does not have
serrations on the ascending limb of preopercle. It is close to Dules humilis of
De Vis from Queensland, differing in having a larger eye, shorter snout, and
longer third anal spine. In D. humilis the second anal spine is as long as and

stronger than the third.

Kuhlia sandvicensis (STEINDACHNER).

Moronopsis argenteus var. sandvicensis STEINDACHNER, Sitz. Ak. Wiss. Wein, 1876, 74, p. 205
(Beitrage 5, p. 158).

Moronopsis sandvicensis STEINDACHNER, Sitz. Ak. Wiss. Wein, 1887, 96, p. 56 (Beitrage 14, p.
1), taf. 1, fig. 1.

C P : : ron « el: .

Seven specimens, No. 05826, 2 to 52 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu
Islands. M. C. Z. 29498 (2 specimens). One specimen (no number) 1+ inches
long from Makatea, Paumotu Islands.

These specimens appear a little deeper than some from Hawaii but their

measurements do not show it.

Kuhlia rupestris (LacrPrpe).

Centropomus rupestris Lacérpe, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 4, p. 252, 272
Dules haswellii Macueay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales, 1881, 5, p. 359.

Nos. 08804, M. C. Z. 29458, a specimen 5 in. long, 08807, a specimen 6g in.
long, OSS06, a specimen 6+ in. long, 08995, a specimen 3 in. long, all from Kusaie,
Caroline Islands.

Easily distinguished from K. maculatus by the much larger mouth and
longer maxillary, which extends to middle of eye, and also by the differences

in coloration.

Kuhlia taeniura (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 208, fig. S1.

Dules taeniurus Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1829, 3, p. 85 (114).

Fourteen specimens, No. 08917, 13 to 14 inches long from Arhno Atoll,

Marshall Islands.

=<

284 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Two specimens, Nos. 08918, and 09039, M. C. Z. 29505, 33 inches long from

Marshall Islands.
SERRANIDAE.

Paracanthistius maculatus (Bt Locn).

Bieeker, Atlas Ichth., 1876, 7, p. 25, 26.

Bodianus maculatus Buocu, Ausl. Fische, 1790, 4, p. 48, pl. 228.

One example, No. A151, 15 inches long, from Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

Head and body spotted; the only spaces without spots are just in front of

the vent and just in front of anal; spots all round, none oblong.

Anyperodon leucogrammicus (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).
Bieexker, Atlas Ichth., [876, 7, p. 28, Nat. tab. 279, Pere. 1, fig. 4.

Serranus leucogrammicus Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1828, 2, p. 259 (347).

One specimen, No. A158, about 12 inches long, from Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

Cephalopholis argus Birocu & SCHNEIDER.

Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 311.

Serranus quitatus (part) Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 24.

Epinephelus argus BurEKer, Atlas Ichth., 1876, 7, p. 32, 43, tab. 313, Pere. 64, fig. 3. Bou-
LENGER, Cat., 1895, 1, p. 189.

Three specimens from Jaluit, Marshall Islands, Nos. 08860, 74 inches long;
08916, 3 inches long and A191, 10 inches long. Nos. A173, 93 inches long,
and A169, M. C. Z. 29787, 74 inches long, from Taritari, Gilbert Islands. Nos.
A25, M. C. Z. 29742, 12 inches long, and A17, from Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands.
Nos. A152, 12} inches long, and A154, M. C. Z. 29743, 114 inches long, from
Funafuti, Ellice Islands. On all the A numbered specimens there are about
8 cross bands on body, especially distinct posteriorly, each about half as wide

as interspaces.

Cephalopholis urodelus (Cuvirr & VALENCIENNES).

Serranus urodelus Cov. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1828, 2, p. 227 (306). Gi:nrumr, Fische der
Siidsee, 1873, 1, p. 3, fig. A.
LE pinephelu urodelus BOULENGER (form A), Cat., 1895, af p. 192.

No. 08961, a specimen 5 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

THE SHORE FISHES. 285

Cephalopholis leopardus (Lacépipe).

JorDan & Seawe, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 258.

Labrus leopardus LAcEPEDE, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 3, p. 518, 521, pl. 30, fig. 1.

No. A179, a specimen 53 inches long from Arhno, Marshall Islands, and
M. C. Z. 29463, A186, 43 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

Ephinephelus merra B1Locu.

Ausl. Fische., 1793, 7, p. 17, pl. 329. BouLeNncEr, Cat., 1895, 1, p. 241 (form B).

>

Serranus hexagonatus Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 14, pl. 2, fig. 3.
Epinephelus stellans JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 258.

Six specimens from Paumotu Islands, Nos. 05864, 62 inches long, A62, 9
inches, A94 M. C. Z. 29796 72 inches, A61, 7} inches, all from Makemo, 05867,
13 inches long and A27, St inches long from Rangiroa. No. 05866, 53 inches
long from Tahiti, Society Islands. No. A185, M. C. Z. 29797, 6¢ inches long

from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

Epinephelus fuscoguttatus (lorsK\L).

BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1876, 7, p. 34, 57, tab. 307, Perc. 29, fig. 3. BouLencrr, Cat., 1895, 1,
p- 249.
Perca summana var. fuscoguttata ForskAt, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 42.
. : x 1: ==
Five specimens from Paumotu Islands, Nos. A938, 84 inches long, A77,
; Cae = 90790. O8 :
93 inches long, A96, 93 inches long, A75, M. C. Z. 29722, 92 inches long and
05865, M. C. Z. 29384, 83 inches long, all from Makemo; A155, 10 inches long
from Funafuti, Ellice Islands; A177, 14 inches long from Rongelab, Marshall

Islands. A12, M. C. Z. 29721, Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands.

Epinephelus caeruleopunctatus (Biocn).

BouLENGER, Cat., 1895, 1, p. 246.
Holocentrus caeruleopunctatus Buocu, Ausl. Fische, 1790, 4, p. 94, tab. 242, fig.

No. 08928, a specimen 72 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

286 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

PRIACANTHIDAE.
Priacanthus cruentatus (LAcEPEDE).

Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U. 8. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 229.

Labrus cruentatus LAckPrDE, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 3, p. 522

= Oro 3 1: 5 Bro S
No. 05858, a specimen 83 inches long from Papeete, Tahiti, Society Islands.

LUTIANIDAE.

Lutianus kasmira (ForsKAL).

Sciaena kasmira ForsKAu, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 46.

Holocentrus bengalensis Buocu, Ausl. Fische, 1790, 4, p. 7, Ichth., p. 82, taf. 246, fig. 2.

7,
Lutianus bengalensis Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 33, pl. 10, fig 4. Brurexer, Atlas Iehth.
1877, 8, p. 44, 55, 333, Perc. 55, fig. 4.
No. OS8865, 5 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands. This specimen has but
i0 dorsal spines, differing from Bloch and Day, who each give 11 dorsal spines.

Bleeker found 10 or 11 spines in the dorsal.

Lutianus gibbus (lorsk\t).

Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 43, pl. 13, fig. 2, 3.

Sciaena gibba ForsKat, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 46.

Two specimens, Nos. 08866, 5 inches long, and O8868, 53 inches long from
Suva, Fiji Islands. Four specimens from Paumotu Islands, Nos. A19, 14
inches and A22, M. C. Z. 29741, 143 inches long from Rangiroa, A66, 149 inches
long from Makemo, and A41, M. C. Z. 29758, 9 inches long from Fakarava. No.
108, M. C. Z. 29757, 93 inches long from Takaa, Society Islands. No. A166,
5¢ inches long from Taritari, Gilbert Islands. Two specimens from Marshall
Islands, Nos. A176, 13 inches long from Rongelab and A183, 144 inches long
from Arhno Atoll.

Lutianus marginatus (Cuvirr & VALENCIENNES).

Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 44, pl. 18, fig. 5.
Diacope marginala Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1828, 2, p. 320 (425).

No. 05869, 74 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands. No. 05871,

32 inches long, Bora Bora, Society Islands. Three specimens from Caroline

THE SHORE FISHES. 287

Islands, Nos. 09021, 08814, 63-and 8} inches long, from Kusaie, and 09011, 13
inches long from Truk Group. Two specimens, Nos. 09038, 1 and 17 inches
long from Arhno Atoll, Marshall Islands, Nos. A137, M. C. Z. 29728 10 inches
long and A138, 112 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands. No. A158, M. C. Z.

29729, 83 inches long from Taritari, Gilbert Islands.

Lutianus johnii (Biocn).

Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 42, pl. 13, fig. 1.

Anthias johnii Buocn, Ichth., 1793, 9, p. 97, tab. 318.

One specimen, No. 08921, 5.75 inches long, from Suva, Fiji Islands. No.
09050, M. C. Z. 29398, 1.75 inches long from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline
Islands. This small specimen is somewhat mutilated and no teeth can be
detected on its tongue; otherwise it agrees with L. johnii, and is with some

doubt, identified as that species.

Lutianus monostigma (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

2

Mesoprion monostigma Cuy. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1828, 2, p. 337 (446). Giunruer, Fische
der Siidsee, 1873, 1, p. 14, taf. 16.
Lutjanus lioglossus BueeKkeEr, Atlas Ichth., 1877, 8, 46, 70, tab. 344, Pere. 66, fig. 4.

Seven specimens from Paumotu Islands: Nos. 08823, 53 inches long
from Anaa, one specimen 5 inches long and A92, M. C. Z. 29768, 73 inches, A99,
83 inches, A100, M. C. Z. 29769, 8 inches from Makemo, and A35, 83 inches,

a ~~ o xs . = , 1 mal, 0
05861, 54 inches from Makatea. Five specimens, Nos. 08986, lz to 3a inches
long from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline Islands. No. A168, 8 inches long from
Taritari, Gilbert Islands.

Lutianus marginatoides, spec. nov.
Plate 4, figure 1.

Type No. 68943 U.S. N. M. (field No. A74), 82 inches long from Makemo,
Paumotu Islands.

Head to tip of flaps 2.57 in body; depth 2.39; eye 5.07 in head; snout 3;
maxillary 2.69, reaching to front of pupil; mandible 2.49; interorbital 4.71;

pectoral 1.26, reaching beyond ventrals to a line from base of last dorsal spine;

288 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

ventrals 1.59, reaching just to vent; dorsal X, 133, fourth spine longest, longest
ray 3.5 in head; anal III, 8, second anal spine longest, 2.85 in head, longest
ray 2.35 in head; preopercle strongly notched; a conspicuous knob on operele;
six rows of scales on cheeks; scales above lateral line in oblique series; counting
from front of dorsal to lateral line there are 8 scales, from anal to lateral line 13,
scales above lateral line 54, below 48, the formulae being 8-48 to 54-13; no
lingual teeth.

Color, greenish gray on back, lighter line of same color on side and belly;
dorsal yellowish with light green spines and dusky spines and rays and a broad
white-edged dusky margin; caudal very dusky with a narrow white terminal
margin, more distinct in middle; other fins all paler; faint light streaks follow-
ing rows of scales, running obliquely upward and backward above lateral line,
horizontally below.

This is close to L. marginata but differs in having a considerably smaller
eye and somewhat smaller mouth, and it may be Diacope striata or D. axillaris
of Cuvier & Valenciennes, but the descriptions aré too incomplete to make the

identification certain.

THERAPONIDAE.
Therapon maculatus, spec. nov.
Plate 4, figure 2.

Hight specimens, No. 08924, 2 to 5 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.
M. C. Z. 29494 (2 specimens).

Type, No. 66061 U. S. N. M., 5 inches long, has head 2.86 in length;
depth 2.71; eye 3.60 in head; snout 2.5; maxillary 3.27; dorsal XII, 11; anal
III, 93: seales 11-60(+9)-18: 11 seales from front of dorsal to lateral line and
18 from lateral line to anal.

Longest dorsal spine 2 in head; second anal spine longest, 1.89 in head;
preopercle strongly denticulate above angle; fine teeth on lower margin; teeth
in upper jaw in many villiform bands in front, the band changing into about
3 rows posteriorly; an anterior row of enlarged mixed, incisor-like and canine-

like or curved backward conical teeth, the latter longer than the others; lower

THE SHORE FISHES. 289

jaw with several rows of viliform teeth in front, these becoming 2 rows pos-
teriorly; outer row larger and conical but not so large as in upper jaw.

Color after a long time (9 years) in alcohol, body dark gray with slight
reddish tinge; dark on back and still darker on top of head and snout, covered
with faint brown spots, one third diameter of eye, approximately arranged in
longitudinal rows and faintly evident on caudal fin; each scale with a small
silvery spot making narrow longitudinal silvery streaks or lines; pectoral dusky ;
ventral black except at base and on last or inner ray where it is white; spinous
dorsal clouded with purplish brown, each interspinous membrane with black
margin which is most evident next to spine in front; soft dorsal margined with
dark brown at its upper anterior margin; anal membrane very dark brown,

most intense anteriorly.

Therapon jarbua (lorskAL).
Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 69. pl. 18, fig. 4.
Sciaena jarbua ForsKAL, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 50.

ad

Six specimens from Suva, Fiji Islands, Nos. 08831, 73 inches, 08821, 5 inches,
08883, 32 inches, 08922, 57 inches, O8889, 7 inches and A144, 83 inches. Three
specimens from Tonga Islands, Nos. 05862, M. C. Z. 29577, 42 inches from Vavau
and 05863, M. C. Z. 29578, 08941, M. C. Z. 29373, 54 and 7 inches long from
Tongatabu.

SPARIDAE.

Lethrinus ramak (lorsKAL).

Ginruer, Fische der Siidsee, 1874, 3, p. 69, taf. 46, fig. B. Jorpan & Seater, Bull. U. 8. Bur.
Fish., 1906, 25, p. 269.

Sciaena ramak Forskau, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 53.

Four specimens from Taritari, Gilbert Islands, Nos. A159, 10 inehes,

A165, M. C. Z. 29727, 64 inches, A170, M. C. Z. 29726, 10% inches, A172, 72 inches.

Lethrinus harak (Forsk\L).

Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 137, pl. 33, fig. 3.

Sciaena harak Forskiv, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 52.

Two specimens, Nos. A143, and 08853, M. C. Z. 29419 (1 specimen), 63

. . ‘ —ysiete! ~\ ze = oe BLP iste “ ;
inches long from Suva, Fiji. Three specimens, Nos. 08935, 92 inches, 08934,

290 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

M. C. Z. 29775, 73 inches, and A198, M. C. Z. 29723, 92 inches long from Kusaie,
Caroline Islands. One specimen, No. 08896, 7i5 inches long from Vavau,
Tonga Islands.

The specimens from Kusaie have a large dusky oblong spot below lateral
line above end of pectoral; axil very dark.

In No. A143 the dusky lateral spot is wanting on right side, with possibly a
faint trace on left; axil not so dusky, otherwise no distinguishable differences.

No. 08896, in addition to the lateral spot it has traces of 8 or 9 cross bars on
body, which extend on to the side of the abdomen, about on a line with lower base
of pectoral.

Lethrinus mahsenoides EHRENBERG.

Cuvier & VALENCIENNEs’s, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1830, 6, p. 212 (286). GitnrTuEr, Cat., 1859, 1, p.
464 Jorpan & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 270.

Two specimens Nos. 08894 M. C. Z. 29782 and 08895, 72 and 7 inches long
respectively, from Vavau, Tonga Islands.

No. 08894 had head 2.96 in length; depth 2.69; eye 3.85 in head; snout
2.08; preorbital 2.63; pectoral 3.44 in length; ventral 4.48; longest dorsal
spine (4th) 7.79; dorsal X, 9; anal III, 8; scales 6-49-16.

No. 08895 had head 2.95 in length; depth 2.68; eye 3.84 in head; snout
2.18; preorbital 2.82; pectoral 3.46 in length; ventral 4.73; longest dorsal
spine (4th) 8.35; dorsal X, 9; anal III, 8; scales 6-49-16.

Head grayish with brownish shades; gill membrane margined with red,
still showing quite plainly; body grayish, darker on back, paler on belly; traces
of 8 or 9 narrow dusky half bars running somewhat obliquely downward and
backward; many scales on back and side, each with a white or pale center;
pectoral yellowish; ventral greenish with dusky tips; dorsal and anal with
traces of narrow horizontal or oblique narrow bars; caudal yellowish with traces

of about 4 broad eross bars.

Lethrinus moensii BLEEKER.
Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1855, 9, p. 435. Giinrur, Fische der Siidsee, 1874, 3, p. 64, taf. 46, fig. A.
BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1877, 8, p. 115, 7, tab. 297, Perc. 19, fig. 3.
No. 08867, 4% inches long, from Suva, Fiji Islands. The specimen is dried
and in bad condition; it does not show any color markings. It seems nearer to

this species than to any other and is without much doubt correctly identified.

THE SHORE FISHES. 291

Lethrinus richardsonii GiNTHER.

Cat., 1859, 1, p. 456.

~s : . + c 7 mae e ‘ 1 .

Six specimens, No. 08903, g to 2 inches long, from Truk Group, Caroline
Islands. These specimens are in bad condition, but the color markings show
fairly well. No. 05870, 5 inches long, and one specimen 23 inches long, from
Vavau, Tonga Islands.

Lethrinella miniata (Forsrer).
Fow ter, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1904, ser. 2, 12, p. 529.

Sparus miniatus Forster, Bloch. & Schneider's Ichth., 1801, p. 281.

No. Al4, M. C. Z. 29748, about 16 inches long from Rangiroa, Paumotu

+ = Kho 5 =
Islands and No. Ad8, about 177 inches long, from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

Monotaxis grandoculis (ForskKAL).
JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 271.

Sciaena grandoculis ForsKAu, Descript. Animal, 1775, p. 53.

One specimen, No. A181, 9% inches long from Arhno, Marshall Islands.

GERRIDAE.

Xystaema argyreum (lorsTeEr).

Sciaena argyrea Forster, Bloch & Schneider’s Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 344. Deseript. Anim. Ed.
Lichtenstein, 1844, p. 291.

Gerres argyreus GUNTHER, Cat., 1859, 1, p. 353; 1862, 4, p. 263.

One specimen, No. 08855, 61 inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

From the descriptions it is difficult to distinguish this species from gigas.

Xystaema acinaces (BLEEKER).

Gerres acinaces BLEEKER, Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1854, 6, p. 194.
Diapterus acinaces BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1877, 8, p. 123-126, tab. 361, Pere. 77, fig. 2.
7 = Sys bp SAG Go : aire hap ;
Three specimens, Nos. 08853, 43 inches, 08973, 37 inches, 08846, 42 inches
long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands.
Two specimens from Vavau, Tonga Islands, Nos. A128, about 7 inches

long, and A129, M. C. Z. 29293 52 inches long.

292 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

These agree with Bleeker’s description and the plate in Atlas, excepting
that our specimen has traces of small dusky spots on the dorsal spines. These

specimens are too deep for X. argyreum or X. macrosoma.,

Xystaema oyena (I*orsKAL).

Labrus oyena ForsKAL, Deserip. Anim., 1775, p. 3

5.
Gerres oyena Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 99, pl. 25, fig. 4.

Diapterus oyena BuerKeR, Atlas Iehth., 1877, 8, p. 124, 129, tab. 361, Pere. 77, fig. 5.

5

Nos. 09019, nineteen specimens, 24 to 3 inches long, and 09047, five speci-
mens, 1} to 3 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands. Seven specimens from Tonga
Islands, one a specimen, M. C. Z. 29388, 52 inches long from Tongatabu; 5
specimens, No. 05886, 4 to 44 inches long, and one, No. 05887, 34 inches long
from Vavau. M. C. Z. 29461, No. 08982, three specimens, 2 to 33 inches long,
from Guam. Nos. 09053, seven specimens 1 to 1] inches long from Truk,
Caroline Islands, and 09081, seven specimens 1 to 12 inches long from Moen,
Caroline Islands.

It is difficult to identify these fishes with any degree of certainty on account
of their poor condition and the small size of most of the specimens. According
to descriptions they seem to be closely related to X. limbatus and X. kapas,
but they agree best with X. oyena. The black on the caudal is more evident
in some than in others, but in all, traces of black are evident. They are more

remote from X. argyreum, the latter being a slender fish.

MULLIDAE.

Upeneus vittatus (I'orsKAL).

3LepKER, Atlas Ichth., 1877-78, 9, tab. 392, Mull., fig. 3. Jorpan & Stan, Bull. U. 8. Bur.
Fish., 1906, 26, p. 273.

Vullus vittatus Forsk&u, Descript. Anim., 17

5, p. dl.

No. A145, about 72 inches long, from Suva, Fiji Islands.

Black blotch covering membrane at upper angle of spinous dorsal from first
to tip of fifth spine; front tip of soft dorsal with black blotch.

This specimen agrees perfectly with Bleeker’s figure.

Teeth in both jaws, vomer and palatines not in villiform bands, but very

blunt teeth in several rows; lateral line 37.

THE SHORE FISHES. 293

Upeneus sulphureus Cuvier & VALENCIENNES.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1829, 3, p. 331 (450). BurrKker, Atlas Ichth., 1877-78, 9, tab. 393, Mull. 3, fig. 4.
Upenoides sulphureus GUNTHER, Cat. 1859, 1, p. 398. Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 120, pl. 30,
fig. 3.

_ Yar 9 1: < . 398
No. 08820, a specimen 42 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

Pseudupeneus moana JorDAN & SNYDER.

Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1905, 29, p. 354. Jorpan & Swaxy, Bull. U. 8. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 274.

4 : = ns ls a > C + .
One specimen, No. 08948, 43 inches long from Kusaie, Caroline Islands.

Pseudupeneus bifasciatus (LackpipE).
Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U. 8. Fish. Comm., 1905, 238, pt. 1, p. 258, fig. 107.
Mullus bifasciatus LackPEDE, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 3, p. 404, pl. 14, fig. 2.
One specimen No. 05847, 73 inches long from Papeete, Tahiti, Society

Islands.
Pseudupeneus barberinus (lLAacEPEDE).

Mullus barberinus LackprDE, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 3, p. 406, pl. 13, fig. 3.
Upeneus barberinus Cuvier & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1829, 3, p. 340 (642). GUnruer,
Vische der Siidsee, 1874, 2, p. 57, taf. 42.
Parupeneus barberinus BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1877, 8, tab. 393, Mull. 3, fig. 1.
One specimen, No. 08899, M. C. Z. 29576, nearly 7 inches long from
Vavau, Tonga Islands. Last ray of dorsal and of anal slightly produced as
A , . , . + aS sl .
represented in Lacépéde’s figure. No. A57 about 174 inches long from Fakarava,
Paumotu Islands. No trace of black at base of soft dorsal.
Thirteen specimens from Caroline Islands, Nos. 09082, seven specimens
. - ; 1 oW 6 b 7. ;
12 to 17 inches long from Moen, and 08904, M. C. Z. 29490, a specimen 13 inches

long, and 09054, five specimens 13 to 1% inches long from Truk.

Pseudupeneus barberinoides (bLEEKER).

Upencus barberinoides BLEEKER, Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1852, 3, p. 263.

U peneus trifasciatus G&@NTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1874, 2, p. 59, taf. 44, fig. C. (In part.)

eno TRIES ‘ 790 £ ‘ 25: jal Tid
No. 05853, M. C. Z. 29788, five specimens 3 to 33 inches long from Vavau,

Tonga Islands.

294 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,’’ 1899-1900.

Mulloides flavolineatus (LackPEDE).

Day, Fishes of India, 1875, p. 122, pl. 30, fig. 6. Giinvuer, Fische der Siidsee, 1874, 2, p. 56.
Mullus flavolineatus Lac&rEpE, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 3, p. 406.

Three specimens (very bad condition) 53 to 62 inches long, and No. A60,
10; inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands. No. 05848, a specimen 5§
inches long from Vavau, Tonga Islands. Nos. 08976 and 08835, 4 and 5 inches
long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands. Nos. 05852, 37 and 05850, M. C. Z. 29528,
three specimens each 4 inches long from Bora Bora, Society Islands. No.
09018, 3% inches long from Guam.

These specimens have shorter and more abruptly arched snout than M.
samoensis, the barbels are longer, reaching considerably beyond the preoperele,
while in M. samoensis they scarcely reach the preopercle; the spinous dorsal
(in young examples) when depressed reaches nearer the soft dorsal than in M,

eamoensis, but this does not hold good in the larger examples.

Mulloides samoensis GUNTHER.

Fische der Stidsee, 1874, 3, p. 57, taf. 43, fig. B. Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm.
1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 253, fig. 105.

Four specimens, Nos. 08974, 08975, 08967, 08969, 4 to 5 inches long from
Funafuti, Ellice Islands. Two specimens, Nos. 08897, M. C. Z. 29575, 63 inches
long, and O8898, M. C. Z. 29575, 72 inches long from Vavau, Tonga Islands.
Four specimens from Paumotu Islands, 2 of them, Nos. A72 and 05851, 8 and
3% long from Makemo; No. A53, 74 inches long from Fakarava, and No. 05849,
54 inches long from Rangiroa. Two specimens, No. 09018, M. C. Z. 29385,
32 and 4 inches long from Guam.

While No. A72 has the more slender form of M. samoensis, the position of
the dorsal and the long barbels is like that of M. flavolineatus; the snout is
even longer, and less abruptly curved than in the other specimens of M. samoen-
sis, and it may be a distinet species; on the other hand all the characters men-
tioned distinguishing M. samoensis and M. flavolineatus may be only individual

variations of one species.

THE SHORE FISHES. 295

POMACENTRIDAE.

Pomacentrus pavo (Buiocu).

Chaetodon pavo Buocu, Ichth., 1787, 3, p. 44, tab. 198, fig. 1.

No. 05882, M. C. Z. 29503, two specimens from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.
Gy Glee 9070 © : . Brie .
Nos. 08863, 25 inches long and OS878, 3 inches long from Taritari, Gilbert
Islands.
Pomacentrus nigricans (Lackprpe).

JoRDAN & Suave, Bull. U. 8. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 281.

Holocentrus nigricans Lackpkpn, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 4, p. 332, 367, 370.

Oey

Five specimens, Nos. 05877-05881, 3 to 4 inches long from Makemo, Pau-
motu Islands. No. 05860, M. C. Z. 29495, 3 inches long from Papeete, Tahiti,
Society Islands. No. 08946, M. C. Z. 29496, 3 inches long from Kusaie, Caroline

Islands, in a fresh water stream, Feb. 9, 1900.

Pomacentrus lividus (Forster).

GtnNTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1881, 7, p. 228, taf. 124, fig. F. Jorpan & SEaue, Bull. U.S. Bur.
Fish., 1906, 25, p. 283.

Chaetodon lividus Forster, Bloch & Schneider’s Syst. Ichth., 1801, Devens

Two specimens, Nos. 08949, 33 inches, and 08951. M. C. Z. 29485, 33
}

inches long, from Kusaie, Caroline Islands.

Abudefduf sordidus (lorsk\1).
Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 274.
Chaetodon sordidus Forsk&u, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 62.
Four specimens from the following localities in the Paumotu Islands:
No. 05874, 33 inches, Makatea; No. A56, 52 inches, Fakarava: No. 08824,
M. C. Z. 29395, 5 inches, Anaa; No. 05875, M. C. Z. 29502, 13? inches, Rangiroa.

Abudefduf septemfasciatus (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Glyphisodon septemfasciatus Cuy. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1830, 5, p. 346 (463).
Glyphidodon septemfasciatus Day, Fishes of India, 1877, p. 386, pl. 81, fig. 7. Burekrr, Atlas
Ichth., 1877-78, 9, tab. 409, Pomac. 10, fig. 5.
No. 05873, thirty-two specimens 2 to 53 inches long from Makatea, Paumotu

Islands.

296 EXPEDITION OF THE, “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

The black spot on the caudal peduncle at the end of dorsal fin is very dis-
tinct in all of the specimens up to about 3 inches in length, a little fainter in
those 3; and 33 inches long, and still fainter in specimens 33; in specimens 4}
it is barely visible and in a specimen 53 inches long it does not show.

One specimen, 235 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands. The
band below 3-5 dorsal spine is somewhat more intensified at its upper end than
the same band in other specimens of like size from Makatea.

Nine specimens from Makemo, Paumotu Islands, as follows: Nos. A68,
5 inches; AS3, 7 inches; AS84, 62 inches; A90, 63 inches; A91, 73 inches;
A93, M. C. Z. 29762, 73 inches; A95, 78 inches; A97, M. C. Z. 29763, 72 inches,
A102, 63 inches long, and 29764, 74 inches long from Tahaa, Society Islands.
No. A167, 6 inches long from Taritari, Gilbert Islands. All of the Makemo
and other A numbers have a very pale blue wash over the dusky margins of

soft dorsal, anal, and caudal which does not quite reach edge of fins.

Abudefduf saxatilis (LINNE).

JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 285.
Chaetodon saxatilis LiNNB, Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 276.

Glyphidodon saxatilis GUNTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1881, 7, p. 229, taf. 126, fig. A

Seven specimens, each ? inches long, from Lagoon at Fakarava, Paumotu

Islands. These specimens are too small for positive identification, but they
agree very closely with the descriptions of this species. The ground color of
the body was probably light bluish; there are 4 cross bars; no pectoral spot
and no black stripe on lobes of caudal. Six specimens, M. C. Z. 29518, i60 to
2 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.

Muzzel and base of caudal are light yellow.

Abudefduf glaucus (Cuvirr & VALENCIENNES).

Jorpan & Seare, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 286.

Glyphisodon glaucus Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1830, 5, p. 355 (475).

Seventy-eight specimens from the following localities in the Paumotu
Islands: Nos. 05821, 25 specimens 12 to 23 inches long, and 05891, M. C. Z.
29445, two specimens 1 and 13 inches long from Makatea; No. 05844, fifty
specimens Lis to 33 inches long from Makemo; No. 05883, 23 inches long from

Fakarava.

THE SHORE FISHES 297

Abudefduf zonatus (Cuvirr & VALENCIENNES).

JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 286.
Glyphisodon zonatus Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1830, 5, p. 361 (483).

One specimen, No. 08926, 32 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

Abudefduf antjerius (Kun_ & Van Hasster).

Glyphisodon antjerius KunHL & Van Hasse, Cuvier & Valenciennes’s, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1830,
), p. 360 (481).
Glyphidodon antjerius Day, Fishes of India, 1877, p. 387, pl. 81, figs. 4, 5.

One specimen, No. 08912, 1% inches long from Arhno Atoll, Marshall Is-
lands. Dorsal XIII, 12; Anal II, 12.

This specimen lacks the median stripe on nape and forehead and the ocelli
m base of dorsal. The band from dorsal above eye forward is much narrower
han pupil, and is continued backward along base of dorsal in a series of inter-
‘upted spots; numerous small grayish spots on sealy base of dorsal; anal uni-

orm in color.

Abudefduf curacao (Biocn).

Chaelodon curacao Buocu, Ichth., 1787, 3, p. 106 (79), taf. 212, fig. 1.

Glyphisodon trifascialtus BLEEKER, Verh. Bat. Genoot., 1846-47, 21, p. 19.

Eight specimens from Jaluit, Marshall Islands, as follows, Nos. 09087, 5
nehes long, 09010, 4 inches long, 08964, M. C. Z. 29564, 42 inches long, and five

specimens, 3% to 44 inches long.

Abudefduf sexfasciatus (LAcEPEDE).

Labrus sexfasciatus LackrEpE, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 3, p. 477, pl. 19, fig. 2

Glyphisodon coelestinus CuviER & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1830, 5, p. 347 (464) pl. 135.

Five specimens (young) § to 14 inches long, and 05859, 7 inches long, from
Papeete, Tahiti, Society Islands, M. C. Z. 29511 (1 specimen). Ten specimens,
3 to 12 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands, and one specimen, M. C. Z.
29469, 2 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.

All the small examples have 12 or 13 anal rays, but the large example

298 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

(05859) has dorsal XII, 1, 12; anal 10, the single anal spine has the appearance
of two spines grown together. It has perhaps been broken and then grown
together.
Dascyllus aruanus (LINNF).
Gintuer, Fische der Siidsee, 1881, 7, p. 235, taf. 124, fig. B.
Chaetodon aruanus LINN®, Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 275.
No. 08861, M. C. Z. 29489, a specimen 2§ inches long from Jaluit, Marshall

Islands. No. 05876, two specimens, 14 and 23 inches long from Fakaraya,
Paumotu Islands. One specimen, 13 inches long from Papeete, Tahiti, Society

Islands.
Dascyllus trimaculatus (RUppPE.LL).

Cuvier & VaLencienneEs, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1830, 5, p. 330 (441). GtntTumr, Fische der Siidsee,
1881, 7, p. 235.
Pomacentrus trimaculatus RUpPELL, Atlas, 1828, p. 39, taf. 8, fig. 3.1

No. 08859, 4% inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands. No. 09029,
M. C. Z. 29397, 13 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

It is possible that D. albisella Gill from Hawaii is the same as this species.
The white bar (which is the only character separating the species) in the Hawai-
ian specimens is quite large in the small examples (1 inch) and becomes gradually
smaller in larger examples; in a 2-inch example it extends only half as far down
on the body as in the small (1-inch) example; we have no larger specimens of
D. albisella, but believe that as the fish becomes larger, the spots are smaller,
and gradually disappear. In the specimen of D. trimaculatus 4% inches long,

the spot has alnost entirely disappeared.

Dascyllus pomacentroides, sp. nov.
Plate 5, figure 1.
Type No. 65812 U. S. N. M., (Field No. 08879), 23 inches long from Tari-
tari, Gilbert Islands.
General form of a Pomacentrus.
‘The name Pomacentrus trimaculatus Cuvier & Valenciennes (Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1830, 5, p. 320,

441)) is preoceupied by Pomacentrus trimaculatus Riippell (1828). For the fish named Pomacentrus
(rimaculatus by Cuvier and Valenciennes we propose the name Pomacentrus dorsomaculatus.

THE SHORE FISHES. 299

Dorsal XII, 112; anal II, 113; scales 3-27-83, 14 pores in lateral line on left
side and 18 on right; head 3.33; depth 2.13 in length without caudal; eye 2.72
in head; snout 4; outer teeth in both jaws much enlarged and conical; pre-
orbital serrate.

Color, plain brown; all the fins brown except that the anal is dusky anteri-
orly and the upper and lower margins of caudal much darker than the middle

rays.

Chromis caeruleus (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Jorpan & Seave, Bull. U. 8. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 290.
Heliases caeruleus Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1830, 5, p. 372 (497).

No. O8880, twenty-one specimens, 17 to 23 inches long, from Taritari,
Gilbert Islands. Some of these specimens appear to have a double row of teeth
in the lower jaw in front, having two large prominently projecting teeth on each
side of symphysis of lower jaw.

No. 08862, four specimens 2; to 23 inches long from Kusaie, Caroline Is-
lands.

Nineteen specimens, M. C. Z. 29534, 13 to 23 inches long from Fakarava,
Paumotu Islands.

These specimens agree better with Cuvier & Valenciennes’s description of
C. lepisurus than with C. caeruleus, but we follow Jordan & Seale, who make

C. lepisurus a synonym of C. caeruleus.

LABRIDAE.

Stethojulis strigiventer (BENNETT).

BLeEekeER, Atlas Ichth., 1862, 1, p. 131, tab. 43, fig. 1. GinrueEr, Cat., 1862, 4, p. 140.
Julis strigiventer BENNETT, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1832, p. 184.

One specimen, No. 08954, 375 inches long from Wotje, Marshall Islands.
No. 09096, and nine specimens 08905, M. C. Z. 29477, 1 to 2 inches long from
Truk, Caroline Islands; No. 09089, eleven specimens, 13 to 27 inches long from
Moen, Caroline Islands. No. 05892, M. C. Z. 29476, two specimens, 13 and 2
inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

Each one of No. 08905 has a small black spot on the base of caudal just

300 EXPEDITION OF THE “AIBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

above lateral line, and one on the next to last ray in dorsal and in anal. In No.
09089 the same spots are present, except in one example 27 inches long, which
lacks the spot; in No. 08954 the spot is wanting; in No. 05892 all the spots are
much larger than in the other examples, the spot on dorsal, in the smaller ex-
ample, is situated on the base of the 10th ray and the membrane between 9th
and 11th ray; on anal it is on base of next to last ray and the membrane in front
of it to 9th ray; in the large example dorsal spot extends from 9th ray to last, not
including 9th or last ray. These may be different species, but we can find no

other tangible differences.

Stethojulis casturi GUNTHER.
Vische der Siidsee, 1881, 7, p. 255, taf. 141, fig. A.
Stethojulis albovitlata BuEnker, Atlas Ichth., 1862, 1, p. 182, tab. 44, fig. 5.
One specimen, No. 08957, 4 inches long from Wotje, Marshall Islands. This
specimen agrees with the figure given by Jordan*and Seale, and confirms their

conclusions in separating it from S. albovittata of Bonnaterre.

Stethojulis bandanensis (BLEEKER).

JorpAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 297, pl. 45, fig. 2.
Julis bandanensis BLEEKER, Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1851, 2, p. 254.

Six specimens from the following localities in the Marshall Islands, Nos.
09036, three specimens 34 to 33 inches, and 09079, M. C. Z. 29482, 3 inches,
from Arhno Atoll; Nos. 08955, 3% inches long, and 08956, 33 inches, Wotije.
OS8838, M. C. Z. 29462, 3 inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

Halichoeres trimaculatus (Quoy & Gaimarp).
Jordan & Seave, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 301.
Julis trimaculata Quoy & Gatmarp, Voy. Astrolabe. Zool., 1835, 3, p. 705, pl. 20, fig. 2.
No. 05894, two specimens, each about 2% inches long from Makemo, Pau-
motu Islands, and No. 05893, M. C. Z. 29508, two specimens, each about 2 inches

long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

Julis pulcherrima (GiNnTHER).

Cat., 1862, 4, p. 200.

No. A134, 9 inches long from Kambara, Fiji Islands.

THE SHORE FISHES. 301

Head 3.41 in length of body to base of caudal; depth 3.41; eye 6.1 in head;
snout, including upper lip 3.22; ventral 1.35; pectoral 1.49; longest dorsal
spine (1st) 1.41; dorsal IX, 12; A. III, 12; scales 6-78-27.

Color in alcohol, head reddish purplish; traces of bands running same as
in J. purpureum in Jordan & Evermann’s Hawaiian Report; these bands have a
faint bluish tinge in alcohol; body brownish, darker on back, with small secat-
tered white spots anteriorly, more crowded, larger and bluish white posteriorly,
anteriorly no spots on side below pectoral fins, but some immediately under the
pectoral, extending from dorsal to anal posteriorly; a dark brown blotch in
membrane between first two dorsal spines; a row of spots running from dorsal
forward on nape to above eye, a similar row below this extending from dorsal to
middle of eye; the fin yellowish with faint brownish base; a bluish white spot
ocellated with brown; at base of each spine and ray, except first spine and ray,
a row of similar spots extending from head on each side of nape; fin above these
spots thickly spotted with similar but smaller spots for about two-thirds of its
height, these spots terminating above abruptly in a row of spots running the
entire Jength of fin; a faint brownish broken narrow band extending from 3d
spine to 3d ray; outer margin of fin bluish white with a thread-like inner margin
of brown; anal yellowish with a purplish brown base, and a narrow bluish white
margin, this margin bordered within by a thread-like purplish brown line;
a white spot on second spine just above base, a comparatively large white spot,
at base of 3d spine and at base of all the soft rays excepting the next to last ray,
a row of bluish white marks and spots beginning on 3d spine just beyond these
dots and about midway of height of fin, these markings being irregular semi-
circular crescents and spots anteriorly, each one beginning on rays and extending
on membranes of this character as far as 6th soft ray, thence continuing as
irregular spots to end of fin; each one of these marks bordered with faint pur-
plish brown; beyond these, a row of small ocelli with white centers and purplish
brown outer rim; between 3d anal spine and 6th soft ray, these ocelli are much
smaller than others; two on each membrane; caudal mostly yellow, with purplish
brown base; pectoral similar to caudal; ventral slight purplish brown with pale
blue outer rays.

Our specimen seems undoubtedly Julis pulcherrima of Giinther, but it

differs from specimens from the Hawaiian Islands identified as J. pulcherrima

302 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

by Jordan & Evermann, in having a larger eye and longer snout and also in
minor color differences. The type of J. pulcherrima came from the South Paci-
fic, the type of J. gaimard from Hawauan Islands. There have been many so-
called J. pulcherrima recorded from Hawaii by various collectors and very few
have got any which they identified as J. gaimard. The stated differences are so
slight that it is doubtful if the Hawaiian J. gaimard and J. pulcherrima are
really distinct.

The color of our specimen agrees fairly well with that of Bleeker’s Coris
formosa in Atlas 1, tab. 19, fig. 3, but he states in his descriptions that J. formosa

has more scales than J. gaimardi; the reverse is the case in the figures.

Thalassoma lunare (LINN&).

JorpAaNn & SEALE, Bull. U. 8S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 305.

Labrus lunaris LINNE, Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 283.

One specimen, No. 08960, 64 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

Depth 3.76; head 3.54; eye 5.83; snout 3.04; dorsal VIII, 13; anal II,
11; scales 4—28-9.

Head naked except for a group of 3 small scales on each side of head just
above opercles, partly on upper part of opercle.

Color in aleohol, head a dark purplish brown, with lighter bands running
obliquely downward and backward across opercles to edge of gill opening; two
light bands crossing lower jaw, one just in front of angle of mouth, the other a
little further back; body brownish yellow; a large black blotch across caudal
peduncle at base of caudal fin; the prolonged rays of the caudal dusky on their
basal third; soft and spinous dorsal with a purplish brown base and broad pale
margin; anal similar; pectoral purplish brown at base of upper ray and with

oblong similarly colored spot on upper half of pectoral but not reaching the tip.

Thalassoma purpureum (I*orsk(AL).
Jorpan & Swap, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 305.

Scarus purpureus ForskAu, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 27.

One specimen, No. A105, 113 inches long from Whitsunday Island, Pinaki,

Paumotu Islands.

THE SHORE FISHES. 303

Cheilinus digrammus (Laciphpr).

Jorpan & Spare, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 309.
Labrus diagrammus Lackrkpe, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 3, p. 448, 517, 518, pl. 1, fig. 2.

Cheilinus radiatus BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1862, 1, p. 64, 68, tab. 26, fig. 1.

= 2 A Os Fae ‘ 5 4
No. A171, a specimen 67 inches long from Taritari, Gilbert Islands. No.

08952, M. C. Z. 29515, a specimen 5 inches long from Kusaie, Caroline Islands.

Cheilinus undulatus Ripper.

Neue Wirb. Fische, 1835, p. 20, taf. 6, fig. 2. Jorpan & Space, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p.
309.

No. 08953, M. C. Z. 29380, 44 inches long, from Kusaie, Caroline Islands.
No. A163, 10 inches long from Taritari, Gilbert Islands. No. A16, 18 inches
long from Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands. No. O8872, 6§ inches long from Suva,
Fiji Islands.

No. 08872, M. C. Z. 29569, is in very bad condition and the identification
is not certain.

The small example, No. 08958, from WKusaie is similar in color, general
shape, and measurements to the fish figured by Giinther in Siidsee, pl. 133, fig.
B, except that it has 10 spines. Ours gives the following counts; dorsal X, 9;
anal III, 82; scales 3-22-6.

In No. A163 the color is exactly like that in No. A16, except that it lacks the
vermiculations of No. Al6 at the axil and base of pectoral. It has dorsal IX,
10; anal III, 82; scales 3-22-6; head 2.8 to base of caudal; depth 2.7; orbit
7; snout 2.3.

No. Al6 gives the following measurements: head 2.8 to base of caudal;
depth 2.75; orbit 8 in head; snout 2.3; dorsal X, 103; anal IIT, 82; scales 3-22-6;
ventrals not reaching anal; maxillary not reaching orbit; the posterior edge
of gape not reaching orbit by a distance equal to nearly the width of orbit;
longest dorsal rays, when depressed, reaching slightly beyond origin of upper
caudal rays, anal rays about equal in extent to dorsal rays; caudal rounded.

In alcohol there are narrow wavy pale bars and reticulations on the caudal,
the edge of fin with broad pale margin; soft dorsal and anal similarly colored,
but lacking the pale margins; spinous dorsal similarly colored, but the bars are

narrower, and more numerous; 2 short irregular narrow broken purplish brown

304 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

bars from the eye backward; rest of head covered with narrow pale vermicula-
tions and streaks.

Inasmuch as our two large specimens have 9 and 10 spines respectively
and they do not otherwise differ, the genus Thalliurus based on 10 spines alone
is therefore not tenable. Giinther’s figure of C. chlorurus is not the C. chlorurus
figured by either Bloch or Bleeker, and differs in coloration and in having a

rounded caudal.

Cymolutes praetextatus (Quoy & GaIMArD).
Day, Fishes of India, 1877, p. 409, pl. 90, fig. 1.
Julis praetextatus Quoy & GaimarD, Voy. Astrolabe. Zool., 1835, 3, p. 712, pl. 15, fig. 4.

One specimen, No. 05897, 3 inches long from Namuka, Tonga Islands.

Dorsal LX, 13; anal III, 12; scales 75 in lateral line.

This specimen agrees exactly in fin formation with Quoy & Gaimard’s deserip-
tion. The original color is now but faintly indicated, but what can be seen agrees
with the figure given by Quoy & Gaimard, excepting that our specimen has a
small black spot on upper edge of caudal peduncle at base of caudal fin. This
spot is stated by Jordan & Evermann to be present in some specimens of C.
leclusii from Hawaii. Our specimen also agrees fairly well with C. praetextatus
given by Day. There is no indication in our specimen of the line under the eye
and the broad shoulder band, as shown in Bleeker’s figure in Atlas Ichth., 1,

pl. 31, fig. 1.

SCARIDAE.

Scarichthys caeruleopunctatus (Ripret).
Ginruer, Fische der Siidsee, 1909, 8, p. 300.
Scarus (Calliodon) coeruleopunctatus Riipreri, Neue Wirbe. Fische, 1835, p. 24, taf. 7, fig. 8.
Ten specimens from Tonga Islands at Vavau, as follows:— Nos. 05896,
eight specimens, 23 to 5% inches long; 05895, M. C. Z. 29381, 53 inches long,
and A130, M. C. Z. 29383, 54 inches long.

Scarus brunneus JEeNKINS.
3ull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1900, 19, p. 59, fig. 16.
Nos. A133, M. C. Z. 29770, 84 inches, and A135, 83 inches long from Kam-

bara, Fiji Islands. No. A192 64 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

THE SHORE FISHES. 305

No. A192 has one tooth on one side and two on other side of upper jaw;
No. A133 has one tooth on right side and none on left side; No. A135 has one
tooth on right side and one on left side.

We have compared our specimens with specimens of S. brunneus, S. bata-
viensis, S. erythrodon, and the type of S. erythacus and find that they differ in no
way from S. brunneus except in a naturally larger eye in our specimens, which

are smaller than those we had of S. brunneus.

Scarus pulchellus Ripper.

Neue Wirb. Fische, 1835, p. 25, taf. 8, fig. 3.
Pseudoscarus pulchellus BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1862, 1, p. 20, 34, tab. 10, fig.38. Ginruer, Cat.,
1862, 4, p. 219.

No. A40, 14 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

Head 3.4 in length; eye 6.71 in head; snout 2.09; pectoral 1.3; dorsal IX,
10; anal III, 9. ;

General color in alcohol greenish gray, darker on the back; pectorals trans-
lucent yellowish; dorsal and anal with a narrow dark margin, that of the dorsal
being darkest on spinous portion of fin; caudal with yellow membranes and
greenish yellow rays and paler margin, the somewhat produced lobes a little
darker than rest of fin.

Seales 23-246; interlobular margin somewhat rounded; 4 scales before
the dorsal; 3 rows on cheek; no teeth at corner of mouth; teeth white; lips
cover more than half the jaws.

This specimen agrees very well with S. pulchellus except the color, and this

we cannot make out.

Scarus bataviensis BLEEKER.

Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1857, 13, p. 342.
Callyodon bataviensis Jorpan & Seave, Bull. U. 8. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 523, fig. 61.
Pseudoscarus bataviensis BureKer, Atlas Ichth., 1862, 1, tab. 12, fig. 3, p. 22, 48. Gtnruer,
Fische der Siidsee, 1909, 8, p. 317.
Nos. A189, M. C. Z. 29777, and A190 from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.
The teeth in No. A189 are ? on right side and { on left; in No. A190 they

are {| on right and ¢ on left.

306 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Regarding the color of these specimens it is like that described by Jordan

& Seale, rather than that of Bleeker.

EPHIPPIDAE.

Platax orbicularis (Forskit).

Jorpan & Seace, Bull. U. S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 335.

Chaetodon orbicularis ForsKAu, Descript. Anim., 1775, p. 59.

One specimen, No. 05890, 13 inches long from Bora Bora, Society Islands.

CHAETODONTIDAE.

Forcipiger longirostris (BRovussONET).

Jorpan & EverRMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 363, pl. 46.

Chaelodon longirostris Broussone?, Ichth. sist. Pisctum, 1782, p. 23, pl. 7.
Plate 5, figure 2.

One specimen § inch long, taken at the surface off Fakarava, Paumotu

Islands.
This is probably the Tholichthys stage of F. longirostris as shown by the

great development of the armature on the head.

Megaprotodon trifascialis (Quoy & GAIMArD).

Jorpan & Seaue, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 336, pl. 50, fig. 1
Chaetodon trifascialis Quoy & Gaimarp, Voy. Uranie. Zool., 1825, p. 379, pl. 62, fig. 5.

- Ssysye 5 23: . —
No. 05885, a specimen 123 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

Chaetodon setifer Biocu.
Ichth., 1788, 6, pl. 426, fig. 1. Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1,
p. 364, pl. 47. Jorpan & Seas, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 338.

The collection contains the following specimens from Taritari, Gilbert

Islands: Nos. A164, 63 inches; A162, M. C. Z. 29746, 4% inches; A174, M. C. Z.
29747, 5% inches. From Makemo, Paumotu Islands, Nos. A76, 54 inches;
A79, M. C. Z. 29744, 73 inches; A85, 7% inches; A101, 7 inches and A104,
M. C. Z. 29745, 7 inches. From Kusaie, Caroline Islands, No. 08808, 23 inches

long.

THE SHORE FISHES. 307

Chaetodon ulietensis Cuvier & VALENCIENNES.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1831, 7, p. 30 (39). Jorpan & Seaue, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 340.

Nos. A82, A88, ASO and 05889, four specimens 5 to 53 inches long from
Makemo, Paumotu Islands, and 05888, two specimens, each 53 inches long from
Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands.

This species is closely related to C. falcula of Bloch, from which according
to Jordan & Seale ‘‘it is well distinguished.”” The figures of C. faleula of Bloch,
Bleeker, and Day, have a somewhat different color pattern than that of C.
ulietensis.

Chaetodon lunula (LAacéprrDE).

Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 28, pt. 1, p. 366, pl. 54, fig. 160.
Pomacentrus lunula Lac., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 4, p. 507, 510, 513.

Nos. A86, M. GC. Z. 29750, 64 inches, and A89, 63 inches long, from Makemo,
Paumotu Islands. Four specimens, Nos. 09070, M. C. Z. 29501, ¢ to } inches
long, and 09068, = inches long from Arhno, and 09077, § inches long from Wotje,

both in Marshall Islands.

Chaetodon kleinii Brocu.
Ichth., 1787, 4, p. 7, tab. 218, fig. 2, after Klein.

Tetragonoptrus (Lepidochaetodon) kleini BLEEKER, Atlas [chth., 877-78, 9, p. 45, tab. 373, Chaet.
ihe. 3.

Nos. O8858, four specimens, 33 to 4 inches long, and 08963, M. C. Z. 29798,
33 inches: 08962, M. C. Z. 29798, 3 inches; 08965, 44 inches, from Jaluit,
Marshall Islands.

Chaetodon trifasciatus \luNGo Park.

Trans. Linn. Soc., 1797, 3, p. 34. Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U. 8. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt.
1, p. 372, pl. 52. Jorpan & Seave, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 344.

No. 08864, a specimen 32 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

30S EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

ZANCLIDAE.
Zanclus canescens (LINNE&).

BuieErker, Atlas Ichth. 1877-78, 9, p. 77-78, tab. 366, Chaet., tab. 4, ig. 3. Jorpan & EVERMANN,

Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1905, 28, pt. 1, p. 382, pl. 57. Jorpan & Seaue, Bull. U. S. Bur. Fish.,
1906, 25, p. 350.

Chaetodon canescens LINNE, Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 272.

No. A175, 6 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.
No. 08840, M. C. Z. 29790, 23 inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

TEUTHIDIDAE.

Teuthis nigricans (LINN&).

Chaetodon nigricans LINNG, Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 274.

Hepatus nigricans JoRDAN & Swave, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 351

- yOrrC . Sal . , aes
No. 08873, a specimen 5z inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

Teuthis elongatus (LAcEkPrDE).

?Chaetodon elongatus LACEPEDE, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 4, p. 471, fig. 2.

Acanthurus nigros GUNTHER, Cat., 1861, 3, p. 332. Fische der Siidsee, 1875, 4, p. 110.

Two specimens from Truk, Caroline Islands, Nos. 09059, 12 inches long, and
09052, M. C. Z. 29582, 133 inches long. The last has the following measure-
ments, dorsal IX, 273; anal III, 253; scales minute; 11 lobate teeth in each jaw;
the ridges of the larval form are indicated on the cheek and on the throat. Gen-
eral color light purplish brown, a broad silvery area as wide as snout extending
from belly to a little above pectoral; dorsal, ventral, and anal dusky; pectoral
and caudal pale; trace of a yellowish band across base of caudal. Number
(9059 seems to differ from the above only in the fin rays which are: dorsal IX,
26; anal III, 24.

secause of the small size of these specimens it is impossible to identify them,
with certainty, but they agree more nearly with Acanthurus nigros Giinther
especially in the number of teeth and the fin formulae than with any other

described species.

THE SHORE FISHES. 309

Teuthis triostegus (LINN&).

Chaetodon triostegus LINNE, Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 274.
Acanthurus triostegus GUNTHER, Cat., 1861, 3, p. 327. Day, Fishes of India, 1876, p. 204, pl. 48, fig. 2.
Hepatus triostegus JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 354.

Nos. 05872, 14 inches long from Fakarava, and 05924, M. C. Z. 29480,
three specimens, 13 to 23 inches long from Makemo, each in Paumotu Islands.
Nos. 08927, 23 inches long from Jaluit, and 08910, M. C. Z. 29483, 13 inches long
from Arhno Atoll, each in Marshall Islands.

Jordan and Seale say: ‘“‘this seems like sandwichensis, but lacks one cross-
band and is very pale; only 4 bands on sides.”’ Regarding sandvicensis they say,
“This is the most abundant species of the genus about Hawai, where it replaces
the closely allied H. triostegus. The differences, although slight, are constant.”

We have compared our specimens with a specimen of sandvicensis from
Hawaii, and find the number of cross bands the same, the only difference being
the somewhat darker color of the Hawaiian specimen and the continuation of
the shoulder band downward and backward below the upper base of the pec-
toral, which is well shown in the figure given by Jordan & Evermann (Bull.
U.S. Fish. Comm. 23, pt. 1, fig. 172). In our specimens the band does not extend
below the pectoral, which character is well shown in Day’s figure of 7’. triostegus.

Another specimen, No. 09072 (larval form) 13 inches long from Arhno Atoll,
Marshall Islands.

In color this specimen differs but slightly from Teuthis elegans Garman,
Deep Sea Fishes, p. 70, pl. 50, fig. 2, the only differences being in the faint V-
shaped mark on caudal peduncle, fainter dots at the base of the anal, none at
base of the dorsal and a much darker end to the caudal. It differs in other re-
spects as follows: the spines at the ends of alternate ridges at the bases of dorsal
and anal are arranged in groups of 2-4 instead of 3-6; the second dorsal spine
is equal to the distance from the posterior edge of the pupil to the tip of the snout,
instead of equal to the eye and snout; and it has no denticles on the anterior
edge, but merely presents a rough and irregular surface, where 7’. elegans is said
to have about nine denticles, it is distinctly grooved on each side, with the
appearance of two close-set spines, the posterior portion of which seems to be

finely serrate on the sides; and the margin of the spinous dorsal instead of hay-

310 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

ing an even curve with the margin of the soft dorsal from the tip of the second
spine, is slightly faleate; a condition due to the second spine exceeding the third
in length, it being about .2 longer; the second spine of the anal is similar to the
2nd spine of the dorsal and has 9 or 10 denticles about the middle of its anterior
edge; dorsal IX, 23 instead of IX, 22; anal III, 20, instead of III, 21.

Teuthis guttatus (BLocu & SCHNEIDER).

Acanthurus gultatus BLocu & SCHNEIDER, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 215.

Hepatus guttatus Jorpan & EVERMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 392, fig. 170.
JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 354.

No. A160, 9 inches, and A161, M. C. Z. 29755, 8} inches long from Tari-
tari, Gilbert Islands, Nos. A47, 7 inches long, and A48, M. C. Z. 29756, 72 inches

long, from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

Teuthis mata (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Acanthurus mata Cuv. & VaAu., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1835, 10, p. 148 (202). Day, Fishes of India,
1876, p. 205, pl. 48, fig. 1.

No. A24, M. C. Z. 29736, 113 inches long from Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands.

This specimen has the head 4 in length; depth 2.18; eye 4.44 in head;
snout 1.87; preorbital 2.30; pectoral 1.74 in depth; dorsal IX, 25; anal III,
23; 9 teeth on each side in upper jaw.

No. A838, a specimen 12} inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

This specimen has the head 3.81 in length; depth 2.25; eye 4.2 in head:
snout 1.97; preorbital 2.42; pectoral 1.73 in depth; dorsal IX, 25; anal III,
233; 10 teeth on each side in upper jaw.

Tail when spread has the inner portion truncate and the outer rays pro-
duced, somewhat lunate when not spread; length of the head about equal to
its depth in a line through the middle of the eye.

Color dark brown, with numerous narrow, wavy, longitudinal, bluish stripes,
these alike on head and body; they meet on the front profile of the head; breast
with coarser stripes; pectoral brown, grading into a pale bluish terminal margin,
into which the brown of the rays continue; caudal, anal, and dorsal dark brown,

dorsal and anal with a darker margin; ventrals brown.

THE SHORE FISHES. 311

Ctenochaetus striatus (Quoy & Gaimarp).

JoRDAN & EvERMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 398, fig. 174. Jorpan & Swain,
Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 354.

Acanthurus striatus Quoy & Garmarb, Voy Uranie. Zool., 1825, p. 373, pl. 63, fig. 3.

= ays 5 ell = ate
No. 05925, two specimens, each 23 inches long from Papeete, Tahiti,

Society Islands.

Zebrasoma rhombeum (Whirriirz).

Jorpan & Spare, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 355.

Acanthurus rhombeus WKirriirz, Senckenberg Mus., 1834, 1, p. 196, pl. 13, fig. 16.

Nos. A109, 73 inches; A113, M. C. Z. 29749, 63 inches and A114, 63 inches
long from Tahaa, Society Islands.
Jordan & Seale suggest the possibility of the two forms Z. flavescens and Z.

rhombeum being color variations of one diacromatic species.

Zebrasoma veliferum (B1Lo0cH).

JORDAN & EVERMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 396, fig. 173. Jorpan & Seay,
Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 356.

Acanthurus velifer Buocu, Ichth., 1793, 9, p. 106, taf. 427, fig 1.

Nos. A110, 975 inches; A111, 9 inches and A112, M. C. Z. 29739, 93 inches

long from Tahaa, Society Islands.

Acanthurus brevirostris (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Jorpan & EveRMANN, Bull. U. 8. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, p. 401, fig. 176.
Naseus brevirostris Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1885, 10, p. 204 (277), pl. 291. GUnruer,
Fische der Siidsee, 1875, 4, p. 121, taf. 79, fig. A, text fig. 5.

No. Al8, M. C. Z. 29738, female, 113 inches long from Rangiroa, Paumotu
Islands. This specimen has head 4.36 in length; depth 2.54; eye 4 in head;
distance from front of eye to tip of horn 4.51 in length; eye to tip of upper lip,
1.76 in head; dorsal VI, 27; anal II, 29.

No. A15, a female specimen, 12 inches long, from Rangiroa, Paumotu
Islands. This specimen has head 4.54 in length; depth 2.65; eye 4 in head;
distance from front of eye to tip of horn 4.06 in length; eye to tip of upper lip

1.64 in head; dorsal VI, 26; anal II, 28.

312 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

No. A23, a male specimen, 123 inches long, from Rangiroa, Paumotu Is-
lands. This specimen has head 4.6 in length; depth 2.67; eye 4 in head; dis-
tance from front of eye to tip of horn 3.2 in length; eye to tip of upper lip 1.6
in head; dorsal VI, 28; anal I], 29.

No. A23 is a male and has the snout much longer than the other specimens,
its length measured from underneath is 2} inches long and just equals length
of head; the two spines on each side of the caudal peduncle are longer than those
in the other specimens, and are close together; their distance apart being less
than their height; they are broad, sharp and hooked forward, the posterior
one the larger; its height measured on the anterior edge is slightly less than its
base; soft dorsal and anal, when depressed, reach the bases of upper and lower
caudal rays respectively; caudal truncate.

Ground color, a dark brown on back, graduated to a lighter brown on side
and belly; horn marked by narrow: longitudinal dusky stripes; cheeks, pre-
orbital, and preopercle covered with small round dark spots; operele with round
dark spots on its upper part, becoming oblong and line-like on lower portion;
opercular membrane or flap creamy white; back thickly covered with very small
round dusky spots, becoming slightly vertical, oblong in the region of lateral line,
and increasing in length on the sides, anteriorly forming linear oblong spots,
and on the middle of the body narrow vertical bands; just anterior to caudal
spines the spots are round; these markings reach a horizontal line extending
from the lower base of the pectoral posteriorly, to about the beginning of the
posterior 4th of the base of the soft anal; base of caudal spotted; dorsal and
anal plain light brown, the membrane of spinous portion shows traces of a
narrow black margin; peetoral light brown, with indication of a lighter margin;
caudal greenish yellow, with a dark grayish brown terminal margin; breast,
throat, and abdominal region, plain light brown, showing traces of a few very
small dusky darker spots just below pectoral.

Nos. A1l5 and A18, both females. The horn of A15, measured from below, is
1.56 inches long and is 1.5 in head; the horn of A18 is 1.37 inches long and is
1.71 in head. The spines on caudal peduncle of A15 are smaller and farther
apart than in A23; their distance apart being much greater than their height
or the length of their base; the spines are rounded and not triangular as in A238,

and about half as high as length of base; slightly inclined forward, but not

THE SHORE FISHES. 313

hooked. The spines in AIS are the same as in A15, but their bases are a little
closer together, the distance between them being about equal to base of Ist
spme. The horn of Al5 is much more slender than that in A18; caudal slightly
emarginate.

These specimens have been badly preserved and the original color cannot
be made out, but they are now brown, showing no traces of spots or lines;
except on base of caudal of A15; there are traces of longitudinal stripes on the
horns; opercular flap yellow; fins similar in color to A23.

While the horns of these specimens are longer than the dimensions given
In current descriptions they, as well as the descriptions, show a wide variation
in that character; and since they agree so well in other respects, and inasmuch
as this variation seems dependent upon age, size, and sex, we believe them to be

A. brevirostris.

Acanthurus vlamingi (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Naseus vlamingi Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1835, 10, p. 216 (293).

Naseus vlamingii GUNTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1875, 4, p. 123, taf. 81.

No. A21, 15 inches long from Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands.

SIGANIDAE.

Siganus fuscescens (Hourruyn).
EVERMANN «& SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1907, 26, p. 98.
Centrogaster fuscescens Hourruyn, Verh. Hall. Maat. Weet. Haarlan, 1782, 20, p. 3335.
af ale 9049 £3; O15 1 7 9Q7Q2 Fl
Nos. 08811, 53 inches; 08812, 53 inches, and 08813, M. C. Z. 29783, 53
inches long from Kusaie, Caroline Islands.

These specimens are in very poor condition.

Siganus punctatus (Biocu & SCHNEIDER).

JorRDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 360.

Amphacanthus punctatus BLocu & SCHNEIDER, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 210.
No. A65, a specimen 133 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.
This specimen has head 4.66 in length; depth 2.45; eye 4 in head; snout

2.4; pectoral 1.12; dorsal XII, 10; anal VII, 9.

314 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

No. A182, M. C. Z. 29753, a specimen 124 inches long from Arhno, Marshall

Islands.

This specimen has head 4.62 in length; depth 2.5; eye 4.07; snout 2.4;
pectoral 1.23; dorsal XIII, 10; anal VII, 10.

In each the caudal is deeply lunate when spread, otherwise it appears deeply
forked.

Color of No. A65, head and body rather dark brown, showing faint traces
of the spotted or reticulated effect, like that in Giinther’s figure of Tewthis
rostrata (Fische der Siidsee, taf. 60); pectorals yellow; ventrals gray, barred
with brown; spinous dorsal gray, mottled with brown, spinous anal same;
soft dorsal and anal have a translucent membrane, and rays barred with brown;
caudal brown, grading into a mottled greenish gray terminal margin. Other
specimens are colored in the same way, but show no mottling on caudal margin.

We follow Jordan & Seale in identifying this fish as S. punctatus, which
from descriptions seems to differ from S. rostratus in no way except in depth of

body.

Siganus rostratus (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Jorpan & Seaue, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 360.
Amphacanthus rostratus Cuy. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1835, 10, p. 116 (158).
Teuthis rostrata GUNTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1874, 3, p. 89, taf. 60.

One specimen, No. 09032, 2 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

SCORPAENIDAE.

Sebastopsis scabra (Ramsay & OaiLBy).

JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 374, fig. 71.

Sebastes scabra Ramsay & OaiLBy, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1885, 10, p. 577.

No. 05935, a specimen 1] inches long from Bora Bora, Society Islands.
No. 08943, a specimen, M. C. Z. 29468, 23 inches long from Kusaie, Caro-
line Islands.
Scorpaenopsis laotale (Jonpan & SHALE).

Scbastapisles laolale JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. lish., 1906, 25, p. 376, fig. 72.

One specimen, No. 05918, 15 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.

THE SHORE FISHES. 315

Although Jordan & Seale include this species in Sebastapistes, they state
that it has no palatine teeth. The presence of palatine teeth is one of the gen-
eric characteristics of Sebastapistes. Jordan & Seale make the Scorpaena
tristis of Gtinther’s Siidsee a synonym of Sebastapistes laotale notwithstanding
that Giinther says it has palatine teeth. We therefore transfer it to Secorpae-
nopsis.

Sebastapistes galactacme JENKINS.
Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1904, 22, p. 496, fig. 40. Jorpan & EverMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm.,
1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 459, fig. 201. Jorpan & Seas, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 376, name only.

One specimen (poor condition), No. 05937, 1% inches long from Suva, Fiji
Islands.

The specimen has no supraorbital cirrhus, but one of the two cotypes of
Jenkins had none, while the other had a conspicuous one. In other respects it

agrees very well with the description given by Jenkins.

Sebastapistes tristis (IMLUNZINGER).
JORDAN & Seawe, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 377.

Scorp2ena tristis KLUNZINGER, Synopsis Fische Rothen Meeres, 1870, p. S02.

No. 05936, a specimen 23 inches long from Bora Bora, Society Islands.

Pterois volitans (LINN&).

Cuvier & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1829, 4, p. 258 (352), pl. 88. Giinrrer, Fische der
Stidsee, 1874, 3, p. 81.
JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 379.

Gasterosteus volitans LINNK, Syst. Nat. Ed. 10, 1758, p. 296.

One specimen 11 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

Pterois radiata Cuvier & VALENCIENNES.
Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1829, 4, p. 275 (369). GiNruer, Fische der Siidsee, 1874, 3, p. 81, taf. 56, fig. A.

One specimen No. 05927, 4 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

Pterois antennata (Biocn).

G&nTuHER, Cat., 1860, 2, p. 124.

Scorpacna antennata Buocu, Ausl. Vische, 1788, 6, p. 16, taf. 185.
Two specimens, No. 05931, 23 and 3% inches long from Makatea, Paumotu

Islands. M. C. Z. 29519 (1 specimen).

316 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Synanceja verrucosa Brocu & SCHNEIDER.

Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 195, tab. 45. Jorpan & Seaue, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 379.

Two specimens, No. A194, M. C. Z. 29754, 9 and 93 inches, respectively,

from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

CARACANTHIDAE.

Caracanthus maculatus (Gray).

JorpaNn & EverMAnn, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 453, fig. 198.
Micropus maculatus Gray, Zool. Misc., 1831, p. 20.

No. 05934, a specimen 13 inches long from Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands.

Amphiprionichthys unipinna (Gray).
Micropus unipinna Gray, Zool. Misc., 1831, p. 20.
Caracanthus unipinna, JORDAN & EVERMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 454.
No. 05932, four specimens, § to 17 inches long, from Makemo, Paumotu
Islands. M. C. Z. 29399 (2 specimens).

GOBIIDAE.

Ophiocara porocephala (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

JorDAN & Seae, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 384; 1908, 27, p. 274.

Eleotris porocephala Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1837, 12, p. 178.

Eleotris ophicephalus Kuan & Van Hasseur, Cuv. & Vaw’s. Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1837, 12, p. 180 (239).
Eleotris ophiocephalus GGNtTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1877, 6, p. 185, taf. 112, fig. A.

One specimen, No. 08801, 5g inches long from Kusaie, Caroline Islands.

Head 3 in length; eye 6 in head; snout 3.2; dorsal VI-I, 9; anal I, 8;
scales 34, 22 in front of dorsal.

One specimen, No. 08988, M. C.

Caroline Islands.

N

Z. 29392, 3% inches long from Kusaie,

Head 2.9 in length; eye 4.5 in head; snout 3.33; dorsal VI-I, 9; anal I,
8; scales 33.
Two specimens, 104 and 113 inches long from Kusaie, Caroline Islands.

The smaller specimen has dorsal VI, 1, 83; anal, I, 73; scales from origin of

THE SHORE FISHES. ole

dorsal to anal 11, from upper end of gill opening to last large scale 35, from front
of dorsal to line on middle of eye 15; maxillary reaches line on middle of eye.
The larger specimen agrees in all the above counts and is similar in color in all
respects, both agreeing with Giinther’s figure and deseription, but not with that
of Day; it is more like Day’s figure of O. porocephalus in coloration and size of
mouth; Giinther includes O. porocephalus of Cuy. & Val. in his synonymy of O.
ophiocephalus in which he is probably correct. M. C. Z. 29784, Kusaie, Caroline

Islands (1 specimen).

Asterropterix semipunctatus Ripre.t.

Asterropterix semipunctatus R&@PPELL, Atlas, 1828, p. 139, taf. 34, fig. 4. Jorpan & Sear, Bull.
U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 385, pl. 36, fig. 1.

Eleotris semipunctata GUNTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1877, 6, p. 187, taf. 111, fig. D.

. + ~ ¢ 3 . n I A z
One specimen, No. 05920, 13 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

Eviota zonura JorpAN & SEALE.

Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 386, fig. 75.

The collection contains the following from the Paumotu Islands: two
specimens, M. C. Z. 29379, each about § inches long from Fakarava; two
specimens, #8 and 3 inch Jong from Rangiroa and one specimen, 35 inch long
from Makemo.

Periophthalmus barbarus (LINN&).

JorpbaNn & Seace, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 393.

Gobius barbarus LINNH, Syst. Nat. ed. 12, 1766, p. 450.

Nos. 09098, a specimen 43 inches long and 09099, 45 inches long from Moen,
Truk Group, Caroline Islands. No. 05910, M. C. Z. 29521, 93 inches long from

Suva, Fiji Islands.

Oplopomus oplopomus (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).
JorpAN & Saxe, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 396.
Gobius oplopomus Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1837, 12, p. 50 (66). Ginruer, Fische der
Siidsee, 1877, 6, p. 170, taf. 110, fig. B.
One specimen, No. 09060, 2} inches long, from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline

Islands.

318 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

D. VI, I, 10; anal I, 10.

This agrees very well with Giinther’s description and figure of this species.
It is, however, a little more slender, and has one more dorsal ray than Giinther
gives in his deseription, but the same number as shown in his figure. This
species resembles O. vergens Jordan & Seale in having a more slender body and
distinct lateral spots, but differs from O. vergens in having a larger eye; two con-
spicuous canine teeth on the lower jaw and produced spinous rays in the first

dorsal fin.

Ruppellia echinocephalus (RipPE.L).

Gobius echinocephalus RUPPELL, Atlas, 1828, p. 136. Cuvier & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,
1837, 12, p. 101 (134). KiLunzrncrr, Fische Rothen Meeres, 1870, p. 475. Giinruer, Fische der
Siidsee, 1877, 6, p. 175, taf. 108, fig. D.

Gobius amiciensis Cuvier & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1837, 12, p. 102 (133).

Paragobiodon echinocephalus, JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 397.

Twelve specimens, No. 05913, 3 to 1 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu
Islands.

Color in alcohol, body very dark brown; dorsal, pectoral, anal, and caudal
almost black; ventrals pale; head in most specimens abruptly lighter brown.

Five specimens, No. 05914, M. C. Z. 29465, § to 13 inches long, from Vavau,
Tonga Islands.

The three smallest specimens are similarly colored, but somewhat lighter
than those from Makemo. The two largest are uniformly light brown all over.

Two specimens > and 23 inches long from Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands.

Body dark brown, head abruptly light brown; dorsal, anal, and caudal
almost black, with punctulated lighter margins; pectoral pale with fine pune-
tulations; ventrals pale.

One specimen, No. 05915, # inches long from Bora Bora, Society Islands.

Similar in color to those from Makemo.

Ruppellia lacunicola, sp. noy.
Plate 6, figure 1.

Type, No. 66006, U. 8. N. M., % inch long from Lagoon at Fakarava,

Paumotu Islands.

THE SHORE FISHES. 319

Head 3; depth 3.27; eye 4; dorsal VI-103; anal 10; 22 scales in longi-
tudinal series.

Color in aleohol, uniform dark straw. All the fins except the ventrals brown-
ish black; ventrals very pale reddish brown. This species is close to P. echino-
cephalus from which it differs in coloration, in being less elongate, having smaller

canines, coarser and fewer flaps, and practically no hair-like papillae on head.

Zonogobius semidoliatus (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 397, fig. S6.
Gobius semidoliatus Cuy. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1837, 12, p. 51.

at T. rqe1 8 4: .
Two specimens, No. 05921, 4 and 5 inches long from Bora Bora, Society

Islands. M. C. Z. 29593 (1 specimen).

Vailima stevensoni Jorpan & SEALE.

Bull. U. S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 398, fig. 87.

One specimen, 23 inches long from Tipaerui Valley, Papeete, Society Islands.

Gobius ornatus RipPe.t.

Atlas, 1828, p. 135. Ginrner, Fische der Siidsee, 1877, 6, p. 172, taf. 3, fig. A. Day, Fishes
of India, 1876, p. 294, pl. 63, fig. 1. JorDAN & Sraxe, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 401, fig. 91.

Nos. 08901, M. C. Z. 29530, five specimens, % to 13 inches, and 09057,
three specimens 13 to 23 inches long from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline Islands.

No. 08938, M. C. Z. 29491 one specimen, 2% inches long from Tonga Islands.

Two specimens, No. 09088, each 13 inches long from Moen, Truk Group,
Caroline Islands.

One specimen, No. 09033, M. C. Z. 29493, 13 inches long from Suva, Fiji
Islands.

The two small specimens from Moen resemble in every way the specimens
of same size from Suva except in having a longer and slightly more humped snout.
The large one differs in the same way, but has in addition a more slender caudal

peduncle and the white markings are not definite.

320 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Mapo fuscus (Ripper).

Jorpan & EverRMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 483, fig. 212. Jorpan & SEALE,
Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 402.

Gobius fuscus Rtprewy, Atlas, 1828, p. 137.

Gobius albopunctatus Cuvier & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1837, 12, p. 57.

No. 05908, five specimens 1§ to 3 inches long from Rangiroa; one specimen
13 inches long and Nos. 05919, 05912, 2} inches and 13 inches long from Makemo,
both places in Paumotu Islands. No. 09051, M. C. Z. 29526, 13 inches long from
Vavau, Tonga Islands. No. 08944, M. C. Z. 29481, 3 inches long from Kusaie,
Caroline Islands. Nos. 08939, M. C. Z. 29504, two specimens 13 and 2 inches
long from Tonga Islands and 08913, 17 inches long from Arhno Atoll, Marshall

Islands.

Glossogobius biocellatus (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

Gobius biocellatus Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1837, 12, p. 57 (74). Day, Fishes of India, 1876,
p. 289, pl. 63, fig. 8.

One specimen, | inch long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands. This speci-
men is too small for positive identification, but it is provisionally identified with
(@. biocellatus, since it agrees very well in all the characters given, except in colora-
tion. It has dorsal VI-I, 9; A. I, 9 (Cuv. & Val. give D. VI, I, 10; A. 1) 9)j

scales at least 27; tongue notched; head naked; it agrees perfectly with Day’s

description of teeth.

Color in alcohol, pale, slight traces of large brownish spots on sides and

narrow bar across base of caudal; group of large punctulations anteriorly at
base of spinous dorsal, other smaller groups near end of rays indicating possible
bands, but the membrane is torn and the spines are separated somewhat. A
few punctulations in longitudinal series on the middle of the rays of the soft
dorsal.
Awaous genivittatus (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).
JorpAN & EverMann, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 492, fig. 218.
Gobius genivitlatus Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1837, 12, p. 64. Ginrner, Fische der Siidsee;

1877, 6, p. 170, taf. 110, fig. C.

One specimen, No. 08989, 33 inches long from Kusaie, Caroline Islands.

THE SHORE FISHES. 321

Amblygobius phalaena (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).
Jorpan & Ricuarpson, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1908, 27, p. 278.
Gobius phalaena Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1837, 12, p. 70 (92). Giwruer, Cat., 1861, 3,
p. 67.

One specimen, No. 09096, 13 inches long from Vavau, Tonga Islands.

Dorsal VI — 15; Anal 15; scales in lateral series 52.

This specimen agrees quite well with the descriptions of this species,
differing, however, in the following points: instead of three rows of spots on the
sides of the head there is a brownish band bordered by narrow marginal bands
of light gray; 18 seales in longitudinal series between the 2nd dorsal and the anal
instead of 16.

The specimen has, as mentioned in Giinther’s description of a young ex-
ample, a single black spot in the upper part of the base of caudal; the pectoral

fins are too badly torn to be certain as to their color pattern.

Amblygobius sphinx (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

JorDAN & Serax, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 406.
Gobius sphinx Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1837, 12, p. 70 (93). Giinrumr, Cat., 1861, 3, p. 67.

One specimen, No. 09085, 13 inches long from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline
Islands.

Head 3.22 in length; depth 3.86; eye 3.6 in head; snout 4.5; interorbital
5.62; maxillary 2.57; longest ventral ray 1.63; pectoral ray 1.12; scales 54,
18 in transverse series; dorsal VI, 15; anal 14.

Color (faded) in spirits, brown, there are about 5 darker brown cross bars;
back with pale mottlings; a series of cross streaks from lateral line to belly,
one in front of pectoral, 4 or 5 behind pectoral; posterior to these from lateral
line across ventral region, a series of 4 pairs of light brown narrow bars; first
pair near vent, second posterior to origin of anal, third under posterior part of
anal, fourth on caudal peduncle; a faint spot on middle of opercle; a small
black spot on upper angle of opercle; a dusky bar across posterior margin of
gill membrane, also a brown spot on each side of the isthmus (chin) close to the
symphysis; numerous small pearly white spots on cheeks and opercles; a dark

brown spot on shoulder just back of opercular spot; a small white-edged black

322 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

ocellus at base of caudal immediately above lateral line; the indistinct clouded
effect on the back corresponds to pairs of bars on the belly; some black on both

dorsals, too badly torn to determine pattern; ventrals and anals slightly dusky.

Gobiodon histrio (Kuni & Van Hasster).

GunTHER, Cat., 1861, 3, p. 88.
Gobius histrio KunL & VAN Hasster, Cuvier & VALENCIENNES’s, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1837, 12, p.
100, (132), pl. 347, lower fig.

Right specimens, part of No. 05918, 1 to 13 inches long from Fakarava,
Paumotu Islands, M. C. Z. 29524 (4 specimens).

Description of largest specimen: Dorsal VI, 11; anal 10; head 3.36 in body;
depth 2.61; depth of head in head .9; eye 4.75; maxillary reaching very
slightly, if any, beyond a line from front margin of orbit, not from the pupil;
body strongly compressed; profile rounded.

Colors, dark brown with lighter head and breast somewhat darker fins.

These specimens have the general shape of G. atrangulatus but with a smaller
mouth; they also have the general shape of Giinther’s figure in Fische der Siidsee
of G. ceramensis, but in our specimens the dorsals are united. Structurally
they agree better with the description in Cuvier & Valenciennes of G. histrio
than with any other described species, except that there are no tubercles on the
head; since, however, these specimens do not now agree in color, we provisionally

refer them to G. histrio.

Gobiodon atrangulatus GARMAN.

Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl., 1903, 39, p. 234, pl. 2, fig. 2.

Five specimens, No. 05918 — part, § to 13 inches long from Fakarava,
Paumotu Islands. M. C. Z. 29378 (2 specimens).

Description of largest specimens, Dorsal VI, 11; anal 10; head 3.5 in body;
depth 2.72; depth of head in head .97; eye 3.5; maxillary extending to below
middle of the eye; mouth larger than in G. rivulatus. Color, the two largest
specimens similar in color being light brown with bluish tint in reflected light
and thickly sprinkled with fine darker punctulations; vertical fins somewhat

dusky; near the tip of each dorsal spine is a small black spot indicating that it

THE SHORE FISHES. 323

may have had a narrow submarginal border. The three smallest specimens are
miformly plain straw color.

Gobiodon rivulatus (Ripre..).

GUNTHER, Cat., 1861, 3, p. 87. Fische der Siidsee, 1877, 6, p. 180, taf. 109, fig. F.
Gobius rivulatus Rié'ppeiy, Atlas, 1828, p. 136. Neue Wirb. Fische, 1835, p. 138.

= : TNE OHIALLZ. ie .
Two specimens, No. 05916, 3 to lg inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu

Islands. M. C. Z. 29592 (1 specimen).

Measurements of larger examples; Depth of head in length of head 1.41;
vead 2 in body; depth 1.92; eye 6.25 in head; maxillary reaches to below an-
erior edge of pupil; dorsal VI, 11; anal 9. Color plain light yellowish brown;
ins paler.

These specimens agree in form with Giinther’s figure in Fische der Siidsee,
af. 109, fig. F.

Gobiodon citrinus (Ripre.y).

GUNTHER, Fische der Stidsee, 1877, 6, p. 181, taf. 109, fig. E.

Gobius citrinus R&éPPELL, Neue Wirb. Fische, 1835, p. 139, taf. 32, fig. 4.

One specimen, No. 05917, 13 inches long from Vavau, Tonga Islands.
One specimen, M. C. Z. 29460, No. 08945, 1} inches long, from Kusaie,

‘aroline Islands.

Sicyopterus taeniurus (GUNTHER).

JorpaNn & Seae, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 410

Sicydium taeniurwm GUNTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1877, 6, p. 183, taf. 112, fig. C.

Four specimens, No. 05902, 23 to 43 inches long from Fataua River, Tahiti,
society Islands. M. C. Z. 29472 (2 specimens).

The largest specimen gives the following measurements: Head 4.5 in length;
ye 2.25 in interorbital; interorbital 2.5 in head; eye 5.71 in head; dorsal VI,
2, anal 10. Produced dorsal rays reaching a little beyond base of caudal;
ast anal rays barely reaching base of caudal; middle rays of pectoral 17 mm.;
ongest dorsal spine 33 mm.; length of head 20 mm.; scales 50. Color: ground
olor dark brown; caudal peduncle and caudal lighter with darker center,

nd darker outer margins; dark shade from back of eye towards corner of mouth.

OS
bo
is

EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

PARAGOBIOIDES, gen. nov.

Type P. grandoculis, sp. nov.
Similar to Gobioides but with very large eyes. The ventral fins apparently

separate, but it is uncertain if the division is normal.

Paragobioides grandoculis, sp. nov.
Plate 6, figure 2.

Type No. 65975, U. 8S. N. M., 1% inches long, Arhno Atoll, Marshall
Islands.

Body elongate, slender, with minute scales; dorsal 58, inserted at a distance
from tip of snout equal to about 3} base of dorsal, its rays somewhat produced
beyond membrane; anal 38, inserted at a distance from tip of lower jaw equal

1
to about

s base of anal; ventrals I, 5; caudal with middle rays somewhat pro-
duced. Mouth somewhat oblique, lower Jaw projecting, lip thick and fleshy; —
teeth in bands in both Jaws, the upper with two canine-like teeth anteriorly,
one on each side; outer series of lower Jaw enlarged, growing progressively
shorter posteriorly; apparently fine teeth on-vomer and palatines; gill mem-
branes broadly joined to the isthmus; head 7.5 in length to base of caudal;
depth 13.28; eye 4.25.

Color pale straw, fins colorless excepting the caudal which is slightly dusky

at the tips of rays. Probably a young fish.

CALLIONYMIDAE.

Callionymus cookii Ginrnuer.

Proc. Zool. Soe. Lond., 1871, p. 665. TF ische der Siidsee, 1877, 6, p. 192, taf. 113, fig. B.

Two specimens, No. 05939, M. C. Z. 29596 (1 specimen), 13 and 2} inches
long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

The 2; inch specimen is apparently a male, the other a female. Dorsal
IV, 8; anal 7.

These specimens agree more closely with Callionymus cookii than with any

other described species. The colors are faded, but in the male there are traces

THE SHORE FISHES. 325

of cross bars on the body and tail as well as small ocelli; dorsals and pectorals
show traces of spots; ventrals plain; anal with dusky punctulations; first
dorsal spine not produced, but last rays of second dorsal and middle rays of
caudal produced. In the female the colors are similar to the above, but with
what appears to have been a white-edged black blotch on spinous dorsal; the
rays are now detached and this mark is not definite; second dorsal and caudal

not so much produced. Neither specimen shows traces of spots on anal.

BLENNIDAE.

Enneapterygius atriceps (.JENKINS).
Tripterygion atriceps JENKrNS, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1903, 22, p. 505, fig. 46.
One specimen slightly over one inch long from Ponapi, Caroline Islands.
This specimen agrees so closely with the type specimens of EF. atriceps,
with which it has been compared, that we identify it as that species, although it
differs somewhat in the vertical fin counts. Head 3.8; eye 3.25; dorsal III-

XIII-10; A. I, 17; seales 32 or 33. The coloration is the same as in the type.

Hypleurochilus vaillanti Jorpan & SEALE.

Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 420.

ain

Ole

One specimen, M. C. Z. 29377, inch long from Lagoon at Fakarava,
Paumotu Islands.

One specimen, 175 inches long from Ponapi, Caroline Islands.

An examination of the type, No. 51788, U. 8. N. M., from Pago Pago,
Samoa, shows that it has the dorsal XII, 18 (not XII, 15, as given in description
by Jordan & Seale), and the anal 19 (not 17). Our specimens agree with this,

except that there appear to be 20 anal rays in the smaller specimen.

Alticus periophthalmus (Cuvier & VALENCIENNES).

JorDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 422.
Salarias periophthalmus Cuv. & Vau., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1836, 11, p. 230 (311), pl. 328. Gunrurr,
Fische der Siidsee, 1877, 6, p. 207, taf. 114, figs. D, E. Day, Fishes of India, 1876, p. 333, pl. 69, fig. 5.

No. 05906, a specimen 23 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.

326 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Alticus caudolineatus GUNTHER.

Jorpan & Space, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 423.

Salarias candolineatus GUNTHER, Fische der Stidsee, 1877, 6, p. 209, taf. 116, fig. F.

No. 05909, M. C. Z. 29583 ( 1 specimen), 2 specimens 2 and 1} inches long
(poor condition) from Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands.

Dorsal XII, I, 20; anal 21; simple supraorbital tentacle, and a bifid nasal
tentacle. Our specimens do not agree exactly in the above characters with

Giinther’s description.

Salarias lineatus Cuvier & VALENCIENNES.

Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1836, 11, p. 232 (814). Day, Fishes of India, 1876, p. 332, pl. 70, fig. 8. JORDAN
& Seaue, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 426.

One specimen, No. 08915, M. C. Z. 29370, 24 inches long from Arhno Atoll,
Marshall Islands.

Head 5 in body; depth 5; eye 3.42 in head; dorsal XII (1), 23; anal 25;
no crest.

Moderately slender, head bluntly rounded, profile steep, a short fringed
nasal cirrus; a supraocular cirrus is sharply triangular and fringed on both sides.

Color in alcohol: ground color on top of head and back light brownish
gray, faintly mottled with darker and lighter on back; about 3 rows of small
black longitudinal spots beginning on a line under posterior 4th of dorsal and
extending on body to base of caudal; caudal irregularly blotched with dark
brown, but with a sharply defined narrow dark brown band running from the
middle of the upper margin obliquely downward and backward; longitudinal
light streaks on side, making broken lines, these being less broken farther down
on the side, showing faintly near base of anal; sides with about 12 pairs of
purplish brown cross bars somewhat triangular in shape with a wide angle, apex
forward; color most intense on axis of body but continuing faintly toward
dorsal and anal; 4 or 5 faint light bars across cheeks; 2 dark bars across base of
pectoral; dorsals finely punctate, a brownish margin on soft dorsal anteriorly,
arow of very faint dark spots on base of soft dorsal, arranged in pairs posteriorly ;
anal plain, pale, with a few fine punctulations on the upper margins of membranes

and rays anteriorly.

THE SHORE FISHES. B2ih

Three other specimens, number 05899, 25 to 32 inches long from Fakarava,
Paumotu Islands.

One of these specimens, 32 inches long, has head 4.85 in body; depth 5.23;
eye 4in head; dorsal XIT (1), 24; anal 24; crest on head, dorsal higher than the
dorsal of another specimen 2% inches long, which has head 4.59; depth 5.16;
eye 3.85; dorsal XIII, 24; anal 24; no crest on head.

Color of specimen 2§ inches long without crest; comparing this specimen
with 08915 it is much darker in color being light brown, abdomen abruptly white,
same markings on body but not so dusky on tail, and lacking the oblique black
bar; throat and chin dusky; spots at base of soft dorsal more distinct, and
paired cross bars less distinct; spinous dorsal similar to body; traces of oblique
light lines on soft dorsal as in S. rivulatus.

The 32 inch specimen with crest and body more elongate has the color
generally darker, body markings less distinct than the specimen, 2) inches long
without crest; light bars on soft dorsal a little more distinet; a narrow dusky
margin on soft dorsal, with a narrow border of white; anal plain light brownish
with dusky margin, at least in front; caudal same as body with a darker upper

and lower margin and central rays, most intense at base, rays tipped with white.

Salarias edentulus (BLocu & SCHNEIDER).

Gtntu_Er, Fische der Siidsee, 1877, 6, p. 206, taf. 117, fig. A. Jorpan & Seaue, Bull. U.S. Bur.
Fish., 1906, 25, p. 429.

Blennius edentulus Buocu & SCHNEIDER, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 172.

Salarias rivulatus RUPPELL, Atlas, 1828, p. 114. JorpDAN & SEALE, loc. cit., p. 429.

Salarias quadricornis Day, Fishes of India, 1876, p. 331, pl. 70, fig. 4.

The collection contains the following female specimens from the Paumotu
Islands: Nos. 05903, 3% inches long from Makemo; 05898, 33 inches long from
Fakarava; 05907, 3 inches and 08936, M. C. Z. 29527, 23 inches long from Rangi-
roa.

The last specimen has dorsal XII, 21; anal 23, and agrees in color with
current descriptions of the species, except that on the caudal the spots are more
or less coalescent, forming 3 wavy, broken cross bars. It differs from the

description given by Jordan & Richardson in Fishes from Islands of the Philip-

325 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

pine Archipelago (Bull. U. 8. Bur. Fish., 27, p. 284), in having one more anal
ray.

The following male specimens are in the collection (formerly called rivu-
latus), Nos. 05900, 33 inches and 05904, three specimens 23 to 53 inches from
Makemo, Paumotu Islands.

The last three specimens each have dorsal XIII, 20; anal 24. Nos. 05911,
M. C. Z. 29516, four specimens 2 to 23 inches long from Makemo, and 05901,
M. C. Z. 29382, 43 inches long from Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands.

The largest specimen among No. 05904 gives the following: head 4.41 in
body; depth 4.07; eye 4.36 in head; longest dorsal spine 1.41; longest ray 1.25;
longest anal ray 1.60; dorsal XII, 20; anal 22. Soft dorsal attached to caudal
for about ? of its length; caudal slightly rounded; front of head almost per-
pendicular; slightly rounded; crest present; supraorbital tentacle bifid; a =
single row of eardiform teeth in each jaw; no canines present, anterior nostril
with short tube having a fringe of cirri on its posterior border.

In spirits this specimen is much lighter than the other specimens though
similarly but more faintly marked on body; soft dorsal dusky in front, lighter
behind, showing very slight traces of the lighter bars. The fin is also very light
colored with a broad dusky margin showing slight traces of oblique bars; anal
light colored, also showing slight traces of bars and with narrow dusky margin
on membrane; caudal has a broad faintly dusky margin and faint dusky bar
about middle.

The differences formerly separating S. edentulus and S. rivulatus were the
presence of an occipital crest in S. rivulatus, and differences in coloration. These
are, however, merely sexual characters. In the fishes of Samoa Jordan & Seale
record seventy-five specimens of S. rivulatus and sixty of S. edentulus from Apia
and Pago Pago. An examination of thirty-seven of these shows that of twenty-
four specimens identified as S. rivulatus all but one of the mature specimens
are males, and this one lacked the crest and had the coloration of the S. edentulus
form. Of the thirteen specimens identified as S. edentulus all were females
except one, and this one had a crest and the coloration of the S. rivulatus form.
All of our specimens show the same differences and leave no doubt but that the

two species are identical.

THE SHORE FISHES. 329

Petroscirtes mitratus Ripper.

Atlas, 1828, p. 111, taf. 28, fig. 1.

Nos. 08908, M. C. Z. 29522, three specimens each 13 inches, and 09086,

: 1 3: , ‘ :
four specimens 13 to 14 inches long, from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline Islands.

Petroscirtes quadrimaculatus, sp. nov.
Plate 7, figure 1.

The collection contains two specimens, No. 09069, 13 and 1% inches lone
from Arhno Atoll, Marshall Islands, the larger of which is the type, and one
specimen, M. C. Z. 29393, 1.75 inches long from Papeete, Tahiti, Society Islands.
The type No. 65980, U.S. N. M., gives the following measurements:

Head 4.25 in body length; depth 6.07; eye 3.33 in head; snout 3.33; head
rather sharply conical; posterior nostril with a slightly raised membranous
edge, anterior nostril with short tubes; two rows of narrow, close-set, rounded
incisors in upper jaw, those of inner row larger, no teeth visible on vomer or
palatines; one row of larger incisors in the front of the truncate lower jaw, and a
huge backward curved, fang-like canine tooth in the anterior angle of each side
of lower Jaw, the lower incisors horizontal; caudal truneate; dorsal 41; anal 29.

Color: back, upper side of body and top of head light brown; a series of
large quadrate dark brown spots, separated by narrow interspaces, from back of
eye to base of caudal, below which an abruptly narrow silvery stripe extending
from tip of lower jaw and lower border of eye to base of caudal; the surface below
this band plain whitish. The narrow interspaces between the spots on body
are made up of pairs of light colored lines diverging at top and extending to base
of dorsal, darker between, but not so dark as the quadrate spots, and causing
spots to show faintly as if continuous to the dorsal; very narrow light colored
bars extending below from the middle, or a little in front of middle, to the anal;
the second interspace behind the pectoral continues in this way.

Dorsal and anal are crossed by broad bars, parallel with the rays, correspond-
ing to the quadrate spots in position, the broad bars covering about .8 of width
of fin; above these a narrow whitish stripe with a very narrow blackish border,
tips of rays white; the borders not showing on anal, but tips of rays also white;

pectoral, ventral, and caudal pale.

EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Co

In the cotype, the ground color similar to type but instead of spots
there are about the same number of cross bars on the body and extending across
entire side, narrower at base of dorsal, than at base of anal, most distinet in
middle line of body, extending across anal and to middle of dorsal; rest of
dorsal as in type; anal without light border and other fins as in type. A light
spot in center of each of the broad dark bars on body appearing as an intensifi-
cation of the longitudinal silvery stripe of the type; the narrowing of the bars
on back due to the diverging of the pairs of lines that make up the interspaces,
and the light bars across the lower part of the body continuous with these inter-
spaces and not as in the type.

In the specimen from Papeete the color on body is similar to the type,
except that the light bars across the lower portion are continuous with the
interspaces and the bars of both dorsal and anal continue entirely across

dorsal and anal with no marginal stripes.

FIERASFERIDAE.

Fierasfer parvipinnis Kaur.

Apodes, 1850, p. 160, pl. 16, fig. 2. GinrHer, Cat., 1862, 4, p. 383, after Kaup. Fische der
Siidsee 1909, 8, p. 338. Fowxer, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1900, p. 528.

Jordanicus parvipinnis JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 435.

No. 05926, a specimen 7% inches long from Papeete, Tahiti, Society Islands.

ECHENEIDIDAE.

Echeneis naucrates LINN».

Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 261. Day, Fishes of India, 1876, p. 257, pl. 57, fig. 1.

Leplecheneis naucrales JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 411.

Two specimens from Paumotu Islands, one, Nos. A44, M. C. Z. 29725,
13¢ inches long from Fakarava and A59, IS82 inches long from Makemo. One
specimen, No. A157, 20 inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

No. A157 has dorsal XXIV, 38; anal 34, color brown, lighter above and
below, no trace of a lateral stripe, except on head, where it is very distinet, dis-

appearing on base of pectoral; ends of pectoral rays pale; dorsal and anal uni-

THE SHORE FISHES. 331

form light brown; tips of dorsal rays dusky; outer rays of caudal not pale;
caudal irregular, shallow emarginate.

No. A59 has dorsal XXIV, 33; anal 31, color dark brown on back, a dis-
tinct lateral stripe, with a distinct white stripe above and below this stripe;
pectoral blue black, lacking white tips; caudal deeply lunate with pale outer
rays.

No. A44, dorsal XXIII, 34; anal 32; color, dark brown above, with a darker
brown lateral stripe, lighter below, but not so light above as in A59; ends of
lower rays of pectoral pale; dorsal and anal yellowish brown, each with a darker
brownish marginal band, with pale tip to the rays; outer caudal rays pale,

middle rays longest and very dark, making the fin double truneate.

Echeneis remora LINNf&.
Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 260. Day, Fishes of India, 1876, p. 25s.
JorDAN & EvERMANN, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 494.
No. 05940, four specimens, 3 to 6+ inches long from Surface at Station
AA1I, Sept. 3, 1899.
No. 05942, M. C. Z. 29466, two specimens, 33 and 32 inches long from
Society Islands.
No. 05941, four specimens, 3¢ to 93 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu

Islands.

PLEURONECTIDAE.

Platophrys mancus (BRovusSsONET).

Jorpan & Spare, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 412.
Pleuronectes mancus BROUSSONET, Ichth., sist. Piscium, 1782, pl. 3, 4.
No. A178, a specimen, 94 inches long from Arhno, Marshall Islands. Dorsal
99; anal 77; pectoral equals head.
No. A43, M. C. Z. 29720, a specimen 8% inches long from Fakarava, Pau-
motu Islands. Dorsal 100; anal 79; pectoral slightly shorter than head.
No. A69, a specimen 7% inches long from Makemo, Paumotu Islands.
Dorsal 100; anal 80; pectoral reaches edge of preopercle.
No. 05945, M. C. Z. 29512, a specimen 13 inches long from Fakarava,

Paumotu Islands.

332 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

Platophrys pantherinus (Rijppe.t).

JorpAN & EvprMann, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 512.
Rhombus pantherinus Riprery, Atlas, 1828, p. 121, pl. 31, fig. 1.

Rhomboidichthys pantherinus GUNTHER, Fische der Siidsee, 1909, 8, p. 342.

No. A132, 93 inches long from Kambara, Fiji Islands. Three specimens
from the following places in Paumotu Islands: Nos. A42, M. C. Z. 29735, 09008,
M. C. Z. 29474, 7 and 13 inches long from Fakarava and 05832, 5 inches long
from Makemo.

No. 09012, 33 inches long from Guam. Nos. 09056 and 09097, 1} and 33
inches long from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline Islands. No. 10060, 14 inches
long from Papeete, Tahiti, Society Islands. No. 09002, M. C. Z. 29535, 53
inches long from Namuka, Tonga Islands.

In No. A42, dorsal 91, anal 69; the pectoral not reaching edge of preopercle
and is 1.5 in head; eye equals distance between interorbital rims.

In specimen A132, pectoral does not reach caudal, but is nearly twice as
long as head; dorsal 91; anal 67. These specimens of P. pantherinus have a
much larger eye than P. mancus has, the upper eye being 4.33 in head, it about
equals the distance between the orbital rims; in P. mancus the eye is 5.5 in head

and about half the distance between the orbital rims.

SOLEIDAE.

Pardachirus pavoninus (LACKPEDE).

JoRDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 4138.
Achirus pavoninus Lac. Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1802, 4, p. 658, 660, 661. Day, Fishes of India, 1877, p.

427, pl. 93, fig. 2.

No. 08937, a specimen 23 inches long from Tonga Islands.

It is said of this species that only the seales on the head and anterior part
of body are ciliated, but in the specimen No. 08937 all the scales on both sides

of the body are ciliated.

THE SHORE FISHES. 399

BALISTIDAE.

Balistes vidua SoLANDER.

Zool. Voy. Sulphur. Ichth., 1845, p. 128, pl. 59, figs. 9, 10. Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U.S.
Fish. Comm., 1905, 28, pt. 1, p. 409, pl. 61. Jorpan & Srae, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 361.

Melichthys vidua BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1865, 5, p. 107, 109, tab. 217, Balist., 3, fig. 2

Nos. A29, 7% inches and A30, M. C. Z. 29766, 63 inches long from Tahiti,

Society Islands.

Balistes capistratus Suaw.

Gen. Zool., 1804, 5, p. 417 (after Lacépéde). Jorpan & Evermann, Bull. U. 8. Fish. Comm.,
1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 411, fig. 181.

Balistes (Balistapus) frenatus, BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1865, 5, p. 110, 114, tab. 223, Balist. 9, fig. 2.
Nos. A70, 113 inches and A89, M. C. Z. 29740, 103 inches long, from Makemo,
Paumotu Islands.

Balistes niger BoNNATERRE.

Ichthyologie, 1788, p. 19, pl. 85, fig. 352.

Balistes (Balistapus) conspiciluum BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1865, 5, p. 111, 116, tab. 221, Balist. 7
fig. 2.

Balistes conspicillum GUNTHER, Cat., 1870, 8, p. 220.

’

Balistes niger JoRDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 362.

No. A195, a specimen, 10 inches long from Jaluit, Marshall Islands.

Balistapus aculeatus (LINN&).

JoRDAN & EverMAnn, Bull. U. 8. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 414, pl. 62. Jorpan & SEALE,
Bull. U. S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 362.

Balistes aculeatus LiNn&, Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 328.

Nos. A199, M. C. Z. 29791, 53 inches, and 08950, 45 inches long from Kusaie,
Caroline Islands. Nos. 05928 to 05930, four specimens, 44 to 7 inches long
from Rangiroa, Paumotu Islands. No. O8849, two specimens, M. C. Z.

29457, 1¢ and 4% inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

Balistapus undulatus (Munco Park).

JorDAN & Seaxe, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 563.

>

Balistes undulatus Munco Park, Trans. Linn. Soc., 1797, 3, p. 37.

5 : p + “= Bis
The collection contains from Marshall Islands, Nos. A187, 92 inches and

334 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

A188, M. C. Z. 29773, 6 inches long, from Jaluit, and A180, M. C. Z. 29767,

from Arhno; and 08874, from Suva, Fiji Islands.

OSTRACIIDAE.

Ostracion cornutus LINNE.

Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 331. Day, Fishes of India, 1878, p. 697, pl. 176, fig. 4.

Ostracion (Acanthostracion) arcus BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1865, 5, p. 31, 35, tab. 202, Ostrae. 2,
fig. 3,.and 204, Ostrac. 4, fig. 4.

Lactoria cornula JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 368.

No. A116, a specimen 103 inches long from Tongatdibu, Tonga Islands.

Ostracion nasus Briocu.

Ausl. Fische, 1787, 1, p. 121 (118), taf. 138. Ginrurr, Cat., 1870, 8, p. 263. Day, Fishes of
India, S78, p. 696.
2Ostracion tuberculatum JORDAN & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1907, 26, p. 35.

One specimen, No. 09092, one inch long from Moen, Truk Group, Caroline
Islands. One specimen M. C. Z. 29600, 765 inches long from Suva, Fiji Islands.

The specimens agree closely with O. duberculatum as described by Jordan &
Seale, Giinther, and Day (loc. cit.).

According to Giinther, O. cubicus, which he considers synonymous with O.
tuberculatus, Cat., 8, p. 260, has the back slightly convex without raised ridge
in the median line. According to Day — loc. cit., in O. nasus the width of the
body is greater than the height, and in O. cubicus the width about equals the

height. In this character our specimens agree with O. nasus.

TETRAODONTIDAE.

Spheroides hypselogeneion (Birekrr).

Jorpan & Sear, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 368.
Tetraodon hypselogencion BLEEKER, Nat. Tijds. Ned. Ind., 1852, 3, p. 300. BurrKer, Atlas Iehth.,
1865, 5, p. 60, 61, tab. 218, Gymnod. 9, fig. 5.
No. 08837, three specimens 3 to 3% inches long from Funafuti, Ellice Islands.

M. C. Z. 29429 (1 specimen).

THE SHORE FISHES. 305)

These specimens are badly faded and show no dark bars across the cheek,
but they agree very well with Riippell’s plate of 7. honckenji (Atlas, 1828, yells AL7e
how 2).

Tetraodon lacrymatus Cuvier.
Quoy & Garmarp, Voy. Uranie. Zool., 1824, p. 204. Jorpan & Evrermann, Bull. U. S. Fish.
Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1, p. 429, fig. 186.

The collection contains Nos. A837, M. C. Z. 29776, a specimen 7+ inches

long from Tikei; A55, 53 inches, Fakarava, and A63, 8? inches long from

Makemo, all in the Paumotu Islands.

Tetraodon manillensis Procr.

Bull. Philom., 1822, p. 130.

Crayracion manillensis BLEEKER, Atlas Ichth., 1865, 5, p. 66, 69, tab. 208, Gymnod. 4, fig. 2.

Tetraodon immaculatus var. virgatas Gtnruer, Cat., 1870, 8, p. 292. Jorpan & Srave, Bull.
U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 370.

Nos. A150, 113 inches and A139, M. C. Z. 29789, 54 inches long from Suva,
Fiji Islands, and 09061, § inches long from Arhno Atoll, Marshall Islands.

Color of back, in A150, dark brown, growing lighter downward, becoming
white on a level with lower part of pectoral; about 11 narrow black longitudinal
stripes between the dorsal and anal with an occasional incomplete line, the
complete lines extending nearly to the caudal, especially those above; there are
similar, but lighter lines on the belly, extending from the throat to the region of
the anal; the lines on body extending on to head, three or four of them encir-
cling the pectoral fin; outer rays of caudal black. In the smaller example
(A139) the dark lines not evident on the belly; the prickles on the smaller
one proportionately longer.

Jordan & Seale say: ‘‘Apparently Dr. Giinther is right in regarding T.
manillensis, with the back streaked, as the young of 7. immaculatus in which
species the back is plain in life. Specimens before us from Negros in the Philip-
pines show that the black stripe on the back disappears with age. Both Giinther
and Bleeker record specimens of the striped forms of 7. manillensis, of 10 to 12
inches in length.” Since the black stripes are present as shown by Giinther &
Bleeker, and by our specimens in individuals of 10 or 12 inches in length, and as

the striped form is of such wide distribution, the presence of stripes is not a

| ee I be 5 a <

336 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.
character peculiar to the young, and if a constant color character is of any speci- —
:
fic value this should be considered a distinct species and not the young of 7.
immaculatus. The disappearing black stripe on Jordan & Seale’s Negros speci-
mens may be due to the action of the preservative rather than to age.
Canthigaster solandri (Ricnarpson). !

Jorpan & SEALE, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., 1906, 25, p. 371.

Tetraodon solandri RicHarpson, Zool. Voy. Sulphur. Ichth., 1845, p. 125, pl. 57, fig. 4-6.

Nos. 05933, a specimen 3 inches long from Bora Bora, Society Islands, and
05823, M. C. Z. 29487, a specimen 23 inches long from Makemo, Paumotu —
Islands.

These specimens are badly faded, but they agree very well with a specimen

from Samoa identified by Jordan & Seale, and with the descriptions of C. solandri.

Canthigaster constellatus, sp. noy.
Plate 7, figure 2.

Type No. 65767 U.S. N. M., 2 inches long; cotype No. 29396, M. C. Z

No. 05922, nine specimens 1% to 2 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu
Islands. These specimens are immature and faded and therefore difficult of —
identification. But, so far as the color can be determined, they agree with the
figure of Tetrodon ocellatus Bennett in Fishes of Ceylon, pl. 21, in having
apparently the same sort of subdorsal ocellus and the same sort of lines about
the eye and snout and back, especially between the dorsal and caudal; the longi-
tudinal row of blue spots in Bennett’s figure is indicated by a similar row of
white spots in the present specimens; our specimens show in addition irregular
dusky blotches, sometimes coalescing, forming a sort of band, sometimes barely
visible, extending from just above the gill opening to caudal; the lower edge
of these dark blotches sharply define the white ventral portion of the fish; in
one or two of our specimens the largest blotch, which is situated just anterior
to a vertical line from the subdorsal ocellus, extends a short distance on the side
of the belly as a faint dusky bar and upward toward the back; in several there
are faint traces of three blotches between the snout and the pectoral, the first

situated some distance back of the angle of the mouth, the second below the

THE SHORE FISHES. Bo"

anterior margin of the eye, the third below the posterior margin; in one or two
specimens there is also a faint blotch-like band across the back, just back of the
highest part of the back or hump.

These additional colors may be characters of the young and can hardly be
considered of specific value; the close agreement with Bennett’s figure would
perhaps justify its identification with that species notwithstanding the remote-
ness of the two localities; however, Bleeker has described a species under the
name of (. bennetti which he considers identical with Bennett’s C. ocellatus.
In his Atlas, 5, Bleeker restores C. ocellatus Bennett, and figures it (Tab. 214,
Gymnod. Tab. 10, fig. 5), but this figure is apparently of a quite different spe-
cies from Bennett’s C. ocellatus.

Inasmuch as Bennett’s name, ocellatus, is preoccupied by Bloch, our speci-
mens, even should they prove identical with Bennett’s, would require a new name.

Head 2.5 in length; eye 4in head; snout 1.68; interorbital about 8; dorsal

10; anal 9; body covered with fine prickles.

DIODONTIDAE.

Diodon hystrix LINNe.

Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, p. 335. Jorpan & EvermMann, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1905, 23, pt. 1,
p. 437, fig. 192.

No. A31, a specimen 113 inches long, from Papeete, Tahiti, Society Islands.

ANTENNARIIDAE.

Antennarius bigibbus (Lackrrper).

Bureker, Atlas Ichth., 1865, 5, p. 10, 21, pl. 199, fig. 3.
Ginruer, Fische der Siidsee, 1876, 5, p. 165, taf. 105, fig. B.
Lophius bigibbus Lac., Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1798, 1, p. 325.

No. 05944, a specimen 24 inches long from Fakarava, Paumotu Islands.

338 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE

Carcharias melanopterus
Albula vulpes
Chanos chanos 4
Stolephorus delicatulus
Harengula kunzei
sundaica .
commersoni
Saurida gracilis
Anguilla mauritiana —
otaheitensis a
Muraenichthys macropterus
schultzei
Leiuranus semicinctus
Gymnothorax richardsonii .
pictus
rupelliae
tessellatus
stellatus
Echidna tritor
Enchelynassa canina
Uropterygius pantherinus .
marmoratus .
concolor
Belone platyura . . .
Hemiramphus dussumierii .
affinis
far
Zenarchopterus dispar
Pxocoetus volitans
Cypsilurus speculiger
bahiensis
Atherina lacunosa
endrachtensis
vaigiensis
uisila
Liza caeruleomaculata
Liza melinoptera .
Liza trochelii
vaigiensis

| Guam

os

++ + +4

\

SPECIES.

i =, ee
3 | wm | | 3 E
Pe| ele) 213\.1 2s pone
nD = 3 = =I ic =| = 2
e\a\o|"|s|ale|2|2) ae
| ‘3 S wa = = 2 S |
#|2\# ® $ cals nat 2 g s
es Sy leah Web=ta|nceaw ) eb ie) o } 3 Gg
= | = =! = 3 a es a of
Oo} 2 ie |S is | O | nm) Bite
| ae
| +
| | | +
| | + | +
| +
| | a
| a Sy ae
| +
‘ak +e
+
te +
| | | Fs
+ | |e
| | a
| | of
of
+
+
oe
| +
| | +
| Ve |
4 | + | + fa 1
lestathectady + |
aR || ar
ee
+} +
i++ i+ +
se heals
| + ae |
| + +
| ae
+ + +/+)+]4)4]4
+i) + + +14 F

DISTRIBUTION OF THE SPECIES—Continued.

THE SHORE FISHES.

Guam

Caroline Islands

Marshall Islands

Ratak Chain

Gilbert Islands

Ellice Islands

Fiji Islands

Tonga Islands
Cook Islands
Society Islands
Paumotu Islands

Marquesas Islands

339

Open Pacifie

Liza borneensis
compressa
crenilabis

Neomyxus chaptali

Sphyraena obtusata

forsteri

Polydactylus kuru

Fistularia petimba

Corythroichthys conspicillatus

specifer
Microphis brachyurus
Hippocampus guttulatus
Holocentrus spinifer
tiereoides
punctatissimus
diadema
sammara
Scomberoides sanctipetri
tolooparah
Trachurops crumenophthalma
Caranx melampygus
forsteri
ignobilis
ferdau
Trachinotus ovatus
baillonu
oblongus
Leiognathus fasciatus
splendens
edentula
Apogon frenatus
orbicularis
savayensis
ceramensis
vaiulae
exostigma
punctulatus
Mionorus waikiki
Paramia quinquelineata
Ambassis urotaenia
Kuhlia malo
maculata
proxima:
sandvicensis
rupestris

+ +++

a

++

+++

++

++

++

++

++

+++

|
|

+

++

+++ 44+ +

+

++

340 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE SPECIES—Continued.

Caroline Islands
Ratak Chain
Gilbert Islands
Ellice Islands
Cook Islands

Guam
| Marquesas Islands

| Tonga Islands
| Society Islands
| Paumotu Islands

| Fiji Islands

+ | Marshall Islands

KXuhlia taeniura :
Paracanthistius maculatus
Anyperodon leucogrammicus
Cephalopholis argus
urodelus
leopardus
Hpinephelus merra
fuscoguttatus
caeruleopunctatus
Priacanthus cruentatus ee
Lutianus kasmira
gibbus
marginatus
johnii
monostigma
marginatoides . . . . | |
Therapon maculatus .
jarbusie wy aa) Carts
Lethnnusramak 2. = = 1 6): =
hark nc ef tes ce oe ee a |
mahsenoides .
moensil 5
Tichardsonil, ce ae 35
Lethrinella miniata . . . . a ar
Monotaxis grandoculis
Xystaema argyreum
acinaces awe ght
Oph gees o on oo OSE ll ae
Upeneus vittatus
sulphureus .
Pseudupeneus moana Ok attest at | |
bifasciatus . . . ar
barberinus . .. .| + | ;
barberinoides . . . |
Mulloides flavolineatus .
samoensis
Pomacentrus pavo .. =» Gee + |
nigricans
lividus
Abudefduf sordidus
septemfasciatus
saxatalis .
glaucus
ZONGUS: 25), ee eae ar
antjerius fp fe ar ||

+4++4+4++
+
++

++

+++
+4+++
++ +

++ +4

+ + ++

+ ++ +

++
+++
++

++
++4+4+

++
+
+

+
+++ +4+++ 4+

THE SHORE

Guam

DISTRIBUTION OF THE SPECIES—Continued.

Marshall Islands

Ratak Chain

rt Islands

1)

Fiji Islands

Tonga Islands

Cook Islands

Society Islands

Paumotu Islands

Marquesas Islands

341

Open Pacific

Abudefduf curacao
sexfasciatus .

Dascyllus aruanus
trimaculatus .

pomacentroides .

Chromis caeruleus
Stethojulis strigiventer .
casturl
bandanensis
Halichoeres trimaculatus
Julis pulcherrima
Thalassoma lunare
purpureum
Cheilinus digrammus
undulatus
Cymolutes praetextatus

Searichthys caeruleopunctatus

Searus brunneus
pulchellus .
bataviensis

Platax orbicularis

Forcipiger longirostris

Megaprotodon trifascialis

Chaetodon setifer

ulietensis
lunula
kleinii
trifasciatus

Zanclus canescens

_Teuthis nigricans
elongatus
triostegus
guttatus
mata

Ctenochaetus striatus

Zebrasoma rhombeum

veliferum

Aeanthurus brevirostris

vlamingi

Siganus fuscescens

punctatus
rostratus .

Sebastopsis scabra

Scorpaenopsis laotalae

Sebastapistes gelactacme

++

++

++ +

+++

++

++

++

+?

++

++

+++

++

++

++4+4+4+

+++

342 EXPEDITION OF THE “ALBATROSS,” 1899-1900.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE SPECTES—Continued.

| bs
aot ely allea | |e/ele
El ea ee 3 | 2 | ee
S/S )/aele)a\3| 3) e/s/2 1a
7 ie a (SV Cn ee an eesti) ey |)
= 2 vey = < ae i a ° 3
ge ele12\/8/2) 8) 2 | oie
S21 @|&)e/a)8|5 |) 81 8) Sieeee
Oy OMe MPa Ale) e|/oOlalale
Sebastapistes tristis +
Pterois volitans +
radiata +
antennata. = 2: <2 5 | | +
Synanceja verrucosa... . . | +
Caracanthus maculatus — ab
Amphiprionichthys unipinna . aE
Ophiocara porocephala oo) ae Ate +
Asteropterix semipunctatus +
Eyiota zonura ae eee ce 6 +
Periophthalmus barbarus . . . . +4. | +
Oplopomus oplopomus b eyc + |
Ruppellia echinocephalus . . . . +) +| +
lacunicola Poe oe ye oo
“onogobius semidoliatus . . . . +
Vailima stevensoni | +.
Gobius ornatus . . . + +o o+
Mapofuscus ... . + | oh | +
Glossogobius biocellatus +
Awaous genivittatus aa
Amblygobius phalaena . + |
ss sphinx +)
Gobiodon histrio +
atrangulatus . +
TWKAUENINS! fo0G ob S 6 | oF
ChUMINUS ara eee + +
Sicyopterus taeniurus . . . . . | lar
Paragobioides grandoculis . . . . | + |
Callionymus cookii | +
Enneapterygius atriceps | +
Hypleurochilus vaillanti . . . . | + +
Alticus periophthalmus. . . .. +
caudolineatus +
Salariaslineatus . . . . . , . +) | |
edentulus:: «., (ia.9) Sane +
Petroscirtes mitratus . . . . , + |
quadrimaculatus . . + | =
Pierasfer parvipinnis ) ar
“cheneis naucrates . . . . . , | + | +
remora + + +
Platophrya mancus . . . . , + | +
panthers). =) 9) eye eale-taeee }+}] + ;+-o+
Pardachirus payoninus . F 5 +)
Balistes vidua . : | at
Capistratus . ... . . | LSE

DISTRIBUTION OF THE SPECIES—Concluded.

THE SHORE FISHES.

Guam

Caroline Islands

Marshall Islands

Ratak Chain

Gilbert Islands

Ellice Islands

Fiji Islands

Tonga Islands

Cook Islands

Society Islands

Paumotu Islands

Marquesas Islands

343

Open Paefic

Balistes niger :
Balistapus aculeatus .

undulatus
Ostracion cornutus

nasus 4
Spheroides hypselogeneion
Tetraodon lachrymatus

manillensis
Canthigaster solandri

constellatus

Diodon histrix s
Antennarius bigibbus

a

+ +

+

+

+ ++ +

Fig.

Fig.

to

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE 1.

Trachinotus oblongus Cuvier & Valenciennes. Page 272.

PLATE 2.

Trachinotus baillonti (Lacépéde). Page 271.

Kuhlia malo (Cuvier & Valenciennes). Page 280.

PLATE 3.

Kuhlia maculatus (Cuvier & Valenciennes). Page 281.

Kuhlia proxima Kendall & Goldsborough. Page 282.

PLATE 4.

Lutianus marginatoides Wendall & Goldsborough. Page 287.

Therapon maculatus Kendall & Goldsborough. Page 288

PLATE 5.

Dascyllus pomacentroides Kendall & Goldsborough. Page 298.

Forcipiger longirostris Broussonet. Page 306.
peg f 2

PLATE 6.

Ruppellia lacunicola Kendall & Goldsborough. Page 318.

Paragobioides grandoculis Kendall & Goldsborough. Page 324.

PLATE 7.

Petroscirles quadrimaculatus Kendall & Goldsborough. Page 329.

Canthigaster constellatus Kendall & Goldsborough. Page 336.

Za
Sea
eer agee
BEES
Rare ae

sane

Zoo

ie reresers
ake

oe

HErtotyre Co Bos Ton

a

x
Boe

pe

i)

“ALBATROSS” TROPICAL PACIFIC EX —SHORE FISHES

SE —————

a
=

“ALBATROSS TROPICAL PACIFIC Ex—SHORE FISHES.

Z HeEtiotrre Co Boston

EX.—SHORE FISHES.

IFIC

mM

HEiotypPe Co Bosro

“ALBATROSS TROPICAL PACIFIC Ex—SHORE FISHES. PLATE 6

PPLE S
Oa

a eee
SRIAS AA

Yo in

aw

HELtotrre Co Boston

he following Publications of the Museum contain Reports on the Dred ging CNA in
charge of Alexander Agassiz, of the U. 8. Fish Commission Steamer “Albatr oss,” during

1891, Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, US. N., Commanding.

Se cites from ALEXANDER AGassiz to the Hon.

. Marshall McDonald, U. S. Commissioner
of Fish and Fisheries, on the Dredging
Operations of the “Albatross” in 1891,
Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXI. No. 4. June,
1891. 16 pp.:

. AGAssiz. On Calamocrinus Diomedz, a
new Stalked Crinoid from the Galapa-
gos. Mem: M. C. Z., Vol. XVII. No. 2
January, 1892. 95 pp. 32 Plates.

. Acassiz. General Sketch of the Expe-
dition of the “ Albatross,” from February
to May, 1891. Bull. M. C. Z.; Vol.
XXIII. No.1. February, 1892. 89 pp.
22 Plates.

. Goks. Neusina Agassizi.
Vol. XXIII. No. 5.
4 pp. 1 Plate.

. Lupwic. Vorliaufiger Bericht iiber die
erbeuteten Holothurien. Zeit. Anz., No.
490. 1893. Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXIV.
No. 4. June, 1893. 10 pp.

Gro. P. Merritt. The Rocks of the
Galapagos. Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XVI.
No. 13. July, 1893. 3 pp.

W. Faxon. Preliminary Descriptions of
new Species of Crustacea. Bull. %i. C. Z.,
Vol. XXIV. No.7. August, 1893. 72 pp.

S. H. Scupper. The Orthoptera of the
Galapagos. Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXV.
No. 1. September, 1893. 25 pp. 3
Plates.

W. Scuim«éwitscu. The Pygnogonide.
Bull. M.C. Z., Vol. XXV. No. 2. Decem-
ber, 1893. 17 pp. 2 Plates.

- W. McM. Woopworvu. The
ans. Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXV.
January, 1894. 4 pp. 1 Plate.

. TH. Stuper. Note préliminaire sur les
Aleyonaires. Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXYV.
No. 5. February, 1894. 17 pp.

S. F. Crarke. The Hydroids. Bull.
M. C. Z., Vol. XXV. No. 6. February,
1894. 7 pp. 5 Plates.

H. Lupwie. The Holothurians.
M. C. Z., Vol. XVII. No. 3.
1894. 183 pp. 19 Plates.

. R. Bere. Die Opisthobranchien.

CUZ AVol. OXY. No. 10.
109 pp. 12 Plates.

. A. Ortmann. The Pelagic Schizopoda.
Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXV. No. &.
tember, 1894. 13 pp. 1 Plate.

W. Faxon. The Crustacea. Mem. M. C. Z.,
Vol. XVIII. April, 1895. 292 pp. 67
Plates.

W. GiesBrecat.
poden. Bull. M.
12. April, 1895.

XVII. C. H. Townsenp.

4 Island. Bull. M. C. Z., Vol.

No. 3. July, 1895. 8pp. 2 Plates.

VIII. C. Hartravs. Die Comatuliden. - Bull.

M: Gy Z., Vol. XXVII. No. 4.

108

II. Bull. M. C. Z.,

December, 1892.

Va

Vil.

VIII.

Planari-
No. 4.

XI.

Mem.

XV.

XVI. Die Pelagischen Cope-
C: Z., Vol. XXV. No.
20 pp. 4 Plates.
The Birds of Cocos

XXVIII. |

August,
7

October |

Bull. M. |
October, 1894. |

Sep- |

XIX.

XX. A. Goks.

XXI.

XXIT

XXIII.

XXIV.

XXXVI.

XXVIII.

XXVIII.

XXIX.

XXX.

XXX.

XXXII.

XXXIV.

G.

O.

H.

A.

W. McM. Woopworru.

W. E. Hoye:

H.

R. von LENDENFELD.

A. AGASSIZ.

E.

. F. LUrKen and Tu. Mortensen.

. GARMAN.

. STEJNEGER.

W. Métrer, Die Ostracoden.
M. C. Z., Vol. XXVII. No. 5.
ber, 1895. 10 pp. 3 Plates.
The Foraminifera.
C. Z., Vol: XXTX. No. 1.
1896. 103 pp. 9 Plates.
Maas. Die Medusen. Mem. M. C. Z.,
Vol. XXIII. No. 1. September, 1897.
92 pp. 15 Plates.

J. Hansen. The Isopoda.
C. Z., Vol. XXXI. No. 5.
1897. 38 pp. 6 Plates.
AGassiz. Preliminary Report on the
Echini. Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXXII.
No. 5. June, 1898. 18 pp. 14 Plates.

Bull.
Octo-

Bull. M.
February,

Bull. M.
December,

L. Mark. Preliminary Report on
Branchiocerianthus urceolus. Bull. M.
C. Z., Vol. XXXII. No. 8. August,
1898. 8 pp.. 3 Plates.

The
Ophiuride. Mem. M.C. Z., Vol. XXIII.
No. 2. November, 1899. 114 pp. 22
Plates and Chart.

The Fishes. Mem. M. C. Z.,
Vol. XXIV. November, 1899. 426 pp.
97 Plates and Chart.

Preliminary
Account of Planktonemertes Agassizii.
Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXXV. No.1.
July, 1899. 4pp. 1 Plate.

Two new Lizards of the
genus Anolis, from Cocos and Malpelo
Islands. Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXXVI.
No.6. November, 1900. 6 pp. 1 Plate.
The Cephalopoda. Bull.
M. C. Z., Vol. XLIII. No. 1. March,
1904. 71 pp. 12 Plates.

V. Witson. The Sponges. Mem. M.
C.Z., Vol. XXX. No. 1. July, 1904.
164 pp. 26 Plates.

The Radiating
Organs of the Deep Sea Fishes. Mem.
M. C. Z., Vol. XXX. No.2. August,
1905. 49 pp. 11 Plates, 1 Chart.

The Panamie Deep Sea
M. C. Z., Vol. XXX
10, 243 pp. 112

Mem.
1904.

Echini.
November,
Plates.
von MARENZELLER. Stein-und
Bull. M. C. Z,
August, 1904.

Hydro-Korallen.
Vol. XLII. No.
16 pp. 3 Plates.

9

E. von MARENZELLER. Lagisca Irritans,

H.

BE.

sp-, noy., ein Symbiont von Hydro-
Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XLII.

korallen.

No. 3. August, 1904. 6 pp. 1 Plate.
Lupwic. Asteroidea. Mem. M.C. Z.,
Vol. XXXII. July, 1905. 12, 292 pp.

35 Plates, 1 Chart.

Ein Beitrag zur Morpholo-
Mem.

October,

TROJAN.
gie des Tiefseefischgehirnes.
M. C. Z., Vol. XXX. No. 3.
2) Di.tan

anaAe pie ae Di)

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

There have been published of the Butierin Vols. I. to XLIL, -
and also Vols. XLIV. to LI.; of the Memorrs, Vols. I. to XXIV.,
and also Vols. XXVIII, XXIX., XXXIJ. to XXXII.

Vols. XLIL, LIL, an Lill, of the BULLETIN, and Vols.
XXV., XXVI, XXVIL, XXX, XXKIV., KEXV:) KR

XXXVIL., and XXXVIII. of the Memorrs, are now in course
of publication.

A price list of the publications of the Museum will be sent
on application to the Librarian of the Museum of ae
Zoilogy, Cambridge, Mass. Cy

99% ”

QL Harvard University. Museum
1 of comparative Zoology
H35 Memoirs
Ve26
logical \\
dical Ape:
ls \a"

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

———

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY

praacerss

¢ 4 fertestbona: 24
t

pevestes
rire sche tet
aHipe the

ssoee
ore

i

silane
Ay:

iy